Basic - TOSHITEC

Basic - TOSHITEC
6F8C1290
Unified Controller
nv Series
vseries
Integrated Controller
Engineering Tool 4
−Basic−
11E_6F8C1290_0821_Engineering_basic_単.indd 1
08.8.21 1:27:45 PM
Notice
(1) Technical information in this document is described for the explanation of typical operation of
the product and its application. It shall not be construed as the grant of intellectual property
or other right of Toshiba or of other party, nor the consent to use the said right.
(2) Duplication and reproduction of a part or whole of this document without approval of Toshiba
is prohibited.
(3) The contents of this document are subject to change without notice.
(4) This document is prepared with the utmost attention. However, when any doubt, error or
the matter to be changed is observed in the document, the customer is kindly requested
to inform us of it.
PROSEC, TOSLINE, TOSDIC and CIEMAC are the registered trade names of Toshiba.
IBM is a registered trade name of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft and Windows are the registered trade name of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and in other countries.
DeviceNet is a registered trade name of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc.
© TOSHIBA CORPORATION 2008
All rights reserved
This document is one of the operation manuals for the Engineering Tool of the Unified
Controller nv series and the Integrated Controller V-series (hereafter abbreviated as
V-Tool).
• Engineering Tool Ver.4 user.
All functions are supported.
• Engineering Tool Ver.3 user.
The function added with Engineering Tool Ver.4 is not supported.
• Engineering Tool Ver.2 user.
The function added with Engineering Tool Ver.3 and Ver.4 is not supported.
Please read the What's new of Ver.3.
V-Tool is a software required in order to create user applications for the controller of the
nv series and the V-series, and to monitor and maintain them.
This document is intended for users with basic knowledge of V-Tool setup and usage and
contains the following topics:
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Chapter 6
Setting Control Parameters
Chapter 7
Downloading/ Uploading
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Chapter 10 Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Chapter 11 V-Tool Maintenance
Chapter 12 Printing Documents
Appendix A Messages
The following V-Tool operation manuals are available:
Setup: 6E8C4891 (Japanese), 6F8C1291 (English)
Basics: 6E8C4890 (Japanese), 6F8C1290 (English)
The following related documents are also available. Refer to them as necessary.
Instruction Set:
6E8C4826 (Japanese), 6F8C1226 (English)
Ver. 1 Setup:
6E8C3843 (Japanese), 6F8C0873 (English)
Ver. 1 Introduction: 6E8C3917 (Japanese), 6F8C0874 (English)
Ver. 1 Basics:
6E8C3918 (Japanese), 6F8C0875 (English)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
i
What's new of Ver.3
The following functions are added in V-Tool Ver.3.
Program editor (Text)
The Program editor (Text) is used for editing, downloadind and monitoring of the
ST(Structured Text).
Program editor (Full graphic)
The Program editor (Full graphic) is used for editing, downloadind and monitoring
of the LD(Ladder Diagram), FBD(Function Block Diagram) and SFC(Sequential
Function Chart).
ii
6F8C1290
Use Regulation
This product is not developed or manufactured for the system including the
equipment directly related to human life (note 1). Do not use the product for that
purpose.
When using this product to the system that is related to the safety of human and
seriously affects the maintenance of public function (note 2), contact our sales
section as the necessary special consideration (note 3) is required for the system
operation, its maintenance and management.
(Note 1) The equipment directly related to human life means the following:
• Medical equipment such as life sustaining equipment and equipment for
operation.
(Note 2) The system that is related to the safety of human and seriously affects the
maintenance of public function means the following:
• Main equipment control system for nuclear power plant, safety protection
system of nuclear facility, other system important for safety.
• Operation control system of mass transportation system and aviation
control system.
(Note 3) Special consideration means the sufficient consultation with our engineers
to establish safe system (fool proof design, fail safe design, redundancy
design).
Disclaimer
Toshiba Corporation shall not be liable for the damage due to earth quake, lightning,
wind and flood damage, fire for which Toshiba is not responsible, conduct of third
party, other accident, customer’s willful, negligence, erroneous use and other use
under abnormal condition.
Toshiba Corporation shall not be liable for the incidental damage (loss of business
profit, suspension of business, change and deletion of the memorized contents)
arising from use of non use of this product.
Toshiba Corporation shall not be liable for the damage arising from the negligence to
observe the instruction described in the instruction manual.
Toshiba Corporation shall not be liable for the damage arising from the malfunction
due to the connection with other equipment.
Toshiba Corporation shall not be liable for the damage arising from the malfunction
due to the combination with application program made by customer.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
iii
The Rules on Notation
This document uses following symbols for the rules on notation for better understanding.
Important:
Describes the matters that need special attention for appropriate
product handling.
Note:
Describes the matters to be observed for appropriate product
handling.
Supplementary: Describes the supplementary matters to the described contents
iv
6F8C1290
Chapter 1
nv Series & V
Series Basic
Knowledge
1.1
Engineering Flow···················································· 3
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series ··············· 5
1.2.1
…1
Chapter 2
Registering
Hardware
…123
Network ························································· 8
1.2.1.2
Node ····························································· 9
Station configuration ··········································· 16
1.2.2.1
Main unit ····················································· 20
1.2.2.2
Main module ················································ 22
1.2.2.3
I/O node / bus·············································· 29
1.2.2.4
I/O unit ························································ 31
1.2.2.5
I/O module··················································· 34
1.2.2.6
Hard address ··············································· 49
Software Model of nv Series & V Series ·············· 52
1.3.1
Tasks ·································································· 53
1.3.2
Task entries ························································ 54
1.3.3
Programs ···························································· 55
1.3.4
Function blocks··················································· 58
1.3.5
Functions ···························································· 61
1.3.6
Variables and types ············································ 66
2.1
Registering the System ······································ 124
2.2
Registering the Station Configuration ··············· 125
2.3
Registering the Network Configuration ············· 129
2.4
Registering Module Parameters························· 131
2.5
Meaning of Module Parameters ························· 139
2.5.1
Meanings of module parameters of nv series ···· 139
2.5.2
Meanings of module parameters of V series······ 142
2.6
Changing IO Connection Area···························· 150
Chapter 3
3.1
Registering Controller Variables························ 154
3.2
Registering Station Variables····························· 158
Registering
Variables
3.3
Registering I/O Variables ··································· 165
3.4
Registering Network Variables··························· 168
3.5
Defining User Data Type (Structure) ·················· 175
…153
v
1.2.1.1
1.2.2
1.3
System configuration ············································ 7
6F8C1290
Chapter 4
4.1
Registering Tags················································· 178
4.2
Meaning of Tag Parameters································ 188
Registering Tag
Variables
…177
Chapter 5
4.2.1
MCS type ·························································· 188
4.2.2
DS type····························································· 204
4.3
Importing Tags···················································· 234
4.4
Exporting Tags ··················································· 237
5.1
Kind of Program Editor ······································ 243
5.2
Semi Graphic ······················································ 244
Creating Control
Programs
…241
5.2.1
Program editor organization ······························ 244
5.2.2
Opening a task·················································· 246
5.2.3
Drawing a program ··········································· 251
5.2.4
Entering variables ············································· 256
5.2.5
Declaring variables ··········································· 259
5.2.6
Using functions ················································· 263
5.2.7
Using function Blocks ······································· 266
5.2.8
Search and replace instruction words ··············· 268
5.2.9
Various edit and display functions ····················· 272
5.2.10 Saving a task ···················································· 275
5.2.11 Displaying variable comment and instruction
execution sequence ·········································· 276
5.2.12 Using cross reference ······································· 278
5.2.13 Using device variables property ························ 279
5.3
Structured Text ··················································· 282
5.3.1
Organization of program editor (Text) ················ 282
5.3.2
Opening program ·············································· 283
5.3.3
Editing program ················································ 284
5.3.4
Entering variables ············································· 286
5.3.5
Declaring variables ··········································· 287
5.3.6
Using function ··················································· 288
5.3.7
Using function block·········································· 289
5.3.8
Searching and replacing device variables ········· 290
5.3.9
Saving program ················································ 291
5.3.10 Using cross reference ······································· 295
5.3.11 Using device variable property ·························· 297
5.4
vi
6F8C1290
Full Graphic ························································ 298
5.4.1
Organization of program editor (Full graphic) ···· 298
5.4.2
Opening program ·············································· 300
5.4.3
Drawing a program ··········································· 303
5.4.4
Entering variables ············································· 313
5.4.5
Declaring variables ··········································· 314
5.4.6
Using functions ················································· 317
5.4.7
Using function blocks ········································ 320
5.4.8
Searching and replacing instructions or
variables ··························································· 321
5.4.9
Various edit and display functions ····················· 324
5.4.10 Saving program ················································ 329
5.4.11 Displaying data type and Execution order ········· 330
5.4.12 Using cross reference ······································· 331
5.4.13 Using device variables property ························ 331
5.4.14 Using any function ············································ 331
5.5
Creating a User Function ··································· 336
5.6
Creating a User Function Block ························· 339
5.7
Using Tag Symbols············································· 342
5.8
Reusing a Program ············································· 343
5.9
Compile a Batch of System ································ 345
5.10 Batch Compiling of Controller ··························· 347
5.11 Searching Influence of Change ·························· 349
5.12 Setting Program Security ··································· 353
5.13 Searching Double Defined Variables ················· 356
5.14 Searching Overlap Addresses of Variables ······· 358
5.15 Checking Duplicated Output Variables ·············· 360
5.16 Checking Input and Output Variables ················ 362
5.17 How to Use Custom Symbols····························· 364
5.18 How to Create Custom Symbols ························ 368
Chapter 6
6.1
Setting Values in Data View ······························· 379
6.2
Setting Values Using Tag Editor ························ 382
Setting Control
Parameters
…377
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
vii
Chapter 7
7.1
Connecting with the Controller ·························· 386
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller ······················ 393
Downloading/
Uploading
…385
Chapter 8
7.2.1
Batch downloading to controller of nv series ····· 393
7.2.2
Batch downloading to controller of V series······· 398
7.3
Downloading Task Individually ·························· 411
7.4
Batch Uploading from Controller ······················· 413
8.1
Semi Graphic ······················································ 419
Monitoring
Control Program
…417
8.2
8.3
8.1.1
Monitoring a program ········································ 419
8.1.2
Monitoring inside a function ······························ 420
8.1.3
Monitoring inside a function block ····················· 421
8.1.4
Exerting force online ········································· 422
8.1.5
Swapping online ··············································· 425
8.1.6
Sequence tag operation ···································· 427
Structured Text ··················································· 432
8.2.1
Monitoring a program ········································ 432
8.2.2
Monitoring the inside of a function ···················· 433
8.2.3
Monitoring the inside of a function block ··········· 433
Full Graphic ························································ 434
8.3.1
Monitoring a program ········································ 434
8.3.2
Monitoring the inside of a function ···················· 435
8.3.3
Monitoring inside a function block ····················· 436
8.3.4
Force online······················································ 437
8.3.5
Swapping online ··············································· 440
8.3.6
Sequence tag operation ···································· 442
8.4
Monitoring Data Together with Program ············ 447
8.5
Monitoring Any Data ··········································· 448
8.6
Monitoring Multiple Tasks Concurrently············ 449
8.7
Externally Starting the Program Monitor ··········· 451
8.8
Determining Free Program Space ······················ 454
8.9
Comparing Programs and Data Files ················· 457
8.10 Tracing Data························································ 462
8.11 Exerting Force on I/O Input Points ···················· 469
viii
6F8C1290
Chapter 9
9.1
Monitoring Program Registration ······················ 472
9.2
Monitoring Controller Parameters ····················· 475
Monitoring
System and
Maintenance of
nv series
9.3
Monitoring Controller Operation Status ············ 477
9.4
Monitor I/O Loop Status ····································· 480
9.5
Monitor I/O Module Status·································· 484
9.6
Monitoring System Logs ···································· 487
9.7
Monitoring Serial I/O Logs ································· 490
9.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information ········· 493
9.9
Various Maintenance Functions························· 497
…471
9.9.1
Setting time ······················································ 497
9.9.2
Switching controller operation status················· 498
9.9.3
Switching duplex status ···································· 499
9.9.4
Switching receiver············································· 500
9.9.5
Clearing memory··············································· 501
9.9.6
Defrag ······························································ 502
9.9.7
Backup and restore ··········································· 502
9.10 Externary Starting the RAS Window ·················· 504
Chapter 10
10.1 Monitoring Program Registration ······················ 508
Monitoring
System and
Maintenance of
V series
10.3 Monitoring Controller Operation Status ············ 513
…507
10.2 Monitoring Controller Parameters ······················511
10.4 Monitoring Parallel I/O Status ···························· 516
10.5 Monitoring Serial I/O Status ······························· 520
10.6 Monitoring System Logs ···································· 524
10.7 Monitoring Serial I/O Logs ································· 528
10.8 Monitoring LAN Management Information ········· 531
10.9 Various Maintenance Functions························· 541
10.9.1 Setting time ······················································ 541
10.9.2 Switching controller operation status················· 543
10.9.3 Switching duplex status ···································· 544
10.9.4 Switching receiver············································· 545
10.9.5 Clearing memory··············································· 547
10.9.6 Defrag ······························································ 548
10.9.7 Backup and restore ··········································· 548
10.9.8 Writing to FROM ··············································· 550
10.9.9 Reading from FROM ········································· 551
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
ix
10.9.10 Clearing output reset······································· 552
10.9.11 Clearing read-back error ································· 553
10.9.12 I/O module online replacement························ 554
10.10 Externary Starting the RAS Window ·················· 556
Chapter 11
11.1 Importing/Exporting User System······················ 560
V-Tool
Maintenance
11.3 Importing/Exporting In Text Format ··················· 567
…559
11.2 Importing/Exporting Library······························· 563
11.4 Importing Products from Ver. 1 ·························· 576
11.5 Convert Semi Graphics to Full Graphics ··········· 578
11.6 Enginnering Log ················································· 580
11.7 Displaying Login Users and Current Editors····· 582
Chapter 12
12.1 Documents and Shot Prints ······························· 586
Printing
Documents
12.3 Printing Documents ············································ 596
…585
Appendix A
Messages
…609
x
6F8C1290
12.2 Setting Page Format ··········································· 587
12.4 Printing the Cross Reference····························· 601
12.5 Printing the Variable Reference and
the Function Reference ······································ 605
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic
Knowledge
This chapter describes the basic usage flow and functions of this tool and the
type of hardware and software that can be registered with the nv series and the V
series by type.
1.1
Engineering Flow ·················································· 3
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series············· 5
1.2.1 System configuration ··································· 7
1.2.1.1 Network··················································· 8
1.2.1.2 Node ······················································· 9
1.2.2 Station configuration ·································· 16
1.2.2.1 Main unit ··············································· 20
1.2.2.2 Main module ········································· 22
1.2.2.3 I/O node / bus ······································· 29
1.2.2.4 I/O unit ·················································· 31
1.2.2.5 I/O module ············································ 34
1.2.2.6 Hard address ········································ 49
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series ············ 52
1.3.1 Tasks·························································· 53
1.3.2 Task entries················································ 54
1.3.3 Programs ··················································· 55
1.3.4 Function blocks ·········································· 58
1.3.5 Functions ··················································· 61
1.3.6 Variables and types···································· 66
1
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.7 Derived types ············································· 70
1.3.8 Standard types ··········································· 73
1.3.9 Identifiers ··················································· 76
1.3.10 Programming languages ···························· 78
1.3.11 Ladder diagram (LD) ·································· 79
1.3.12 Function block diagram (FBD) ··················· 80
1.3.13 Sequential function chart (SFC) ················· 81
1.3.14 Structured text (ST)···································· 82
1.3.15 Specification of graphical languages·········· 86
1.3.16 Graphical statements ································· 95
1.3.17 Execution order of graphical languages
································································· 104
1.3.18 Controller variables ·································· 107
1.3.19 I/O variables··············································111
1.3.20 Station variables ·······································117
1.3.21 Network variables ·····································119
1.3.22 Configurations·········································· 121
2
6F8C1290
1.1
1.1
Engineering Flow
Engineering Flow
This tool may be utilized for the design, production, test, tuning, and
maintenance of the nv series and the V series. This guide describes the
engineering flow and the role of each tool function.
<Engineering flow>
Product Manager
User Registration
Product Tree
Hardware Registration
Create I/O Symbols, TAGs
Create Control Program
Set Control Parameters
Download
Variable
Download
Program Editor
TAG Editor
Module Parameter
TAG Editor
System Monitor & Maintenance
Program Monitoring
Data Monitoring
Variables
Data
System View
Tool Maintenance
Printing Documents
System Log
SI/O log
Import/Export
Print Document
Ver.1 Import
User registration
The system administrator registers the tool users and passwords. This is
performed from the Product Manager. Only the registered users can login to
the tool.
Hardware registration
Registers the V series Systems ,Stations ,Controllers and I/O modules. Each
LAN card is connected to Network. These operations are performed from
the Product Tree.
Variables and TAGs creation
Symbol names are assigned to process I/O signals, transmitted data
between Controllers and controller memories . And also TAG No. can be
assigned to TAG Parameters provides in advance. The symbol names can
be used in user programs as Variables. These name registration are
performed from Variables or TAG Editor.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
3
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Control program creation
Draws and saves a control program at each task entry of controller. These
programming is performed from Program Editor using LD(Ladder
Diagram) ,FBD(Function Block Diagram) or SFC( Sequential Function
Chart) of IEC61131-3 ,which is international standard.
Control parameter setting
An initial value is assigned to each parameter and TAG parameter. This is
performed from the Module Parameter, Variables, or TAG Editor.
Download
Downloads configurations, variables, and programs to the controller.
Download is used to download to the controller as batch. Program Editor is
used to download programs individually.
System monitoring and maintenance
Monitors the V Series LAN, station, controller, and I/O operation status after
downloading. The operation status and control period of downloaded tasks
may also be monitored. The log recorded in the controller may be
monitored. Maintenance operations such as switching between RUN and
HALT, backup and restore of data and codes in the controller can also be
performed. These operations are performed from System View.
Program monitoring
The downloaded programs can be monitored online in their own graphic
language. The LD power flow, FBD monitored value, and SFC active steps
are refreshed and displayed. The variables in a program may be updated
while monitoring the program. This is performed from Program Editor.
Data monitoring
Any global or local variable may be monitored online from Variables or Data
View. TAGs can be monitored online from the dedicated TAG Editor.
Tool maintenance
Data can be exchanged with other programs in CSV format using
Import/Export.
Printing documents
The hardware configuration, programs, and parameters can be printed out
as a book. This is performed from Print Document.
4
6F8C1290
1.2
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Hardware model of nv series
The nv series provides sequence model (type 1) suited for high-speed
sequence control, and DCS model (type 2) suited for instrumentation
control.
CPU Module:
• Sequence model (type 1)
• DCS model (type 2)
I/O Module:
• TC-net I/O
• Parallel I/O
• Serial I/O
Hardware model of V series
The V series provides sequence control module (S module) suited for
high-speed sequence control, loop control module (L module) suited for
instrumentation control, and computer module (C module) suited for
computer control. These modules can be used individually or in any
combination.
Also, there are three station configurations with different size: Large (Model
3000), Small (Model 2000), and Very Small (Model 1000).
[Large type (Model 3000)]
CPU Module:
• Sequence Control Module (S Module)
• Loop Control Module (L Module)
• Computer Module (C Module)
I/O Module:
• Parallel I/O
• Serial I/O
• 5800 I/O
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
5
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
[Small type (Model 2000)]
CPU Module:
• Sequence Control Module (S Module)
• Loop Control Module (L Module)
• Computer Module (C Module)
I/O Module:
• Parallel I/O
• Serial I/O
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
CPU Module:
• Loop Control Module (L Module)
I/O Module:
• Serial I/O
6
6F8C1290
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
1.2.1 System configuration
System consists of multiple Networks and Stations.
Ethernet, TC-net100, FL-net, MODBUS etc can be used as nv series Network
to connect each station or field unit.
Ethernet, TC-net, ADMAP, Tosline, DeviceNet ,Profibus etc can be used as V
series Network to connect each station or field unit.
The general system configuration is as follows. (The following system is V
series.)
OIS
Engineering Tool
Ethernet
Large type (Model 3000)
Large type (Model 3000)
Small type (Model 2000)
Very small type (Model 1000)
TC-net 10
Small type (Model 2000)
TOSLINE-S20
DeviceNet
Field Unit
Very small type
(Model 1000)
Supplementary
• Refer to the LAN Card User Manual for the details concerning LAN.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
7
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.2.1.1
Network
Network refers to a single LAN segment connecting multiple nodes (stations).
Network is divided into the following three major levels.
• Network for monitor
• Network for system
• Network for field I/O
Restrictions
In some cases, there are restrictions on the equipment supported by the
Engineering Tool. Read the ReadMe.TXT file included with the setup
package and check the latest information.
Network for monitor
Connects process monitor and operation unit (such as OIS_DS) and the
station of the nv series and the V series.
Name
Description
EtherLAN
Ethernet LAN (Single)
EtherLANDouble
Ethernet LAN (Double)
Network for system
Mutually connects the station of the nv series and the V series.
For high speed transmission between controllers.
Name
Description
S20LAN
S20 LAN
S20LoopLAN
S20-Loop LAN
TC-net 10LAN
TC-net 10 LAN (Single)
TC-net 10LANd
TC-net 10 LAN (Double)
TC-net 20LAN
TC-net 20 LAN
TC-net 100LAN
TC-net 100 LAN (Single)
TC-net 100LANd
TC-net 100 LAN (Double)
FL-netLAN
FL-net LAN
FL-netControlLAN
FL-net Control LAN
ADMAP-5MLAN
ADMAP-5M LAN
ADMAP-100FLAN
ADMAP-100F LAN
* 'FL-netLAN' and ' FL-netControlLAN' are the same network for FL-net [OPCN-2].
But there are restrictions to register node of these networks. Please see the manual
'1.2.1.2 Node'.
8
6F8C1290
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Network for field
Connects field units.
Name
1.2.1.2
Description
DevicenetLAN
Devicenet LAN
T_EthernetLAN
T-series Ethernet LAN
F10LAN
F10 LAN
ProfibusLAN
Profibus LAN
TL-30LAN
TL-30 LAN
TL-100LAN
TL-100 LAN
TL-1000LAN
TL-1000 LAN
ProfibusLAN
Profibus LAN
ModbusLANm
Modbus LAN (Master)
ModbusLANs
Profibus LAN (Slave)
Node
Node refers to transmission stations connecting to Network.
The nodes connected to Network at each level are shown below.
Restrictions
In some cases, there are restrictions on the equipment supported by the
Engineering Tool. Read the Readme.txt file included with the setup package
and check the latest information.
Network for monitor
EtherLAN, EtherLANDouble
[nv series]
Name
Description
EN811
Ethernet GB/100MB for electric (Single)
EN812
Ethernet GB/100MB for TOSMAP-DS
EN821
Ethernet GB/100MB for optical (Single)
FN812
Ethernet GB/100MB for OIS-DS
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
9
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
Description
EN711
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Single)
EN721
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Double)
EN731
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Single)
EN741
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Double)
EN751
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Single)
EN761
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Double)
FN711
Ethernet card (DS type)
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
EN611
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Single)
EN621
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Double)
EN631
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Single)
EN641
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Double)
EN651
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Single)
EN661
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Double)
FN611
Ethernet card (DS type)
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
Name
EN531
Description
Ethernet LAN card for L1PU11
[Other]
Name
10
6F8C1290
Description
ENGW-5654
TL-8000 Message gateway
FMGW1
MDWS/TC-net gateway
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Network for control
<S20LAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
Description
SN321
G3I/O S20 coxial type
SN322A
G3I/O S20 optical type
SN323
G3I/O S20 coxial/optical type
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
SN621
G2I/O S20 coxial type
SN622
G2I/O S20 optical type
SN221
G2I/O S20 coxial type
SN222A
G2I/O S20 optical type
<S20LoopLAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
SN325
Description
G3I/O S20LP optical loop type
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
Name
L1PU12
Description
L1-type2 with TL-S20LP
<TC-net 10LAN, TC-net 10LANd>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
Description
CN711
TC-net 10 LAN card for coxial (Single)
CN712
TC-net 10 LAN card for coxial (Double)
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
CN611
TC-net 10 LAN card for coxial (Single)
CN612
TC-net 10 LAN card for coxial (Double)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
11
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<TC-net 20LAN>
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
CN623
Description
TC-net 20 LAN card for optical loop
(Dual)
<TC-net 100LAN, TC-net 100LANd>
[nv series]
Name
Description
TN821
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Single)
TN822
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Dual)
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
Description
TN711
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Single)
TN712
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Dual)
TN721
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Single)
TN722
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Dual)
[Other]
Name
12
6F8C1290
Description
TNH11A
TC-net 100 shared hub electric/single
TNH11A_B
TC-net 100 shared hub electric/dual
TNH21A
TC-net 100 shared hub optical/single
TNH21A_B
TC-net 100 shared hub optical/dual
TNE21
TC-net 100 Ethernet bridge/single
TNGW-5652
TL-8000 gateway
FMGW1
MDWS/TC-net gateway
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
<FL-netLAN>
[nv series]
Name
FL911
Description
FL-net module
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
Description
FL311
G3 I/O FL-net module(Ver1.00)
FL312
G3 I/O FL-net module(Ver2.00)
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
FL211
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver1.00)
FL212
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver2.00)
FL611
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver1.00)
FL612
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver2.00)
* For other type node like FL754, please use the node of 'other station'.
<FL-netControlLAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
FL754
Description
FL-net G3 Remote I/O station
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
FL654
Description
FL-net G2 Remote I/O station
* For other type node like FL312, please use the node of 'other station'.
Supplementary
• When FL-net Remote I/O station and FL-net module for controller are connected to
same network, and FL-net Remote I/O station is registered with V-Tool, please register
as follows:
1) Register both 'FL-net LAN' and 'FL-net Control LAN'.
2) On the each network, register normal node and other station node.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
13
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<ADMAP-5MLAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
AN712
Description
ADMAP-5M Gateway module
<ADMAP-100FLAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
AN777
Description
ADMAP-100F interface module
Network for Field
<DevicenetLAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
DN311
Description
G3I/O Devicenet master station
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
DN611
G2 I/O Devicenet Master
DN211
G2 I/O Devicenet Master
<F10LAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
14
6F8C1290
Description
MS311
G3I/O T-F10 master station
MS321-128
G3I/O T-F10M master station with 128words
MS321-256
G3I/O T-F10M master station with 256 words
MS321-32
G3I/O T-F10M master station with 32 words
MS321-64
G3I/O T-F10M master station with 64 words
MS331
G3I/O T-F10L master station
RS311
G3I/O T-F10 remote station
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
UN611
G2I/O F10 master station
UN612
G2I/O F10 remote station
MS211
G2I/O F10 master station
RS211
G2I/O F10 remote station
<TL-30LAN>
Name
Description
LK611
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for twisted pair type
LK612
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for optical type
LK11
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for twisted pair type
LK12
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for optical type
TL30_X
TOSLINE-30 station
<TL-100LAN>
Name
TL100_X
Description
TOSLINE-100 station
<TL-1000LAN>
Name
TL1000_X
Description
TOSLINE-1000 station
<ProfibusLAN>
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
Description
PF311
G3 I/O PROFIBUS-DP module
PF312
G3 I/O PROFIBUS-DP slave module
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
PF611
G2 I/O PROFIBUS-DP master module
PF612
G2 I/O PROFIBUS-DP slave module
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
15
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<ModbusLANm>
[nv series]
Name
MD911-M
Description
MODBUS-RTU module (Master)
<ModbusLANs>
[nv series]
Name
Description
MD911-S
MODBUS-RTU module (Slave)
1.2.2 Station configuration
A station consists of one main unit and connected Main Modules, Buses, I/O
Units, and I/O Modules.
I/O Modules are Parallel I/O and Serial I/O.
The station configuration for each model is shown.
Station configuration of nv series
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Main Module
Main Unit
I/O Loop
I/O Node
I/O Node
0 1 2 3 4 5
I/O Unit
I/O Unit
0 1 2 3 4 5
I/O Module
I/O Module
TC-net I/O
16
6F8C1290
Parallel I/O
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Station configuration of V series
[Large Type (Model 3000)]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Main Unit
Bus
Main Module
Bus
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5
I/O Unit
I/O Unit
I/O Module
0 1 2 3 4 5
I/O module
Serial I/O
Parallel I/O
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
17
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
[Small type (Model 2000)]
0 1 2
Main Unit
Bus
Main Module
Bus
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5
I/O Unit
I/O Unit
I/O Module
0 1 2 3 4 5
I/O Module
Serial I/O
Parallel I/O
[Very Small type (Model 1000)]
0 0 1 2 3
I/O Module
Main Unit
Main Module
14 15
I/O Unit
Supplementary
• Refer to the Controller User Manual for details concerning main unit and main module.
• Refer to the User Manual for detail information concerning bus, I/O Unit, and I/O
module.
18
6F8C1290
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Duplexing concept
Duplexing is to be performed by "Selecting duplexing module" from the tool.
Therefore, station configuration can be registered without setting the same
module twice.
<Main Unit (for duplexing)>
0 1 2 3
Power supply
3 2 1 0
Register shaded area
<Main unit (2 unit duplexing)>
Power supply
Power supply
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Register shaded area
<Parallel I/O unit (Bus interface duplexing)>
Interface
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Register shaded area
<Serial I/O unit (Bus interface duplexing)>
Interface
1
Register shaded area
14
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
19
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.2.2.1
Main unit
Main Unit refers to units consisting of modules including CPU such as
controllers.
It is also called the "Base Unit."
Main Unit is divided in to single mode and duplex mode unit.
The main unit for each model is as follows.
Restrictions
In some cases, there are restrictions on the equipment supported by the
Engineering Tool.
Read the ReadMe.TXT file included with the setup package and check the
latest information.
Main unit of nv series
Name
Description
BU816
nv station main unit(Single) 7 main
BU816Double
nv station main unit(Double with 2 set) 7 main *2
BU825
nv station main unit(Double) 6 main
BU825Single
nv station main unit(Single) 6 main
BU866
nv station multi main unit(Single) 7 main
Main unit of V series
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Name
20
6F8C1290
Description
BU719
Model3000 main unit(Single) 2 main + 9 I/O with no system bus
BU742
Model3000 main unit(Single) 2 main + 9 I/O
BU742Double
Model3000 main uinit(Double with 2 set) 2 main *2
BU744
Model3000 main uinit(Single)4 main + 7 I/O
BU744Double
Model3000 main unit(Double with 2 set) 4 main *2
BU746
Model3000 main unit(Single) 6 main + 5 I/O
BU746Double
Model3000 main unit(Double with 2 set) 6 main *2
BU748
Model3000 main unit(Single) 8 main + 3 I/O
BU748Double
Model3000 main unit(Double with 2 set) 8 main *2
BU784
Model3000 main unit(Double)
BU784Single
Model3000 main unit(Single) 4 main
BU74A
Model3000 RI/O Main Unit(Single) with 6 slots
4 main
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Name
Description
BU643D
Model2000 main unit(Single) 4 main + 3 I/O
BU643DDouble
Model2000 main unit(Double with 2 set) 4 main
BU648E
Model2000 main unit(Single) 5 main + 8 I/O
BU648EDouble
Model2000 main unit(Double with 2 set) 5 main
BU664
Model2000 main unit(Single) 2 main + 3 I/O
BU666
Model2000 main unit(Single) 1 main + 5 I/O
BU668
Model2000 main unit(Single) 1 main + 8 I/O
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
Name
Description
MainUnit11
model1000 main unit for L1PU11,EN531,L1LG11
MainUnit12
model1000 main unit for L1PU12,LC
Main unit of other
Name
Description
ANStn
ADMAP station unit
DNStn
Devicenet station unit
F10Stn
F10 station unit
FLStn
FL-net station unit
PFStn
Profibus station unit
SNStn
S20 station unit
TL30Stn
TL-30 station unit
TL100Stn
TL-100 station unit
TL1000Stn
TL-1000 station unit
TL8000GWStn
TL-8000 gateway station unit
TNHub
TC-net100 hub unit
TNStn
TC-net100 station unit
FMGWStn
MDWS/TC-net gateway station unit
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
21
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.2.2.2
Main module
Main module refers to controller modules contained in the main unit. Large
type G3I/O module and small type G2I/O module are treated as main module
in the tool because they can connect to main unit in addition to I/O unit. The
following main modules can be registered from main unit of each model.
Restrictions
In some cases, there are restrictions on the equipment supported by the
Engineering Tool. Read the ReadMe.TXT file included with the setup
package and check the latest information.
Main module of nv series
BU816,BU816Double,BU825,BU825Single
Name
Description
PU811
Unified Controller type1 256KS sequence model
PU821
Unified Controller type2 512KS DCS model
PU871
Unified Controller type2 (nuclear) 512KS
EN811
Ethernet GB/100MB for electric (Single)
EN812
Ethernet GB/100MB for TOSMAP-DS
EN821
Ethernet GB/100MB for optical (Single)
FN812
Ethernet GB/100MB for OIS-DS
FN862
Ethernet GB/100MB for OIS-DS (nuclear)
TN821
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Single)
TN822
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Dual)
BU866
Name
22
6F8C1290
Description
PU866
Unified Controller type1 (multi) 256KS
EN811
Ethernet GB/100MB for electric (Single)
EN821
Ethernet GB/100MB for optical (Single)
TN821
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Single)
TN822
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Dual)
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Main module of V series
[Large type (Model 3000)]
BU742, BU742Double, BU744, BU744Double, BU746, BU746Double,
BU748, BU748Double, BU784
Name
Description
C3PU11
C3 RS3 8MB
C3PU22
C3 NT(Japanese) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU23
C3 NT(Japanese) 128MB Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU35
C3 controller (Fast type)
C3PU62
C3 NT(English) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU63
C3 NT(English) 128MB Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
CN711
TC-net 10 LAN card for coxial (Single)
CN712
TC-net 10 LAN card for coxial (Double)
EN711
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Single)
EN721
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Double)
EN731
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Single)
EN741
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Double)
EN751
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Single)
EN761
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Double)
FN711
Ethernet card (DS type)
IF719
DU3 with no G3I/O bus
IF721
PIF 2 G3I/O buses
IF728
DU3 with 2 G3I/O buses
IF735
SIF 3 SI/O buses
IF741
PIF 4 G3I/O buses
IF748
DU3 with 4 G3I/O buses
L3PU11
L3-type1 (MCS type)
L3PU21
L3-type2 (DS type)
S3PU45
S3-type3 112kstep 64kW
S3PU55
S3-type1 112kstep 128kW
S3PU65
S3-type5 112kstep 128kW Duplex Type
TS711
GPS Interface
TN711
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Single)
TN712
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Dual)
TN721
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Single)
TN722
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Dual)
AN712
ADMAP-5M card
AN777
ADMAP-100F interface module
* The I/O module cannot be registered in the main unit for the dual system.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
23
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
BU742
Name
FL754
Description
FL-net G3 Remote I/O station
* G3I/O Module can be registered in addition to the above.
BU719
Name
Description
C3PU11
C3 RS3 8MB
C3PU22
C3 NT(Japanese) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU23
C3 NT(Japanese) 128MB Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU35
C3 controller (Fast type)
C3PU62
C3 NT(English) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU63
C3 NT(English) 128MB Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
CN711
TC-net 10 LAN card
for coxial (Single)
CN712
TC-net 10 LAN card
for coxial (Double)
EN711
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Single)
EN721
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Double)
EN731
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Single)
EN741
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Double)
EN751
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Single)
EN761
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Double)
FN711
Ethernet card (DS type)
IF719
DU3 with no G3I/O bus
IF721
PIF 2 G3I/O buses
IF728
DU3 with 2 G3I/O buses
IF735
SIF 3 SI/O buses
IF741
PIF 4 G3I/O buses
IF748
DU3 with 4 G3I/O buses
L3PU11
L3-type1 (MCS type)
L3PU21
L3-type2 (DS type)
S3PU21
S3-type4 64kstep
S3PU45
S3-type3 112kstep 64kW
S3PU55
S3-type1 112kstep 128kW
S3PU65
S3-type5 112kstep 128kW Duplex Type
48kW
with no system bus
TS711
GPS Interface
TN711
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Single)
TN712
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Dual)
TN721
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Single)
TN722
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Dual)
* G3I/O Module can be registered in addition to the above.
24
6F8C1290
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
BU74A
Name
Description
C3PU11
C3 RS3 8MB
C3PU22
C3 NT(Japanese) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU23
C3 NT(Japanese) 128MB Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU35
C3 controller (Fast type)
C3PU62
C3 NT(English) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C3PU63
C3 NT(English) 128MB Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
EN711
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Single)
EN721
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Double)
EN731
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Single)
EN741
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE2 (Double)
EN751
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Single)
EN761
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Double)
R3PU45 + IF721
R3 RI/O controller with PIF(2 G3I/O buses)
R3PU45 + IF71B
R3 RI/O controller with PIF(1 5800I/O bus)
R3PU45 + IF72C
R3 RI/O controller with MELPLAC I/O (2 buses)
S3PU45
S3-type3 112kstep 64kW
S3PU55
S3-type1 112kstep 128kW
S3PU45 + IF721
S3 controller (112ks 64kw) for RI/O with PIF(G3 2 bus)
S3PU45 + IF741
S3 controller (112ks 64kw) for RI/O with PIF(G3 4 bus)
S3PU55 + IF721
S3 controller (112ks 128kw) for RI/O with PIF(G3 2 bus)
S3PU55 + IF741
S3 controller (112ks 128kw) for RI/O with PIF(G3 4 bus)
S3PU65
S3-type5 112kstep 128kW Duplex Type
TN711
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Single)
TN712
TC-net 100 LAN card for electric (Dual)
TN721
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Single)
TN722
TC-net 100 LAN card for optical (Dual)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
25
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
[Small type (Model 2000)]
BU643D, BU643Ddouble, BU648E, BU648Edouble, BU664, BU666, BU668
Name
Description
C2PU11
C2 RS3 8MB
C2PU21
C2 NT(Japanese) 64MB, Flash Disk 160MB
C2PU22
C2 NT(Japanese) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB
C2PU23
C2 NT(Japanese) 128MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
C2PU35
C2 controller (Fast type)
C2PU37
C2 controller (Hard disk pack type)
C2PU61
C2 NT(English) 64MB, Flash Disk 160MB
C2PU62
C2 NT(English) 64MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB
C2PU63
C2 NT(English) 128MB, Hard Disk 4.8GB, PCMCIA 2
CN611
TC-net 10 LAN card
for coxial (Single)
CN612
TC-net 10 LAN card
for coxial (Double)
CN623
TC-net 20 LAN card for optical loop (Dual)
EN611
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Single)
EN621
Ethernet LAN card 10BASE5 (Double)
EN631
Ether LAN card 10BASE2 (Single)
EN641
Ether LAN card 10BASE2 (Double)
EN651
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Single)
EN661
Fast Ethernet LAN card (Double)
FN611
Ethernet card (DS type)
IF617
EC bus interface
L2PU11
L2-type1
with 1 SI/O bus
L2PU12
L2-type2
with 3 SI/O bus
L2PU22
L2-type5 (DS type)
S2PU22
S2-type1 32Kstep with no system bus
S2PU32
S2-type4 64Kstep with no system bus
S2PU72
S2-type2 64Kstep
S2PU72D
S2-type5 64Kstep Duplex Type
S2PU82
S2-type3 64Kstep
* The I/O module cannot be registered in the main unit for the dual system.
BU648E
Name
Description
CN614
G2 RI/O for Optical transmission
R2PU72
G2 Remoto I/O Controller
CN624
TC-net 20 LAN card for optical loop (Dual)
* G2I/O Module can be registered in addition to the above.
26
6F8C1290
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
BU668, BU666, BU664
Name
FL654
Description
FL-net G2 Remote I/O station
* G2I/O Module can be registered in addition to the above.
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
MainUnit11
Name
Description
L1PU11
L1-type1
L1LG11
L1 Logger
EN531
Ethernet LAN card for L1PU11
MainUnit12
Name
Description
L1PU12
L1-type2
with TL-S20LP
LC511
One loop controller (Current)
LC512
One loop controller (Pulse)
LC521
One loop controller (Current) for MC Bus
LC522
One loop controller (Pulse) for MC Bus
Main module of other
ANStn
Name
Description
AN_X
ADMAP-5M station
AN_Y
ADMAP-100F station
DNStn
Name
DN_X
Description
Devicenet station
F10Stn
Name
F10_X
Description
F10 station
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
27
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
FLStn
Name
Description
FL_X
FL-net station
FL_Y
FL-net station (For FLnetControlLAN)
PFStn
Name
PF_X
Description
Profibus station
SNStn
Name
Description
SN_X
S20-Loop LAN card
SN_Y
S20 LAN card
TL30Stn
Name
TL30_X
Description
TOSLINE-30 station
TL100Stn
Name
TL100_X
Description
TOSLINE-100 station
TL1000Stn
Name
TL1000_X
Description
TOSLINE-1000 station
TL8000GWStn
Name
28
6F8C1290
Description
TNGW-5652
TL-8000 gateway
ENGW-5654
TL-8000 Message gateway
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
TNHub
Name
Description
TNH11A
TC-net 100 shared hub electric/single
TNH11A_B
TC-net 100 shared hub electric/dual
TNH21A
TC-net 100 shared hub optical/single
TNH21A_B
TC-net 100 shared hub optical/dual
TNE21
TC-net 100 Ethernet bridge/single
TNStn
Name
Description
TNI11
TC-net 100 LAN card electric/single
TNI12
TC-net 100 LAN card electric/dual
TNI21
TC-net 100 LAN card optical/single
TNI22
TC-net 100 LAN card optical/dual
FMGWStn
Name
FMGW1
1.2.2.3
Description
MDWS/TC-net gateway
I/O node / bus
In the case of the nv series, indicates the I/O Node between the main module
and I/O module.
In the case of the V series, Indicates the bus connecting to I/O unit from main
module.
Bus is divided into Parallel Bus,Serial Bus,5800I/O Bus and MELPLAC I/O Bus.
In the tool, the bus is connected with the left end controller.
Restrictions
In some cases, there are restrictions on the equipment supported by the
Engineering Tool. Read the ReadMe.TXT file included with the setup
package and check the latest information.
I/O Node of nv series
PU811, PU821, PU866, PU871
Name
Description
SA911
TC-net I/O I/F for electric
SA912
TC-net I/O I/F for optical
SA931
TC-net I/O I/F (for LP918B)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
29
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
I/O node of V series
[Large type (Model 3000)]
• Parallel I/O
IF721, IF728, IF741, IF748
R3PU45 + IF721, S3PU45 + IF721, S3PU45 + IF741, S3PU55 + IF721,
S3PU55 + IF741
Name
G3Bus
Description
G3 Parallel Bus
• 5800 I/O
R3PU45 + IF71B
Name
5800IOBus
Description
5800 I/O bus
• MELPLAC I/O
R3PU45 + IF72C
Name
M_IOBus
Description
MELPLAC I/O Bus
• Serial I/O
IF735, L3PU11
Name
SerialBus
Description
Serial
Bus
[Small type (Model 2000)]
• Parallel I/O
In the case of small type parallel I/O, the bus connects to dedicated G2I/O
interface module rather than the main module. There is no bus registration
in the tool, but the following bus is used for I/O unit selection.
Name
30
6F8C1290
Description
G2Bus_V
G2I/O bus for G2 I/O unit
G2Bus_T
G2I/O bus for G2/T2 I/O unit
G2Bus_EX
G2I/O bus for EX I/O unit
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
• Serial I/O
L2PU11, L2PU12
Name
SerialBus
Description
Serial
Bus
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
• Serial I/O
L1PU11, L1PU12
Name
IOBus
1.2.2.4
Description
For IO Bus L1
I/O unit
Unit used to expand the I/O module in addition to the main unit. Also called
Expansion Unit.
In the case of the nv series, there are I/O units for TC-net I/O, Parallel I/O or
Serial I/O.
In the case of the V series, there are I/O units for Parallel I/O, Serial I/O, 5800
I/O or MELPLAC I/O.
The following I/O units can be registered for I/O node or Bus of each model.
Restrictions
In some cases, there are restrictions on the equipment supported by the
Engineering Tool. Read the ReadMe.TXT file included with the setup
package and check the latest information.
I/O Unit of nv series
• TC-net I/O
SA911, SA912
Name
SIOUnit
Description
TC-net I/O unit 16 slots
SA931
Name
BU928F
Description
TC-net I/O unit (LP918B) with 8 slots
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
31
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
I/O Unit of V series
[ Large Type (Model 3000) ]
• Parallel I/O
G3Bus
Name
Description
BU356
G3I/O unit(Single) with 6 slots
BU35B
G3I/O unit(Single) with 11 slots
• 5800 I/O
5800IOBus
Name
Description
CHS-5807
5800 I/O unit with 17 slots
CHS-5839
5800 I/O unit(only Power I/O) with 9 slots
• MELPLAC I/O
M_IOBus
Name
32
6F8C1290
Description
BS4706-03
BS series I/O unit with 1 slot
E7CPU
E series I/O unit with 11 slots
U1CPU
E series I/O unit with 5 slots
DSU
F series I/O unit with 3 slots
F1IOU
F series I/O unit with 10 slots
EIOU
K series I/O unit with 8 slots
E1IOU
K series I/O unit with 8 slots
E3IOU
K series I/O unit with 8 slots
E4IOU-F
K series I/O unit with 8 slots
E4IOU-B
K series I/O unit with 8 slots
IOU
K series I/O unit with 8 slots
DCPU
P series I/O unit with 1 slot
MDWU
P series I/O unit with 1 slot
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
• Serial I/O
SerialBus
Name
Description
SBIF1
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Single)(Slow type)
SBIF1Double
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Double)
SBIF2
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Single)(Fast type)
SBIF2Double
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Double)(Fast type)
F-AI/AO
F series I/O unit (AI/AO)
F-DI/DO
F series I/O unit (DI/DO)
SSIF1Unit
Serial I/O Unit
[Small type (Model 2000)]
• Parallel I/O
G2Bus_V
Name
Description
BU664_E
G2I/O unit with 4 slots
BU666_E
G2I/O unit with 6 slots
BU668_E
G2I/O unit with 8 slots
G2Bus_T
Name
Description
BU266
T2I/O unit with 6 slots
BU268
T2I/O unit with 8 slots
BU664_E
G2I/O unit with 4 slots
BU666_E
G2I/O unit with 6 slots
BU668_E
G2I/O unit with 8 slots
G2Bus_EX
Name
Description
UBB1
EXI/O unit with 5 slots
UBB2
EXI/O unit with 8 slots
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
33
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
• Serial I/O
SerialBus
Name
Description
SBIF1
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Single)(Slow type)
SBIF1Double
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Double)
SBIF2
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Single)(Fast type)
SBIF2Double
SI/O unit with 14 slots(Double)(Fast type)
F-AI/AO
F series I/O unit (AI/AO)
F-DI/DO
F series I/O unit (DI/DO)
SSIF1Unit
Serial I/O Unit
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
• Serial I/O
IOBus
Name
IOUnit
1.2.2.5
Description
SI/O unit with 16 slots for L1
I/O module
Indicates I/O modules forming I/O units.
In the case of the nv series, there are I/O modules for TC-net I/O, Parallel I/O or
Serial I/O.
In the case of the V series, there are I/O modules for Parallel I/O, Serial I/O,
5800 I/O or MELPLAC I/O.
These I/O modules that can be registered for I/O unit of each model are as
follows.
Restrictions
In some cases, there are restrictions on the equipment supported by the
Engineering Tool. Read the ReadMe.TXT file included with the setup
package and check the latest information.
34
6F8C1290
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
I/O Module of nv series
• TC-net I/O
SIOUnit
Name
Description
DI934
DC24V 5.2mA input with digital filter
DI934I
DC24V 5.2mA input with digital filter(for Instrumentation)
DI934T
DC24V 8mA input with digital filter (Temp. derating)
DI944
DC48V 2.6mA input with digital filter
DI935
DC24V 4mA input with digital filter
DI936
DC12/24V 10mA input with digital filter (point isolation)
IN956
AC/DC-100/110V input
IN966
AC200/240V 10mA input (point isolation)
DI937
DC24V 10mA contact input
DI947
DC48V 4.5mA contact input
DI957
DC100/120V 2.3mA contact input
DI934S
DC24V 5.2mA input with strobe
DO934
DC24V 100mA output
DO935
DC24V 100mA sync output
DO934P
DC12/24V 80mA/point 1.6A,16 points/com sync output
DO936
DC24V 2.0A FET-CH isolation output (no fuse)
AC963
AC100/240V- 2A/point output
RO966
AC240V/DC24V-2.0A output
AI914
0-5V 14bits input (1ms)
AI918
0-5V 14bits input (16bits format, 10ms)
AI918F
0-5V 16bits input (16bits format, 10ms)
AI919
0-5V 14bits input (16bits format, 50ms)
AI929D
0-5V 14bits input (16bits format, 50ms) with distributor
AI918D
0-5V 14bits input (16bits format, 10ms) with distributor
AI938
+ -10V 14bits input (S + 13bits format, 0.5ms) with distributor
AI928
0-20mA 14bits input (0.5ms)
AI969
With 16 mV/V input
TC919
Thermocouple (type B,R,S,J,K,T,E)
RT918C
RTD Pt100,JPt100 (common)
RT918
RTD Pt100,JPt100 (point isolation)
AO928
0-20mA 14bits output (16bits format, 1ms)
AO928F
0-20mA 16bits output (16bits format, 1ms)
AO929
0-20mA 14bits output (16bits format, 20ms)
AO918
0-5V 14bits output (16bits format, 10ms)
AO918F
0-5V 16bits output (16bits format, 10ms)
(point isolation)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
35
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Name
Description
AO919
0-5V 14bits output (16bits format, 20ms)
AO938
-10V to 10V 14bits output (S + 15bits format, 5ms/8ch)
AO934F
-10V to 10V 16bits output (S + 15bits format, 0.175ms)
AO954F
-10mA to 10mA 16bits output (S + 15bits format, 0.175ms)
PI918
Pulse input (High speed DC-50kHz, Low speed 0-50Hz)
PI924
Bipulse input (DC-50kHz)
PI934
RS485 differential pulse input
PI948
With 8 voltage instrumentation pulse
PO918
Pulse output (DC24V-100mA, Width:72/9ms Row:28/111Hz)
PO928
Pulse output conforming TOSMAP(POC1)
FI913
Frequency input
FL911
FL-net module
MD911-M
MODBUS-RTU module (master)
MD911-S
MODBUS-RTU module (slave)
AB932J
Resolver type absolute single-turn encoder
AB933J
Resolver type absolute multi-turn encoder
AB934J
Resolver type linear encoder
AB932N
Resolver type absolute single-turn encoder
AB933N
Resolver type absolute multi-turn encoder
AB934N
Resolver type linear encoder
TP912M
Linear sensor
• BU928F
Name
36
6F8C1290
Description
LP918B
AI12,MV8(4-20mA output),DI8,DO8 (Single)
LP918BDouble
AI12,MV8(4-20mA output),DI8,DO8 (Double)
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
I/O Module of V series
[Large Type (Model 3000)]
• Parallel I/O
BU356, BU35B
Name
Description
AB32N
G3 I/O absocoder converter 1 turn
AB33N
G3 I/O absocoder converter
AB34N
G3 I/O absocoder converter linear
AC354
G3 I/O 32 DO ,100Vac 0.5A/point
AC363
G3 I/O 16 DO ,100Vac/200Vac 2.0A/point
AC364
G3 I/O 32 DO ,100/200Vac 0.5A/point
AD318
G3 I/O fast 8 AI ,0-5V with channel isolation
AD328
G3 I/O fast 8 AI ,4-20mA with chanel isolation
AD334S
G3 I/O fast 4 AI ,-10to + 10V with chanel isolation
AD338
G3 I/O fast 8 AI ,-10to + 10V with chanel isolation
AD368
G3 I/O 8 AI, 10V,5V,0-20mA,4-20mA,0-5V,1-5V
AS311
G3 I/O ASCII interface
BS311
G3 I/O BSC protocol comm.
CD332
G3 I/O 8 CCDI
CD333
G3 I/O 16 CDDI
CD333-1W
G3 I/O 8 CDDI (CD332 compatible mode)
DA314S
G3 I/O fast 4 AO ,0-5V with chanel isolation (with output hold)
DA324S
G3 I/O fast 4 AO ,0-20mA with chanel isolation (with output hold)
DA334S
G3 I/O fast 4 AO ,-10to + 10V with chanel isolation
DA364
G3 I/O fast 4 AO ,-10to + 10V,-5to + 5V,0-10V,0-5V
DA364S
G3 I/O fast 4 AO ,output mode user setup, with chanel isolation
(with output hold)
DA374
G3 I/O 4 AO ,0-20mA,4-20mA
DA374S
G3 I/O fast 4 AO ,output mode user setup, with chanel isolation
(with output hold)
DA384S
G3 I/O fast 4 AO ,-10to + 10mA with chanel isolation
DI324S
G3 I/O 32 DI with strobe , 12/15Vdc
DI333D
G3 I/O DC12/24V Input 16 points
DI334
G3 I/O 32 DI ,24Vdc
DI334H
G3 I/O 32 DI ,24Vdc ,fast type
DI334S
G3 I/O 32 DI with strobe, 24Vdc
DI335
G3 I/O 64 DI ,24Vdc
DI335H
G3 I/O 64 DI ,24Vdc, fast type
DI344
G3 I/O 32 DI ,48Vdc
muti turn
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
37
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Name
38
6F8C1290
Description
DI353D
G3 I/O DC110/AC100V Input 16 points
DL311
G3 I/O TMX1000 protocol comm.
DN311
G3 I/O Devicenet master station
DO333
G3 I/O 16 DO ,24Vdc ,2.0A/point
DO334
G3 I/O 32 DO ,24Vdc, 0.5A/point
DO334P
G3 I/O 32 DO source output ,24Vdc, 0.5A/point
DO334S
G3 I/O 32 DO with strobe ,24Vdc
DO335
G3 I/O 64 DO ,24Vdc ,0.1A/point
DO344
G3 I/O 32 DO ,48Vdc
EN311
G3 I/O Ethernet LAN card of T-series
FL311
G3 I/O FL-net module(Ver1.00)
FL312
G3 I/O FL-net module(Ver2.00)
IN354
G3 I/O 32 DI ,100Vac
IN364
G3 I/O 32 DI ,200Vac
M3ANY-iX + Y16W
G3 I/O 8W input with interruption 8W output
M3ANY-iX + Y2W
G3 I/O 1W inputwith interruption 1W output
M3ANY-iX + Y32W
G3 I/O 16W input with interruption 16W output
M3ANY-iX + Y4W
G3 I/O 2W input with interruption 2W output
M3ANY-iX + Y8W
G3 I/O 4W input with interruption 4W output
M3ANY-iX16W
G3 I/O 16W input with interruption
M3ANY-iX1W
G3 I/O 1W input with interruption
M3ANY-iX2W
G3 I/O 2W input with interruption
M3ANY-iX32W
G3 I/O 32W input with interruption
M3ANY-iX4W
G3 I/O 4W input with interruption
M3ANY-iX8W
G3 I/O 8W input with interruption
M3ANY-OPT
G3 I/O memory type module
M3ANY-X + Y16W
G3 I/O 8W input 8W output
M3ANY-X + Y2W
G3 I/O 1W input 1W output
M3ANY-X + Y32W
G3 I/O 16W input 16W output
M3ANY-X + Y4W
G3 I/O 2W input 2W output
M3ANY-X + Y8W
G3 I/O 4W input 4W output
M3ANY-X16W
G3 I/O 16W input
M3ANY-X1W
G3 I/O 1W input
M3ANY-X2W
G3 I/O 2W input
M3ANY-X32W
G3 I/O 32W input
M3ANY-X4W
G3 I/O 4W input
M3ANY-X8W
G3 I/O 8W input
M3ANY-Y16W
G3 I/O 16W output
1.2
Name
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Description
M3ANY-Y1W
G3 I/O 1W output
M3ANY-Y2W
G3 I/O 2W output
M3ANY-Y32W
G3 I/O 32W output
M3ANY-Y4W
G3 I/O 4W output
M3ANY-Y8W
G3 I/O 8W output
MC352
G3 I/O 2 axis positioning
MC392
G3 I/O 2 axis positioning for OLB
ML311
G3 I/O MODBUS comm.
PF311
G3 I/O PROFIBUS-DP master module
PF312
G3 I/O PROFIBUS-DP slave module
PI312
G3 I/O 2 PI ,50kpps 5/12Vdc
PI312-20
G3 I/O 2 PI ,50kpps ,5/12Vdc
PI314
G3 I/O 4 PI ,50kpps 12/24Vdc
PI314-32
G3 I/O 4 PI ,50kpps 12/24Vdc
PI314-32R
G3 I/O 4 PI ,50kpps 12/24Vdc
PI318
G3 I/O 8 PI ,50kpps 12/24Vdc
PI318-32
G3 I/O 8 PI ,50kpps 12/24Vdc
PI318-32R
G3 I/O 8 PI ,50kpps 12/24Vdc
PI324
G3 I/O 4 PI ,2.6Mpps/650Kpps ,RS485 differential input with
chanel isolation
PI324-16
G3 I/O 4 PI ,2.6Mpps/650Kpps ,RS485 differential input with
chanel isolation
PI324-16R
G3 I/O 4 PI ,2.6Mpps/650Kpps ,RS485 differential input with
chanel isolation
RD32T
G3 I/O absolution position detector
RO363S
G3 I/O 16 DO ,250Vac,30Vdc, 2.0A/point
RO364
G3 I/O 32 DO ,250Vac/30Vdc 2.0A/point
RT318
G3 I/O RTD(Pt100) Input 16 points
SV31N
G3 I/O Servo comm.
UW311-X + Y2W
G3 I/O Uniwire
UW311-X + Y4W
G3 I/O Uniwire 32 inputs 32 outputs
UW311-X + Y8W
G3 I/O Uniwire 64 inputs 64 outputs
UW311-X4W
G3 I/O Uniwire 64 inputs
UW311-X8W
G3 I/O Uniwire 128 inputs
UW311-Y4W
G3 I/O Uniwire 64 outputs
UW311-Y8W
G3 I/O Uniwire 128 inputs
SN321
G3 I/O S20 coxial type
SN322A
G3 I/O S20 optical type
SN323
G3 I/O S20 coxial/optical type
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
39
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Name
Description
SN324
G3 I/O S20 optical type (long distance)
SN325
G3 I/O S20LP optical loop type
TM311
G3 I/O Telemeter communication module
TP312
G3 I/O Temposonic sensor I/F module
MS311
G3 I/O T-F10 master station
MS321-128
G3 I/O T-F10M master station with 128words
MS321-256
G3 I/O T-F10M master station with 256 words
MS321-32
G3 I/O T-F10M master station with 32 words
MS321-64
G3 I/O T-F10M master station with 64 words
MS331
G3 I/O T-F10L master station
RS311
G3 I/O T-F10 remote station
• 5800 I/O
CHS-5807, CHS-5839
Name
40
6F8C1290
Description
ACO-5881
5800 I/O 16 AC output
AI-5861
5800 I/O 8ch analog input
AIEX-5862
5800 I/O extension analog input
AO-5860
5800 I/O 4ch analog output
BF-5837
5800 I/O buffer interface
CDDI-5851
5800 I/O CDDI (non interrupt)
DCO-5882
5800 I/O 16 power output
DI-5857
5800 I/O 32 DC input (DC15-48V-4mA)
DI-5886
5800 I/O 128 DI self support type power I/O
DO-5852
5800 I/O 32 transistor output (DC15-48V)
DO-5887
5800 I/O 128 DO self support type power I/O
HDI-5855
5800 I/O 32 handshake DC input (non interrupt)
HDO-5856
5800 I/O 32 handshake transistor output(non interrupt)
INP-5880
5800 I/O 16 AC input
MC1-5631
5800 I/O 16-128W TOSLINE-100 station
MC2-5632
5800 I/O 64-1024W TOSLINE-1000 station
MSP-5627
5800 I/O 8-64W TOSLINE-30 station
PBF-5838
5800 I/O power I/O buffer
PI-5870
5800 I/O 8 pulse input (non interrupt)
PIB-5871
5800 I/O 4 bipulse input (non interrupt)
REO-5864
5800 I/O resistance output
RO-5853
5800 I/O 16 relay output (8 point/common)
RO-5854
5800 I/O 16 relay output (self support common)
1.2
Name
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Description
RTD-5863
5800 I/O RTD input
SF-5847
5800 I/O slave interface
SN1-7885
5800 I/O 8-1024W TOSLINE-S20 station
SN2-7886
5800 I/O 8-1024W TOSLINE-S20 station
• MELPLAC I/O
BS4706-03, E7CPU, U1CPU, DSU, F1IOU, EIOU, E1IOU, E3IOU, E4IOU-F,
E4IOU-B, IOU, DCPU, MDWU
Name
Description
BS4118-01
JP-EI2000L IOB card for Hydraulic pressure controller
E4XF
NET II I/F card
E5VF
RIO Main card
E5XF
NET-10 I/F card
FF2F
Bus changer for Hydraulic pressure controller
FI2F
32 (16 Interrupts) DI, 48Vdc (High speed)
FI3F
32 DI, 48Vdc (High speed) with 2 inhibit
FI4F
32 DI, 48Vdc (High speed)
FI5F
32 DI, 24Vdc (High speed) with 2 inhibit
FO2F
32 open collector output with 2 inhibit
FO3F
32 open collector output
FQ2F
8 AI
FQ3F
8 AI (High speed type)
FR2F
8 AO
FR3F
4 AO, + -10V 50mA
FT2F
MDWS-600S2 I/F card
FTDF
MDWS-600S1 I/F card
FU2F-R
RIO Main for remote PY station (Remote I/O)
FU2F-C
RIO Main for remote PY station (CPU to CPU)
FU3F-R
RIO Main for remote PY station (Remote I/O)
FU3F-C
RIO Main for remote PY station (CPU to CPU)
FU6F-R
RIO system (Remote I/O)
FU6F-C
RIO system (CPU to CPU)
FU2F-R2
RIO Main for remote PY station (Remote I/O)-2
FU2F-C2
RIO Main for remote PY station (CPU to CPU)-2
FU3F-R2
RIO Main for remote PY station (Remote I/O)-2
FU3F-C2
RIO Main for remote PY station (CPU to CPU)-2
FU6F-R2
RIO system (Remote I/O)-2
FU6F-C2
RIO system (CPU to CPU)-2
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
41
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Name
42
6F8C1290
Description
FV2F
DIG-THY I/F card (Coaxial)
FV4F
DIG-THY I/F card (Coaxial)
K5AF
RIO MELPLEX-Main
K5GF
THY-I/F (Optical)
K5LF
A-NET II I/F card
K6GF
THY-I/F (Optical)
KC1A
Counter
KC3A
Counter
KI3A
16 DI, 100Vac
KI5A
32 DI, 48Vdc
KI5B
32 DI, 24Vdc
KI5C
64 DI, 48Vdc
KI5D
32 DI, 5Vdc
KI5E
64 DI, 24Vdc (CYCLIC)
KI5F
64 DI, 24Vdc
KI5G
32 DI, 48Vdc with inhibit
KI5H
32 DI, 24Vdc with inhibit
KI6C
16 (8 interrupts) DI ,48Vdc for P750
KI6D
16 (8 interrupts) DI ,24Vdc
KI7B
32 Shaft encoder input ,24Vdc
KI7C
Position detecting card
KO3A
32 Contact output (one side common)
KO3B
32 Contact output (independent common)
KO4A
32 Open collector output ,12-48Vdc
KO4C
64 Open collector output
KO5A
16 Triac output, AC solenoid valve (with fuse)
KO5B
16 Triac output, AC solenoid valve (with fuse & alarm)
KO5C
16 Triac output, AC solenoid valve (without fuse)
KO6A
16 FET output, 24-100Vdc solenoid valve
KO6B
16 Open collector output ,12-24Vdc solenoid valve
KO6C
16 FET output ,100Vdc solenoid valve (without fuse)
KO6D
16 Open collector output, 24Vdc solenoid valve(without fuse)
KO7A
LED display of 8 digits
KQ2A
8 AI, + -10Vdc
KQ2B
8 AI, 0-10Vdc
KQ2C
16 AI, 0-10Vdc
KQ2D
16 AI, 0-10Vdc with S/W filter
KQ2E
8 AI, + -10Vdc
1.2
Name
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Description
KQ3A
8 AI & 8 AO, Current output
KQ3B
8 AI & 8 AO, Current output for Duplex system
KQ3C
8 AI & 8 AO, Current output for Duplex system
KQ5A
4 AO, + -10Vdc
KQ5C
8 AO, 0-20mA
KQ5D
8 AO
KQ5E
8 AO
P7GF-P
IOB for MDWS-515P/506E(PLC STN)
P7GF-D
IOB for MDWS-515P/506E(DRIO STN)
• Serial I/O
SBIF1, SBIF1Double
Name
Description
SAI01
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V
SAI02
SI/O module with 4 AI ,1-5Vdc
SAI03
SI/O module with 4 AI ,1-5Vdc and distributor
SAO01
SI/O module with 8 AO ,4-20mAdc
SAO02
SI/O module with 4 AO ,4-20mAdc
SDI01
SI/O module with 32 DI ,24Vdc
SDI01A
SI/O module with 32 DI ,24Vdc,syncronous input
SDO01
SI/O module with 32 DO, 24Vdc
SPI01
SI/O module with 4 PI
SPO01
SI/O module with 4 PO
SRT01
SI/O module with 4 RTD
STC01
SI/O module with 8 TC
SBIF2, SBIF2Double
Name
Description
SAI06
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V (Single)
SAI06Double
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V (Double)
SAO06
SI/O module with 8 AO (Single)
SAO06Double
SI/O module with 8 AO (Double)
SPI06
SI/O module with 4 PI (Single)
SPI06Double
SI/O module with 4 PI (Double)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
43
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
• F-AI/AO, F-DI/DO
Name
Description
SAIF1
F series I/O with 16 AI (Single)
SAIF1Double
F series I/O with 16 AI (Double)
SAOF1
F series I/O with 16 AO (Single)
SAOF1Double
F series I/O with 16 AO (Double)
SDIF1
F series I/O with 32 DI
SDOF1
F series I/O with 32 DO
[Small type (Model 2000)]
• Parallel I/O
BU266, BU268, BU664_E, BU666_E, BU668_E
Name
44
6F8C1290
Description
AC663
G2 I/O 12 DO ,100-240Vac, 0.5A
AD624
G2 I/O 4 AI ,4-20m/1-5V ,12bits
AD624L
G2 I/O 4 AI ,4-20m/1-5V 8bits
AD628S
G2 I/O 8 AI ,0-5V/0-20mA 12bits break
AD634L
G2 I/O 4 AI ,0-10V 8bits
AD638S
G2 I/O 8 AI ,-10- + 10V 12bits break
AD674
G2 I/O 4 AI ,-10to + 10V 12bits
CF611
G2 I/O general comunication RS232C 1ch 160word * 2
CD633
G2 I/O 16 CDDI
DA614S
G2 I/O 4 AO ,0-5V 16bits break
DA622
G2 I/O 2 AO ,4-20mA/1-5V 12bits
DA622L
G2 I/O 2 AO ,4-20mA/0-5V/1-5V/0-10V 8bits
DA624S
G2 I/O 4 AO ,0-20mA 16bits break
DA672
G2 I/O 2 AO ,-10- + 10V 12bits
DI633
G2 I/O 16 DI ,12-24Vdc/12-24Vac
DI634
G2 I/O 32 DI ,24Vdc
DI635
G2 I/O 64 DI ,24Vdc
DI635H
G2 I/O fast 64 DC , 24Vdc
DI643
G2 I/O 16 DI ,48Vdc
DI653
G2 I/O 16 DI ,110Vdc
DO633
G2 I/O 16 DO ,5-24Vdc 1A
DO633P
G2 I/O 16 DO ,12-24Vdc 1A
DO634
G2 I/O 32 DO ,5-24Vdc 100mA
DO635
G2 I/O 64 DO ,5-24Vdc 100mA
1.2
Name
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Description
FL611
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver1.00)
FL612
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver2.00)
IN653
G2 I/O 16 DI ,100-120Vac
IN663
G2 I/O 16 DI ,200-240Vac
LK611
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for twisted pair type
LK612
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for optical type
M2ANY-iX + Y2W
G2 I/O 1W input with interruption1W output
M2ANY-iX + Y4W
G2 I/O 2W input with interruption 2W output
M2ANY-iX + Y8W
G2 I/O 4W input with interruption 4W output
M2ANY-iX1W
G2 I/O 1W input with interruption
M2ANY-iX2W
G2 I/O 2W input with interruption
M2ANY-iX4W
G2 I/O 4W input with interruption
M2ANY-iX8W
G2 I/O 8W input with interruption
M2ANY-X + Y2W
G2 I/O 1W input 1W output
M2ANY-X + Y4W
G2 I/O 2W input 2W output
M2ANY-X + Y8W
G2 I/O 4W input 4W output
M2ANY-X1W
G2 I/O 1W input
M2ANY-X2W
G2 I/O 2W input
M2ANY-X4W
G2 I/O 4W input
M2ANY-X8W
G2 I/O 8W input
M2ANY-Y1W
G2 I/O 1W output
M2ANY-Y2W
G2 I/O 2W output
M2ANY-Y4W
G2 I/O 4W output
M2ANY-Y8W
G2 I/O 8W output
MC612
G2 I/O 2 axis positioning
MC614
G2 I/O 4 axis positioning
PF611
G2 I/O PROFIBUS-DP master module
PF612
G2 I/O PROFIBUS-DP slave module
PI631
G2 I/O 1 PI, 5/12Vdc 100kppsMax
PI632
G2 I/O 2 PI, 5/12V/24Vdc 100kppsMax
PI672
G2 I/O 2 PI, RS422 100kppsMax
RO662S
G2 I/O 8 DO, 240Vac-24Vdc 2A
RO663
G2 I/O 16 DO, 240Vac-24Vdc 2A
SN621
G2 I/O S20 coxial type
SN622
G2 I/O S20 optical type
TC618
G2 I/O 8 Thermocouple input
UN611
G2 I/O F10 master station
UN612
G2 I/O F10 remote station
DN611
G2 I/O Devicenet Master
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
45
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
UBB1, UBB2
Name
46
6F8C1290
Description
AC61
G2 I/O 12 DO, 100-240Vac, 0.5A
AD814
G2 I/O 4 AI, 0-20mA/0-5V 12bits
AI21
G2 I/O 4 AI, 4-20m/1-5V 8bits
AI22
G2 I/O 4 AI, 4-20m/1-5V ,12bits
AI31
G2 I/O 4 AI, 0-10V ,8bits
AI32
G2 I/O 4 AI, -10to + 10V ,12bits
AO22
G2 I/O 2 AO, 4-20mA/1-5V 12bits
AO31
G2 I/O 2 AO, 4-20mA/0-5V/1-5V/0-10V 8bits
AO32
G2 I/O 2 AO, -10to + 10V 12bits
AS11
G2 I/O ASCII/BASIC
CF211
G2 I/O general comunication RS232C 1ch 160word * 2
DA822
G2 I/O 2 AO, 0-20mA 12bits
DA832
G2 I/O 2 AO, 0-10V 12bits
DI234
G2 I/O 32 DI, 24Vdc
DI235
G2 I/O 64 DI, 24Vdc
DI235H
G2 I/O fast 64 DC, 24Vdc
DI31
G2 I/O 16 DI, 12-24Vdc, 12-24Vac
DI32
G2 I/O 32 DI, 24Vdc
DI33
G2 I/O 8 DI, 24Vdc
DI41
G2 I/O 16 DI, 48Vdc
DI832
G2 I/O 8 DI (non voltage contact)
DO233P
G2 I/O 16 DO, 12-24Vdc 1A
DO234
G2 I/O 32 DO, 5-24Vdc 100mA
DO235
G2 I/O 64 DO, 5-24Vdc 100mA
DO31
G2 I/O 16 DO, 5-24Vdc 1A
DO32
G2 I/O 32 DO, 5-24Vdc 100mA
FL211
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver1.00)
FL212
G2 I/O FL-net module(Ver2.00)
IN51
G2 I/O 16 DI, 100-120Vac
IN52
G2 I/O 16 DI, 100-120Vac
IN61
G2 I/O 16 DI, 200-240Vac
IN62
G2 I/O 16 DI, 200-240Vac
LK11
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for twisted pair type
LK12
G2 I/O TOSLINE-30 for optical type
M2EANY-iX + Y2W
G2 I/O 1W input with interruption1W output
M2EANY-iX + Y4W
G2 I/O 2W input with interruption 2W output
1.2
Name
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
Description
M2EANY-iX + Y8W
G2 I/O 4W input with interruption 4W output
M2EANY-iX1W
G2 I/O 1W input with interruption
M2EANY-iX2W
G2 I/O 2W input with interruption
M2EANY-iX4W
G2 I/O 2W input with interruption
M2EANY-iX8W
G2 I/O 8W input with interruption
M2EANY-X + Y2W
G2 I/O 1W input 1 W output
M2EANY-X + Y4W
G2 I/O 2W input 2W output
M2EANY-X + Y8W
G2 I/O 4W input 4W output
M2EANY-X1W
G2 I/O 1W input
M2EANY-X2W
G2 I/O 2W input
M2EANY-X4W
G2 I/O 4W input
M2EANY-X8W
G2 I/O 8W input
M2EANY-Y1W
G2 I/O 1W output
M2EANY-Y2W
G2 I/O 2W output
M2EANY-Y4W
G2 I/O 4W output
M2EANY-Y8W
G2 I/O 8W output
MC11
G2 I/O 1 axis positioning
MC212
G2 I/O 2 axis positioning
PI21
G2 I/O 1 PI, 5/12Vdc 100kppsMax
PI232
G2 I/O 2 PI, 5/12V/24Vdc 100kppsMax
PI272
G2 I/O 2 PI, RS422 100kppsMax
RC831A
G2 I/O remote control relay ,24Vac
RO263
G2 I/O 16 DO, 240Vac-24Vdc 2A
RO61
G2 I/O 12 DO, 240Vac-24Vdc 2A
RO62
G2 I/O 8 DO, 240Vac-24Vdc 2A
RO832
G2 I/O 8 DO, 240Vac-24Vdc 2A
RT814
G2 I/O RTD pt100
SN221
G2 I/O S20 coxial type
SN222A
G2 I/O S20 optical type
TC218
G2 I/O 8 Thermocouple input
MS211
G2 I/O F10 master station
RS211
G2 I/O F10 remote station
DN211
G2 I/O Devicenet Master
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
47
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
• Serial I/O
SBIF1, SBIF1Double
Name
Description
SAI01
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V
SAI02
SI/O module with 4 AI ,1-5Vdc
SAI03
SI/O module with 4 AI ,1-5Vdc and distributor
SAO01
SI/O module with 8 AO ,4-20mAdc
SAO02
SI/O module with 4 AO ,4-20mAdc
SDI01
SI/O module with 32 DI ,24Vdc
SDI01A
SI/O module with 32 DI ,24Vdc,syncronous input
SDO01
SI/O module with 32 DO, 24Vdc
SPI01
SI/O module with 4 PI
SPO01
SI/O module with 4 PO
SRT01
SI/O module with 4 RTD
STC01
SI/O module with 8 TC
SBIF2, SBIF2Double
Name
Description
SAI06
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V (Single)
SAI06Double
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V (Double)
SAO06
SI/O module with 8 AO (Single)
SAO06Double
SI/O module with 8 AO (Double)
SPI06
SI/O module with 4 PI (Single)
SPI06Double
SI/O module with 4 PI (Double)
F-AI/AO, F-DI/DO
Name
48
6F8C1290
Description
SAIF1
F series I/O with 16 AI (Single)
SAIF1Double
F series I/O with 16 AI (Double)
SAOF1
F series I/O with 16 AO (Single)
SAOF1Double
F series I/O with 16 AO (Double)
SDIF1
F series I/O with 32 DI
SDOF1
F series I/O with 32 DO
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
• Serial I/O
I/O unit
Name
1.2.2.6
Description
SAI01
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V
SAI02
SI/O module with 4 AI, 1-5Vdc
SAI03
SI/O module with 4 AI, 1-5Vdc and distributor
SAO01
SI/O module with 8 AO, 4-20mAdc
SAO02
SI/O module with 4 AO, 4-20mAdc
SDI01
SI/O module with 32 DI, 24Vdc
SDI01A
SI/O module with 32 DI, 24Vdc,syncronous input
SDO01
SI/O module with 32 DO, 24Vdc
SPI01
SI/O module with 4 PI
SPO01
SI/O module with 4 PO
SRT01
SI/O module with 4 RTD
STC01
SI/O module with 8 TC
SAI06
SI/O module with 8 AI mV,V (Single)
SAO06
SI/O module with 8 AO (Single)
SLP01
SI/O module with 4 AI, MV, 2 AO, 3 DI ,4 DO
SLP02
SI/O module with 4 AI, PO, 2 AO, 3 DI ,4 DO
SLP03
SI/O module with 4 AI, MV, 2 AOv3 DI ,4 DO
SLP04
SI/O module with 4 AI, PO, 2 AO, 3 DI, 4 DO
SPI06
SI/O module with 4 PI (Single)
Hard address
In the case of the nv series, expresses the hardware location of main module,
I/O node, I/O unit, I/O module, and I/O point. Each has the following address
expression.
Name
Address expression
Description
Main Module
Main Slot No.
Slot no. in main unit
I/O Node
Node No.
I/O node no. unique for each interface
I/O Unit
Unit No.
I/O unit no. unique within a bus
I/O Module
Slot No.
Slot no. in I/O unit
I/O Point
Point No.
I/O Point No.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
49
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
In the case of the V series, expresses the hardware location of main module,
bus, I/O unit, I/O module, and I/O point. Each has the following address
expression.
Name
Address expression
Description
Main Module
Main Slot No.
Slot no. in main unit
Bus
Bus No.
Bus no. unique for each interface
I/O Unit
Unit No.
I/O unit no. unique within a bus
I/O Module
Slot No.
Slot no. in I/O unit
I/O Point
Point No.
I/O Point No.
Address expression range of nv series
The range of address for nv series is as follows:
Valid range
Address expression
Common
TC-net I/O
Parallel I/O
Serial I/O
Main Slot No.
0-Max
−
−
−
Node No.
3-Max
−
−
−
Unit No.
−
1
1-Max
1-Max
Slot No.
−
0-15
0-Max
1-Max
Point No.
−
0-Max
0-Max
1-Max
Address expression range of V series
The range of address for each station model is as follows:
[Large type (Model 3000)]
Valid range
Address expression
Common
Main Slot No.
50
6F8C1290
0-Max
Parallel I/O
5800 I/O
Serial I/O
−
−
−
Bus No.
−
0-Max
0-Max
1-Max
Unit No.
−
1-Max
1-Max
1-Max
Slot No.
−
0-Max
0-Max
1-Max
Point No.
−
0-Max
0-Max
1-Max
1.2
Hardware Model of nv Series & V Series
[Small type (Model 2000)]
Valid range
Address expression
Common
Main Slot No.
Parallel I/O
Serial I/O
−
−
0-Max
Bus No.
−
0-Max
1-Max
Unit No.
−
1-Max
1-Max
Slot No.
−
0-Max
1-Max
Point No.
−
0-Max
1-Max
[Very small type (Model 1000)]
Valid range
Address expression
Common
Main Slot No.
Serial I/O
−
0-Max (0 or 1)
Bus No.
−
1
Unit No.
−
1
Slot No.
−
0-15
Point No.
−
1-Max
Hardware address expression
In the tool, the location of main module, bus, I/O unit, and I/O module is
expressed with hardware address combination as follows.
{MM-BB-UU-SS}
MM: Main Slot No.
BB: Bus No. (In the case of the nv series, it is Node No.)
UU: Unit No.
SS: Slot No.
"**" appears where this does not apply.
The hardware address expression example is shown below.
• In case of main module with Main Slot No. = 3
{03-**-**-**}
• In case of bus with Main Slot No. = 1 and Bus No. = 0
{01-00-**-**}
• In case of I/O unit with Main Slot No. = 1, Bus No. = 2,
{01-02-05-**}
Unit No. = 5
• In case of I/O module with Main Slot No. = 1, Bus No. = 1, Unit No. = 3, Slot
No. = 8
{01-01-03-08}
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
51
Chapter 1
1.3
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
Software Configuration
System
Network (TC-net)
Network variables
Station
Station
Station variables
Station variables
Main module
Main module
Configuration
Main module
(TC-net)
Main module
Main module
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Task
Task
Task
Task
Controller
variables
Controller
variables
Controller
variables
Controller
variables
I/O variables
I/O variables
I/O module
PI/O
Main module
(TC-net )
I/O module
S20
PI/O
S20
Network (S20)
Network variables
Meanings of software elements
Task
Control program created by user
Global variable
Various registers, parameters, data in controller
I/O variable
Process I/O signal; S20, F10 and other I/O data
Station global variable
Variable used to send and receive data between controllers
System global variable
Scan data on scan communication LAN
Configuration
Hardware configuration information on main units, I/O, etc.
These elements vary in use and capacity depending on the type of hardware as described
on the next page.
52
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.1 Tasks
Task is a execution unit of user program on a controller, and is available in
several types different depending on the way of execution. A task has two or
more entry points, where a user program is registered to be executed. The
entry points are called Task Entries. The V-tool can create, save ,download,
and monitor control programs in units of task entry.
Controller
Scheduler
Task
Task entry
EV task
EV0
SS task
EV7
MyProgram
IP task
HS task
HS0
XPro_1
MS task
HS31
Tic_Fic
BG task
Types of tasks
Symbol
Name
Execution priority
Use
EV
Event task
1
Event task, Executing only once an
interval event, such as of power on and
I/O degeneration
SS
Ultra high speed
task
2
Scan execution type of the highest
priority in processing
IP
Interrupt task
3
Executing only once a PI/O interrupt,
such as of CCDI and PI
HS
High-speed scan
task
4
Scan execution type of the second
highest priority in processing
MS
Main scan task
5
Scan execution type of the third highest
priority in processing
BG
Background task
6
Scan execution type of the fourth highest
priority in processing
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
53
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.2 Task entries
Task entries of nv series
[type 1]
Controller name
EV
SS
IP
HS
MS
8
1
16
128
256
PU811
[type 2]
Controller name
PU821
EV
IP
HS
MS
8
16
128
512
Task entries of V series
[S controller]
Controller name
EV
SS
IP
HS
MS
BG
S3PU65
8
1
8
128
256
4
S3PU55
8
1
8
128
256
4
S3PU45
8
1
8
32
256
4
S3PU21
8
1
8
32
256
4
S3ST45
−
−
−
−
8
−
S2PU72
8
1
8
32
256
4
S2PU32
8
1
8
32
256
4
S2PU22
8
1
8
32
256
4
Controller name
EV
SS
IP
HS
MS
BG
L3PU21
16
−
32
128
256
4
L3PU11
8
1
8
32
256
4
L2PU22
16
−
32
128
256
4
L2PU12
8
1
8
8
64
1
L2PU11
8
1
8
8
64
1
L1PU12
−
−
−
−
8
−
L1PU11
−
−
−
−
8
−
LC512
−
−
−
−
8
−
LC511
−
−
−
−
8
−
[L controller]
Supplementary
• With the V tool, task entries are expressed as [EV7] and [MS0] using task symbols and
entry numbers. Entry numbers begin with 0.
54
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.3 Programs
Program organization
Parameters
VAR_INPUT
Trigger: Bool; (*Trigger Signal*)
END_VAR
Internal variables
VAR
Data part
MyStatus:
Bool; END_VAR
Code part
Trigger
XFlag
MyStatus
Program Codes
MyStatus
The program can first be divided into the data part and code part. The data
part consists of parameters and internal variables. A parameter is externally
given before calling the program as in the case of subroutine parameters of a
general high-level language, and is used for operation with its value (or
pointer) while the program is being executed. In this sense, the parameter may
sometimes be called an externally open interface. As the name indicates, the
internal variables are used only within the program, and will not be made open
to the outside.
Program name
A program name is given by user when adding a new program. The program
that already registered in Library can be also selected. For program naming,
see Identifier topic.
Program names easy for anyone to remember are recommended because
programs may be shared.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
55
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Types of variable declarations
The types of program variable declarations are shown below.
Classification
Parameter
Internal variable
Type of VAR**
Name
VAR_INPUT
END_VAR
Input parameter
VAR_IN_OUT
END_VAR
Input/output parameter
VAR_OUTPUT
END_VAR
Output parameter
VAR
END_VAR
Static variable (Static)
VAR CONSTANT
ENDVAR
Static (Static)
VAR_TEMP
END_VAR
Temporary variable (Temporary)
Difference between Parameters and External Variables
If program reads or writes external data via Parameters, it is not necessary to
edit the program codes to change the external variables.
However, if program reads or writes external data directly, you must edit
program codes to change the external variables. A program which does not
use any external variable at all has higher reusability and reallocatability
because it will not be affected by external variable declarations in any way. It
will be meaningless to look for this perfection with programs which are not
intended for reuse or reallocation. It is recommended that this should be taken
well into consideration in using programs.
Difference among three parameters
VAR_INPUT is a parameter whose value is referred to but not changed by the
program.
VAR_IN_OUT is a parameter whose value is referred to and changed by the
program.
VAR_OUTPUT is a parameter for simply changing by the program.
Difference among three internal variables
A static memory is provided for VAR in the program. The static memory can be
used for static operations because it retains the values even after program
execution. A temporary memory is provided for VAR_TEMP. This memory is
valid only while the program in question is being executed, so the values are
valid only during the period from calling the program to return. VAR
CONSTANT is a variable simply for reference, that is, it is a constant. It cannot
be changed by the program.
56
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
Function block invocation
A function block can be called from programs or other function blocks.
Because a function block has static internal variables as described later, the
declaration must be made in the static internal variable area in program which
calls the function block.
Program
Function Block TON
VAR
EmgTM:TON;
END_VAR
EmgTM
TON
IIN
Q
PT
ET
Function invocation
A function can be called from programs, fucntion blocks or another functions.
The function itself is non-static, so no internal variable declaration is necessary.
Program
Function ADD_INT :INT
VAR
END_VAR
ADD_INT
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
57
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.4 Function blocks
Function block organization
Data part
Parameters
Internal variables
VAR_INPUT
Trigger
Xflag
END_VAR
:Bool; (*Trigger Signal*)
:Bool;
VAR
MyStatus: Bool; END VAR
Code part
Trigger
XFlag
MyStatus
Program Codes
MyStatus
The function block can first be divided into the data part and code part. The
data part consists of parameters and internal variables. A parameter is
externally given before calling the function block as in the case of subroutine
parameters of a general high-level language, and is used for operation with its
value (or pointer) while the function block is being executed. In this sense, the
parameter may sometimes be called an externally open interface. As the name
indicates, the internal variables are used only within the function block, and will
not be made open to the outside.
Function block name
A function block name is given by user when adding a new function block. The
function block that already registered in Library can be also selected. For
function block naming, see Identifier topic.
Function block names easy for anyone to remember are recommended
because function blocks may be shared.
58
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
Types of variable declarations
The types of function block variable declarations are shown below.
Classification
Parameter
Internal variable
Type of VAR**
Name
VAR_INPUT
END_VAR
Input parameter
VAR_IN_OUT
END_VAR
Input/output parameter
VAR_OUTPUT
END_VAR
Output parameter
VAR
END_VAR
Static variable (Static)
VAR CONSTANT
END_VAR
Static (Static)
VAR_TEMP
END_VAR
Temporary variable (Temporary)
Difference between parameter and external variables
If function block reads or writes external data via Parameters, it is not
necessary to edit the function block codes to change the external variables.
However, if function block reads or writes external data directly, you must edit
function block codes to change the external variables. A function block which
does not use any external variable at all has higher reusability and
reallocatability because it will not be affected by external variable declarations
in any way. It will be meaningless to look for this perfection with function
blocks which are not intended for reuse or reallocation. It is recommended that
this should be taken well into consideration in using function blocks.
Difference among three parameters
VAR_INPUT is a parameter whose value is referred to by the function block but
not changed by the function block.
VAR_IN_OUT is a parameter whose value is referred to and changed by the
function block.
VAR_OUTPUT is a parameter for simply changing by the function block.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
59
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Parameters versus graphic symbols
If a parameter is properly declared, the graphic symbol of the function block is
automatically drawn.
Program (PRG)
Function block (FBK) = XBLK
VAR
BLK_1:XBLK;
END_VAR
VAR_INPUT
IN:INT;
CN:INT;
END_VAR
VAR_IN_OUT
TBL:Array[0..255] of BOOL;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
Q:BOOL;
END_VAR
BLK_1
XBLK
IN
Q
CN
TBL
TBL
VAR_INPUT (input parameter), VAR_IN_OUT (input/output parameter), and
VAR_OUTPUT (output parameter) are graphically allocated as shown below.
They are allocated in the order of declarations within each parameter group.
The total of input/output points must not exceed 15.
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
VAR_IN_OUT
Difference among three internal variables
A static memory is provided for VAR in the function block. The static memory
can be used for static operations because it retains the values even after
function block execution.
A temporary memory is provided for VAR_TEMP. This memory is valid only
while the function block in question is being executed, so the values are valid
only during the period from calling the function block to return. VAR
CONSTANT is a variable simply for reference, that is, it is a constant. It cannot
be changed while the function block is being executed.
60
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.5 Functions
Function organization
Data part
Function Variable
Parameters
Parameters
FUNCTION XProc
:Bool VAR_INPUT
Trigger
Xflag
END VAR
:Bool; (*Trigger Signal*)
:Bool;
Internal variables
VAR
MyStatus: Bool; Code part
END VAR
Trigger
XFlag
XProc
Program Codes
MyStatus
The function can first be divided into the data part and code part. The data part
consists of a function variable, parameters, and internal variables. Function
variable is a return value resulting from an operation. Function name itself is a
variable, and returns the result of operating a parameter as a variable. A
parameter is externally given before calling the function as in the case of
subroutine parameters of a general high-level language, and is used for
operation with its value (or pointer) while the function is being executed. In this
sense, the parameter may sometimes be called an externally open interface.
As the name indicates ,internal variables are used only within a function , and
will not be made open to the outside.
Function name
A function name is given by user when adding a new function. The function
that already registered in Library can be also selected. For function naming,
see Identifier topic.
Function names easy for anyone to remember are recommended because
functions may be shared.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
61
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Types of variable declarations
The types of function variable declarations are shown below.
Classification
Type of VAR**
Name
Function
FUNCTION
END_FUNCTION
Function variable
Parameter
VAR_INPUT
END_VAR
Input parameter
VAR_IN_OUT
END_VAR
Input/output parameter
VAR_OUTPUT
END_VAR
Output parameter
VAR
END_VAR
Temporary variable (Temporary)
Internal variable
Characteristics of function
Function is used for static-free operation. Therefore, only a temporary memory
is allocated to internal variables. Function is suited to static-free operations
which return one function value. Generally, the function is better than the
program and function block in terms of memory consumption and execution
speed.
Difference among three parameters
VAR_INPUT is a parameter whose value is referred to by the function but not
changed by the function.
VAR_IN_OUT is a parameter whose value is referred to and changed by the
function.
VAR_OUTPUT is a parameter for simply changing by the function.
62
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
Parameters versus graphic symbols
If a parameter is properly declared, the graphic symbol of Function is
automatically drawn.
Program (PRG)
Function (FUN) = XFUN : INT;
VAR
VAR_INPUT
IN:INT;
CN:INT;
END_VAR
VAR_IN_OUT
TBL:Array[0..255] of BOOL;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
Q:BOOL;
END_VAR
END_VAR
XFUN
IN
CN
Q
TBL
TBL
VAR_INPUT (input parameter), VAR_IN_OUT (input/output parameter),
VAR_OUTPUT (output parameter) and FUNCTION are graphically allocated as
shown below. They are allocated in the order of declarations within each
parameter group. The total of input/output points must not exceed 15.
Remember that, different from Function Block, Function name itself is a
function variable and has a data type.
FUNCTION
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
VAR_IN_OUT
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
63
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Functions which permit change in the number of input
parameters
Some of the standard functions available permit changing the number of input
parameters. ADD and AND, for example. With these functions, the number of
input parameters can be changed within the range of 2 to 15 for purposes of
convenience in use. Such functions can be identified by the absence of input
parameter name. Some of the standard functions are valid as such, and
cannot be made by the user.
ADD_**
ADD_**
No
parameter
name
Function execution control
The ordinary function always executes function operation.
ADD_INT
A normal value is output if the operation is normal.
An error value is output is if the operation is an error.
The input parameter EN and output parameter ENO are special parameters for
executing function operation only when EN is 1 (True). They are called
functions with EN/ENO.
ADD_INT
EN
ENO
Function operation is executed when the input parameter EN is 1 (True).
When the operation is normal, the output parameter ENO is 1 (True) and
a normal value is output.
If the operation is an error, the output parameter ENO is 0 (False) and an
error value is output.
No function operation is executed when the input parameter EN is 0
(False).
It makes the output parameter ENO 0 (False) and the default value is
output.
Supplementary
• Error values and default values vary from function to function. For details, see the
section on instructions.
64
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
Function output and ST/SET instruction
The operation of storing a function output in a variable using the ST (store) or
SET (set) instruction is as follows:
1) Connecting ST instruction to an ordinary function
A normal value or an error value is stored in the variable (OutVar).
ADD_INT
OutVar
ST
2) Connecting SET instruction to an ordinary function
OutVAR is constant. Do not use this way.
ADD_INT
OutVar
ST
3) Connecting ST instruction to a function with EN or ENO
A normal value, an error value, or a default value is stored in the variable
(OutVar).
ADD_INT
EN
ENO
OutVar
ST
4) Connecting SET instruction to a function with EN or ENO
The variable (OutVar) is refreshed only when EN is 1 (True). Therefore a
normal value or an error value is output to the variable (OutVar).
ADD_INT
EN
ENO
OutVar
SET
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
65
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
To make it a variable to be refreshed by normal values only, use the ENO
status.
ADD_INT
EN
ENO
Normal
Normal
VarX
VarX
SET
OutVar
SET
Function multiple connection and execution control
Use of a function with EN/ENO has the advantage of safe operation and easy
identification of functions with an operation error. In the following example, only
normal values are stored in the final operation result and the OFF display of the
EN line makes it easy to locate where an error is.
Enable
ADD_*
MUL_*
SUB_*
SIN
EN ENO
EN ENO
EN ENO
EN ENO
Normal
Work
Normal
Work
Result
SET
1.3.6 Variables and types
Variables are registered in the spread-sheet of this tool. So the form of
variables declaration that is described in this section is not always used. It is
explained as a basic knowledge.
Form of variable declaration
Generally, variables are declared in the form shown below.
{VAR**}
{Variable name} {:} {Data type} {;}
{Variable name} {:} {Data type} {;}
{Variable name} {:} {Data type} {;}
{Variable name} {:} {Data type} {;}
{END_VAR}
66
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
{ } is used simply for purposes of explanation, and is not necessary. {:}
separates the variable name from the data type. {;} signifies the end of a
variable declaration. Space, Tab, Enter may be inserted as desired before and
after {variable name}, {data type}, {:}, {;}. For ease of reading, the form may
be indented using Tab. {VAR**} varies depending on the program module and
the type of variable. See the Topics "Program," "Function Block," "Function,"
and "Global Variable."
Variable name
For the naming of variables, see the Topic "Identifiers." It is recommended that
variables be so named that they are easy for anyone to remember.
Example 1:
Example 2:
Example 3:
Example 4:
120ABC
AB_C
ab_C
Function
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
The first character is not an English letter.
Examples 2 and 3 are not taken as different.
FUNCTION is a keyword (reserved term) of
IEC61131-3.
Variable comment
A comment may be added to a variable. In a variable declaration, the string
enclosed in (*,*) is taken as a comment.
VAR
Trigger :Bool ; (*Trigger signal*)
END_VAR
Write a comment for a variable after {;}. A comment must not be longer than
50 bytes (n quad 1 byte; m quad 2 bytes). (*,*) cannot be nested. A variable
comment can be displayed and printed in the program circuit after compiling.
Data type name
For the naming of variables, see the Topic "Identifiers." In the arrays described
later, 'ARRAY [ ]OF' cannot be included in the specified number of
characters.
Example 1:
Example 2:
Example 3:
Example 4:
INT
ARRAY[0..255] OF INT
ARRAY[0..128] OF type X
0typeUSER
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid 0 type USER runs counter to
the identifier rules.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
67
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Data types
The data types supported by the nv series and the V series are as shown in the
table below.
Major
Minor
classification classification
Elementary
data types
Keyword
Data type
Bit
Word
Range of values
INT
Integer
16
1
-32768 to 32767
UINT
Integer without
sign
16
1
0 to 65535
DINT
Double integer
32
2
-2147483648 to 2147483647
REAL
Real
32
2
-3.402823E38 to
-1.401298E-45
1.401298E-45 to 3.402823E38
BOOL
BOOL
1
−
0 (False), 1 (True)
WORD
Bit line 16 in
length
16
1
0000h to FFFFh
DWORD
Bit line 32 in
length
32
1
00000000h to FFFFFFFFh
String
STRING
Variable length 16 +
string
String
Time
TIME
Continuous
time
32
2
-2147483648 to 2147483647
(ms)
(596h31m23s647ms)
DATE
(Abbreviated
to D)
Date
32
2
1998-01-01 to 2097-12-31
TIME_OF_DAY Time
(Abbreviated
to TOD)
32
2
00:00:00.000 to 23:59:59.999
(Note)
1998-01-01-00:00:00.000 to
2097-12-31-23:59:59.999
(Note)
Numeric
value
Bit line
1+
String
64 characters maximum
DATE_AND_
TIME
(Abbreviated
to DT)
Date and time
64
4
PTR
Pointer
−
−
−
PTRB
Bit pointer
−
−
−
ARRAY [*..*]
OF
Array
−
−
−
Structure
Any
Structure
−
−
−
Mixed
Any
Combination of
array and
structure
−
−
−
Derived data Array
types
Supplementary
• Valid range is shown for the time. Internal range differs from it. Please use in valid
range.
68
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
How to declare array
The array of any data type can be declared. Use ARRAY[ ]OF to declare an
array. Specify the lower and upper limits of a subscript in the bracket [ ],
separating them with {..}.
Example: VAR
MyTable: ARRAY [0..255] OF INT;
(*The array MyTable is declared using the integer
element 256.*)
END_VAR
Restrictions on array declaration
Array name
Same as restrictions on variable names
Maximum number of subscripts
One subscript only
Number of elements
1-65536
Subscript range
0-65535
Subscript lower limit
0 fixed
Generating method
Static array whose size is determined in the design process
Supplementary
• Array size is subject to further restriction with the memory size at the location of
variable declaration (program, function, function, global variable, etc.).
Array variable literals
Add a subscript to an array-declared variable in using it. A subscript must be a
constant within the subscript range or an index variable. Encode it with bracket
[ ].
Example: MyTable[0]
MyTable[255]
MyTable[XI]
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
69
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Index variable
Index variables are exclusive to qualifying indices. General variables cannot be
used as array subscripts.
Index variable
Data type
XI
DINT
XJ
DINT
XK
DINT
XL
DINT
XM
DINT
XN
DINT
XP
DINT
XQ
DINT
1.3.7 Derived types
If the user wishes to create a data type different from the elementary types or
an array thereof, the user must define his or her own data type in Library.
Type declaration
Generally, data type declarations are defined as follows:
TYPE
{Data type name}{:}{Data type or structure serving as base}{;}
{Data type name}{:}{Data type or structure serving as base}{;}
{Data type name}{:}{Data type or structure serving as base}{;}
--END_TYPE
Example 1: This example defines an elementary type as an own data type.
TYPE
FLOAT:
BIT:
END_TYPE
70
6F8C1290
REAL;
BOOL;
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
Example 2: This example defines an elementary type array as an own data
type.
TYPE
typeTable:Array[0..255] of INT;
typeArray:Array[0..7] of BOOL;
END_TYPE
Example 3: In this example, the own data types typeMOTOR, type X are
defined using a structure. STRUCT-END_STRUCT is called a
structure, used to combine two or more types into a single type.
TYPE
typeX:
typeMOTOR:
STRUCT
B
:Array[0..15] Of BOOL;
END_STRUCT;
STRUCT
RUN
:BOOL;
RUNNING :BOOL;
OL
:BOOL;
SET
:DINT;
FB
:DINT;
STATUS :Array[0..15] Of BOOL;
END_STRUCT;
END_TYPE
Example 4: Not only elementary types and arrays but also own-defined types
can be used to serve as base.
TYPE
typeX:
typeMOTOR:
STRUCT
B
:Array[0..15] Of BOOL;
END_STRUCT;
STRUCT
RUN
:BOOL;
RUNNING :BOOL;
OL
:BOOL;
SET
:DINT;
FB
:DINT;
STATUS :typeX;
END_STRUCT;
END_TYPE
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
71
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Inhibiting looped reference
In the following declaration, typeX and typeMOTOR are are dependent on each
other so that data type size and allocation cannot be determined. This kind of
data type having looped reference cannot be declared.
TYPE
typeX:
typeMOTOR:
STRUCT
B
:Array[0..15] Of typeMOTOR;
END_STRUCT;
STRUCT
RUN
:BOOL;
RUNNING :BOOL;
OL
:BOOL ;
SET
:DINT;
FB
:DINT;
STATUS :typeX;
END_STRUCT;
END_TYPE
Declaration and literals of variable using own data type
Shown below are examples of variable declarations using the types defined in
Examples 1 to 4 and of variable literals in the program.
No.
72
6F8C1290
Example of variable declaration
Example of variable literals
1
VAR
X:FLOAT;
Y:Array[0..255] of BIT;
END_VAR
X
Y[255]
Y[XP]
2
VAR
X:typeTable;
Y:typeArray;
END_VAR
X[0]
Y[XJ]
3
VAR
X:typeX;
Motor:Array[0..15] Of typeMotor;
END_VAR
X.B[15]
Motor[1].SET
Motor[XK].STATUS[XJ]
4
VAR
X:typeX;
Motor:Array[0..15] Of typeMotor;
END_VAR
X.B[15]
Motor[1].SET
Motor[XK].STATUS.B[XJ]
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.8 Standard types
The nv series and the V series has several standard data declaration. Their
contents and uses are as follows:
Common
Data type
Use
TYPE_ACT
Used in ACTION instruction of SFC
TYPE_ACT_T
Used in ACTION instruction of SFC
TYPE_STEP
Used in STEP instruction of SFC
type16BITS
Used in register variable declaration
TypeSTN_CNF
Used in communication function block
TypeUDP_OPEN
Used in communication function block (UDP)
TypeUDP_SEND_BC
Used in communication function block (UDP)
TypeUDP_RCV_BC
Used in communication function block (UDP)
TypeUDP_CLOSE
Used in communication function block (UDP)
TypeTCP_OPEN
Used in communication function block (TCP)
TypeTCP_SEND
Used in communication function block (TCP)
TypeTCP_RCV
Used in communication function block (TCP)
TypeTCP_CLOSE
Used in communication function block (TCP)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
73
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
L controller (MCS type of V series)
Data type
74
6F8C1290
Use
typeC_DATA
Data type of C: counter
typeC_PARA
Data type of C: counter
typeF_DATA
Data type of F: communication data (real)
typeF_PARA
Data type of F: communication data (real)
typeGD_DATA
Data type of GD: guidance
TypeHEAD
DL file header
typeI_DATA
Data type of I: communication data (integer)
typeI_PARA
Data type of I: communication data (integer)
typeLP_DATA
Data type of LP: regulator
typeLP_PARA
Data type of LP: regulator
typeP_RARA
Data type of P: polynomial line
typePB_DATA
Data type of PB: pushbutton
typePB_PARA
Data type of PB: pushbutton
typePV_DATA
Data type of PV: indicator
typePV_PARA
Data type of PV: indicator
typeSQ_DATA
Data type of SQ: sequence
typeSQ_PARA
Data type of SQ: sequence
typeT_DATA
Data type of T: timer
typeT_PARA
Data type of T: timer
typeVB_DATA
Data type of VB: batch interface
TypeXY
Data type of P: polynomial line
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
L controller (DS type of V series) and type 2 (nv series)
Data type
Use
TypeALIT_32BITS
Data type of 32 bit alarm array
TypeALM_MASK_BIT
Data type of FN user system alarm mask bit (Area)
TypeC_DATA_DS
Data type of C: counter
TypeC_PARA_DS
Data type of C: counter
TypeDB_PARA_DS
Data type of DB: Data Block TAG
TypeEXST_32BITS
Data type of 32 bit mask array
TypeG_ALM_BIT_N
Data type of FN user system alarm error bit
TypeG_MASK_BIT
Data type of FN user system alarm mask bit
TypeHEAD_DS
Data type of HEAD: Header
TypeLP_DATA_DS
Data type of LP: Loop TAG
TypeLP_PARA_DS
Data type of LP: Loop TAG
TypeP_PARA_DS
Data type of P: Polynomial Line Table
TypePB_DATA_DS
Data type of PB: Push Button TAG
TypePB_PARA_DS
Data type of PB: Push Button TAG
TypePV_DATA_DS
Data type of PV: Indicator TAG
TypePV_PARA_DS
Data type of PV: Indicator TAG
TypeRTT_HEAD_DS
Data type of RTT: Real time trend
TypeRTT_PARA_DS
Data type of RTT: Real time trend
TypeSQ_DATA_DS
Data type of SQ: Sequence TAG
TypeSQ_PARA_DS
Data type of SQ: Sequence TAG
TypeT_DATA_DS
Data type of T: timer
TypeT_PARA_DS
Data type of T: timer
TypeTC_DATA_DS
Data type of TC: Timer TAG
TypeTC_PARA_DS
Data type of TC: Timer TAG
Instrumention function block
Data type
Use
TypeDCL_PARA
Data type of DCL (Double Cross Limit) Instruction
TypeFF_PARA
Data type of FF (Feed Forward) Instruction
S controller of V series
Data type
Use
TypePID3_LP_P
Data type of PID3 Instruction
TypePID3_PV_D
Data type of PID3 Instruction
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
75
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.9 Identifiers
The program names, function block names, function names, variable names,
and data type names that are defined by the user are called by the general
term identifier.
Restrictions on identifiers
Identifiers must satisfy all the conditions in the table below.
Conditions
Description
Usable
characters
Alphabetic letters from A to Z, numerals from 0 to 9, underscored (_) ASCII
characters; both uppercase and lowercase alphabetic letters are
permissible.
First character
Alphabetic letter only
String length
1 to 20 characters except for I/O variable names whose string length must
not exceed 19 characters.
Rules on
identification
No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase.
Example : typeX and TYPEX are taken as the same.
Do not use consecutive underscores.
Non-use of
reserved terms
Do not use the reserved terms shown in the table below as identifiers.
Reserved terms
Do not use identifiers identical with the following terms. These terms are
reserved for IEC61131-3 or the V series.
ACTION, END_ACTION
ARRAY, OF
AT
CASE,OF, ELSE,END_CASE
CONFIGURATION, END_CONFIGURATION
CONSTANT
BOOL,SINT,INT,DINT,LINT,USINT,UINT,UDINT,ULINT,REAL,LREAL,TIME,DATE,TIME_OF_DAY,
TOD,DATE_AND_TIME,DT,STRING,BYTE,WORD,DWORD,LWORD,WSTRING
EN,ENO
EXIT
FALSE
F_EDGE
FOR,TO, BY, DO, END_FOR
FUNCTION, END_FUNCTION
76
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
FUNCTION_BLOCK, END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
IF,THEN,ELSEIF,ELSE,END_IF
INITIAL_STEP, END_STEP
NOT, MOD, AND, XOR, OR
PROGRAM, WITH
PROGRAM, END_PROGRAM
R_EDIGE
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE
REPEAT, UNTIL, END_REPEAT
RESOURCE, ON, END_RESOURCE
RETAIN
RETURN
STEP, END_STEP
STRUCT,END_STRUCT
TASK
TRANSITION, FROM, TO, END_TRANSITION
TRUE
TYPE, END_TYPE
VAR, END_VAR
VAR_INPUT, END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT, END_VAR
VAR_IN_OUT, END_VAR
VAR_EXTERNAL, END_VAR
VAR_ACCESS, END_VAR
VAR_GLOBAL, END_VAR
WHILE, DO, END_WHILE
WITH
XI,XJ,XK,XL,XM,XN,XP,XQ
(Existing program names)
(Existing function block names)
(Existing function names)
(Existing variable names)
(Existing data type names)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
77
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.10 Programming languages
Programming Languages of the nv series and the V Series
The programming languages supported by the controllers of the nv series and
the V series are as follows:
1) Ladder Diagram (LD)
2) Function Block Diagram (FBD)
3) Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
4) Structured Text (ST)
Use these programming languages to represent the program codes of
programs, functions, or function blocks.
Supplementary
• For individual instructions, see the section on instructions.
78
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.11 Ladder diagram (LD)
The ladder diagram (LD) is a graphic language for simulating a relay control
circuit consisting of contacts and coils. In addition to the contacts and coils, it
consists of such elements as left power rail, horizontal link, right power rail,
vertical link, variable, immediate, function block, function, variable comment,
and free comment. Since a power supply is connected between the two power
rails to operate the relay control circuit, the data flow through it is called power
flow. Execution order is automatically determined on the basis of interpretation
that the power flows basically from left to right and from to bottom.
Program Code
Left power
rail
Horizontal link
Right power
rail
OpenPB
ClosePB
Open
<1>
ClosePB
<2>
OpenPB
<3>
Close
<4>
Open
<5>
Close
<7>
OpenMem
<9>
<8>
Close
<10>
Vertical link
Open
CloseMem
<13>
<14>
Contact
Opened
<15>
<16>
Coil
tmOpen
<20>
<21>
Opened
T#5s
<22>
Closed
<25>
Opened
<26>
Closed
<27>
<28>
Free comment
OpenAlart
Open alarm output
TON <18>
<19>
T#5s
<17>
Closed
tmClose
CloseMe
Variable comment
Close memory
<11>
CloseMem
<12>
OpenMem
<6>
OpenMem
Variable
TON
CloseAlart
Close alert output
<23>
Immediate
tmLS
<24>
LSAlart
TON <30>
<31>
Open/close alert
t t
T#5s
<29>
Function or function block
Supplementary
• Power flow can be monitored using the program editor described later.
• The execution order automatically determined can be viewed with the program editor
described later.
• The execution order of the above example is shown in numbers in brackets <>.
• For individual instructions, see the section on instructions.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
79
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.12 Function block diagram (FBD)
The function block diagram (FBD) is a graphic language for processing signals
and data that use functions and function blocks. In addition to the functions
and function blocks, it consists of a horizontal link, vertical link, load, store, set,
variable, immediate, variable comment, and free comment. Execution order is
automatically determined on the basis of interpretation that the power flows
basically from left to right and from to bottom.
Program Code
Free comment
Variable comment
Oil level alarm
Oil level
Horizontal link
Oil_level
LD
Level alert
RS_1
GE_REAL
<1>
<3>
LevelH
S
RS
Level_Alart
Q
<9> ST <10>
R1
<2>
<5>
Oil_level
SUB_REAL
<7> LD
<4>
LE_REAL
<8>
Function block
DeadBand
<6>
Variable
Function
Vertical link
Supplementary
• Data flow can be monitored using the program editor described later.
• The execution order automatically determined can be viewed with the program editor
described later.
• The execution order of the above example is shown in numbers in brackets <>.
80
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.13 Sequential function chart (SFC)
The sequential function chart (SFC) is a graphical element for sequential
operation. It consists of an initial step, step, transition, step link. conditional
branch line, parallel execution line, variable, variable comment, and free
comment. Transition conditions can be described by mixed use of the LD and
FBD languages.
Program code
Free comment
This is the sequence of the conveyor line to the
storage tank T-311.
Initial step
Conditional
branch line
Step jump
Parallel execution line
Step link
Transition
Step
Variable comment
X1 selecting signal
X1
TON
Variable
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
81
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.14 Structured text (ST)
Structured Text (ST) is a structured text language similar to PASCAL or C.
ST consists of variables, data types, operators, assignment, IF, CASE, FOR,
WHILE, REPEAT and Function call statement shown as follows.
This function is not supported in Engineering tool 2.
Program Code
(* Initialize *)
XO[0]:=XOUT;
XU[0]:=XIN;
XOUT:=B[0]*XIN;
Assignment
(* Output *)
(* Input *)
Comment
IF
(* condition *)
IF RUN THEN
FOR XI:=M TO 0 BY -1 DO
XOUT:=XOUT+A[XI]*XO[XI];
FOR
REPEAT
A[XJ]:=A[XJ]+XO[XI];
UNTIL A[XJ]<100
END_REPEAT;
END_FOR;
ELSE
WHILE XIN<100 DO
XOUT:=XOUT+A[XI];
IF XOUT>200 THEN
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_WHILE;
END_IF;
CASE XK OF
0..9:
(* Function *)
XOUT:=FUN_XOUT(XIN,XK);
10,20:
(* Function Block *)
FBK_XIN_1(XIN,XK);
XOUT:=FBK_XIN_1.OUT;
END_CASE;
Operator
WHILE
EXIT
CASE
Function Call
Function Block Call
<Variables and Data types>
See [1.3.6 Variables and Types] section about variables and data types used
in ST.
'TRUE' (= 1) and 'FALSE' (= 0) can be used as BOOL type constant.
82
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
<Sentence Structures>
Sentence structures of ST are shown as follows.
Statement
Sentence structure
Note
Assignment
variable := expression ;
<expression> is the combination of
variables, constants, operators and
function calls.
Function call
variable := FUN_NAME(expression, ---);
FUN_NAME(expression, ---);
<FUN_NAME> is a Function name.
Function
Block call
FBK_INSTANSE_NAME(expression, ---);
<FBK_INSTANSE_NAME> is an
instance variable of Function Block.
IF
IF bool_expression THEN
statement
ELSEIF bool_expression THEN
statement
ELSE
statement
END_IF;
<bool_expression> is a boolean
type expression.
<statement> consists of
Assignment, Function call,
Function Block call
or the other structured statement.
CASE
CASE index OF
data :
<Index> is a index variable.
<data> is an integer type constant.
statement
data , data :
statement
data .. data:
statement
ELSE
statement
END_CASE;
FOR
FOR Index := min TO max BY step DO
statement
END_FOR ;
WHILE
WHILE bool_expression DO
statement
END_WHILE;
REPEAT
REPEAT
statement
UNTIL bool_expression
END_WHILE ;
EXIT
EXIT ;
RETURN
RETURN;
<min>, <max>, <step> is a
integer type expression.
EXIT statement should be in loop of
FOR, WHILE, REPEAT.
Note: See [Instruction Manual] document about the executing operations.
See [1.3.6 Variables and Types] section about index variables.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
83
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Supplementary
• In Function or Function Block call statement, parameters of VAR_INOUT and
VAR_OUTPUT needs to be set as parameters of VAR_INPUT. And also Function return
which data size exceeds 4 bytes needs to be done.
Example 1:
-
<IN>, <CN> are parameters of VAR_INPUT.
<TBL> is a parameter of VAR_INOUT.
<XFUN> is Function return which data size exceeds 4bytes.
<Q> is a parameter of VAR_OUTPUT.
• In this case the Function call statement should be described as follows.
XFUN ( INTX, UINTX, STRX, REALX, ARYX ) ;
• Parameter order of Function needs to be follows.
1: VAR_INPUT
2: VAR_INOUT
3: VAR_OUTPUT
4: FUNCTION which data size exceeds 4bytes
Example 2:
- <IN>, <CN> are parameters of VAR_INPUT.
- <TBL> is a parameter of VAR_INOUT.
- <Q> is a parameter of VAR_OUTPUT.
• In this case the Function Block call statement should be described as follows.
BLK_1 (INTX, UINTX, STRX, ARYX) ;
• Parameter order of Function needs to be follows.
1: VAR_INPUT
2: VAR_INOUT
3: VAR_OUTPUT
84
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
<Operators>
The following operators can be used in ST.
Operator
Meaning
Priority
(,)
Parenthesis
1
NOT, to
Negation
2
**
Exponetiation
3
*
Multiplication
4
/
Division
4
MOD
Modulo
4
+
Addition
5
-
Subtraction
5
<, >, <=, >=
Comparison
6
=, <>
Equality, Inequality
7
AND, &
Boolean AND
8
XOR
Boolean Exclusive OR
9
OR
Boolean OR
10
Example 1: XO := A * B + (C - D) / E ;
This execution order is shown as follows.
(1): A * B
(2): C - D
(3): (2) / E
(4): (1) + (3)
(5): XO := (4)
Example 2: IF A >= 0 AND B < 100 THEN
This execution order is shown as follows.
(1): A >= 0
(2): B < 100
(3): (1) AND (2)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
85
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
1.3.15 Specification of graphical languages
<Restrictions on Linking LD and FBD Languages>
1) Links cannot be crossed.
SUB_INT
SUB_INT
ADD_INT
2) Links cannot be broken.
3) Links cannot be shorted.
4) Links cannot be looped.
AND
OR
5) Different data types cannot be connected.
IntegerX
SUB_INT
SIN
RealX
ST
LD
6) Links cannot be wired except for the BOOL type.
SUB_INT
SUB_INT
86
6F8C1290
IntegerY
ADD_INT
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
7) Links cannot branch a data type of over 4 bytes.
StringX
LEFT
StringY
StringZ
Supplementary
• Data types of over 4 bytes include DATE_AND_TIME (DT), STRING, PTR, PTRB, and
all other derived types.
8) Functions require correct connection of all input and output terminals.
X1
ADD
X2
9) Function blocks require correct connection of all input/output terminals
except for output parameters for data types of 4 bytes or less.
X1
FBX
IN1 TBL
X2
IN2
Supplementary
• Data types of 4 bytes or less include BOOL, INT, DINT, UINT, REAL, WORD, DWORD,
TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY (TOD).
10) Coil cannot be closed in the links.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
87
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<SET Instruction Restrictions>
The SET instruction must have a preceding instruction pair (GATE instruction
or EN/ENo Function) in the same linking circuit.
X1
C1
LD
Y1
Q1
EN
SET
ENO
ADD_INT
D1
SET
GATE and SET instruction pair
EN/ENO Fun and SET instruction pair
LD
ST
LD
SET
No instruction paried with SET
LD
ST
LD
SET
Cannot branch or join before SET
ST
LD
SET
SET
LD
SET
SET
EN
ST
ENO
ADD_INT
Cannot branch or join before SET
EN
SET
ENO
ADD_INT
SET
Cannot branch or join
before SET
SET
ADD_INT
INC_INT
EN ENO
SET
No instruction paried with
SET
SET
V
V
SET
TON_1
TON
No instruction paried with
SET
SET
TINZ_WORD
EN
ENO
SET
88
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
<Restrictions on SFC>
1) SFC can be used only in programs, function blocks, and user-defined
ACTIONs, not in FUNCTIONs.
Function
2) SFC may have only one initial step, not any more, in a program, a function
block and a user-defined ACTION.
Program
FB_1
User-defined ACTION
FB
Function block
3) A program and the user-defined ACTION that is included in it cannot use
the same step.
Program
S1
User-defined ACTION
S1
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
89
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
4) A function block and the user-defined ACTION that is included in it cannot
use the same step.
Function block
S1
User defined ACTION
S1
5) Whichever route of sequence SFC may pass, it must terminate in the order
of step - transition - --- --- step - transition - step.
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
6) A conditional branch line must branch between step and transition.
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S0
90
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
7) A conditional wired-OR line must be wired (…) between the transition and
step.
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
8) A parallel branch line must branch between transition and step. There must
be only transition to be shared by the subsequent steps.
S0
S1
S2
S3
9) A parallel wired-OR line must be connected between step and transition.
There must be only transition to be shared by the subsequent steps.
S0
S1
S2
S3
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
91
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
10) A parallel execution line cannot coexist with other execution line.
S0
S1
S2
S4
S3
11) A parallel branch line and parallel wired-OR line must exist as a pair, and be
correctly nested.
S0
S1
S4
S2
S3
12) A step jump destination must be an existing step.
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S0
92
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
13) Conditional branch, wired-OR, and step jump are limited within a serial line
of the same level. Branch or jump to a serial line of higher or lower level is
not allowed.
S0
S2
S1
S4
S3
S2
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
93
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
< SFC Example >
Program
S1
S10
S1
S10
S1
Supplementary
• If SFC has many steps, SFC may be drawn divided using step jump as shown in the
figure above.
94
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.16 Graphical statements
<What are Statements?>
A graphical statement is an instruction, such as an IF statement and FOR
statement of a high-level language, for processing conditional branch and
repeat.
Graphical statements supported by the V series are as follows:
Graphical statement
Instruction symbol
IF statement
[IF], [THEN], [ELSE], [ELSEIF], [END_IF]
CASE statement
[CASE], [:], [.. :], [,], [.. ,], [ELSE], [END_CASE]
FOR statement
[FOR_DO], [EXIT], [END_FOR]
WHILE statement
[WHILE], [DO], [EXIT], [END_WHILE]
REPEAT statement
[REPEAT], [EXIT], [UNTIL], [END_REPEAT]
RETURN instruction
----<RETURN>
Jump instruction
---->>Label Label:
Bracket instruction
----[,
Jump control instruction
----[JCS]----||, ----[JCR]---||
Master control instruction
----[MCS]----||, ----[MCR]---||
]----||
Supplementary
• Page delimiter is not a control statement, but is similar in some respects to others as an
instruction symbol. It is explained in the final part of this section.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
95
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<Nesting Restrictions>
1) IF, CASE, FOR, WHILE, and REPEAT instructions can be nested within each
other any number of times.
2) Bracket instructions and jump control instructions can be nested within
each other any number of times.
3) Master control instruction cannot be nested.
4) The following restrictions apply when using statement type instructions
such as IF, CASE, FOR, WHILE, and REPEAT and network type instructions
such as bracket, jump control, and master control.
IF
THEN
Network type instruction can be nested within statement
type instruction
END_IF
IF
THEN
END_IF
96
6F8C1290
Network type instruction cannot be nested within statement
type instruction
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
<IF Statement>
Program
IF
{Condition_1}
<Condition_1>
No
{Action_1}
<Condition_2>
No
THEN
ELSEIF
{Condition_2}
Yes
Yes
[Action_1]
[Action_2]
[Action_Else]
THEN
{Action_2}
ELSE
{Action_Else}
END_IF
• An IF statement controls branch destinations using a (Condition) BOOL
value.
• A circuit starting with the line next to IF, ELSEIF (Condition_1, Condition_2
in the figure above), a branch destination is determined by evaluating the
last BOOL output (example: coil).
• An IF statement cannot have another instruction symbol on a line which
has an instruction symbol.
• The {Action} part of an IF statement can be nested with other control
statement. In one nest of an IF statement, IF, END_IF must be one in any
case. Others may be omitted as appropriate.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
97
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<CASE Statement>
Program
Yes
< Index=Value_0 >
No
CASE
{Index}
< Index>=Value_0
And
Index<=Value_2 >
:
{Value_0}
[Action_0]
Yes
[Action_1]
{Action_0}
No
.. :
{Value_1}
{Value_2}
{Action_1}
,
.. ,
{Value_3}
:
{Value_4}
{Value_5}
{Value_6}
{Action_2}
< Index=Value_3
Or
(Index>=Value_4
And
Index<=Value_5)
Or
Index=Value_6 >
No
ELSE
Yes
[Action_2]
[Action_Else]
{Action_Else}
END_CASE
• A CASE statement executes {Action} when it is consistent with {Index} or
satisfies the conditions within the range.
• Use the specified index variable for [CASE].
• Specify a consistent condition value in [
:].
• Specify the low and high values of the range conditions in [ ,, :].
• Enumerate the consistent conditions in [
,].
• The range conditions and consistent conditions can be enumerated using
[ , , :].
• A CASE statement cannot have another instruction symbol on a line which
has an instruction symbol.
• The {Action} part of a CASE statement can be nested with other control
statement. In one nest of a CASE statement, CASE, END_CASE must be
one in any case. Others may be omitted as appropriate.
The CASE statement above is equivalent to the following when it is written
in the ST language.
{Index} OF
CASE
{Value_0} :
{Action_0} ;
{Value_1} .. [Value_2] :
{Action_1} ;
{Value_3} , {Value_4} .. {Value_5} , {Value_6} :
{Action_2} ;
ELSE
{Action_Else} ;
END_CASE ;
98
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
<FOR Statement>
Program
[ Index= Min ]
FOR_DO
{Min}
{Index}
Action_1
{Max}
{Step}
No
< Index<=Max >
Yes
[Action_1]
EXIT
Exit
Action_2
[Action_2]
END_FOR
[ Index= Index+Step ]
• A FOR statement increments {Index} from {Min} to {Min} with {Step},
and repeats {Action} when it is within the range. When [EXIT] is executed,
the execution is shifted out of the nest concerned of the FOR statement.
• For [FOR_DO], specify an index variable in {Index}; a minimum index
value in {Min}; a maximum index value in {Max}, and an index increment
value in {Step}.
• A FOR statement cannot have another instruction symbol on a line which
has an instruction symbol.
• The {Action} part of a FOR statement can be nested with other control
statement. In one nest of a FOR statement, FOR, END_FOR must be one in
any case. Others may be omitted as appropriate.
<WHILE Statement>
Program
WHILE
< Condition >
Condition
No
Yes
[Action_1]
DO
Exit
Action_1
[Action_2]
EXIT
Action_2
END_WHILE
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
99
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
• A WHILE statement repeats {Action} circuit processing as long as
{Condition} is satisfied. When [EXIT] is executed, the execution is shifted
out of the nest concerned of the WHILE statement. Specify a condition
circuit for BOOL output in {Condition}.
• A WHILE statement cannot have another instruction symbol on a line which
has an instruction symbol.
• The {Action} part of a WHILE statement can be nested with other control
statement. In one nest of a WHILE statement, WHILE, END_WHILE must be
one in any case. Others may be omitted as appropriate.
<REPEAT Statement>
Program
REPEAT
[Action_1]
Action_1
Exit
EXIT
[Action_2]
Action_2
No
UNTIL
{Condition}
< Condition >
Yes
END_REPEAT
• A REPEAT statement first executes {Action} and, if {Condition} is not
satisfied then, repeats {Action}. When [EXIT] is executed, the execution is
shifted out of the nest concerned of the REPEAT statement. Specify a
condition circuit for BOOL output in {Condition}.
• A REPEAT statement cannot have another instruction symbol on a line
which has an instruction symbol
• The {Action} part of a REPEAT statement can be nested with other control
statement. In one nest of a REPEAT statement, REPEAT, END_REPEAT
must be one in any case. Others may be omitted as appropriate.
100
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
<RETURN Instruction>
Program
{ Action_0 }
Condition
<RETURN>
{ Action_1 }
[Action_0]
< Condition >
No
Yes
RETURN
[Action_1]
• RETURN shifts the execution from the program, function block, or function
to the source of invocation when the immediately preceding Boolean
output (the contact in the figure) is True (1). When RETURN is not used, the
execution generally returns to the source of invocation at the end of the
execution circuit.
In the figure above, however, it returns to the source of invocation without
executing {Action_1} when {Condition} is satisfied.
• RETURN is treated as a circuit element as a bit input instruction symbol
(example: coil).
<JUMP Instruction>
Program
{ Action_0 }
[Action_0]
Condition
>> Emg_1
{ Action_1 }
< Condition >
Yes
No
[Action_1]
Emg_1:
{ Action_2 }
[Action_2]
• Jump (--->>) shifts the control to the specified label when the immediately
preceding Boolean output (the contact in the figure) is True (1).
• The jump destination must be of the same POU as that of the jump source.
• Other instruction cannot be included on the label line.
• Either a number or string can be specified for a label. When specifying a
string, observe the rules on identifiers.
• Jump is treated as a circuit element as a bit input instruction symbol
(example: coil).
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
101
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<BRACKET Instruction>
Network
Program
{ Action_0 }
[Action_0]
Condition
< Condition >
Yes
{ Action_1 }
No
[Action_1]
[Action_2]
{ Action_2 }
1) BRKT/BRKTE instructions ([ ]) executes the {Action_0} enclosed in [
when the immediately preceding Boolean condition (the contact in the
figure) is True (1).
]
2) BRKT should be located in the end of the Network and unique in the
Network.
3) BRKT and BRKTE should be paired.
4) BRKT and BRKTE can be nested.
Supplementary
• Network means the smallest unit of programming circuit that consists of instructions.
<Jump Control Instruction>
Network
Program
{ Action_0 }
[Action_0]
Condition
[JCS]
< Condition >
Yes
No
[Action_1]
{ Action_1 }
[JCR]
[Action_2]
{ Action_2 }
1) JCS shifts the execution to the processing next to JCR when the Boolean
condition (the contact in the figure) immediately preceding JCS is True (1).
102
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
2) JCS should be located in the end of the Network and unique in the
Network.
3) JCS and JCR should be paired.
4) JCS and JCR can be nested.
5) JCR should be directly connected to the left power rail.
<Master Control Instruction>
Network
Program
{ Action_0 }
[Action_0]
Condition
[MCS]
{ Action_1 }
No
< Condition >
Yes
[Action_1] is executed with
power rails on
[Action_1] is executed with
power rails off
[Action_2]
[MCR]
{ Action_2 }
Master control instruction controls the master, that is, the power rails, of the
ladder circuit.
1) The power rails of the ladder circuit, including the left power rail in the area
enclosed by MCS and MCR instructions, are controlled.
The power rails are turned on when the Boolean condition (the contact in
the figure) immediately preceding MCS is True (1), and the ladder circuit is
executed as usual. The power rails are turned off when the Boolean output
is False (0), and the ladder circuit is executed.
2) MCS should be located in the end of the Network and unique in the
Network.
3) MCS and MCR should be paired.
4) MCS and MCR cannot be nested.
5) MCR should be directly connected to the left power rail.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
103
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<Page delimiter>
Program
{ Circuit }
(*@Page_**@*)
{ Circuit }
{ Circuit }
(*@Page_**@*)
{ Circuit }
• Page Delimiter is for the user to insert in a line of a POU to separate one
processing unit from another.
• Other instruction cannot be included on a line which has Page Delimiter.
• Page Delimiter is an instruction invalid for execution.
• When Page Delimiter is added, pages are changed in printing them.
• A page can be called back for display by the page number specified by
Page Delimiter.
1.3.17 Execution order of graphical languages
One of the features of this tool is that it can represent graphical languages,
that is, LD, FBD, and SFC, mixedly in one POU (program, function block,
function). These are compiled and converted into instruction codes that can be
understood by the controller. In this process, the tool automatically decides the
order of executing the instructions. Here is a brief description of how to decide
the order of executing them. With the program editor, order of execution
numbers are called step numbers, which can be displayed for confirmation
after the compiling.
104
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
Statements and circuits
POU
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Statement 1
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Statement 1
Circuit 5
Circuit 6
Statement 1
Circuit 7
Circuit 8
• Statements are instructions, such as IF statement, CASE statement, FOR
statement, WHILE statement, REPEAT statement, label, and page delimiter.
These instructions are characterized by not allowing other instruction to be
present on their line.
• Circuit is a unit of assembly of connected instructions, prepared by the
instructions of LD, FBD, and SFC. Unconnected instructions are taken as
part of another circuit.
• The example in the figure above may be compiled into a code where the
circuits are enclosed between statements as shown below.
• The order of executing circuits is such that the cell is traced from left to
right so that the circuit where the instruction reaches first is executed first.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
105
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
POU code
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Statement 1
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Statement 2
Circuit 5
Circuit 6
Statement 3
Circuit 7
Circuit 8
<Execution order of circuit including SFC>
A circuit which includes SFC is compiled, unit by unit, in the order of executing
Conditional processing
Transition processing
Operation processing
106
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.18 Controller variables
Global variables are used in controllers, and can be accessed with two or
more control programs. Size and use depend on the type of controller.
<Controller variables of nv series>
[type 1]
Variable
Name
Use
Download
SW
System register
Controller system register
No
DW
Data register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
(User)
User register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
Controller
PU811
SW
8192
DW
8192
(User)
10240
[type 2]
Variable
Name
Use
Download
ZW
System register
Controller system register
No
DW
Data register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
(User)
User register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
AW/BW/MW
Transmit data
User Transmit Data
No
PV_PARA
PV parameter
Indicator Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
LP_PARA
LP parameter
Regulator Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
PB_PARA
PB parameter
Pushbutton Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
TC_PARA
TC parameter
Timer Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
DB_PARA
DB parameter
Data set Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
SQ_PARA
SQ parameter
Sequence Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
P_PARA
P parameter
Polynomial table parameter
Yes in HALT mode
T_PARA
T parameter
Timer parameter
Yes in HALT mode
C_PARA
C parameter
Counter parameter
Yes in HALT mode
RTT_PARA
RTT parameter
DS scan parameter
Yes in HALT mode
PV_DATA
PV data
Indicator Tag data
No
LP_DATA
LP data
Regulator Tag data
No
PB_DATA
PB data
Pushbutton Tag data
No
TC_DATA
TC data
Timer Tag data
No
SQ_DATA
SQ data
Sequence Tag data
No
T_DATA
T data
Timer data
No
C_DATA
C data
Counter data
No
R_PARA
R parameter
Real parameter
Yes in HALT mode
W_PARA
W parameter
Integer parameter
Yes in HALT mode
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
107
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Controller
PU821
Controller
PU821
ZW
DW
8192
65536
16384
SQ
P
T
C
256
512
128
DB
256
(User)
128
A,B,MW
PV
66560
LP
1024
PB
320
RTT
512
TC
1280
R
4096
128
W
2560
Supplementary
• The numeric values above, those in the ZW, DW and (User) columns are the numbers
of words, and those in the other columns are the numbers of tag and parameter points.
<Controller variables of V series>
[S controller]
Variable
Name
Use
Download
SW
System register
Controller system register
No
DW
Data register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
User
User register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
Controller
SW
DW
(User)
S3PU65
512
4096
10240
S3PU55
512
4096
10240
S3PU45
512
4096
10240
S3PU21
512
4096
10240
S3ST45
512
4096
1024
S2PU72
512
4096
10240
S3PU32
512
4096
10240
S2PU22
512
4096
10240
S2PU72D
512
4096
10240
Supplementary
• The numeric values above are the numbers of words.
• Download means loading the initial values into the entire global variable area
concerned from the V tool. Yes in HALT mode means that the variables can be
downloaded when the controller is not in operating mode (that is, when program
execution is halted).
108
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
[L controller (MCS type)]
Variable
Name
Use
Download
ZW
System register Controller system register
No
User
User register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
PV_PARA
PV parameter
Indicator Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
LP_PARA
LP parameter
Regulator Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
PB_PARA
PB parameter
Pushbutton Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
SQ_PARA SQ parameter
Sequence Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
P_PARA
P parameter
Polynomial table parameter
Yes in HALT mode
T_PARA
T parameter
Timer parameter
Yes in HALT mode
C_PARA
C parameter
Counter parameter
Yes in HALT mode
F_PARA
F parameter
Communication data (real) parameter
Yes in HALT mode
I_PARA
I parameter
Communication data (integer) parameter
Yes in HALT mode
PV_DATA
PV data
Indicator Tag data
No
LP_DATA
LP data
Regulator Tag data
No
PB_DATA
PB data
Pushbutton Tag data
No
SQ_DATA
SQ data
Sequence Tag data
No
T_DATA
T data
Timer data
No
C_DATA
C data
Counter data
No
F_DATA
F data
Communication data (real) data
No
I_DATA
I data
Communication data (integer) data
No
R_PARA
R parameter
Real parameter
Yes in HALT mode
W_PARA
W parameter
Integer parameter
Yes in HALT mode
GD_DATA GD data
Guidance data
No
VB_DATA
Visual batch data
No
Controller
VB dat
ZW
User
PV
LP
PB
SQ
L3PU11
8192
16384
1024
256
1024
128
L2PU12
8192
16384
128
96
288
48
L2PU11
8192
16384
288
32
128
16
L1PU12
1024
1024
128
8
32
−
L1PU11
1024
1024
128
8
32
−
LC512
1024
1024
128
8
32
−
LC511
1024
1024
128
8
32
−
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
109
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Controller
P
T
C
F
I
R
W
GD
VB
L3PU11
128
512
256
128
128
2048
2048
8
128
L2PU12
48
192
96
48
48
768
768
3
48
L2PU11
48
192
96
48
48
768
768
3
48
L1PU12
16
−
−
32
32
128
128
1
−
L1PU11
16
−
−
32
32
128
128
1
−
LC512
16
−
−
32
32
128
128
1
−
LC511
16
−
−
32
32
128
128
1
−
Supplementary
• The numeric values above, those in the ZW and (User) columns are the numbers of
words, and those in the other columns are the numbers of tag and parameter points.
• The sign - in the above table means not supported by the corresponding controllers.
[L controller (DS type)]
Variable
110
6F8C1290
Name
Use
Download
ZW
System register
Controller system register
No
DW
Data register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
User
User register
User data register
Yes in HALT mode
AW/BW/MW
Transmit data
User Transmit Data
No
PV_PARA
PV parameter
Indicator Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
LP_PARA
LP parameter
Regulator Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
PB_PARA
PB parameter
Pushbutton Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
TC_PARA
TC parameter
Timer Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
DB_PARA
DB parameter
Data set Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
SQ_PARA
SQ parameter
Sequence Tag parameter
Yes in HALT mode
P_PARA
P parameter
Polynomial table parameter
Yes in HALT mode
T_PARA
T parameter
Timer parameter
Yes in HALT mode
C_PARA
C parameter
Counter parameter
Yes in HALT mode
PV_DATA
PV data
Indicator Tag data
No
LP_DATA
LP data
Regulator Tag data
No
PB_DATA
PB data
Pushbutton Tag data
No
TC_DATA
TC data
Timer Tag data
No
SQ_DATA
SQ data
Sequence Tag data
No
T_DATA
T data
Timer data
No
C_DATA
C data
Counter data
No
R_PARA
R parameter
Real parameter
Yes in HALT mode
W_PARA
W parameter
Integer parameter
Yes in HALT mode
1.3
Controller
ZW
DW
User
A,B,MW
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
PV
LP
PB
TC
DB
SQ
L3PU21
8192
65536
16384
67584
768
256
1024 128
256
128
L3PU22
8192
65536
16384
67584
768
256
1024 128
256
48
P
T
C
R
L3PU21
256
512
128
4096
1280
L3PU22
256
512
128
4096
1280
Controller
W
Supplementary
• The numeric values above, those in the ZW and (User) columns are the numbers of
words, and those in the other columns are the numbers of tag and parameter points.
• The sign - in the above table means not supported by the corresponding controllers.
1.3.19 I/O variables
I/O variables is a kind of global variables, reflecting the process I/O data of an
I/O module. Process I/O signals can be acquired and set by referring to I/O
variables with the program or function block.
<Combination of I/O module and controller>
With the nv series, three types of I/O modules, that is, TC-net I/O, G3I/O, and
SI/O, can be used. The I/O modules may be combined with controllers as
shown in the table below. For a description of the I/O modules, see the
manual.
Controller
TC-net I/O
G3 I/O
SI/O
−
type 1
type 2
With the V series, three types of I/O modules, that is, G3I/O, G2I/O, and SI/O,
can be used. The I/O modules may be combined with controllers as shown in
the table below. For a description of the I/O modules, see the manual.
V series
Model3000
Model2000
Model1000
Controller
G3 I/O
G2 I/O
SI/O
S3*
−
−
L3*
−
S2*
−
L2*
−
L1*
−
5800I/O
−
−
−
−
−
−
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
111
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<I/O variable of G3I/O>
The I/O variable size of G3I/O is shown below.
Controller
No. of words of I/O variable
S3PU65
8192 (8kw)
S3PU55
8192 (8kw)
S3PU45
5120 (5kw)
S3PU21
3072 (3kw)
A G3I/O module is automatically allocated to an I/O variable when the
hardware configuration is entered and saved with the configuration editor of
the tool. An I/O variable map is shown below. This mapping size is the default,
which can be changed by the user. For the types of G3I/O modules, see the
manual for the G3I/O.
I/O module
I/O variable
4-word type I/O module
4-word type
1268 word
8-word type
400 word
20-word type
1000 word
TL-F10 type
1000 word
TL-S20 type
1000 word
Tc-net10 type
1000 word
Station global
type
1000 word
8-word type I/O module
4-word type I/O module
20-word type I/O module
An I/O variable file is automatically created when I/O variable names are
registered with the [I/O variable] of the tool, thereby permitting programming
by referring to the I/O symbols with the program.
112
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
<I/O variable of G2I/O>
The I/O variable size of G2I/O is shown below.
Controller
No. of words of I/O variable
S2PU22
3072 (3kw)
S2PU72
3072 (3kw)
S2PU32
3072 (3kw)
S2PU72D
3072 (3kw)
The mapping of I/O modules and of I/O variables is similar to that of G3I/O.
<Direct I/O variable and Batch I/O variable>
There are two kinds of I/O variables for G2I/O and G3I/O: direct I/O variable
and batch I/O variable. Both have the same capacity and are identical in I/O
module mapping. As its name indicates, the direct I/O variable accesses the
actual I/O module to acquire I/O data only when the program loads and stores
data. The batch I/O variable acquires I/O data in synchronization with a scan
processing type task, that is, HS or MS task. The I/O variable names registered
with the [I/O Variable] of the tool becomes directly a batch I/O variable name.
The direct I/O variable will have the same name except for the underscore ( _ )
added to the end of it.
I/O symbol
X1
I/O module
I/O variable
Batch I/O variable X1
Program
X1
X1_
Direct I/O variable
X1_
It is up to the user to decide which variable is to be used in the program. The
batch I/O variable remains unchanged in value during a scan however often it
is referred to in the same program. That is, this variable is often used because
it is synchronized with the task. In contrast, the direct I/O variable is refreshed
in value each time it is referred to.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
113
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<I/O variable of SI/O>
The I/O variable size of SI/O is shown below.
Controller
No. of words of I/O variable
L3PU21
8192 *4 (8kw*4)
L3PU11
8192 *4 (8kw*4)
L2PU22
8192 *3 (8kw*3)
L2PU12
8192 *3 (8kw*3)
L2PU11
8192
(8kw)
L1PU12
2048
(2kw)
L1PU11
2048
(2kw)
The L3 and L2 have an I/O variable capacity of 8 kw per SI/O bus.
The L1 has a capacity of 2 kw per unit.
The mapping of I/O variables is as shown below.
When I/O symbols (variable names) are registered with the ‘I/O variable’ of the
tool, they can be used for programming. (DS type only)
• I/O variables of L3, L2
I/O variables per bus
Input data
(4096)
Unit 1256)
Slot 1 (16)
Work (6)
Unit 2 (256)
Slot 2 (16)
I/O data(8)
Work (2)
Output data
(4096)
114
6F8C1290
Unit 15 (256)
Slot 14 (16)
Work (256)
Work (32)
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
• I/O Variable of L1
1 I/O variables per unit
Input data
(256)
Slot 0(16)
Work (6)
Slot 1(16)
I/O data (8)
Work
(256)
Output data
(256)
Work
(1280)
Work (2)
Slot 14(16)
Slot 15 (16)
<I/O Data structure of SI/O>
The SI/O module has an I/O data structure of 8 words per module. The
structure of each type of SI/O module is shown below.
SI/O module type
Digital input
Module name
SDI01
Input/output
Input
I/O data structure (+: word offset)
+ 0 = DI1 - DI16
+ 1 = DI17 - DI32
Digital output
SDI01
Output
+ 0 = DO1 - DO16
+ 1 = DO17 - DO32
Analog input
SAI01
SAI02
SAI03
SRT01
STC01
SAI06
Input
+ 0 = AI1
+ 1 = AI2
+ 2 = AI3
+ 3 = AI4
+ 4 = AI5
+ 5 = AI6
+ 6 = AI7
+ 7 = AI8
Analog output
SAO01
SAO02
SAO06
Output
+ 0 = AO1
+ 1 = AO2
+ 2 = AO3
+ 3 = AO4
+ 4 = AO5
+ 5 = AO6
+ 6 = AO7
+ 7 = AO8
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
115
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
SI/O module type
Pulse input
Module name
SPI01
Input/output
Output
I/O data structure (+: word offset)
+ 0 = PI1 (Total)
+ 1 = PI2 (Total)
+ 2 = PI3 (Total)
+ 3 = PI4 (Total)
+ 4 = PI1 (Momentary value)
+ 5 = PI2 (Momentary value)
+ 6 = PI3 (Momentary value)
+ 7 = PI4 (Momentary value)
Pulse output
SPO01
Output
+0=
+1=
+2=
+3=
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
Analog loop
LP01
Input
+0=
+1=
+2=
+3=
+4=
DI1, 2, 3
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
Output
+0=
+1=
+2=
+3=
DO1, 2, 3
MV
AO1
AO2
Input
+0=
+1=
+2=
+3=
+4=
DI1, 2, 3, R/M
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
Output
+ 0 = DO1, 2, 3
+ 1 = PO
+ 2 = AO1
+ 3 = AO2
Pulse loop
LP02
Note: The LP01 and LP02 modules can be used with Model 1000 only.
<Asynchronism of I/O data of SI/O>
The I/O variables of SI/O are automatically refreshed on the own cycle of the
SI/O bus. In this sense, it is asynchronous with the task execution cycle. Direct
reference to the I/O variables of SI/O in the program is the same as accessing
the direct I/O variables of G3I/O or G2I/O. Use of its I/O data in synchronization
with the program requires the user to take such steps as loading it to the
internal variable in the program, then using that internal variable in the program.
The I/O variables of SI/O are batch-input and output by standard controller
processing when they are input and output with the standard TAG variables
(indicator, regulator pushbutton), so they are processed in synchronization
with the task so long as the TAG variables are referred to within the program.
116
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.20 Station variables
The station variable is a shared memory used in sending and receiving data
between main modules (Controller, Ethernet, TC-net, etc). It is called station
variable in the sense that it can be programmed in the same variable name in
the station.
<Data flow>
Station
Main Module
Main Module
Shared
memory
Shared
memory
Tasks
Main Module
Shared
memory
Tasks
Tasks
The station variable is actually the memory in a main module, which can be
accessed in the same variable name from other main modules in the same
station.
<Capacity of station variable of nv series>
Controller
No. of words of shared memory
PU811
−
PU821
−
TN8*
524288
EN8*
262144
Note: The sign - in the table above means that the station global variable is
not supported.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
117
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<Capacity of station variable of V series>
[Model 3000]
Controller
No. of words of shared memory
S3PU65
1024
S3PU55
1024
S3PU45
1024
−
S3PU21
S3ST45
512
L3PU21
1024
L3PU11
1024
C3PU*
32768
TN7*
524288
CN7*
65535
EN7*
262144
Note: The sign - in the table above means that the station global variable is
not supported.
[Model 2000]
Controller
S2PU72
No. of words of shared memory
1024
S2PU32
−
S2PU22
−
L2PU22
1024
L2PU12
1024
L2PU11
1024
C2PU*
32768
CN6*
65535
EN6 +
262144
Note: The sign - in the table above means that the station global variable is
not supported.
[Model 1000]
Model 1000 has no station variable.
118
6F8C1290
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.21 Network variables
Network Variable is scan data on a scan communication type control network.
It is called Network Variable in the sense that it can be programmed in the
same variable name at system level among the stations connected to the
network. The capacity of Network Variable differs depending on the Network
and the type of node.
<Capacity of network variables of F10>
Station
Model3000
Model2000
Node
No. of scan data words
MS311
RS311
MS321_32
32
MS321_64
MS331
64
MS321_128
128
MS321_256
256
MS211
RS211
32
<Capacity of network variable of S20>
Station
Node
Model3000
SN321
SN322A
SN323
Model2000
SN221
SN222
No. of scan data words
1024
<Capacity of network variable of S20 LP>
Station
Node
Model3000
SN325
Model1000
L1PU12
No. of scan data words
4096
<Capacity of network variable of FL-net>
Station
Node
nv station
FL911
Model3000
FL311
No. of scan data words
8704
FL312
Model2000
FL611
FL612
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
119
Chapter 1
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
<Capacity of network variable of devicenet>
Station
Node
No. of scan data words
Model3000
DN311A
756
Model2000
DN611A
256
<Capacity of network variable of profibus>
Station
Model3000
Node
No. of scan data words
PF311
256
PF312
122
<Capacity of network variable of Tc-net 10>
Station
Node
Model3000
CN711
CN712
CN713
Model2000
CN611
CN612
CN613
No. of scan data words
16384
<Capacity of network variable of Tc-net 20>
Station
Model3000
Node
CN623
CN624
No. of scan data words
16384
<Capacity of network variable of Tc-net 100>
Station
120
6F8C1290
Node
nv station
TN821
TN822
Model3000
TN711
TN712
TN721
TN722
No. of scan data words
131072
1.3
Software Model of nv Series & V Series
1.3.22 Configurations
Configuration means the hardware configuration information of the main units
and I/O modules of a station. This information is automatically created when
hardware configuration and module parameters are registered with the
Product tree of the V tool, and batch-downloaded to the controller. The
information includes the following, for example.Contents of Configuration.
<Configurations of nv series>
Item
Contents
Station configuration
information
Main unit configuration, etc.
Controller parameter
Operation in case of power failure, task control cycle, and other
information on settings
I/O connection information
Connection information for batch input/output of I/O signals of
TC-net I/O etc
I/O loop information
I/O loop configuration information
I/O node information
I/O node and I/O module configuration information
Special TC-net I/O
information
FL-net and MODBUS configuration information
G3/G2 I/O information
G3I/O and G2I/O module configuration information
<Configurations of V series>
Item
Contents
Station configuration
information
Main unit configuration, etc.
Controller parameter
Operation in case of power failure, task control cycle, and other
information on settings
PI/O module configuration
information
G3I/O and G2I/O module configuration information
I/O connection information
Connection information for batch input/output of I/O signals of
G3I/O and G2I/O
S20 module parameter
S20 module setting parameters
SI/O module configuration
information
Serial I/O module configuration information
SI/O module parameter
Serial I/O module parameters
SIF shared map
Management information on serial I/O managing module SIF
and L3 controller
Supplementary
• Configuration is not accessed by user tasks, and will not be released as a variable.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
121
Chapter 1
122
6F8C1290
nv Series & V Series Basic Knowledge
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
This chapter is intended for users with understanding of nv series and V series
hardware models and describes how to register the hardware.
Registering hardware is the first task that must be performed.
You should prepare an outline of the hardware models to be registered in order to
register them smoothly.
The hardware registration flow is as follows:
2.1
Registering the System ···································· 124
2.2
Registering the Station Configuration············· 125
2.3
Registering the Network Configuration··········· 129
2.4
Registering Module Parameters······················· 131
2.5
Meaning of Module Parameters ······················· 139
2.5.1 Meanings of module parameters
of nv series ·············································· 139
2.5.2 Meanings of module parameters
of V series················································ 142
2.6
Changing IO Connection Area ························· 150
123
Chapter 2
2.1
Registering Hardware
Registering the System
In order to register a system, you must start the Product Tree.
Select the [System] folder at the top left corner of the screen and select
<New> from the <File> menu.
(Or, right-click and select <New> from the pop-up menu.)
When the input dialog appears, enter a desired system name.
Note
• The name must not exceed 64 characters.
• The characters # ' | \ @ [ ] : * . / < > ? " are not allowed.
When the system folder is registered, it appears at the top right corner of the
screen.
124
6F8C1290
2.2 Registering the Station Configuration
2.2
Registering the Station Configuration
This section describes how to register the hardware configuration below the
station.
Start the Product Tree and double-click the system to edit at the top right
corner of the screen.
The editable sub folders in the selected system appear at the bottom left of the
screen.
Registering the station
Select the [Station] sub folder and select <New> from the <File> menu.
When the registration dialog appears, input a model and name.
Registering the main unit
Select [Unit] directly below the station and select <New> from the <File>
menu.
When the registration dialog appears, select Main unit.
If the controller is to be used in a redundant configuration, select the
redundancy type.
Registering the main module
Select [Module] directly below the main unit and select <New> from the
<File> menu.
When the registration dialog appears, select the Slot No. and Main module.
If a controller module is selected, the comment can be registered up to 64
characters.
Registering the I/O node or the bus
In the case of nv series, select [I/O Node] directly below the main module and
select <New> from the <File> menu.
When the registration dialog appears, select the Node No. and I/O Node
module.
In the case of V series, select [Bus] directly below the main module and select
<New> from the <File> menu.
When the registration dialog appears, select the Bus No. and Bus module.
Bus is the cable connecting the main module and I/O unit and is registered
here to control the connection.
In case of model 1000, register the default bus [I/O bus].
To register the bus to model 3000 SIF module, register the control controller
with the module parameter.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
125
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Registering the I/O unit
Select [Unit] directly below the bus and select <New> from the <File> menu.
When the registration dialog appears, select the I/O Unit No. and I/O Unit.
In case of model 1000, there is no corresponding I/O unit, but register the
default I/O unit [I/O unit] in order to control the connection.
If you are using parallel bus with model 2000, select the bus type and then
register the I/O unit.
Comment can be registered up to 64 characters.
Registering the I/O module
Select [Module] directly below I/O unit and select <New> from the <File>
menu.
When the registration dialog appears, select the I/O Module No. and Module.
Changing the product name
Select [Unit] or [Module] at bottom left of the Product Tree and select
<Rename> from the <File> menu.
Change dialog appears.
The name to change is chosen when changing a name.
Change comment is inputted when changing a comment.
126
6F8C1290
2.2 Registering the Station Configuration
• Compatible units
1
BU816
BU816Double
2
BU825
BU825Single
3
BU742
BU742Double
4
BU744
BU744Double
5
BU746
BU746Double
6
BU748
BU748Double
7
BU648E
BU648EDouble
8
BU643D
BU643DDouble
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
127
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
• Compatible modules
1
S3PU55
S3PU65
2
S2PU72
S2PU72D
3
S2PU72_X
S2PU72D_X
• Compatible modules of a unit ‘BU74A
Before
After
1
S3PU55
S3PU55 + IF721
S3PU55 + IF741
2
S3PU55 + IF721
S3PU55
3
S3PU55 + IF741
4
S3PU45
S3PU45 + IF721
S3PU45 + IF741
5
S3PU45 + IF721
S3PU45
6
S3PU45 + IF741
7
S3ST45A
S3ST45A + IF721
8
S3ST45A + IF721
S3ST45A
Hiding the other stations
Select <Show other station> from the <View> menu, and the check mark of
this menu is turned off.
If "other station" is hiding, "other station in hiding" is displayed on the right side
of [Stations].
When showing "other station", select <Show other station> from the <View>
menu again.
128
6F8C1290
2.3
2.3
Registering the Network Configuration
Registering the Network Configuration
This section describes how to register the LAN configuration which connects
stations. This must be performed if you intend to transmit data using LAN. If
you do not intend to use LAN, skip this procedure and continue.
LAN configuration
Multiple stations can share information such as process data over LAN.
The following figure is an example of a system with three stations and an
engineering tool connected to a single LAN.
Engineering tool
LAN
Station
Station
Station
The procedure to implement a LAN in a system is as follows:
• Add a network module to the hardware configuration of each station
• Add LAN to the system
• Connect the network module of each station to the LAN
Add a LAN card to the hardware configuration of each station
Register the network module corresponding to the type of LAN to be used.
Refer to section "2.2 Registering the Station Configuration" for details.
Add LAN to the system
Select the [Network] folder at bottom left of the Product Tree and select
<New> from the <File> menu.
Select the Network No. and LAN type. If it is necessary, the comment can be
registered up to 64 characters.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
129
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Connect the network module of each station to the LAN
Up to this point, the [Network module] and [LAN] have been added. In this
state, the [Network module] and [LAN] are independent of each other and
cannot communicate.
The procedure to connect [LAN] and [Network module] with software is as
follows.
Select the [Module] folder at bottom left of the Product Tree and select
<New> from the <File> menu.
Select the Node No. and Module name.
Changing the network name
The network is selected under the left of the product tree, and select
<Rename> from the <File> menu. The change dialog is displayed, and input
the changed comment.
130
6F8C1290
2.4
2.4
Registering Module Parameters
Registering Module Parameters
This section describes how to register the parameters of the main module and
I/O module registered in the station configuration.
Opening the module parameter window
Select a main module or an I/O module at bottom left of the Product Tree and
select <New> from the <File> menu.
In the case of network module, you can also select a network module at
bottom right and select <Module Parameters> from the <File> menu.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
131
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Description of the module parameter window
This window contains the following:
<Module name>
Enables you to switch the module connected to the unit.
Select the desired module from the Slot No. and Module name list.
<View>
Enables you to switch the item to view.
Tool: Shows only the offline information.
Module: Shows the online information.
Tool and Module: Shows the offline and online information side by side.
* Appears for controller and transmission module
<Transmission>
Enables you to switch the transmission target.
You can select between primary and secondary path.
* Appears for transmission module
<Tab>
Parameters are organized into tabs according to view classification.
* The available tab is different for controller, I/O module, and transmission
module.
<Refresh>
Reloads the display data.
<Write>
Writes the changed data to the module when viewing a module.
<Download>
Writes the entire tool content to the module.
* Valid for transmission module.
<Print>
Prints the displayed content.
<Close>
Closes the module parameter window.
<Verify>
The module parameters and the block transfer registration of MELPLAC I/O
are checked.
* Appears for R3PU45 + IF72C and MELPLAC I/O module.
<Verify All>
The validity of all the module parameters is checked.
* Appears for FMGW1.
132
6F8C1290
2.4
Registering Module Parameters
<Batch Download>
If it performs "Verify All" and there is no error, all the module parameters will
be downloaded.
* Appears for FMGW1.
<Copy to Tool>
The module value is written in the value of the tool at the time of "Tool and
Module" display.
* Appears for FMGW1.
Changing value
Move the cursor to each item and enter or select a value.
The range of values appears for item for which value is to be entered at the
bottom of the window. Enter a value within that range.
There is no need to save the tool value because it is written immediately when
confirmed.
The changed item appears in red for module value and all changes are written
when the Write button is pressed.
Important
• When changing the task scan cycle of S3 controller (OS: V02.5* or higher) on-line,
there are the following restrictions.
maximum >= change setting value > now setting value x 0.8
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
133
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Verify (MELPLAC I/O)
This function checks settings of the module parameters and the block transfer
registration of MELPLAC I/O.
1) Opening the verify dialog.
Select MELPLAC I/O module.
Open the window [Module parameters].
Click the [Verify] button to start the Verify dialog.
Moreover, it can be started from following dialogs.
• [Module parameters] window of [R3PU45 + IF72C].
• [Batch download] window. (The Verify dialog is started automatically.)
134
6F8C1290
2.4
Registering Module Parameters
2) Canceling verification
Click [Cancel] to cancel verification.
3) Printing error list.
Click [Print] to print error list.
4) Messages & Measure.
When the error messages are displayed, please check to take actions in
following list.
No.
Messages
Measure
101
IOW - 'Parameter not defined'
Please register module parameter(s).
For unused area, please set 0 as size and minimum
top-address in areas.
102
IOW - 'Out of Range'
Please repair top address and/or size in [Module
Parameter] window. The IOW area total size must be
within 64KW.
103
IOW - 'Area Override'
Please repair top address and/or size in [Module
Parameter] window. The area overlaps with other area.
104
IOW - 'Area run over'
Please repair top address and/or size in [Module
Parameter] window. When one module has two or
more areas, all areas must be placed within
continuous 16kW.
106
IOW - 'I/O Direction'
Please check the I/O variables registration.
'I/O Direction' setting has conflict with the I/O
variable.
107
IOW - 'PIO Area Out of Range'
Please check the I/O variables registration.
I/O variables are registered outside of the IOW area.
108
IOW - ' Invalid IOW'
Please check the I/O variables registration.
I/O variable is registered with invalid IOW.
109
IOW - 'PIO Area Size Over'
Please repair size in [Module Parameter] window.
Total of occupation size of an I/O module is beyond a
range.
201
VAR - 'Not Defined'
Please assign I/O variables of MELPLAC I/O module
as network variables.
301
BLK - 'TN7** Module Not
Registered'
Please register TN7** module.
302
BLK - 'TN7** Module Not
Connected'
Please connect TN7** module to TC-net100LAN.
303
BLK - 'Block Transfer
Parameter not defined'
Please check the block transfer registration.
Parameter items are insufficient.
304
BLK - 'I/O Module Parameter
not defined'
Please register the parameter of I/O module which
specified in [Target I/O module] of the block transfer
registration.
305
BLK - 'PIO Area Out of Range'
Please check the block transfer registration.
The [PIO Address] value is out of range, which is
specified with the module parameter.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
135
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
No.
Messages
Measure
306
BLK - 'Scan Area Out of
Range'
Please check the block transfer registration.
The [Scan data block No] value is out of range.
307
BLK - 'Scan Area Override'
Please check the block transfer registration.
The [Scan data block No] area overlaps with other
area.
308
BLK - 'TC-net 100 Talker not
defined'
Please register the node and the output controller on
TC-net100 LAN.
The [Scan data block No] of block Transfer registration
is invalid.
309
BLK/IOW - 'Area Override'
Please check the block transfer registration and/or I/O
variable registration.
The I/O variable is already registered in [Scan data
block No].
310
BLK - 'I/O Direction'
Case of "Input", please register the R3 controller as
output controller. Case of "Output", please register with
the exception of R3 controller as output controller. The
[I/O direction] of block Transfer registration is conflict.
311
BLK - 'Area Override'
Please check the block transfer registration and/or I/O
variable registration.
When the value [I/O direction] is 'Output', the I/O
variable can not be registered as the batch output.
312
BLK/IOW - 'Size Over'
Please check the block transfer registration and/or I/O
variable registration.
The total size of batch I/O and [Block Transfer] area
must be less than 4096 words.
313
BLK - 'PIO Area Out of Range'
Please check the block transfer registration.
The IOW area total size must be within 64KW.
(Top address + size <= 65536W)
314
BLK - 'PIO Area Override'
Please check the block transfer registration.
The [PIO Address] area overlaps with other area.
Verify (FMGW1)
The validity of all the module parameters is checked.
1) Opening the verify dialog.
Click the [Verify All] button to start the Verify dialog.
136
6F8C1290
2.4
Registering Module Parameters
When the [Batch Download] button is clicked, the Verify dialog is started
automatically.
2) Canceling verification
Click [Cancel] to cancel verification.
3) Printing error list.
Click [Print] to print error list.
4) Messages & Measure.
When the error messages are displayed, please check to take actions in
following list.
No.
Messages
0001 The TC Word count value in Parameter
tab is set to 1. Hence the valid range for
TC Code is 0 to HFFFF.
Measure
Please repair the “TC code” of the
[Message Transaction] into the value of
"0-FFFF".
0002 The Size setting in Type1 is exceeding the Please repair the size of "Type 1" of the
corresponding request area size of
[Message Transaction] into the value within
Message Transmission Block setting.
the limits.
0003 The Size setting in Type2 is exceeding the Please repair the size of "Type 2" of the
corresponding request area size of
[Message Transaction] into the value within
Message Transmission Block setting.
the limits.
0004 MDWS data size setting is exceeding the
MDWS Cyclic Address upper limit.
Please repair the “MDWS data size” of the
[Cyclic Transfer] into the value within the
limits.
0005 Req area scan offset and Req area size
setting is exceeds the upper limit of Scan
block No.
Please repair the offset and size of the
“Response Area” of the [Message
Transfer] into the value within the limits.
0006 TC Code setting is duplicated.
Please repair the “TC code” of the
[Message Transaction] into the value not
overlapping.
0007 Responce area scan block setting is
duplicated.
Please repair the “Scan Block No.”,
“Offset”, and “Size” into the value not
overlapping.
0008 Scan block setting is duplicated.
Please repair the “Scan Block No.”,
“Offset”, and “Size” into the value not
overlapping.
0009 MDWS Cyclic Address setting is
duplicated.
Please repair the “MDWS Address” and
“Size” into the value not overlapping.
0010 Transmission direction does not match.
Please repair the “Transmission Direction”
of the [Message Transfer] and the
[Message Transaction] into the same
value.
0011 Transmission block registration is
necessary.
Please register the “Scan Block No.” into
the [Talker block].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
137
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
No.
138
6F8C1290
Messages
Measure
0012 Responce area scan block related
transmission block registration is
necessary.
Please register the “Scan Block No.” into
the [Talker block].
0013 Delete the transmission block
registration.
Please delete the “Scan Block No.” from
the [Talker block].
0014 Delete the response area scan block
related transmission block registration.
Please delete the “Scan Block No.” from
the [Talker block].
0015 Status T->M setting is duplicated.
Please repair the “Address” and “Size” of
the Scan Healthy into the value not
overlapping.
0016 The scan block setting of Request and
Response is duplicated.
Please repair the “Scan Block No.”,
“Offset”, and “Size” into the value not
overlapping.
0017 The scan block setting of Response and
Request is duplicated.
Please repair the “Scan Block No.”,
“Offset”, and “Size” into the value not
overlapping.
2.5
2.5
Meanings of Module Parameters
Meanings of Module Parameters
Among the hardware modules registered in station configuration, some have
parameters (module parameters) and some have not.
Before setting module parameters, refer to the instruction manual for each
module and thoroughly understand the meaning of each module parameter.
This section describes the meaning of each module parameter briefly.
2.5.1 Meanings of module parameters of nv series
Main modules
• PU811, PU821
Program fallback
Specify the operation in case where an error has occurred in a
user program.
Yes: Continue operation (fallback) by separating the program that
caused an error.
No: Cause an error down.
I/O fallback
Specify the operation in case where an error has occurred in the
batch or direct I/O.
Yes: Continue operation (fallback) by the I/O that caused an error.
No: Cause an error down.
Global initialize
Specify whether to initialize user defined global variables.
Local initialize
Specify whether to initialize user defined local variables. System
assigned local variables are initialized.
Log at setting clock at
program
Specify whether to record time update from user program in event
log.
Instantaneous DC failure
time (s)
Specify the duration for detecting a momentary power failure when
DC power of the power unit has dropped. Specify 0 for not
detecting any power failure.
Priority *: Task kind
Specify the task kind.
Priority *: Enabled
Specify the execution task.
Specify ‘No’ if not used.
Priority *: Scan time
Specify the execution cycle of scan task.
RIO middle speed I/O
schedule number
Specify the number medium-speed I/O scan data is divided into
by the high-speed scan cycle.
Duplex system alarm
Select the state in case the secondary side is on-line operation.
Standard: Minor alarm
Special: Normal
User global var. tracking
Specify whether to track user global variable.
Tracked User start No
Specify the top register No. when tracking User global variable.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
139
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Tracked User end No
Specify the last register No. when tracking User global variable.
Tracked DW start No
Specify the top register No. when tracking DW register.
Tracked DW end No
Specify the last register No. when tracking DW register.
Computer link Ethernet
SlotNo
Specify the Ethernet slot when connecting equipment such as MMI
with computer link protocol via Ethernet.
Computer link UDP PortNo Specify the UDP Port No. for computer link.
Time zone bias
Specify the difference between GMT and the local time.
Numerical input (-13 to 13)
Compensation unit
Specify the unit to be used for tag temperature and pressure
compensation.
Scan sync. Tag data
writing
Specify whether to synchronize update of tag data from OIS-DS
with task scan.
DO read back processing
Specify whether to perform output readback with the standard
controller function (linealize function) when control mode is M for
digital tag with mode (push button tag).
Controller No.
Specify a unique number within the system assigned to the
controller.
DS scan
Specify whether to perform realtime trend.
Inter-controller com.
Specify whether to broadcast any data.
Ethernet
• EN8
140
6F8C1290
IP address type
Select the address type for the Ethernet card.
ClassB type: 172.16.64.XX, subnet mask: 255.255.192.0
ClassC type: 192.168.0.XX, subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Any: Any value can be set from the tool.
Primary IP address
Set the IP address of the network card on the primary side in a
single-station configuration or duplex-station configuration.
Primary sub-net mask
Set the sub-net mask value of the network card on the primary
side in a single-station configuration or duplex-station
configuration.
Secondary IP address
Set the IP address of the Ethernet card on the secondary side in a
duplex-station configuration.
Secondary sub-net mask
Set the sub-net mask value of the Ethernet card on the secondary
side in a duplex-station configuration.
Total number of multicast
When setting a multicast group, set the number of multicasts that
are used sequentially from [Multicast IP1].
Multicast IP
Set the values that do not overlap each other within the range from
[225.224.0.1] to [225.224.0.15] as IP addresses for a multicast
group.
Option switch 0
ON: A transmission-line diagnostic function is operated at the time
of the free mode.
Default gateway IP
address in the free mode
Specify the PI address of the default gateway (router).
2.5
Meanings of Module Parameters
TC-net
• TN8
IP address type
Select an address type.
Vseries standard 1: 172.16.64.XX: subnet mask: 255.255.192.0
Vseries standard 2: 172.31.64.XX: subnet mask: 255.255.192.0
Any: Any value can be set from the tool.
Primary IP address
Set the IP address of the network card on the primary side in a
single-station configuration or duplex-station configuration.
Primary sub-net mask
Set the subnet mask of the network card on the primary side in a
single station configuration or duplex-station configuration.
Secondary IP address
Set the IP address of the network card on the secondary side in a
duplex-station configuration.
Secondary sub-net mask
Set the subnet mask of the Ethernet card on the secondary side in
a duplex-station configuration.
Total number of multicast
Specify the number to be used consecutively from [multicast IP1]
when setting multicast group.
Multicast IP
Specify unique multicast group IP addresses between
[225.224.0.1] and [225.224.0.15].
Scan enabled
Set the operation of scan communication (stopping of receiving
cannot be set).
Stop: Stop transmission.
Start: Start transmission
High-speed scan cycle
time (0.1ms)
Set the scan cycle for high-speed transmission blocks.
Middle-speed scan cycle
time (ms)
Set the scan cycle for medium-speed transmission blocks.
Low-speed scan cycle
time (ms)
Set the scan cycle for low-speed transmission blocks.
Scan stop at all hosts
down
Scanning operation when the host device(controller) has shut
down.
No: Not stop
Yes: Stop
Receiver
When communication line is duplicated, set which communication
line is to be used.
Automatic selection/forced receiving on the A system/forces
receiving on the B system
Maximum distance
between nodes (km)
Specify the farthest distance between nodes. However, specify 8
km if this is less than the default 8 km.
Maximum number of
repeaters
Specify the value for the path with the most number of repeaters.
However, specify 3 if this is less than the default 3.
Option switch 0
ON: Stand alone mode
A scan is carried out by one set.
Option switch 1
ON: self healthy mode
A local station transmitting block is surely made healthy.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
141
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
2.5.2 Meanings of module parameters of V series
Main modules
S3, S2, R3, L3, L2, L1(LC), FN7, FN6
Cooperative operation
When multiple controllers are in operation, specify whether to
participate in cooperative operation.
If there are more than one controller in the station, set all
controllers the same.
Select “No” when a single controller is in operation.
Yes: Cooperative operation
No: Independent operation
Fallback operation
When multiple CPUs are in operation, specify whether this
controller falls back if this controller has caused an error. Select
“No” when a single controller is in operation.
Yes: Other controllers continue to execute RUN.
No: Other controllers transit come to the [R-HOLD] state.
Program fallback
Specify the operation in case where an error has occurred in a
user program.
Yes: Continue operation (fallback) by separating the program that
caused an error.
No: Cause an error down.
I/O fallback
Specify the operation in case where an error has occurred in the
batch or direct I/O.
Yes: Continue operation (fallback) by the I/O that caused an error.
No: Cause an error down.
Data initialize
Specify whether to initialize user data in the initialization of user
data (to be executed when initializing the system or executing
RUN).
Yes: Initialize
No: Not initialize
Trans. I/O data to system
bus
Specify whether to reflect the state of I/O variables obtained from
batch or direct I/O to the system. When that I/O is used by
multiple controllers, set “Yes.”
Yes: Reflect
No: Not reflect
Special ope. at direct I/O
error
When any fault has occurred in direct I/O, specify whether to
ignore that fault or not.
Yes: Ignore the fault. Records are maintained in the error log.
No: Perform fault handling.
I/O module error detection Specify whether to detect any fault in the I/O module such faults in
the module that will not case a fault in access such as blowing of a
built-in fuse.
Yes: Detect
No: Not detect
Instantaneous AC failure
time (ms)
142
6F8C1290
Specify the duration for detecting a momentary power failure when
AC power of the power unit has dropped. Specify 0 for not
detecting any power failure.
2.5
Meanings of Module Parameters
Ore. at instantaneous AC
failure
Select the operation when a momentary AC failure has been
detected.
Error down continuous operation
Instantaneous DC failure
time (s)
Specify the duration for detecting a momentary power failure when
DC power of the power unit has dropped. Specify 0 for not
detecting any power failure.
SS task enabled
Set the execution of super-high-speed scan task.
Specify No if not used.
HS task enabled
Set the execution of high-speed scan task.
Specify No if not used.
MS task enabled
Set the execution of main scan task.
Specify No if not used.
SS task scan time(ms)
Set the execution cycle of super-high-speed scan task.
HS task scan time(ms)
Set the execution cycle of high-speed scan task.
MS task scan time(ms)
Set the execution cycle of main scan task.
Set 0 for floating scan.
BG task run mode
Background task execution mode
Single execution: The mode where the task is executed once
when its initialization is requested.
Cyclic execution: The mode where the task is executed at
intervals of a certain number of scans specified
on the number of cycles while the initializing
request continues.
BG task run time (ms)
In case where the main scan is a floating scan, set the execution
cycle of background task.
Set 0 (floating scan) when main scan is periodical scan.
BG task cycle count
Background task is executed at intervals of the number of cycles
set.
Com. task wait time(ms)
This is the parameter to perform the tuning of sequence control
processing and data communication processing. Set this
parameter to the default value (0) if your are not familiar with the
system.
RS485 station No
Specify the ID No. to identify the station connected to the RS485
cable.
RS485 boud rate (bit/s)
Select the communication rate for RS485.
RS485 parity
Specify the parity bit attached to unit data of RS485.
RS485 data length
Specify the data length to be transmitted on unit data of RS485.
RS485 stop bit
Specify the stop bit length to be attached to unit data of RS485.
I/O-less test
Specify whether to perform I/O without using actual I/O module.
Non I/O less bus No
Specify the Bus No. of the TOSLINE-S20 excluded from I/O-less
test.
Non I/O less unit No
Specify the Unit No. of the TOSLINE-S20 excluded from I/O-less
test.
Non I/O less slot No
Specify the Slot No. of the TOSLINE-S20 excluded from I/O-less
test.
Log at setting clock at
program
Specify whether to record time update from user program in event
log.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
143
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Computer link Ethernet
SlotNo
Specify the Ethernet slot when connecting equipment such as MMI
with computer link protocol via Ethernet.
Computer link UDP PortNo Specify the UDP Port No. for computer link.
SS task tracking
Specify whether to track super high-speed scan task.
HS task tracking
Specify whether to track high-speed scan task.
MS task tracking
Specify whether to track main scan task.
BG task tracking
Specify whether to track background task.
SW register tracking
Specify whether to track SW register.
DW register tracking
Specify whether to track DW register.
Tracked DW start No
Specify the top register No. when tracking DW register.
Tracked DW end No
Specify the last register No. when tracking DW register.
User global var. tracking
Specify whether to track user global variable.
Station global var. tracking Specify whether to track station global variable.
144
6F8C1290
IQ register tracking
Specify whether to track I/Q register.
Compensation unit
Specify the unit to be used for tag temperature and pressure
compensation.
Time zone bias
Specify the difference between GMT and the local time.
Numerical input (-13 to 13, 0 is treated the same as 9)
Scan sync. Tag data
writing
Specify whether to synchronize update of tag data from OIS-DS
with task scan.
DO read back processing
Specify whether to perform output readback with the standard
controller function (linealize function) when control mode is M for
digital tag with mode (push button tag).
Fast-speed I/O scan time
(ms)
Specify the high-speed I/O scan cycle.
Middle-speed I/O
schedule num
Specify the number medium-speed I/O scan data is divided into
by the high-speed scan cycle.
Fall back I/O card
Bus*-Unit* (hex)
Specify the I/O fallback operation for each card when I/O fault is
detected. (hex)
Specify input with bits.
0: Error down
1: I/O fallback
Local initialize
Specify whether to initialize user defined local variables. System
assigned local variables are initialized.
Controller No.
Specify a unique number within the system assigned to the
controller.
DS scan
Specify whether to perform realtime trend.
Inter-controller com.
Specify whether to broadcast any data.
Momentary judgment DI
module No.
This item is currently unused.
Momentary judgment DI
point No.
This item is currently unused.
LDU Alarm confirm type
The method of returning the alarm displayed on a loop display is
chosen.
2.5
Meanings of Module Parameters
I/O Signal processing
mode
Whether the I/O processing to G3I/O is done at high speed is
specified.
Combination condition:S3 V2.72 or higher
Target I/O module
Select the MELPLAC I/O module for the block transfer registration.
PIO Address
Input the area in process I/O for the block transfer registration.
Word Size
Input the word size for the block transfer registration.
Scan data block No.
Input the scan block number of TC-net100 for the block transfer
registration.
Scan data word No.
The offset address of the scan block for the block transfer
registration.
I/O direction
Select the direction where process I/O is input and output data for
the block transfer registration.
Duplex system alarm
Select the state in case the secondary side is on-line operation.
Standard: Minor alarm
Special: Normal
Combination condition:S3PU65A V02.79 or higher, S2PU82 V02.02
or higher
Ethernet
• EN7, EN6, EN5, FN7, FN6, ENGW-5654
IP address type
Select the address type for the Ethernet card. The offset value of
the address on the secondary side on a duplex LAN configuration
varies depending the address type.
ClassB type: 172.16.64.XX, subnet mask: 255.255.192.0
TOSDIC-CIE 1200 type: 192.0.0.XX, subnet mask:
255.255.255.192
Arbitrary: Any value can be set from the tool.
Primary IP address
Set the IP address of the network card on the primary side in a
single-station configuration or duplex-station configuration.
Primary sub-net mask
Set the sub-net mask value of the network card on the primary
side in a single-station configuration or duplex-station
configuration.
Secondary IP address
Set the IP address of the Ethernet card on the secondary side in a
duplex-station configuration.
Secondary sub-net mask
Set the sub-net mask value of the Ethernet card on the secondary
side in a duplex-station configuration.
Total number of multicast
When setting a multicast group, set the number of multicasts that
are used sequentially from [Multicast IP1].
Multicast IP
Set the values that do not overlap each other within the range from
[225.224.0.1] to [225.224.0.15] as IP addresses for a multicast
group.
Option switch 0
ON: A transmission-line diagnostic function is operated at the time
of the free mode.
Default gateway IP
address in the free mode
Specify the PI address of the default gateway (router).
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
145
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
TC-net
• TN7, TNH, TNGW-5652, FMGW1, CN7, CN6
IP address type
Select an address type.
Vseries standard 1: 172.16.64.XX: subnet mask: 255.255.192.0
Vseries standard 2: 172.31.64.XX: subnet mask: 255.255.192.0
Any: Any value can be set from the tool.
• In the case of FMGW1
Fixed: 192.168.0.XX: subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Any: Any value can be set from the tool.
146
6F8C1290
Primary IP address
Set the IP address of the network card on the primary side in a
single-station configuration or duplex-station configuration.
Primary sub-net mask
Set the subnet mask of the network card on the primary side in a
single station configuration or duplex-station configuration.
Secondary IP address
Set the IP address of the network card on the secondary side in a
duplex-station configuration.
Secondary sub-net mask
Set the subnet mask of the Ethernet card on the secondary side in
a duplex-station configuration.
Total number of multicast
Specify the number to be used consecutively from [multicast IP1]
when setting multicast group.
Multicast IP
Specify unique multicast group IP addresses between
[225.224.0.1] and [225.224.0.15].
Scan enabled
Set the operation of scan communication (stopping of receiving
cannot be set).
Stop: Stop transmission.
Start: Start transmission
High-speed scan cycle
time (ms) / (0.1ms)
Set the scan cycle for high-speed transmission blocks.
Middle-speed scan cycle
time (multiples)
Set the scan cycle for medium-speed transmission blocks
(multiples of the high-speed scan cycle).
Middle-speed scan cycle
time (ms)
Set the scan cycle for medium-speed transmission blocks.
Low-speed scan cycle
time (ms)
Set the scan cycle for low-speed transmission blocks.
Scan stop at all hosts
down
Scanning operation when the host device (S/L/C controller) has
shut down.
No: Not stop
Yes: Stop
Scan run at hosts1 down
Scanning operation when Slot 0 of the host device (S/L/C
controller) has shut down.
No: Stop
Yes: Not stop
Scan run at hosts2 down
Scanning operation when Slot 1 of the host device (S/L/C
controller) has shut down.
No: Stop
Yes: Not stop
2.5
Meanings of Module Parameters
Scan run at hosts3 down
Scanning operation when Slot 2 of the host device(S/L/C
controller) has shut down.
No: Stop
Yes: Not stop
Scan run at hosts4 down
Scanning operation when Slot 3 of the host device(S/L/C
controller) has shut down.
No: Stop
Yes: Not stop
Receiver
When communication line is duplicated, set which communication
line is to be used.
Automatic selection/forced receiving on the A system/forces
receiving on the B system
Link address
When the network is nested, set which network is to be selected
(this is a parameter for future use).
High-speed talker block 1- Head word No. in the high-speed block area
head word No
High-speed talker block 1- Size of the high-speed transmission block area
number of words
Middle-speed talker block
1- head word No
Head word No. in the medium-speed block area
Middle-speed talker block
1- number of words
Size of the medium-speed transmission block area
Maximum distance
between nodes (km)
Specify the farthest distance between nodes. However, specify 8
km if this is less than the default 8 km.
Maximum number of
repeaters
Specify the value for the path with the most number of repeaters.
However, specify 3 if this is less than the default 3.
Option switch 0
ON:Stand alone mode
A scan is carried out by one set.
Option switch 1
ON:self healthy mode
A local station transmitting block is surely made healthy.
TOSLINE-S20
• SN3, SN2, SN6, L1PU12
Scan enabled
Set the operation of scan communication.
Yes: Perform scan communication.
No: Stop scan communication.
Scan access
Se the continuity of the data transmitted and received by scan
communication.
Unit of 1Word Assure continuity of data in units of 1Word.
Unit of 2Words Assure continuity of data in units of 2Words.
Message enabled
Set the operation of message communication.
Yes: Start message communication.
No: Stop message communication.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
147
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Scan cycle time
This is the parameter to control the transmission time for message
communication.
(Allowed transmission time for message communication)=(Target
cycle time)-(Time interval between the acquisition transmission
right in the former cycles and the acquisition of transmission right
on the next cycle)
Standby startup
Yes: Enter standby state at startup (do not perform scan
transmission).
No: Start scan transmission upon startup.
Talker top address 1
Specify the head address of the transmission block area.
Talker word address 1
Specify the size of the transmission block area.
SIF
Slot n controller is parent
Set when placing this SIF under the control of slot n.
I/O module
148
6F8C1290
Filter
Select the frequency to cut noises that contaminates into analog
input signals.
Range
Select the input signal conversion range.
Input
Select presence or absence of input processing.
Scale at wire break
Set the output value when the signal wire to the sensor has been
broken.
Downscale:Equal to count 0
Output points num.
Select the number of analog output points. Output of the
specified number of points is performed from the first point. The
I/O renewal interval increases as the number of output points
increases.
Output hold at emg.
Select the process when abnormal output of the module has
occurred.
No: Reset the output value to the level equal to count 0 (0V or 0A).
Yes: Hold the output value.
CCDI hold time (100ms)
Hoed detection of changes in state (This a parameter for future
use.)
Signal type
Select signal type of pulse.
Unit time for the
instantaneous value
(10ms)
Pulse count per specified time interval is defined as the
momentary value.The unit is 10 ms.
Threshold
Se the threshold voltage.
Pulse slow / fast
Select the type of output pulse signal.
Pulse train/width
Select the type of output pulse signal.
Hold time
When the direction of pulse has been reversed, set the time until
the stoppage of pulse output. The unit is 100ms.
The unit is V.
2.5
Meanings of Module Parameters
Backlash compensation
time
When the direction of pulse has been reversed, set the value to be
added to correct the output of pulse. The unit varies depending on
the type of output signal.
Pulse width output In units of 100 pulse row output: In units of 1
count.
AI: Input
Select wither to perform input processing or not.
AI: Scale at wire break
Set the output value when the signal wire to the sensor has been
broken.
Downscale: Equal to count 0
AI: Range
Input signal conversion range.
Fixed between 1-5 V
DI: CCDI holding time
(100ms)
Hoed detection of changes in state(This a parameter for future
use.)
PO: Pulse slow / fast
Select the type of output pulse signal.
Pulse train / width
Select the type of output pulse signal. (”Width” alone can be
specified.)
Hold time (100 ms)
When the direction of pulse has been reversed, set the time until
the stoppage of pulse output. The unit is 100ms.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
149
Chapter 2
2.6
Registering Hardware
Changing I/O Connection Area
This section describes how to set the area for each connection type.
Important
• Make sure the areas do not overlap.
• Make sure %IQ number is not less than the total words occupied by card for each type.
• Please input the even number to a set value.
• Please be the same as %IQ use number or input to %IQ number any more.
[nv series]
Displaying area assignment
Select a Station at bottom left of the Product Tree and select <I/O Connection
Setting Range> from the <File> menu.
Tab <I/O>: Displaying and setting for each I/O type area.
Tab <Task>: Displaying and setting for each task type area.
150
6F8C1290
2.6
Changing I/O Connection Area
Column <%IQ Used number>: Number of used registers. Blue letter means
‘’Read Only”.
Changing area assignment
Click the column <%IQ Top No.> or <%IQ number> and enter the value.
The characters turn red when changed. Select <Save> to save the change.
[Attention]
Because the address of the I/O variable and the station variable is changed
when <%IQ top No.> is changed, it is necessary to compile the program
again. Afterwards, please execute the batch download.
[V series]
Displaying area assignment
Select a Station at bottom left of the Product Tree and select <I/O Connection
Setting Range> from the <File> menu.
When the main unit of the selected station is BU74A (for RIO), it changes in
each controller. Please select the controller who sets it on the screen.
The %IQ use number shows the number of registers which have already been
used.
As for TC-net10 and a station global, the value of the controller who is using a
lot of registers is displayed when two or more station registration of the
controller (The main unit excludes BU74A).
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
151
Chapter 2
Registering Hardware
Changing area assignment
To change, click the %IQ Top No. or %IQ number column and enter the value.
The characters turn red when changed. Select <Save> to save the change.
[Attention]
Because the address of the I/O variable and the station variable is changed
when %IQ top No. is changed, it is necessary to compile the program again.
Afterwards, please execute the batch download.
152
6F8C1290
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
The following types of variable are available:
• Local variable
Variables used only within a program and not made available externally.
• Controller variable
Variables used within a controller and made accessible to more than one
control program.
• Station variable
Shared memory used to pass data between main modules (Controller, Ethernet,
TC-net, etc.). The same variable name can be used to program within a station.
• I/O variable
Process I/O signal available outside the station. Signals are input/output via I/O
card configured for each station.
• Network variable
Scan data on scan transmission method control LAN. The same variable name
can be used to program among stations connected via this LAN.
The following items are described:
3.1
Registering Controller Variables······················ 154
3.2
Registering Station Variables··························· 158
3.3
Registering I/O Variables ·································· 165
3.4
Registering Network Variables························· 168
3.5
Defining User Data Type (Structure) ················ 175
153
Chapter 3
3.1
Registering Variables
Registering Controller Variables
This section describes how to register controller variables (variables shared
used within a controller and shared among multiple control programs).
Opening a controller variable
1) In the [Product Tree], select [Controller memories] under a controller.
2) Click the [Controller memories] icon (example: SW, DW, User, etc.) on the
right side of the [Product Tree] and select <Controller variables> from the
<File> menu.
Edit lock
Editing is locked just after startup, so you cannot update and delete the
variables.
Unlock the edit lock to perform input operation.
The line for adding which marked '*' is always available.
154
6F8C1290
3.1
Registering Controller Variables
Registering variables
Click [Variable] in a blank row. Enter the variable name.
Enter the data type of the variable in [Data type].
Enter the value of the variable in [Value]. Input is enabled when the data type is
basic type.
Enter the comment of the variable in [Comment].
Enter 'Yes' in [Const] if the value of the variable is to be constant.
Enter the word address within the controller in [Word No]. If input is omitted, it
is assigned automatically.
Enter the bit number in [Bit No] if the variable type is [BOOL].
To delete a variable, click the column to the left of the row to delete and press
the [Del] key while a row is selected.
Note
For safety engineering, there are following restrictions after updating and deleting the
variables.
1) After deleting registrations, used address is not available for automatically
assignment.
2) After updating data-type, used address is not available for automatically assignment.
3) After updating address, used address is not available for automatically assignment.
4) Over and over again operated 1), 2) or 3), variables can not be assigned
automatically. In this case, please try batch compiling. Used address is available
again.
Searching variables
Enter the variable to search in [Find Word] and click the [Find] button.
Changing variable display order
Change [Address] in [Order] to sort by Word No. Click [Variable] to sort by
variable name.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
155
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Registering variable member
When the data type is user (structure) or array, expand [Variable member] and
enter a value.
Double-click a row, or select a row and click a [Variable Member] button.
Drag & drop operation
Drag a variable name and drop in the [Data monitor], [Data view] window to
register as monitor target.
Or drop in the [Program Editor] window to use it as variable name.
Registering default variables
The default variable of "1.3.17 Controller Variables" can be registered.
Unlock the edit lock and click [Default variable] button. Refresh the variable
screen after registration.
Registering variables for RIO special register 'SW register'
(MELPLAC I/O)
This registration is used in following case:
• 'SW Register(s)' of RIO controller for MELPLAC I/O assign as the Network
Variables on Tc-net100.
• Using these variables, upper Controller can check the I/O Fallback status
of RIO Controller.
For operation, please see the manual "3.3 Registering IO Variables".
After registering variables, using [Undefined network variables] window, they
can be assigned as Network Variables.
156
6F8C1290
3.1
Registering Controller Variables
The main information on SW register is as follows:
1) I/O No ACK, Parity, Card Error (Major Failure)
SWNo. = 80 + BB*14 + UU (BB: Bus No., UU: Unit No.)
Bit No.0 to 13 means each Slot No. status. (1: Error, 0: Normal)
2) I/O Fallback
SWNo. = 110 + BB*14 + UU (BB: Bus No., UU: Unit No.)
Bit No.0 to 13 means each Slot No. status. (1: Fallback, 0: Normal)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
157
Chapter 3
3.2
Registering Variables
Registering Station Variables
This section describes how to register station variables (variables shared
among main modules).
Important
• When station variables are registered, please download configurations to controller.
If configurations includes I/O connections are not downloaded, batch I/O processing
can not be executed.
• Using 'I/O Connections Online Downloading' function, the controller don’t need to be
halted, and batch I/O processing can not be executed after adding variables.
• See '7.2 Batch Downloading to Controller' to know how to use 'I/O Connections Online
Downloading' function.
Opening a station variable
1) In the [Product Tree], select [Station memories] under a station.
2) Click the 'User' icon on the right side of the [Product Tree] and select
<Station variables> from the <File> menu. The output side controller
appears in the window title.
158
6F8C1290
3.2
Registering Station Variables
Edit lock
Editing is locked just after startup, so you cannot update and delete the
variables.
Unlock the edit lock to perform input operation.
The line for adding which marked '*' is always available.
Registering the output variable
Click [Variable] in a blank row at the top of the window. Enter the variable
name.
Enter the data type of the variable in [Data type].
Enter the comment of the variable in [Comment].
Specify a task (MS: Main task, HS: High-speed task) to synchronize I/O in [I/O
speed]. (S controller: MS fixed, L controller: MS, HS)
Enter the word address of the station global in [Word No]. If input is omitted, it
is assigned automatically.
Enter the bit number in [Bit No] if the variable type is [BOOL].
To delete a variable, click the column to the left of the row to delete and press
the [Del] key while a row is selected.
Searching variables
Enter the variable to search in [Find Word] and click the [Find] button.
Changing variable display order
Change [Address] in [Order] to sort by Word No. Click [Variable] to sort by
variable name.
Assigning I/O variables to the controller
1) Select the controller to input the variable from the [InController] pull down
list.
2) Click the left edge of the output variable row to select the row. Click while
pressing the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key to select multiple rows.
3) Click the [Assign to inputs] button. Then the variables selected as output
variable appears as input controller variable (bottom of screen).
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
159
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Drag & drop operation
Drag a variable name and drop in the [Data monitor], [Data view] window to
register as monitor target.
Or drop in the [Program Editor] window to use it as variable name.
RAS variable of network card
When 'Standard' of the network card is displayed and click [Default variable]
button, The RAS variable can be registered.
The model and the variable identifier are as shown in the following table. Slot
No of the card is added at the end of the variable identifier. Please refer to the
manual of each card for a detailed meaning of the variable identifier. The
starting address is a relative address from the head of the station memory
allocated to each card.
160
6F8C1290
3.2
Registering Station Variables
[RAS variable of nv series]
Module
No.
Variable Name
Data type
Start Address
TN821
1
TC_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340608
TN821
2
TC_UHLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340736
TN821
3
TC_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..2047] OF WORD
342016
TN821
4
TC_RASINF_
ARRAY[0..16383] OF WORD
344064
TN821
5
TC_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
TN822
1
TC_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340608
TN822
2
TC_UHLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340736
TN822
3
TC_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..2047] OF WORD
342016
TN822
4
TC_RASINF_
ARRAY[0..16383] OF WORD
344064
TN822
5
TC_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN811
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN811
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN811
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN811
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN812
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN812
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN812
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN812
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN821
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN821
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN821
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN821
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
FN812
1
FN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
FN812
2
FN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
FN812
3
FN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
FN812
4
FN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
161
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
[RAS variable of V series]
Module
162
6F8C1290
No.
Variable Name
Data type
Start Address
CN611
1
CN_ONLMAP_
ARRAY[0..1] OF DWORD
65284
CN611
2
CN_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..255] OF DWORD
64768
CN611
3
CN_STSTS_
DWORD
65320
CN612
1
CN_ONLMAP_
ARRAY[0..1] OF DWORD
65284
CN612
2
CN_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..255] OF DWORD
64768
CN612
3
CN_STSTS_
DWORD
65320
CN711
1
CN_ONLMAP_
ARRAY[0..1] OF DWORD
65284
CN711
2
CN_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..255] OF DWORD
64768
CN711
3
CN_STSTS_
DWORD
65320
CN712
1
CN_ONLMAP_
ARRAY[0..1] OF DWORD
65284
CN712
2
CN_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..255] OF DWORD
64768
CN712
3
CN_STSTS_
DWORD
65320
CN623
1
CN_ONLMAP_
ARRAY[0..1] OF DWORD
65284
CN623
2
CN_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..255] OF DWORD
64768
CN623
3
CN_STSTS_
DWORD
65320
CN623
4
CN_LOOPMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
65408
TN711
1
TC_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340608
TN711
2
TC_UHLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340736
TN711
3
TC_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..2047] OF WORD
342016
TN711
4
TC_RASINF_
ARRAY[0..16383] OF WORD
344064
TN711
5
TC_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
TN712
1
TC_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340608
TN712
2
TC_UHLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340736
TN712
3
TC_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..2047] OF WORD
342016
TN712
4
TC_RASINF_
ARRAY[0..16383] OF WORD
344064
TN712
5
TC_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
TN721
1
TC_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340608
TN721
2
TC_UHLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340736
TN721
3
TC_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..2047] OF WORD
342016
TN721
4
TC_RASINF_
ARRAY[0..16383] OF WORD
344064
TN721
5
TC_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
TN722
1
TC_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340608
TN722
2
TC_UHLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..63] OF DWORD
340736
TN722
3
TC_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..2047] OF WORD
342016
TN722
4
TC_RASINF_
ARRAY[0..16383] OF WORD
344064
TN722
5
TC_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN611
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
3.2
Module
No.
Variable Name
Data type
Registering Station Variables
Start Address
EN611
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN611
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN611
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN621
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN621
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN621
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN621
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN631
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN631
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN631
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN631
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN641
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN641
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN641
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN641
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN651
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN651
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN651
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN651
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN661
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN661
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN661
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN661
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN711
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN711
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN711
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN711
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN721
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN721
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN721
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN721
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN731
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN731
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN731
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN731
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN741
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN741
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN741
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN741
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
163
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Module
164
6F8C1290
No.
Variable Name
Data type
Start Address
EN751
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN751
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN751
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN751
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
EN761
1
EN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
EN761
2
EN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
EN761
3
EN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
EN761
4
EN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
FN711
1
FN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
FN711
2
FN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
FN711
3
FN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
FN711
4
FN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
FN611
1
FN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130944
FN611
2
FN_SOCKET2_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
130784
FN611
3
FN_NODEMAPA_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130912
FN611
4
FN_NODEMAPB_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
130928
AN712
1
AN_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..31] OF DWORD
28672
AN712
2
AN_UHLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..31] OF DWORD
28736
AN712
3
AN_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..31] OF DWORD
28800
AN712
4
AN_INRINGMAP_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
28864
AN712
5
AN_ONLMAP_
ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD
28880
AN712
6
AN_LVLS_
ARRAY[0..256] OF WORD
28896
AN712
7
AN_STSTS_
WORD
29153
AN712
8
AN_STNADR_
ARRAY[0..5] OF WORD
29154
AN712
9
AN_APIHLTH_
ARRAY[0..7] OF WORD
32256
AN712
10
AN_SOCKET_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
32640
AN777
1
AN_ACSERR1_
WORD
130650
AN777
2
AN_ACSERR2_
WORD
130652
AN777
3
AN_STSTS_
WORD
262182
AN777
4
AN_ONLMAP_
ARRAY[0..15] OF WORD
262256
AN777
5
AN_RING_
ARRAY[0..511] OF DWORD
262272
AN777
6
AN_STSLST_
ARRAY[0..255] OF DWORD
263296
AN777
7
AN_HLTYMAP_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
263808
AN777
8
AN_TALKMAP_
ARRAY[0..127] OF WORD
263936
AN777
9
AN_ACSSTS1_
WORD
4456448
AN777
10
AN_ACSSTS2_
WORD
4456450
3.3
3.3
Registering I/O Variables
Registering I/O Variables
This section describes how to register I/O variables (process I/O signal).
Opening an I/O variable
1) In the [Product Tree], select [I/O module].
2) Select <I/O variables> in the <File> menu.
Edit lock
Editing is locked just after startup, so you cannot update and delete the
variables.
Unlock the edit lock to perform input operation.
The line for adding which marked '*' is always available.
Registering I/O variables
Click [I/O Word No] in a blank row and enter the I/O module word No.
Enter the bit number in [Bit No] if the variable type is [BOOL].
Enter the variable name to be assigned to the I/O word No. and bit No. in
[Variable].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
165
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Enter the data type of the variable in [Data type].
Enter the comment of the variable in [Comment].
Specify a task (MS: Main task, HS: High-speed task) to synchronize I/O in [I/O
speed]. (S controller: MS fixed, L controller: MS, HS)
In [Out. Cnt. Slot], enter the controller to output the signal when output
module.
To delete a variable, click the column to the left of the row to delete and press
the [Del] key while a row is selected.
In case of using batch I/O variables, these I/O variables are used.
In case of using direct I/O variables, please add a charactor “_” (Under score)
to the end of I/O variables name. (Ex.: “AI000” -> “AI000_”)
Important
• Even if “Direct IN/OUT” is selected on “I/O” field, a charactor “_” must be added on
programing.
Searching variables
Partial characters are searched from all I/O variables name of the selected
system.
Input the characters to search in [Find Word] and click the [Find] button.
If they are found, displaying cursor is moved to the I/O variable. If [Find] button
is pushed again, it is moved to next target.
Special characters '*' and '?' can be used as follows:
Input characters
Found variables
Note
'ABC'
XABC, ABC345, XXXABC45
Characters included 'ABC'.
'A??C'
XAZZC, AXXC345, XYZA89C45
Characters included 2 characters
between 'A' and 'B'.
'A*C'
XAZC, AXXXXXC345, XYZAB99C45
Characters included some
characters between 'A' and 'B'.
Changing variable display order
Change [Address] in [Order] to sort by Word No. Click [Variable] to sort by
variable name.
166
6F8C1290
3.3
Registering I/O Variables
Drag & drop operation
Drag a variable name and drop in the [Data monitor], [Data view] window to
register as monitor target.
Or drop in the [Program Editor] window to use it as variable name.
Registering I/O variables (MELPLAC I/O)
1) Register module parameters before registering I/O variables.
Select [I/O module] on the [Product Tree]. Select <Module Parameters> in
the <File> menu.
Input values on the [Module parameter] window
Please see the V-Tool manual '2.4 Registering Module Parameters'.
2) Open I/O variable window.
Select [I/O module] on the [Product Tree]. Select <I/O variables> in the
<File> menu.
3) Select I/O area.
When the I/O area names appear in tabs, select the tab for which you want
to register the value.
4) Register I/O variables.
Please see the V-Tool manual in this section: ' Registering I/O variables'.
Supplementary
• In some module types, you need to select 'Batch IN' or 'Batch OUT' in [I/O] item.
Please refer to the manual of MELPLAC I/O Modules to know which should be
selected.
5) Assign I/O variables of RIO as network variables.
Please see the V-Tool manual '3.4 Registering Network Variables'.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
167
Chapter 3
3.4
Registering Variables
Registering Network Variables
This section describes how to register network variables (variables shared
among stations connected to scan transmission method control LAN).
Important
• When network variables are registered, please download configurations to controller.
If configurations includes I/O connections are not downloaded, batch I/O processing
can not be executed.
• Using 'I/O Connections Online Downloading' function, the controller don’t need to be
halted, and batch I/O processing can not be executed after adding variables.
• See '7.2 Batch Downloading to Controller' to know how to use 'I/O Connections Online
Downloading' function.
Opening a transmit block
1) In the [Product Tree], select a network.
2) Click 'Talker blocks' on the right side of the [Product Tree] and select
<Talker blocks> from the <File> menu. The network type name appears
in the screen title.
168
6F8C1290
3.4
Registering Network Variables
Registering the transmit block data
Enter the start word address of the block in [Word No].
Enter the word size used by the block in [Word Len.].
Note: Selecting the multiple of 64 as 'Word Length' in TC-net100LAN, two or
more continuation blocks can be registered as the same block ('block
range'). Exceeding 64 words as the data type should be defined in
Network Variable using the user data type (Array or Structure), please
change this Value. In that case, the Talker block on TC-net100 is also
fixed 64-words.
Specify the transmission speed (Low: Slow, Medium: Normal, High: Fast) in
[Trans. Speed].
In [Talker Node], specify the transmission module for the control LAN.
In [Source], enter the controller to output the scan data.
To delete a variable, click the column to the left of the row to delete and press
the [Del] key while a row is selected.
When TC-net10/20 is registered
It is necessary to register transmit block data of TC-net10/20 by both [Talker
blocks] and [Module parameter].
[Product Tree] After the module is selected, the menu <File><Module
parameter> is selected.
[Module parameter] screen opens.
It allocates to four high-speed blocks and four middle-speed blocks.
Enter the start word address of the block in [Top address].
Enter the word size used by the block in [Word size].
Top address, word size, and transmission speed (High speed or Middle
speed) allocated here are set to [Talker blocks].
Note: It must agree to the content registered by the [Module parameter]
though Top address, Word size, and the transmission speed are
acceptable even if it allocates it to where in [Talker blocks].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
169
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Opening a network variable
Double-click the registered block No. or click [Open network] at top right of the
window.
Edit lock
Editing is locked just after startup, so you cannot update and delete the
variables.
Unlock the edit lock to perform input operation.
The line for adding which marked '*' is always available.
170
6F8C1290
3.4
Registering Network Variables
Registering the output variable
Click [Variable] in a blank row at the top of the window.
name.
Enter the variable
Enter the data type of the variable in [Data type].
Enter the comment of the variable in [Comment].
Specify a task (MS: Main task, HS: High-speed task) to synchronize I/O in [I/O
Speed]. (S controller: MS fixed, L controller: MS, HS)
Enter the word address of the station global in [Word No]. If input is omitted,
it is assigned automatically.
Enter the bit number in [Bit No] if the variable type is [BOOL].
To delete a variable, click the column to the left of the row to delete and press
the [Del] key while a row is selected.
Assigning I/O variables under RIO to network variables
Click the [Open Undefined var.] button to assign I/O variables under RIO to
TC-net100 LAN network variables. When the [Undefined network variables]
dialog box opens, select one or more variables and drag and drop on output
variables. The output variable assigned as output controller becomes an RIO
controller in the case of device input and a non-RIO controller in the case of
device output.
Searching variables
Output Variables:
Partial characters are searched from all network variables name of the
selected system.
Input the characters to search in [Find Word] and click the [Find] button.
If they are found, displaying cursor is moved to the network variable. If
[Find] button is pushed again, it is moved to next target.
Special characters '*' and '?' can be used as follows:
Input characters
Found variables
Note
'ABC'
XABC, ABC345, XXXABC45
Characters included 'ABC'.
'A??C'
XAZZC, AXXC345, XYZA89C45
Characters included 2 characters
between 'A' and 'B'.
'A*C'
XAZC, AXXXXXC345, XYZAB99C45
Characters included some
characters between 'A' and 'B'.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
171
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Input Variables:
Variable name is searched from all network variables name of the selected
system.
Select an output variable to search and click the [Find] button.
If it is found, displaying cursor is moved to the network variable. If [Find]
button is pushed again, it is moved to next target.
Searching output variables
Searching input variables
Changing variable display order
Change [Address] in [Order] to sort by Word No. Click [Variable] to sort by
variable name.
Assigning to input variable
1) Select the controller to input the variable from the [InNode] and
[InController] pull down list.
2) Click the left edge of the output variable row to select the row.
pressing the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key to select multiple rows.
Click while
3) Click the [Assign to inputs] button. Then the variables selected as output
variable appears as input controller variable (bottom of window).
172
6F8C1290
3.4
Registering Network Variables
Drag & drop operation
Drag a variable name and drop in the [Data monitor], [Data view] window to
register as monitor target.
Or drop in the [Program Editor] window to use it as variable name.
Online monitoring
To monitor data of registered variables, select <Controller> of [Values].
Important
• When you want to monitor the following field network data of RIO station, you must
assign variables on TC-net100 network.
G3 I/O: TL-S20, Devicenet, Profibus
5800 I/O: TL-S20, TL-30, TL-100, TL-1000
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
173
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Assigning FL-net RAS Information variables under RIO to
network variables
This registration is used in following case:
• RAS information for FL-net like 'Node status' and 'Node map' assigns as the
Network Variables on Tc-net100.
• Using these variables, upper Controller can check them.
Please register as follows:
1) Register 'other station' of FL-net LAN
The 'other station' is used to assign RAS Information as input variables.
2) Register talker block of 'other station'
See following 'The RAS information on FL-net network'.
3) Register network variable
Assign 'Node status' and 'Node map' as the Network Variables on FL-net
LAN.
4) Register input variable of FL-net LAN
Assign as input variable of RIO controller.
5) Register output variables of TC-net100 LAN
Assign as output variable from undefined variables.
6) Register input variable of TC-net100 LAN
Assign as input variable of S3 controller.
The RAS information on FL-net network is as follows:
1) Node status
Top address = 3001h (Please register '12289' to 'Word no.' of 'Talker
Block'.)
Size = 1 word
Format: See the manual of FL311/FL312 ('Chapter 11 RAS Function',
6F8C1067)
2) Cyclic node map
Top address = 306Bh (Please register '12395' to 'Word no.' of 'Talker
Block'.)
Size = 16 words
Format: See the manual of FL311/FL312 ('Chapter 11 RAS Function',
6F8C1067)
174
6F8C1290
3.5
3.5
Defining User Data Type (Structure)
Defining User Data Type (Structure)
This section describes how to define any data type that is not basic type or its
array.
Opening a library
1) In the [Product Tree], click [Libraries].
2) Click 'Work' on the right side of the [Product Tree] and select <Library>
from the <File> menu.
Registering user data type
Click [Data type] in a blank row. Enter the user data type name.
Enter 'STRUCT' in [Parent type].
Enter the comment of the user data type in [Comment].
To delete a user data type, click the column to the left of the row and press the
[Del] key while a row is selected.
Searching a user data type
Enter the user data type name to search in [Find Word] and click the [Find]
button.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
175
Chapter 3
Registering Variables
Opening a user data type member
A user data type row is double-clicked, or a [Structure Member] button is
clicked after choosing a row.
Registering a user data type member
Click [Member] in a blank row. Enter the user data type member name.
Enter the data type of the member in [Data type].
Enter the initial value of the member in [Value]. Input is enabled when the data
type is basic type.
Enter the comment of the member in [Comment].
Drag & drop operation
Drag the data type and drop in the [Controller variable], [Station variable], [I/O
variable], or [Network variable] window to use as data type.
Change the allocation of a user data type member
On the User data type member window, the option 'Even Address Forced'
means as follows:
• 'No': The user data type members are allocated tightly.
• 'Yes': They are aligned on the double-word address.
Note
• If Option 'Even Address Forced' is 'No', the Network or Station variables using this
Structure which may has REAL,DINT,DWORD data types which length is over 2-word
will have wrong values at run time.
176
6F8C1290
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
This topic describes how to register parameters to process signals exchanged
with sensors and actuators connected to the L controller. This determines the
standard processing of process signals and the display on instruments.
The following topics are described:
4.1
Registering Tags ··············································· 178
4.2
Meaning of Tag Parameters······························ 188
4.2.1 MCS type ················································· 188
4.2.2 DS type ···················································· 204
4.3
Importing Tags ·················································· 234
4.4
Exporting Tags ·················································· 237
177
Chapter 4
4.1
Registering Tag Variables
Registering Tags
This topic explains how to register Tag No. and Parameters using Tag Editor.
Start tag editor
Select the station to display in the [Product Tree] and select <File><Tag
Editor> to start the Tag Editor.
Parameters
Each Controllers has the following Parameters.
[MCS type]
L3PU11
L2PU1*
L1PU1*
LC5**
PV : Indicator
OK
OK
OK
LP : Loop
OK
OK
OK
PB: Push button
OK
OK
OK
SQ: Sequence Panel
OK
OK
None
T: Timer
OK
OK
None
C: Counter
OK
OK
None
R: General Parameters (Real)
OK
OK
OK
W: General Parameters (Integer)
OK
OK
OK
P: Polynomial Line
OK
OK
OK
GD: Guidance
OK
OK
OK
F: Communication Data (Real)
OK
OK
OK
I: Communication Data (Integer)
OK
OK
OK
VB: Batch Control interface
OK
OK
None
Parameters
178
6F8C1290
4.1
Registering Tags
[DS type]
L3PU21
L2PU22
FN711
FN611
PU821
PV : Indicator
OK
OK
OK
OK
LP : Loop
OK
OK
OK
OK
PB: Push button
OK
OK
OK
OK
SQ: Sequence Panel
OK
OK
None
OK
Parameters
TC:Timer Counter
OK
OK
None
OK
DB:Data Block
OK
OK
None
OK
T: Timer
OK
OK
None
OK
C: Counter
OK
OK
None
OK
R: General Parameters (Real)
OK
OK
None
OK
W: General Parameters (Integer)
OK
OK
None
OK
P: Polynomial Line
OK
OK
None
OK
None
None
OK
OK
RTT: DS Scan Parameter
Display parameters
Select item [Parameter] on the tool bar to open the parameter view.
There are five columns.
Item
Shows items that can be registered for the selected parameter.
Tool Value
Shows the value registered offline.
Controller Value
Shows the value read from the controller.
Data Type
Shows the data type of each item.
Initial Value
Shows the initial value used by the copy function.
The displayed fields are changed by the display mode option.
Tool
Item, Tool value, Data type, Initial value
Controller
Item, Controller value, Data type, Initial value
Tool and Controller
Item, Tool value, Controller value, Data type, Initial value
The [Record No.] button can be used to display the previous or next number.
You can also enter the number directly.
Place the cursor on top of the number to display the range.
Note
• Record No. starts from 1 because it follows the numbering rules for monitoring with
OIS.
• However, note that the program internal Index No. starts from 0 because controller
instruction does not allow array to start from any number other than 0.
• Tag Editor Record No. 1 = Program Editor [0].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
179
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Entering and saving values
A value input consists of tool value and controller value. Move the focus to the
input item and double-click or press Enter.
Enter characters or numbers, or select from a list depending on the item.
When entering characters and numbers, enter a value within the range
displayed at the bottom of the window.
The following rules apply to TagNo.
Use only the following characters. (They must be unique within the system)
MCS type: Alphanumeric characters and underscore. The first character
must be alphabet.
DS type: Alphanumeric characters and underscore. Characters not
recognized as numeric value or reserved word cannot be used.
Select <File><Save> to save. The changed locations (red) are saved.
180
6F8C1290
4.1
Registering Tags
Copy values
The value (tool value, initial value) currently being displayed can be copied to
another record.
Copy can be made in following units:
• Tool value (all items)
• Tool value (selected items)
• Initial value (all items)
• Initial value (selected items)
Selected item refers to any consecutive items that are in reverse video.
Selection is made by dragging the cursor over the target item while pressing
the left button.
Or use the [Shift] + ↑ or [Shift] + ↓key combination.
Select <Edit><Copy parameter> to open the following window.
1) Setting source
1-1) Select 'Tool Value' or 'Initial Value' for 'Contents of copy'.
1-2) Select whether to copy 'All items' or 'Selected items'.
2) Setting destination
2-1) Input the target 'Start No.'
2-2) Input the target 'End No.'
3) Click [OK] to start copying.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
181
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Generating sequential tag Nos.
This function is used to register only tag No. and to add the tag variables for
'New Instrument FB Library' to an existing tags.
It is useful when initially entering Tag no. only or when generating sequential
Tag Nos.
Select <Edit><Registration of Tag No.>.
How to register the continuousness tag Nos.
1) In 'TagNo. Continuation setup', the characters and numerical value bundled
'[ ]' is set as Tag No.
2) Input the total number of registered tags.
3) Click button [OK]. Registered tag No. is displayed in the table in red-letter.
4) When [Save] is clicked, all the change parts (red-letter) are written in the
file.
How to add variable for 'New Instrument FB Library' to existing tag variable.
(Note) This function is used for tag Nos. which are registered on V-Tool
V2.6.1 or more.
Click button [Re-regist.].
182
6F8C1290
4.1
Registering Tags
Display item setting
Item displayed on the screen is specified.
Select <View><Display item setting> to open the following window.
Only the item which puts the check is displayed on the screen.
[All On] button: The check is put on all items.
[All Off] button: The check on all items is removed.
Select I/O connection
I/O hard address (L-MCS) and I/O point variable identifier (L-DS,FN) can be
specified with the alternative form.
When < View >< Select I/O connection > of the menu is checked, and the
object item is double-clicked, the selection screen is displayed.
The object item is as follows.
L Controller(MCS)
Tag kind
Item Name
Comment
I/O module kind
PV
IP
Input hard address
AI,PI
LP
OA
Output hard address
AO,PO
PB
IA1-IA3
Input hard address
DI,DO
OA1-OA3
Output hard address
DO
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
183
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
L Controller (DS) / Unified controller type 2
Tag kind
Item Name
Comment
I/O module kind
PV
PVA
Input Point Variable Name
AI,PI
LP
MVA
Output Point Variable Name
AO,PO
PB
IA1-IA8
Input Point Variable Name
DI,DO
OA1-OA8
Output Point Variable Name
DO
FN Module
Tag kind
Variable type
PVA
Input Point Variable Name
INT,UINT,WORD
LP
MVA
Output Point Variable Name
INT,UINT,WORD
PB
IA1-IA8
Input Point Variable Name
BOOL
OA1-OA8
Output Point Variable Name
BOOL
<FN Module>
6F8C1290
Comment
PV
<L Controller>
184
Item Name
4.1
Registering Tags
Searching tag No.
Select or input the tag no. in ‘Search TagNo:’ list, the displayed tag parameter
will be changed.
• All tag nos. are searched in a system.
• ‘Search TagNo’ is available, when one or more tag is registered.
Masking unnecessary item
When the tag type is specified in the PV, LP, and PB tag of DS type, the
unnecessary items are made a gray display and it comes not to be able to
input the value.
The mask is done for PV by the combination of tag type (TYPE) and signal type
(SIG).
For example, the IND tag and the signal type is the not pulse in the PV is
displayed as follows.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
185
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Automatic setting of initial value
When the meter range RL and RH are input, the items which can be decided
are set automatically.
The same values as RH and RL are set.(It is set that the alarm is not generated
in an initial value.)
[MCS]
Input Item
Set Item
RH
PH
RL
PL
[DS]
Input Item
Set Item #1
Set Item #2
RH
PH
PHH
RL
PL
PLL
Supplementary
• This function is not available, when the item value has already been input as non-zero.
But in editing mode (displaying red-characters), it is available.
186
6F8C1290
4.1
Registering Tags
Selecting PV number
The item which inputs the PV number can be selected from a list.
In the list, tag no. and the table-variables are described in parallel.
Ex.) ‘1:FT_2000:PV[0]’
[MCS]
Tag kind
Item which selects PV number
Indicator (PV)
SPV,TM,PM
Loop Controller (LP)
PVP
[DS]
Tag kind
Item which selects PV number
Indicator (PV)
TM,PM,SVP,PVP
Loop Controller (LP)
PVP,VP
Push Button (PB)
PVP
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
187
Chapter 4
4.2
Registering Tag Variables
Meaning of Tag Parameters
4.2.1 MCS type
Tag parameter type and count
The L controller has the following Tag parameters.
Tag Type
Meaning
L3-type1
L3PU11
L2-type1
L2PU11
L2-type2
L2PU12
L1PU11
L1PU12
L1LG11
LC511
LC512
CL521
PV
Indicator
1024
128
288
128
128
LP
Controller
256
32
96
8
8
PB
Push button
1024
128
288
32
32
SQ
Sequencer
128
16
48
−
−
T
Timer
512
192
192
−
−
C
Counter
256
96
96
−
−
R
Real parameter
2048
768
768
128
128
W
Integer parameter
2048
768
768
128
128
P
Polynomial line
128
48
48
16
16
GD
Guidance
8 (512GD)
3 (192GD)
3(192GD)
1 (64GD)
1 (64GD)
F
Transmission
parameter real
128
48
48
32
32
I
Transmission
parameter integer
128
48
48
32
32
VB
Batch interface
128
48
48
−
−
Meaning of PV
Item
188
6F8C1290
Type
Meaning
TAG
P
Tag No. assigned as instrument ID. This is used as an ID No. to identify the
instrument.
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and underscore.
• The leading character must be alphabet.
• The length must not exceed 16 characters.
• It must be unique within the system.
• It must not be a reserved word.
NAME
O
Name of instrument.
• It must not exceed 32 bytes.
RH
P
Indicator range upper limit. Real value. Engineering value. Unit is
registered in the (engineering unit character) list.
• It must be greater than instrument range lower limit (RL).
RL
P
Indicator range lower limit. Real value. Engineering value.
registered in the (engineering unit character) list.
• It must be less than instrument range upper limit (RH).
Unit is
4.2
Item
Type
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning
EU
O
Set the engineering unit character of the process value PV.
• It must not exceed 8 bytes.
DCML
O
Specify the number of decimal digits when displaying PV value and range
on instrument.
• It must be between 0 and 6.
SIG
P
Select the input signal type from the following:
[Input Signal Type]: [Description]
None:
No standard processing of this instrument is
performed.
User calculated:
Calculated value is assigned to PV value with script
and used as internal instrument because no input
counter conversion is performed.
4-20mA 2-wire:
Select 4-20mA from 2-wire transmitter with real input
signal.
4-20mA 4-wire:
Select 4-20mA from 4-wire transmitter with real input
signal.
1-5V:
Select 1-5V from converter etc. with real input signal.
Pt100new:
Select resistance thermometer (new JIS support
Pt100) with real input signal.
Pt100old:
Select resistance thermometer (old JIS support
Pt100) with real input signal.
K-THC:
Select K type thermal couple with real input signal.
T-THC:
Select T type thermal couple with real input signal.
J-THC:
Select J type thermal couple with real input signal.
E-THC:
Select E type thermal couple with real input signal.
B-THC:
Select B type thermal couple with real input signal.
R-THC:
Select R type thermal couple with real input signal.
S-THC:
Select S type thermal couple with real input signal.
Pulse contact:
Select pulse contact input with real input signal.
Pulse voltage:
Select pulse voltage input with real input signal.
mV:
Select mV voltage input with real input signal.
SENS
O
Set the ID No. indicating the signal source of sensors and transmitters.
This is for information only and not used for internal processing.
IP
P
Register the input points in the format MM_BB_UU_SS_PP.
• MM is main slot No.
• BB is bus No.
• UU is unit No.
• SS is slot No.
• PP is point No.
CH
P
Set the input counter value equivalent to instrument range upper limit
(RH). Integer.
• It must be greater than input count lower limit (CL).
CL
P
Set the input counter value equivalent to instrument range lower limit (RL).
Integer.
• It must be less than input count upper limit (CH).
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
189
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Type
Meaning
UIH
P
Set whether to suppress sensor error (PVI) when input count exceeds
input count upper limit (CH).
• YES/NO
UIL
P
Set whether to suppress sensor error (PVI) when input count is less than
input count lower limit (CL).
• YES/NO
LNR
P
Select the type of linearlization performed by controller internal standard
input processing.
[Compensation operation code]: [Description]
190
6F8C1290
Linear:
Select when the relationship between
process value and input signal is
already linear or when no linearlization
is performed.
DP/F:
Convert from differential pressure to
flow.
DP/F-P:
Convert from differential pressure to
flow after pressure compensation.
DP/F-T:
Convert from differential pressure to
flow after temperature compensation.
DP/F-PT:
Convert from differential pressure to
flow after temperature and pressure
compensation.
RTD:
Perform linear conversion of resistance
thermometer (Pt100).
THC:
Perform linear conversion of
thermocouple.
Custom:
Select when no linearlization is
performed with standard input process
and compensation is performed with
script etc.
TTL
P
Select whether to treat PV value as instantaneous value or integrated
value. Instantaneous value is displayed as bar graph and integrated value
is displayed as counter.
SPV
P
When [Totalized Value] is selected in TTL, PV indicates integrated value.
Other PV values can be selected as well as signal assigned to oneself as
the instantaneous value that is the source of this integrated value. Register
PVNo if other PV value is used for integration operation.
MAX
P
Set the maximum value when PV is integrated value. When PV exceeds
this value, the excess becomes the PV value and integration is performed
against this value starting from the next cycle. The maximum integrated
value is used by journal calculation software that calculates the usage by
periodically reading the rotary integrated value. Real. Same engineering
value as PV.
• It must be zero or greater.
4.2
Item
Type
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning
PRS
P
Controller can perform main scan or high-speed scan.
Select the scan cycle to use for standard input processing.
LC
P
During instantaneous value processing, the controller treats instantaneous
value less than this value as 0%. If low cut value is negative, no low cut is
performed. Integer. To second decimal places. Unit %.
FT
P
During instantaneous value processing, the controller uses the primary
low pass filter calculated by the following formula. Integer. To second
decimal places.
• Must be 0 or greater and less than 99.
TM
P
Register the PV No indicating the measured temperature when the
process value is air flow and compensation by temperature is necessary.
PM
P
Register the PV No indicating the measured temperature when the
process value is air flow and compensation by pressure is necessary.
TDG
P
Register the standard design temperature when the process value is air
flow and compensation by pressure is necessary. Real. Unit °C.
PDG
P
Register the standard design pressure when the process value is air flow
and compensation by pressure is necessary. Real. Unit kPa.
PRD
P
A PV process error bit (PRE) is set when there is an error in the signal
source of the process value PV. Select the method of handling this signal
source error from the following:
[All sensors alarm detected]:
Treat as PV process error if it is an error in signal from own sensor or if
temperature/pressure compensation PV is in error.
[Only main sensor alarm detected]:
Even if there are temperature/pressure compensation points, monitor
error in signal from own sensor only and treat it as PV process error
(PRE).
[No sensor alarm detected]:
Do not treat as PV process error even if there is error in signal from
own sensor or sensor error in one of the compensation points.
PU
P
For pulse input, register the process amount equivalent to one pulse.
Real. Engineering value.
• Must be zero or greater.
T
P
Select the unit of time for instantaneous value operation.
• SEC (=1), MIN (=60), or HOUR (=360).
K
P
Conversion factor between the unit indicated by the process signal and
the unit of the displayed process value PV. Real.
• Must be zero or greater.
D
P
Compensation factor that serves as conversion factor similar to unit
conversion factor. Real.
• Must be zero or greater.
PH
P
Alarm judgment upper limit for process value PV.
engineering value as PV.
• Must be greater than PV lower limit alarm (PL).
Real. Same
PL
P
Alarm judgment lower limit for process value PV.
engineering value as PV.
• Must be less than PV upper limit alarm.
Real.
Real.
Same
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
191
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Type
Meaning
PVB
P
Dead band for upper/lower limit judgment.
value as PV.
DPL
P
Process value PV change rate alarm judgment value.
engineering value/s.
• It must be zero or greater.
DPB
P
Dead band for change rate alarm.
• It must be zero or greater.
AGRD
O
Select the instrument warning level.
• None, minor alarm, or major alarm.
AMON
O
Specify whether to monitor alarm with OIS.
• ON or OFF
LOCK
O
Specify whether to disable instrument parameter change with OIS.
• YES/NO
SIGN
O
Set the tagging character displayed on the instrument.
• The length must not exceed 16 characters.
PVPT
O
When the PV value is instantaneous value, it is displayed as bar graph. In
this case a pointer can be placed as a marker for process operation. Set
its initial value. Real.
LOG
O
Specify whether to perform logging (record or print alarm etc.) with OIS.
• YES/NO
PICT
O
Specify the window to expand when a tag is selected in the OIS alarm tag
window. If unspecified, expanded to point window by default.
• It must not exceed 8 bytes. Specify an ODF file name.
SIMM
P
Register the controller loopback simulation method when operating as
indication value PV of the indicator registered in [LP].
Real.
Real.
Same engineering
Real. Unit is
Unit is engineering value/s.
[Simulation method]: [Description]
192
6F8C1290
Standard:
Loopback automatically from controller output to
PV when the simulation flag (SIM) is OFF.
User:
Do not perform automatic loopback when the
simulation flag (SIM) is ON. Loopback is performed
according to the user program.
DIC
P
Set whether to use the atom PVC which is used to compensate the PV
value with application.
PVC
P
PV for application
Attention: Data actually though it is in the parameter area.
PV
D
Engineering unit value
May be set when scan is OFF (SCN=1).
SCN
D
Stop standard I/O processing when SCN=1
Perform standard I/O processing when SCN=0
SIM
D
When SIM=1, simulation is specified and MV -> PV simple loopback is
performed.
SPR
D
Reset following alarms when SPR=1.
PVH, PVL, PVD, PVI, PRE
RST
D
Initialize integrated value of TTL tag when RST=1.
4.2
Item
Type
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning
DEU
D
For future use
VIU
D
For future use
PRU
D
For future use
VHU
D
For future use
VLU
D
For future use
VDU
D
For future use
PDE
D
PDE=1 when input point (input module) is faulty.
PVI
D
PVI=1 when input count is less than input count lower limit (CL) or input
count is greater than input count upper limit (CH).
PRE
D
PRE=1 when there is an error in the signal source of the process value PV.
PVH
D
PVH=1 when PV value>PV upper limit alarm (PH).
PVL
D
PVL=1 when PV value<PV lower limit alarm (PL).
PVD
D
If the change in PV per scan is expressed as dPV and the absolute value
of PV is expressed as ABS(), PVD=1 when ABS(dPV)>=PV change rate
alarm (DPL) x (scan cycle).
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
Meaning of LP
Item
Type
Meaning
PVP
P
Set the number of the process value PV.
Register the PV record No.
MSIG
P
Select the output signal type from the following:
[Output Signal Type]: [Description]
ACTS
O
None:
No standard processing of this instrument is
performed.
User calculated:
No MV value real value processing performed.
Select when no real output is performed such as
cascade master loop.
4-20mA:
Select 4-20mA with real output signal.
Pulse width/slow:
Select low speed pulse width output with real
output signal.
Pulse width/fast:
Select high speed pulse width output with real
output signal.
Pulse train/slow:
Select low speed pulse series output with real
output signal.
Pulse train/fast:
Select high speed pulse series output with real
output signal.
Register the ID No. of the controller valve for connecting the output signal.
This is unrelated to the program operation.
• It must not exceed 16 bytes.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
193
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
194
6F8C1290
Type
Meaning
OA
P
Register the input points in the format MM_BB_UU_SS_PP.
• MM is main slot No.
• BB is bus No.
• UU is unit No.
• SS is slot No.
• PP is point No.
CTL
P
Select the instrument type from the following:
[Control Operation Type]:
[Description]
none:
No instrument operation performed.
PID:
Select PID controller.
Sample PID
Select sample PID controller.
M/A:
Select M/A controller.
Ratio setter:
Select ratio controller.
PRS
P
Select the cycle of the control operation. Select main scan or high-speed
scan.
CDR
P
When PID controller or sample PI controller, select the operation direction
of control amount MV with respect to deviation. MV increases or
decreases when deviation (SV-PV) increases.
MDR
P
When analog output, select the direction of the analog output with respect
to control amount MV.
Select between [4-20mA output at 0-100%] or [20-4mA output at 0-100%].
KP
P
Ratio gain of PID operation.
• It must be zero or greater.
TI
P
Integrated time of PID operation.
• It must be zero or greater.
TD
P
Rate time of PID operation. Real.
• It must be zero or greater.
ETA
P
eta for imperfect differential gain (1/eta). Real.
• It must be greater than 0 and 1 or less.
ALP
P
2-degree-of-freedom proportion coefficient (α).
• It must be between 0 and 1.
Real.
BET
P
2-degree-of-freedom integration coefficient (β).
• Must be 1 or greater and less than 2.
Real.
GAM
P
2-degree-of-freedom differential coefficient (γ).
• Must be 0 or greater and less than 2.
Real.
GP
P
During PID or SPI operation, the gain can be modified within a gap width
near 0 of deviation (SV-PV). Set this gap width. Real. Unit %.
• It must be between 0 and 100.
GG
P
During PID or SPI operation, the gain can be modified within a gap width
near 0 of deviation (SV-PV). Set This gain. Real. Unit [times].
• It must be between 0 and 1.
DMV
P
MV change rate limit. Real. Unit [%/s].
• It must be zero or greater.
MH
P
MV upper limit. Real. Unit [%].
• It must be greater than MV lower limit (ML).
Real. Unit [times].
Real. Unit [min].
Unit [min].
4.2
Item
Type
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning
ML
P
MV lower limit. Real. Unit [%].
• It must be less than MV upper limit (MH).
FP
P
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the pulse count (pulse series) or
pulse time (pulse width) necessary for the actuator to move full stroke.
Real.
• It must be zero or greater.
BL
P
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the actuator backlash.
• It must be between 0 and 255.
HT
P
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the hold time when the output
direction is reversed. Real. Unit [s].
• It must be between 0 and 10.
PLB
P
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the dead band to stop
unnecessary actuator movement for minute pulse count. Real.
• It must be between 0 and 10.
DL
P
Set the alarm level for deviation (SV-PV).
• It must be zero or greater.
DVB
P
Set the dead band for deviation alarm.
• It must be zero or greater.
MHA
P
Set the MV upper limit alarm. Real.
• It must be greater than MV lower limit alarm (MLA).
MLA
P
Set the MV lower limit alarm. Real.
• It must be less than MV upper limit alarm (MHA).
MVB
P
Set the MV upper/lower limit alarm dead band.
• It must be zero or greater.
VP
P
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, the feedback PV value can be
displayed on the MV bar graph instead of MV in order to determine the
actuator position and valve position. Set this PV No.
DT0
P
Set the cycle of the control operation.
• It must be zero or greater.
T0
P
Set the sampling time for sample PI controller.
• Must be zero or greater.
T1
P
Set the control time for sample PI controller.
• Must be zero or greater.
CLD
P
When PID controller or sample PI controller, select how to determine
control stop (CLI) from the following:
CLI by PRE:
Real.
Real.
Engineering value.
Engineering value.
Real.
Integer. Unit [scan time].
Integer. Unit [0.1s].
Integer.
Unit [0.1s].
Set CLI=ON and automatically stop control
operation when PV or SV value is abnormal
(PRE).
CLI depends on application: CLI is not automatically set to ON. The
control stop condition depends on the user
program.
POR
P
Pulse output request flag (= 1 is output request)
PMV
P
Pulse output request count
LDP
P
LDU decimal point position
• It must be between 0 and 4.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
195
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
196
6F8C1290
Type
Meaning
LDB
P
LDU display method
Bar graph type
Point display type
MVPT
O
Set the position of the operation pointer placed on the MV bar graph.
• Above ML, below MH.
DCSV
O
When ratio controller, set the decimal point position of SV value.
• It must be between 0 and 6.
EUSV
O
When ratio controller, set the engineering unit character of SV value.
• It must not exceed 8 bytes.
DCMV
O
When ratio controller, set the decimal point position of MV value.
• It must be between 0 and 6.
EUMV
O
When ratio controller, set the engineering unit character of MV value.
• It must not exceed 8 bytes.
LDC
P
Register whether to connect loop display unit or not.
CMD
P
The control mode is set.
SVS
P
Select whether SV value can be set when the control mode of the
controller is A mode.
FS0
P
The parameter for new instrumentation FB.
The majors tracking of SV is done or it selects it.
FS1
P
The parameter for new instrumentation FB.
The unit of the cascade value is selected.
MDT
P
The parameter for model drive PID FB library.
MKF
P
The parameter for model drive PID FB library.
MTF
P
The parameter for model drive PID FB library.
SV
D
For user application
[For deviation alarm (DVE), absolute value of PV-SV is treated as the
deviation.]
MV
D
When control mode (MOD)=C, A, RM, the value output to I/O specified
with output point No(OA).
However, when control operation type (CT)=[ratio controller], MV
becomes engineering value and no output is performed.
MODE
D
C/A: MV changed by application is AO output.
RM: Mode during OIS operation.
M: Intelligent I/O readback data is overwritten for MV.
M
D
Mode M (for new instrumentation FB.)
A
D
Mode A (for new instrumentation FB.)
C
D
Mode C (for new instrumentation FB.)
RM
D
Mode RM (for new instrumentation FB.)
MVT
D
For user application
SIM
D
Simulation (SIM) of LP specified by control target PVNo (PVP) is set.
When SIM=1, AO output of MV is stopped.
LSP
D
Reset following alarms when LSP=1.
MVH, MVL, DVE
4.2
Item
Type
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning
MVE
D
Alarm indicating error in intelligent serial I/O specified with output point
No(OA).
MVE does not recover automatically. (Acknowledged recovery request
from OIS is necessary.)
CLI
D
For user application
MVH
D
Alarm issued when MV exceeds MV upper limit alarm (MHA).
MVL
D
Alarm issued when MV is less than MV lower limit alarm (MLA).
DVE
D
Alarm issued when deviation (absolute value of PV-SV) exceeds the
deviation alarm (DL).
No alarm is issued if control operation type (CTL) is M/A controller or ratio
controller.
No alarm is issued if control mode is M or RM.
VPI
D
Alarm set when there is a sensor error in the AI specified with valve
position PVNo (VP).
Valid only when the output signal type (MSIG) is pulse.
SSV
D
For user application
CSV
D
For user application
SMV
D
For user application
When SMV=ON, AO output of MV changed by application is performed
regardless of the control mode.
CMV
D
For user application
CMP
D
For user application
SEQ
D
For user application
CC
D
For user application
MEU
D
For future use
CLU
D
For future use
MHU
D
For future use
MLU
D
For future use
DVU
D
For future use
VPU
D
For future use
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
197
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Meaning of PB
Item
198
6F8C1290
Type
Meaning
TAG
P
Tag No. assigned as instrument ID. This is used as an ID No. to identify
the instrument.
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and underscore.
• The leading character must be alphabet.
• The length must not exceed 16 characters.
• It must be unique within the system.
• It must not be a reserved word.
NAME
O
Name of instrument.
• It must not exceed 32 bytes.
NAM1
NAM2
NAM3
O
Name to be assigned to lamp status (FI1 to FI3).
USE
P
Register whether to use the corresponding instrument.
• Use, not use.
IA1
IA2
IA3
P
Register the input points in the format MM_BB_UU_SS_PP.
Register the digital input points or output points. The three points
correspond to the three push button lamp signals.
• MM is main slot No.
• BB is bus No.
• UU is unit No.
• SS is slot No.
• PP is point No.
OA1
OA2
OA3
P
Register the process signal output points in the format
MM_BB_UU_SS_PP.
Register the digital output points. The relationship between these outputs
and the three push buttons is determined by the registration in the output
table.
• MM is main slot No.
• BB is bus No.
• UU is unit No.
• SS is slot No.
• PP is point No.
INV1
P
Specify whether to invert signal at input point to turn on lamp 1.
• Non Invert/Invert
INV2
P
Specify whether to invert signal at input point to turn on lamp 2.
• Non Invert/Invert
INV3
P
Specify whether to invert signal at input point to turn on lamp 3.
• Non Invert/Invert
INA1
P
Specify whether to interpret turning on of lamp 1 as alarm.
• YES/NO
INA2
P
Specify whether to interpret turning on of lamp 2 as alarm.
• YES/NO
INA3
P
Specify whether to interpret turning on of lamp 3 as alarm.
• YES/NO
UI1
P
Register whether to use lamp or not as function of push button lamp 1.
• YES/NO
4.2
Item
Type
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning
UI2
P
Register whether to use lamp or not as function of push button lamp 2.
• YES/NO
UI3
P
Register whether to use lamp or not as function of push button lamp 3.
• YES/NO
AMON
O
Specify whether to monitor alarm with OIS.
• YES/NO
AGRD
O
Select the instrument warning level.
• None, minor alarm, or major alarm.
ONV1
P
Set whether to invert output of value after output table processing to
output point 1.
• Non Invert/Invert
ONV2
P
Set whether to invert output of value after output table processing to
output point 2.
• Non Invert/Invert
ONV3
P
Set whether to invert output of value after output table processing to
output point 3.
• Non Invert/Invert
UO1
P
Register whether to use button or not as function of push button lamp 1.
• YES/NO
UO2
P
Register whether to use button or not as function of push button lamp 2.
• YES/NO
UO3
P
Register whether to use button or not as function of push button lamp 3.
• YES/NO
DA01
DA02
DA03
P
Select the action for output of each point when the button returns.
• None (no action)/Set (set output)/Rest (reset output)/Toggle (invert
output)
DA11
DA12
DA13
P
Select the action for output of each point when button 1 is pressed.
• None (no action)/Set (set output)/Rest (reset output)/Toggle (invert
output)
DA21
DA22
DA23
P
Select the action for output of each point when button 2 is pressed.
• None (no action)/Set (set output)/Rest (reset output)/Toggle (invert
output)
DA31
DA32
DA33
P
Select the action for output of each point when button 3 is pressed.
• None (no action)/Set (set output)/Rest (reset output)/Toggle (invert
output)
PRS
P
Set the standard processing cycle of the corresponding instrument within
the controller.
• HS(high-speed scan cycle), MS(main scan cycle)
LOCK
O
Specify whether to disable instrument parameter change with OIS.
• YES/NO
SIGN
O
Set the tagging character displayed on the instrument.
• The length must not exceed 16 characters.
LOG
O
Specify whether to perform logging (record or print alarm etc.) with OIS.
• YES/NO
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
199
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Type
Meaning
PICT
O
Specify the window to expand when a tag is selected in the OIS alarm tag
window. If unspecified, expanded to point window by default.
• It must not exceed 8 bytes. Specify an ODF file name.
CM1
P
Used in OIS button operation and application button operation request.
(There is no need to set CM1 as parameter.)
none: Perform the set action when button returns (DO0).
Button1: Perform the set action when button 1 is pressed (DA1).
Button2: Perform the set action when button 2 is pressed (DA2).
Button3: Perform the set action when button 3 is pressed (DA3).
SCN
D
Stop update of FI1 to FI3 when scan is OFF (=1).
SIM
D
For future use [Stop FO1 to FO3 output when simulation (=1)]
SPR
D
For future use [Reset alarm unacknowledged (IU1 to IU3) when alarm
suppress (=1)]
LOC
D
For future use [Lock button status (FO1 to FO3) when requesting interlock
(=1)]
IU1
D
For future use
IU2
D
For future use
IU3
D
For future use
UIO
D
For future use
FO1
D
When control mode (MOD) = A or RM, the status output to I/O specified
with output point No (OA).
FO2
D
When control mode (MOD) = A or RM, the status output to I/O specified
with output point No (OA).
FO3
D
When control mode (MOD) = A or RM, the status output to I/O specified
with output point No (OA).
IOE
D
Alarm (alarm when 1) indicating error in intelligent serial I/O specified with
input point No (IA) or output point No(OA).
FI1
D
Status input from I/O specified with input point No(IA).
FI2
D
Status input from I/O specified with input point No(IA).
FI3
D
Status input from I/O specified with input point No(IA).
MODE
D
A: FO changed by application is DO output.
RM: OIS button operation mode.
M: Intelligent I/O readback DO is overwritten for FO.
M
D
Mode M (for new instrumentation FB.)
A
D
Mode A (for new instrumentation FB.)
RM
D
Mode RM (for new instrumentation FB.)
'P' indicates parameter. 'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
200
6F8C1290
4.2
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning of SQ
Item
Type
Meaning
TAG
P
Tag No. assigned as instrument ID. This is used as an ID No. to
identify the instrument.
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and underscore.
• The leading character must be alphabet.
• The length must not exceed 16 characters.
• It must be unique within the system.
• It must not be a reserved word.
NAME
O
Name of instrument.
• It must not exceed 32 bytes.
PNAM1-17
O
Name of step included in sequence operation.
• It must not exceed 12 bytes.
AGRD
O
Select the instrument warning level.
• None, minor alarm, or major alarm.
AMON
O
Specify whether to monitor alarm with OIS.
• YES/NO
LOCK
O
Specify whether to disable instrument parameter change with OIS.
• YES/NO
SIGN
O
Set the tagging character displayed on the instrument.
• The length must not exceed 16 characters.
LOG
O
Specify whether to perform logging (record or print alarm etc.) with OIS.
• YES/NO
PICT
O
Specify the window to expand when a tag is selected in the OIS alarm
tag window. If unspecified, expanded to point window by default.
• It must not exceed 8 bytes. Specify an ODF file name.
RUN
D
RUN mode
SSS
D
Single step mode
ON/OFF=1/0
SPR
D
Alarm suppress
ON/OFF=1/0
SSE
D
Single step execution ON/OFF=1/0
STU
D
[For future use]
ASU
D
[For future use]
ILA
D
[For future use]
STA
D
Congestion alarm ON/OFF=1/0
ASA
D
Answer alarm ON/OFF=1/0
ILA
D
Interlock alarm ON/OFF=1/0
PHNO0-31
D
Active Phase Map
Indicates whether the phase is currently active (1) or not (0).
RUN/HOLD=1/0
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data.
'O' indicates OIS data.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
201
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Meaning of T
Item
Type
Meaning
SET
P
Register the timer setting.
CMNT
O
Register the comment for the timer with up to 36 characters.
EU
O
Shows the unit for the second timer (0.1 [sec]) and minute timer (0.1
[min]).
VAL
D
Shows the current value when a timer is started or stopped.
START
D
Shows [ON] when the specified timer is started.
STOP
D
Shows [ON] when the specified timer is stopped.
RESET
D
Shows [ON] when the specified timer is reset.
UP
D
Shows [ON] when the value set in the timer exceeds the current value or is
equal to the current value.
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
Meaning of C
Item
Type
Meaning
SET
P
Register the counter setting.
CMNT
O
Register the comment for the counter with up to 36 characters.
EU
O
Shows the counter unit (count).
VAL
D
Shows the current value when the counter is manipulated.
INC
D
Shows [ON] when the specified counter is incremented.
DEC
D
Shows [ON] when the specified counter is decremented.
RESET
D
Shows [ON] when the specified counter is reset.
UP
D
Shows [ON] when the absolute value of the value set in counter exceeds
the current value or is equal to the current value.
DOWN
D
Shows [ON] when the current value of the counter is less than the
absolute value of the value set in counter prefixed with minus sign or the
value set in counter is equal to the current value.
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
Meaning of R
Item
Type
Meaning
VAL
P
Register the value of real parameter.
CMNT
O
Register the comment for the real parameter with up to 36 characters.
EU
O
Register the unit of the real parameter with up to 16 characters.
'P' indicates parameter.
202
6F8C1290
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
4.2
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning of W
Item
Type
Meaning
VAL
P
Register the value of integer parameter.
B0-15
P
Register the integer value with bit parameter.
CMNT
O
Register the comment for the integer parameter with up to 36 characters.
EU
O
Register the unit of the integer parameter with up to 16 characters.
BCOM
0-15
O
Register the comment for the bit parameter with up to 36 characters.
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
Meaning of P
Item
P/D/O
Meaning
VAL0X-11X
P
Register the X coordinates 0 to 11 as single precision floating point in
increasing direction (X(i + 1)-Xi>=0).
VAL0Y-11Y
P
Register the Y coordinates 0 to 11 as single precision floating point.
CMNT
O
Register the comment with up to 36 characters.
XEU
O
Register the unit of X value with up to 16 characters.
YEU
O
Register the unit of Y value with up to 16 characters.
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
Meaning of GD
Item
Type
Meaning
MSEG
0-63
O
Register guidance message with up to 40 characters.
PICT
0-63
O
For future use. Up to 8 characters.
B
0-63
D
Guidance bit
'P' indicates parameter.
0/1=OFF/ON
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
Meaning of F
• To be supported in the future
Meaning of I
• To be supported in the future
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
203
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Meaning of VB
Item
Type
Meaning
VC
D
VB command
EC
D
External command
VR
D
VB switch request
ER
D
External switch request
UN
D
Unit No.
ST
D
Status
RQ
D
Request
Q0-4
D
Request data 0-4
F
D
Fault No.
P
D
Owner
PD
D
Paused
W
D
Paused
S
D
Single step
WW0-8
D
Reserved integers 0-8
BB0-31
D
Reserved bits 0-31
'P' indicates parameter.
'D' indicates data. 'O' indicates OIS data.
4.2.2 DS type
Tag parameter type and count
The L controller (DS Type) and DS connection Ethernet card have the following
Tag parameters.
Tag Type
204
6F8C1290
Meaning
L3-type2
L3PU21
L2-type5
L2PU22
FN711
FN611
PU821
PV
Indicator
768
768
256
256
1024
LP
Controller
256
256
128
128
320
PB
Push button
1024
1024
512
512
1280
SQ
Sequencer
128
128
−
−
128
TC
Timer/Counter
128
128
−
−
128
DB
Data block
256
256
−
−
256
R
Real parameter
4096
4096
−
−
4096
W
Integer parameter
1280
1280
−
−
2560
T
Timer
512
512
−
−
512
C
Counter
128
128
−
−
128
P
Polynomial line
256
256
−
−
256
RTT
DS scan parameter
−
−
512
512
512
4.2
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning of PV
Item
Tag No. (TAG)
Description
Set Value
Remark
Set the tag number to be assigned to the instrument. This is Up to 16
characters
used to identify the instrument.
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and
underscore.
• Must be unique within the system.
• Must not be a reserved word.
The case of the character is not recognized. All characters
are converted to uppercase.
Tag Name
(NAME)
Up to 32
Name of instrument.
characters.
By inserting space in between, this can be centered or
left/right justified in unit of 16 characters when displayed on
OIS instrument.
Tag Type (TYPE)
Select the instrument function type.
0: Not used 10: IND 11: AMM 12: PFI
14: WND
13: TTL
See
description
Display Pattern
Model No. (MDL)
This is the OIS tag pattern number. Standard tag pattern is
used for 0. User created display pattern is used for 1 to 9.
0 to 9
Signal Category
No. (AREA)
Number used to group instrument signals throughout the
system. Determine and register the number to which this
instrument belongs.
0 to 63
Auto Screen
Display No.
(SCNO)
With OIS, a screen to be opened automatically when an
instrument issues an alarm can be registered in advance.
Set the number of such screen. Set 0 if no screen is to be
opened automatically.
0 to 1024
Operation Lock
Setting (LOCK)
Specify whether to prohibit operator action when instrument 0: Enabled
tag pattern is tagged with the OIS.
1: Disabled
Tagging Color
(COLR)
Register the tagging color.
Select a color from the list.
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow4: Blue 5: Purple
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange
10: Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth
22: Tea green 23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue
25: Dark purple 26: Gray green
27: Faint gray
28: Pale green 29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green
31: Faint dark gray
See
description
Tagging Character Register the tagging character.
(SIGN)
Up to 16
characters.
Alarm Monitoring
Method (ATYP)
Select the alarm issue and verification method.
0: A type 1: B type 2: B1 type 3: C type
4: C1 type 5: D type 6: B2 type
See
description
Alarm Monitor
Common Setting
(AMON)
Select whether to monitor (ON) instrument alarm or not
(OFF).
0: ON
1: OFF
0: Atype
1: B type
are currently
supported
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
205
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Control Scan
Setting (PRS)
Description
Set Value
Select the scan to perform instrument standard processing
in controller. High-speed scan or main scan.
0: Main
1: High-speed
Sub Schedule No. If main scan processing, the execution cycle of the
(SCH)
instrument standard processing can be scheduled in order
to distribute the load. When the sub schedule no. is 0,
processing is performed for each main scan. When N
(>0), processing is performed once every N + 1 main
scans.
0 to 255
Grouping No.
(GPR)
0 to 254
Register the number of the main scan to perform the
processing performed every N + 1 main scans described in
"Sub Schedule No". Indicate with a number between 0 and
(N-1). When the grouping number is greater than 1, set the
number less than that number.
Alarm Monitor
Single Setting
(MON)
When Alarm Monitoring Common Setting is ON, select
whether to monitor (ON) each alarm point or not (OFF).
Alarm Grade Type Select the alarm grade for each alarm point.
(AGRD)
0: None 1: Warning 2: Minor alarm 3: Medium alarm
4: Major alarm
Monitoring Timer
Setting (AMMT)
Remark
0: ON
1: OFF
See
description
0.1 sec unit
0 to 32767
Set the interval in which no PV related alarm processing is
performed in 01. second units.
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 11: AMM is
selected. Used as follows in combination with Start Button
No. (FONO) and Start Button PB No. (PBNO).
Example:
When AMMT=100, FONO=8, and PBNO=1, no PV value
related alarm processing [PVHH, PVH, PVL, PVLL, PVD,
PVIH, PVIL, PDE, PRE] is performed for 10 seconds after
#PB1.FO8 has changed.
Decimal Place
(DCML)
Specify the number of decimal digits when displaying PV
value and range on instrument.
0 to 5
Engineering Unit
(EU)
Set the engineering unit character of the process value PV.
Up to 16
characters.
Input Point Bus
No. / Node No.
(BNO)
In the case of nv series, I/O node number is set.
TC-net I/O: 3 to 26
Intelligent I/O: 31 to 34
For nv series
In the case of V series, the bus number of the input point of
the process signal is set.
Please set input point bus/unit/slot/point number when you
should detect PV I/O abnormality (PDE) by using intelligent
cereal PI/O.
For V series
(1) I/O module type when all the following conditions
consist: IOM ="Intelligent serial"
(2) PV I/O abnormality: PDE is necessary.
PDE: Warning where intelligent I/O (AI module) is
generated by DU (down of card).
(3) The tag type: Excluding "Not Used".
(4) The input signal type: Excluding " Calculated
Value", ”Not Used”
206
6F8C1290
4.2
Item
Description
Input Point Unit
No. (UNO)
Set the unit no. of the process signal input point.
Input Point Slot
No. (SNO)
Set the slot no. of the process signal input point.
Input Point Point
No. (PNO)
Set the point no. of the process signal input point.
Main Slot No.
(CNO)
Set the slot no. of the main module.
Simulation
Method (SIMM)
Select the controller loopback simulation method when
operating as indication value PV of the indicator registered
in AO/PO list.
Simple loopback:
Loopback automatically from controller
output to PV when the simulation flag
(SIM) is ON.
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Remark
Only nv series
0: Program
loopback
1: Simple
loopback
Program loopback: Do not perform automatic loopback
when the simulation flag (SIM) is ON.
Loopback is performed according to
the user program.
See
description
I/O Module Type
(IOM)
Select the PI/O module type.
0: Parallel PI/O
1: Intelligent serial PI/O
2: Serial PI/O
3: SSIF 4: F series PI/O
Please set input point bus/unit/slot/point number
(BNO,UNO,SNO,PNO) when “Intelligent serial”, "SSIF", ”F
series" is selected, and the PV I/O abnormality (PDE)
detection is necessary.
Use Integrated
Set Value (PSS)
Select whether to use integration setting or not.
0: Not used
This is valid only when Tag type (TYP) = 13: TTL is selected. 1: Used
Use as follows in combination with integration setting
(PSET).
PSET setting is invalid when PSS = 0 (unused).
Example: PSS = 1 (use), PSET = 500
Issue UP alarm when 500 < PV
Recover UP alarm when PV< = 500
Cold
Compensation
Point PV No.
(ZPT)
Set the PV number of signal used for cold contact
compensation of thermocouple output.
0 to 1024
For future use
Inverse Poly Line
No. (IPL)
Set the number of the inverse polynomial line table for
inverse polynomial compensation of process signal.
0 to 256
For future use
Input Signal Type
(SIG)
Select the input signal type.
See
description
0: Not used 1: Calculated value 2: 2-wire 3: 4-wire
4: 1-5V 5: Pt100 new 6: Pt100 old 7: K-THC 8: T-THC
9: J-THC 10: E-THC 11: B-THC 12: R-THC
13: S-THC 14: Pulse contact 15: Pulse voltage 16: mV
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
207
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
Remark
Input Correction
Operation Type
(LNR)
Select the type of linearlization performed by PCS internal
standard input processing.
Input Point
Variable Name
(PVA)
Set the variable name of the of the process signal input
point (analog input point) with direct notation variable.
(Example: %MW11.0).
Input Count
Upper Limit (CH)
Set the input counter value (integer) equivalent to instrument See
description
range upper limit (RH).
CL<CH< = 32767
Only V series
Input Count Lower Set the input counter value (integer) equivalent to instrument See
Limit (CL)
description
range lower limit (RL). The relationship between input
signal and input count is as follows:
Only V series
Input signal:
Input count
4-20mA:
6400 to 32000
1-5V:
6400 to 32000
Thermocouple:
6400 to 32000 for the module
measurement range
mV:
−32000 to 32000 for the module
measurement range
Therefore, set CL and CH with the value in the table in order
to match the module measurement range with the
instrument range. However, set CH and CL obtained with
the following formula in order to make the instrument range
narrower than module measurement range.
CH = CLO + (CHO-CLO) x RH/ (mRH-mRL)
CL = CLO + (CHO-CLO) x RL/ (mRH-mRL)
where
CHO: Input count (32000) equivalent to the measurement
range upper limit
CLO: Input count (6400 or −32000) equivalent to the
measurement range lower limit
mRH: Input range upper limit
mRL: Input range lower limit
Note that measurement range is a parameter set in I/O
module.
−32768<=CL<CH
6F8C1290
See
description
0: No correction 1: DP/F 2: DP/F-P 3: DP/F-T
4: DP/F-PT 5: RTD 6: THC 7: Custom 8: Power factor
9: Phase angle
Resistance thermometer: 6400 to 32000 for the module
measurement range
208
Set Value
4.2
Item
Low Cut Setting
(LC)
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Remark
Set the low cut value used for instantaneous value process. −1 to 10
During instantaneous value processing, instantaneous value
less than this value is treated as 0%.
Note: For "Compensation operation code", square root
extraction is performed when performing differential
pressure to flow conversion. Therefore, small
change in signal near 0% is magnified and PV value
may vary near 0. In such case, eliminate this variance
by assigning a positive value for low cut value near 0.
Filter Coefficient
(FT)
Set the filter constant for the primary filter used for
instantaneous value processing. During instantaneous
value processing, the primary low pass filter calculated by
the following formula is used.
See
description
Output value = Input value x (1 = FT/100) +
Previous output x FT/100
(Note) With greater FT, the primary filter functions to
eliminate more abrupt variation.
0< = FT<1
Instrument Range Set the indicator range upper limit with real or engineering
Upper Limit (RH) value.
Unit is set in the (engineering unit character) item.
See
description
RL<RH<=999999999
Instrument Range Set the indicator range lower limit with real or engineering
Lower Limit (RL)
value.
Unit is set in the (engineering unit character) item.
See
description
−999999999< = RL<RH
Upper Limit Alarm PH<=PHH<=999999999
Above PV (PHH)
PV Upper Limit
Alarm (PH)
Set the upper limit alarm of the process value PV.
PV Lower Limit
Alarm (PL)
Set the lower limit alarm of the process value PV.
PL<PH<=PHH
PLL<=PL<PH
Lower Limit Alarm −999999999< = PLL< = PL
Below PV (PLL)
PV Upper/Lower
Limit Alarm Dead
Band (PVB)
Set the upper/lower limit alarm dead band.
PV Change Rate
Alarm (DPL)
Set the change rate alarm of the process value PV.
Note: How to issue PV value upper/lower limit alarm
Issue upper limit alarm (PVH) when PV>=PH.
Then recover when PV<=PH-PVB is satisfy.
Issue lower limit alarm (PVL) when PV<=PL.
Then recover when PV<=PL-PVB is satisfy.
See
description
See
description
Real
See
description
Real
See
description
0 to
999999999
0 to
999999999
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
209
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
Remark
PV Change Rate Set the PV change rate alarm dead band.
Alarm Dead Band Note: How to issue PV value change rate alarm
(DPB)
When change in PV per scan is expressed as dPV
and absolute value is expressed as ABS ( ),
Change rate alarm (PVD) is issued when
ABS (dPV) > = DPL x (scan cycle).
Then, it recovers when
ABS (dPV) < = (DPL-DPB)x(scan cycle).
0 to
999999999
Temperature
Set the number of the process value PV for which
Correction PV No. temperature compensation is performed.
(TM)
This is the PV No indicating the measured temperature
when the process value is air flow and compensation by
temperature is necessary.
0 to 1024
Pressure
Set the number of the process value PV for which pressure
Correction PV No. compensation is performed.
(PM)
This is the PV No indicating the measured temperature
when the process value is air flow and compensation by
pressure is necessary.
0 to 1024
Temperature
Correction Design
Temperature
(TDG)
0 to
999999999
Real
0 to
999999999
Real
Set the design temperature (°C) necessary for temperature
compensation.
This is the standard design temperature when the process
value is air flow and compensation by temperature is
performed.
Pressure
Set the design pressure (kPa) necessary for pressure
Correction Design compensation.
Pressure (PDG)
This is the standard design pressure when the process
value is air flow and compensation by pressure is
performed.
PR Error Process
Type (PRD)
See
Select how to detect error in the signal source of process
value PV. A PV process error bit (PRE) is set when there is description
an error in the signal source of the process value PV. This
is how the error in this signal source is detected.
Sensor error OR:
Treat as PV process error if it is an
error in signal from own sensor or if
temperature/pressure
compensation PV is in error.
Main sensor error only: Even if there are
temperature/pressure
compensation points, monitor error
in signal from own sensor only and
treat it as PV process error (PRE).
No sensor error:
Not treated as PV processing error
even if there is error in own sensor
or temperature compensation
point.
0: OR with Sensor Error
1: Only Main Sensor’s Error
2: No sensor error
210
Set Value
6F8C1290
4.2
Item
Integrated Input
PV No. (SPV)
Description
Set the number of the integrated input process value PV.
When [Integration Type Code] is integrated value, PV
indicates integrated value. Other PV values can be
selected as well as signal assigned to oneself as the
instantaneous value that is the source of this integrated
value. Register PVNo if other PV value is used for
integration operation.
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Remark
0 to 1024
Note: In actual application, often instantaneous value and
integrated value are required from one flow signal.
In this case, integrated value can be obtained as PV
by assigning this signal to real input of certain
instrument, making PV the instantaneous value and
"Integrated input PVNo." from other instrument as this
PVNo.
Pulse Weight
Coefficient (PU)
Set the pulse input signal weight coefficient. This is the
process amount for a single pulse input pulse.
0 to
999999999
Time Conversion
Coefficient (T)
Select the unit of time for instantaneous value operation.
See
description
Unit Conversion
Coefficient (K)
Set the conversion coefficient between the unit indicated by 0 to
999999999
the process signal and the unit of the displayed process
value PV.
Compensation
Coefficient (D)
Set the compensation coefficient that serves as conversion
factor.
0: None
1: Second
60: Minute
3600: Hour
0 to
999999999
Note: The values of PU, T, K, and D are used to obtain the
following process value PV.
Analog integrated value = (previous integrated value) +
(current instantaneous value) x D x K x (scan cycle) /T
Pulse integrated value=(previous count) + (current pulse
value) x PU x D x K)
Pulse instantaneous value = (current pulse count) x PU x D
x K x T/(scan cycle)
Integrated Upper
Limit (MAX)
Set the maximum value when PV is integrated value. When 0 to
999999999
PV exceeds this value, the excess becomes the PV value
and integration is performed against this value starting from
the next cycle. Maximum integrated value is used by
journal calculation software that calculates the usage by
periodically reading the rotary integrated value.
Integration Setting Set the integration setting.
(PSET)
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) =13:
TTL is selected. Use as follows in combination with
integration setting used (PSS).
RL to RH
PSET setting is invalid when PSS = 0 (unused).
Example: PSS=1 (use), PSET = 500
Issue UP alarm when 500<PV
Recover UP alarm when PV< = 500
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
211
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Start Button No
(FONO)
Description
Set the FO number of the start button to set the time where
no PV related alarm process is performed.
Set Value
Remark
0 to 8
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 11:
AMM is selected. Used as follows in combination with
Start Button No. (FONO) and Start Button PB No. (PBNO).
Example: When AMMT = 100, FONO = 8, and PBNO = 1,
no PV value related alarm processing [PVHH,
PVH, PVL, PVLL, PVD, PVIH, PVIL, PDE, PRE] is
performed for 10 seconds after #PB1.FO8 has
changed.
Start Button PB
No (PBNO)
Set the #PB number of the start button to set the time where 0 to 1024
no PV related alarm process is performed.
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 11:
AMM is selected. Used as follows in combination with
Start Button No. (FONO) and Start Button PB No. (PBNO).
Example: When AMMT = 100, FONO = 8, and PBNO = 1,
no PV value related alarm processing [PVHH,
PVH, PVL, PVLL, PVD, PVIH, PVIL, PDE, PRE] is
performed for 10 seconds after #PB1.FO8 has
changed.
PV Split Range
Position (SPLT)
Set the position of the split range origin of the PV value bar
graph of the split range displayed by OIS.
RL to RH
PV on-screen
Pointer Position
(PVPT)
Set the initial value of the on-screen pointer that marks the
PV value on the bar graph displayed when PV value is
instantaneous value.
RL to RH
Integrated
Change Rate SV
(DMAX)
Set the change rate setting of the PV integrated value.
0 to
999999999
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) =13:
TTL is selected. Unit is engineering value/hour.
Example: Scan cycle=0.5 sec (500ms), DMAX = 3600
When A = change in PV (integrated value) for 1
scan cycle
• Issue TTE alarm and stop PV integration when DMAX<A x
(1/0.5) x 3600.
• Issue TTE alarm and resume PV integration when A x
(1/0.5) x 3600< = DMAX.
When DMAX is set to 0, no TTE alarm is issued and PV
integration is not stopped regardless of the change in PV
(integrated value).
212
Poly Line No.
(PLN)
Set the number of the polynomial line table for polynomial
compensation of process signal.
0 to 256
PF Signal
Direction Setup
(SGDR)
Select the direction of the power factor signal.
0: Direct
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE)=12:
PFI is selected. When SDGR = 1 (negative direction),
inversion is performed during power factor input
conversion (such as convert as 0% if input count after
normalization is 100%).
1: Reverse
6F8C1290
For future use
4.2
Item
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Lead/Lag Display
Setup
(PDSP)
Select the display direction of the power factor bar graph
displayed by OIS.
Input Device
Name (SENS)
Select the device name of the input signal source for
displaying with OIS.
Up to 16
characters.
Dragless
Determination
Value (V0)
Set the wind speed to be judged as windless.
−3.402823E38 to 3.402823E38
See
description
Remark
0: Lead Lag
1: Log Lead
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 12:
PFI is selected.
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 14:
WND is selected.
Example: When #PV1.TYPE = 14(WND), #PV1.V0 = 10,
If #PV1.PV<10, #PV1direction (wind direction) is
windless.
Wind Direction PV Specify the #PV to be converted as wind direction value.
No (PVP)
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 14:
WND is selected.
0 to 1024
Example: When PV1.TYPE = 14(WND), #PV1.PVP = 2,
#PV2.PV shall be wind direction input. For
example, If #PV2.PV = 0, #PV1direction (wind
direction) is North.
PV L-limit Sensor
Error Suppress
(UIL)
Set whether to suppress sensor error (PVI) when input count ON: Yes
is less than input count lower limit (CL).
OFF: No
PV H-limit Sensor
Error Suppress
(UIH)
Set whether to suppress sensor error (PVI) when input count ON: Yes
exceeds input count upper limit (CH).
OFF: No
PV/PVC Direct
(DIC)
Set whether to use the atom PVC which is used to
compensate the PV value with application.
PV<>PVC,
PV=PVC
Input Count
Upper Limit
(DCH)
Set the input counter value (double integer) equivalent to
instrument range upper limit (RH).
See
description
Only nv series
See
description
Only nv series
DCL<DCH< = 2147483647
Input Count Lower Set the input counter value (double integer) equivalent to
Limit (DCL)
instrument range lower limit (RL).
−2147483648< = DCL<DCH
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
213
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Meaning of LP
Item
Tag No. (TAG)
Description
Set Value
Set the tag number to be assigned to the instrument.
is used to identify the instrument.
Remark
This Up to 16
characters
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and
underscore.
• Must be unique within the system.
• Must not be a reserved word. The case of the character is
not recognized. All characters are converted to
uppercase.
Tag Name
(NAME)
Name of instrument.
Tag Type (TYPE)
Select the instrument function type.
By inserting space in between, this can be centered or
left/right justified in unit of 16 characters when displayed on
OIS instrument.
0: Not used
25: SET
214
20: PID
21: SPI
22: M/A
23: RS
24: TPI
Up to 32
characters.
See
description
Display Pattern
Model No. (MDL)
This is the OIS tag pattern number. Standard tag pattern is 0 to 9
used for 0. User created display pattern is used for 1 to 9.
Signal Category
No. (AREA)
Number used to group instrument signals throughout the
system. Determine and register the number to which this
instrument belongs.
0 to 63
Auto Screen
Display No.
(SCNO)
With OIS, a screen to be opened automatically when an
instrument issues an alarm can be registered in advance.
Set the number of such screen. Set 0 if no screen is to be
opened automatically.
0 to 1024
Operation Lock
Setting (LOCK)
Specify whether to prohibit operator action when instrument 0: Enabled
tag pattern is tagged with the OIS.
1: Disabled
Tagging Color
(COLR)
Register the tagging color.
Select a color from the list.
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Purple
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange
10: Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth
22: Tea green 23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue
25: Dark purple 26: Gray green 27: Faint gray
28: Pale green 29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green
31: Faint dark gray
Tagging Character Register the tagging character.
(SIGN)
Up to 16
characters.
Alarm Monitoring
Method (ATYP)
See
description
6F8C1290
Select the alarm issue and verification method.
0: A type 1: B type 2: B1 type 3: C type
4: C1 type 5: D type 6: B2 type
0: A type
1: B type
currently
supported
4.2
Item
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Alarm Monitor
Common Setting
(AMON)
Select whether to monitor (ON) instrument alarm or not
(OFF).
0: ON
1: OFF
Control Scan
Setting
(PRS)
Select the scan to perform instrument standard processing
in controller. High-speed scan or main scan.
0: Main
1: High-speed
Sub Schedule No. If main scan processing, the execution cycle of the
(SCH)
instrument standard processing can be scheduled in order
to distribute the load. When the sub schedule no. is 0,
processing is performed for each main scan. When N
(>0), processing is performed once every N + 1 main
scans.
Remark
0 to 255
Grouping No.
(GRP)
0 to 254
Register the number of the main scan to perform the
processing performed every N + 1 main scans described in
"Sub Schedule No". Indicate with a number between 0 and
(N-1). When the grouping number is greater than 1, set the
number less than that number.
Interrupt Control
Register Setup
(SFRP)
Select whether to send (YES) interrupt to TIF station or not
(NO) when control amount (MV) changes.
0: No
1: Yes
Alarm Monitor
Single Setting
(MON)
When Alarm Monitoring Common Setting is ON, select
whether to monitor (ON) each alarm point or not (OFF).
0: ON
1: OFF
Alarm Grade Type Select the alarm grade for each alarm point.
(AGRD)
0: None 1: Warning 2: Minor alarm 3: Medium alarm
4: Major alarm
See
description
Indicator PV No.
(PVP)
Set the number of the process signal PV for which valve
position is displayed. When [Output Signal Type] is pulse,
the feedback PV value can be displayed on the MV bar
graph instead of MV in order to determine the actuator
position and valve position.
0 to 1024
Valve Position PV
No. (VP)
0 to 1024
Set the number of the process signal PV for which valve
position is displayed. When [Output Signal Type] is pulse,
the feedback PV value can be displayed on the MV bar
graph instead of MV in order to determine the actuator
position and valve position.
MV Output
Direction Setting
(MDR)
When analog output, select the direction of the analog
output with respect to control amount MV.
Either "4-20mA output at 0-100%" or "20-4mA output at
0-100%".
See
description
Note: For pulse input, this output direction is as follows:
When "4-20mA output at 0-100%", ΔMV is positive
and it is Open pulse output.
When "20-4mA output at 0-100%", ΔMV is negative
and it is Close pulse output.
0: 4-20mA output at 0-100%
1: 20-4mA output at 0-100%
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
215
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
Set Value
Control Operation Select the operation direction of control amount MV for the
Direction Set
deviation of the PID controller or sample PI controller.
(CDR)
Either "Increase MV when deviation (SV-PM) increase" or
"decrease MV when deviation (SV-PV) increase".
Remark
See
description
0: Increase MV when SV-PM increase
1: decrease MV when SV-PV increase
MV Display
Direction Setting
(MDSP)
Select the origin for the display direction of the MV bar
graph. 0 for origin on left side and 1 for origin on right
side.
0: 0 to 100%
1: 100 to 0%
MV Open/Close
Char (VCHR)
Select the characters to display on 0-100 (100-0) origin in
MV bar graph.
See
description
0: C-O
1: O-C
2: C-C
3: O-O
4: S-O
5: O-S
6: S-S
MV Split Range
Position (MSPL)
Set the location of the origin when the MV bar graph is split
range.
ML to MH
MV On-screen
Pointer Position
(MVPT)
Set the position of the operation pointer placed on the MV
bar graph.
ML to MH
Output Signal
Type (MSIG)
Select the output signal type.
See
description
Not used:
No standard processing of this
instrument is performed.
No real output:
No MV value real output
processing performed. Select
when no real output is performed
such as cascade master loop.
4-20mA:
Real output signal is 4-20mA.
Pulse width low-speed:
Real output signal is low-speed
pulse width output.
Pulse width high-speed:
Real output signal is high-speed
pulse width output.
Pulse column low-speed: Real output signal is low-speed
pulse train output.
Pulse column high-speed: Real output signal is high-speed
pulse train output.
216
I/O Module Type
(MIOM)
Select the PI/O module type.
Simulation
Method (SIMM)
This item sets and is unnecessary.
6F8C1290
0: Parallel PI/O 1: Intelligent serial PI/O
3: SSIF 4: F series PI/O
Please setting SIMM of PV:Indicator
2: Serial PI/O
See
description
−
4.2
Item
Output Point Bus
No. / Node No.
(MBNO)
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
In the case of nv series, I/O node number is set.
Remark
For nv series
TC-net I/O: 3 to 26
Intelligent I/O: 31 to 34
For V series
In the case of V series, the bus number of the output point of
the process signal is set. Please set output point bus/ unit/
slot/point number when all the following conditions consist.
1) I/O module type: MIOM = “Intelligent serial", “SSIF", "F
series".
2) "MV abnormality: MVE" or "MV read backing processing
when control mode is M" necessity.
MVE:
Warning where intelligent I/O (AO
module) is generated by DU (down of
card).
MV read backing: Processing which sets I/O (AO
module) intelligent read backing
count in MV.
3) Tag type: TYPE = “PID",“SPI",“M/A",“TPI".
4) Output signal type:MSIG = “4-20mA".
Output point unit
No. (MUNO)
Set the unit no. of the of the process signal output point.
Output point slot
No. (MSNO)
Set the slot no. of the of the process signal output point.
Output point point Set the point no. of the of the process signal output point.
No. (MPNO)
Main Slot No.
(MCNO)
Set the slot no. of the main module.
Output Point
Variable Name
(MVA)
Set the variable name of the of the process signal output
point (analog output point) with direct notation variable
(Example: %MW11.0).
See
description
MV Change Rate
Limit
(DMV)
Set the MV change rate limit.
0 to
999999999
MV Upper Limit
(MH)
Set the MV upper limit.
See
description
MV Lower Limit
(ML)
Set the MV lower limit.
MV Upper Limit
Alarm Value
(MHA)
Set the MV upper limit alarm.
MV Lower Limit
Alarm Value
(MLA)
Set the MV lower limit alarm.
MV Alarm Dead
Band (MVB)
Set the MV upper/lower limit alarm dead band.
ML<MH< = 999999999
−999999999< = ML<MH
MLA<MHA< = 999999999
−999999999< = MLA<MHA
Only nv series
See
description
See
description
See
description
0 to
999999999
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
217
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
Control Stop Type Select how to judge the control stop (CLI) of the PID
(CLD)
controller or sample PI controller.
Set Value
Remark
See
description
Demoted to CLI/M mode at SV/PV error:
Set CLI = ON and automatically stop control operation
when PV or SV value is abnormal (PRE).
No error process setup:
CLI is not automatically set ON. The control stop
condition depends on the user program.
Control Mode
Setting (CMD)
Select the operation disable condition for OIS-DS tag
control mode change.
Enable, C mode disabled, A mode disabled, M mode
disabled, C/A mode disabled, C/M mode disabled, A/M
mode disabled
See
description
SV Setting at A
Mode (SVS)
Select whether SV value can be set when the control mode
of the controller is A mode.
0: Enabled
Control Cycle
(DT)
Set the cycle of the control operation in seconds.
0 to 32767
1: Disabled
Sample Time (T0) Set the sample time of the sample PI controller in 0.1s units. 0 to 32767
218
Control Time (T1)
Set the control time of the sample PI controller in 0.1s units. 0 to 32767
Proportional Gain
(KP)
Set the ratio gain of the PID operation.
0 to 1000
Integral Time (TI)
Set the integration time of the PID operation in minutes.
0 to 1000
Rate Time (TD)
Set the rate time of the PID operation in minutes.
0 to 1000
Derivative
Coefficient (ETA)
Set the eta for imperfect differential gain (1/eta).
0 <= ETA
<= 1
Real
2-degree-of-freed Set the 2-degree-of-freedom proportion coefficient (α).
om Prop.
Coefficient (ALP)
0 to 1
Real
2-degree-of-freed Set the 2-degree-of-freedom integration coefficient (β).
om Integ.
Coefficient (BET)
0 <= BET < 2 Real
2-degree-of-freed Set the 2-degree-of-freedom differentiation coefficient (γ).
om Deriv.
Coefficient (GAM)
0 <= GAM
<2
Real
Deviation Gap
Width (GP)
Set the gain of the deviation (SV-PV) of the PID and SPI
operation. The gain can be modified within the gap width
near 0.
0 to 100
Real
Unit is %
Deviation Gap
Gain (GG)
Set the gain of the deviation (SV-PV) of the PID and SPI
operation. The gain can be modified within the gap width
near 0.
0 to 1
Real
Unit is times
Ratio Gain (GAIN) Set the ratio station gain.
0 to
999999999
Real
Ratio Bias (BIAS)
−999999999
to 999999999
Real
6F8C1290
Set the ratio station bias.
Unit is times
4.2
Item
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Remark
Full Stroke
Time/Pulse (FP)
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the pulse count
(pulse series) or pulse time (pulse width) necessary for the
actuator to move full stroke.
0 to
999999999
Back Lash (BL)
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the actuator
backlash.
0 to 255
Hold Time (HT)
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the hold time (S)
when the output direction is reversed.
0 to 10
Real
Pulse Dead Band
(PLB)
When [Output Signal Type] is pulse, set the dead band to
stop unnecessary actuator movement for minute pulse
count.
0 to 100
Real
Positive Deviation Set the alarm level for positive deviation with engineering
Alarm Value (PDL) value.
0 to
999999999
Real
Negative
Deviation Alarm
Value (NDL)
0 to
999999999
Set the alarm level for negative deviation with engineering
value.
Deviation Alarm
Set the dead band for deviation alarm with engineering
Dead Band (DVB) value.
0 to
999999999
Real
Deviation alarm issuing and recovery method
When absolute value is denoted as ABS (
)
Deviation alarm (DVE) is issued when
ABS (SV-PV) > = DL is satisfied.
Then,
ABS (SV-PV) < = DL-DVB
ABS (SV-PV) < = DL-DVB.
Ratio Upper Limit
(SH)
Set the instrument range upper limit of the ratio station.
Ratio Lower Limit
(SL)
Set the instrument range lower limit of the ratio station.
SL < SH < = 999999999
−999999999 < = SL < SH
See
description
See
description
Ratio Engineering Set the engineering unit of the instrument range of the ratio
station.
Unit Character
(SVEU)
Up to 16
characters.
Ratio Operation
Set the engineering unit character of the MV value of the
Value Engineering ratio station.
Unit (MVEU)
Up to 16
characters.
Ratio Decimal
Place (SVDM)
Set the decimal point position of the SV value of the ratio
station.
0 to 5
Ratio Operation
Decimal Place
(MVDM)
Set the decimal point position of the MV value of the ratio
station.
0 to 5
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
219
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Delta MV Gain
(KF)
Description
Set Value
Set the compensation factor to compensate the MV change. 0 to 100
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 20: PID, 21: SPI,
or 24: TPI is selected. Combine with ΔMV bias (DFF) and
use in instruction word (PID, SPI, TPI) as follows.
• Add (A x KF) + DFF to MV where MV change operated with
instruction word is A.
If compensation is not necessary for calculated MV
change of instruction word, set KF = 1 and DFF = 0.
Delta MV Bias
(DFF)
Set the bias value to compensate the MV change.
This is valid only when Tag type (TYPE) = 20: PID, 21: SPI,
or 24: TPI is selected. Combine with ΔMV gain (KF) and
use in instruction word (PID, SPI, TPI) as follows.
−100 to 100
• Add (A x KF) + DFF to MV where MV change operated with
instruction word is A.
If compensation is not necessary for calculated MV
change of instruction word, set KF = 1 and DFF = 0.
MV Lamp Target
Value (MVP)
Set the target value for SMV instruction.
Use as follows in combination with MV lamp increment
(MVK) and MV lamp time coefficient (MVT).
−999999999
to 999999999
• Bring MV closer to target value MVP with slope
(MVK/MVT).
MV Lamp
Increment Value
(MVK)
Set the slope of SMV instruction.
Use as follows in combination with MV lamp target value
(MVP) and MV lamp time coefficient (MVT).
0 to
999999999
• Bring MV closer to target value MVP with slope
(MVK/MVT).
MV Lamp Time
Coefficient (MVT)
Select the time unit for MV lamp.
Use as follows in combination with MV lamp target value
(MVP) and MV lamp increment (MVK).
See
description
• Bring MV closer to target value MVP with slope
(MVK/MVT).
0: None 1: Second 60: Minute 3600: Hour
SV Lamp Target
Value (SVP)
Set the target value for SSV instruction.
−999999999
Use as follows in combination with SV lamp increment (SVK) to 999999999
and SV lamp time coefficient (SVT).
• Bring SV closer to target value SVP with slope (SVK/SVT).
SV Lamp
Increment Value
(SVK)
Set the slope of SSV instruction.
Use as follows in combination with SV lamp target value
(SVP) and SV lamp time coefficient (SVT).
0 to
999999999
• Bring SV closer to target value SVP with slope (SVK/SVT).
SV Lamp Time
Coefficient (SVT)
Select the time unit for SV lamp.
Use as follows in combination with SV lamp target value
(SVP) and SV lamp increment (SVK).
See
description
• Bring SV closer to target value SVP with slope (SVK/SVT).
0: None 1: Second 60: Minute 3600: Hour
MV Tracking Value Not used.
(TR)
220
6F8C1290
−999999999
to 999999999
Remark
4.2
Item
Description
Set Value
Output Instrument Select the device name of the output signal destination for
Name (ACTS)
displaying with OIS.
Set the inching width during pulse output.
Inching Pulse
Width (POIP)
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Remark
Up to 16
characters.
0 to 1500
Unit is MS
Note: Set the multiple of pulse width (9ms or 72ms). If a
value that is not a multiple is specified, the excess is
truncated. However, minimum pulse width is used if
a value between 0 and minimum pulse width (9ms or
72ms) is specified.
SV major tracking The parameter for new instrumentation FB.
(FS0)
The majors tracking of SV is done or it selects it.
Cascade value
kind (FS1)
The parameter for new instrumentation FB.
The unit of the cascade value is selected.
Dead time [min]
(MDT)
The parameter for model drive PID FB library.
PD comp. Gain
(MKF)
The parameter for model drive PID FB library.
PD comp.
defferential time
[min] (MTF)
The parameter for model drive PID FB library.
0: %
1: Engineering
Varue
Meaning of PB
Item
Tag No. (TAG)
Description
Set Value
Remark
Set the tag number to be assigned to the instrument. This is Up to 16
used to identify the instrument.
characters
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and
underscore.
• Must be unique within the system.
• Must not be a reserved word. The case of the character is
not recognized. All characters are converted to
uppercase.
Tag Name
(NAME)
Name of instrument.
Tag Type (TYPE)
Select the instrument function type.
By inserting space in between, this can be centered or
left/right justified in unit of 16 characters when displayed on
OIS instrument.
If TIM (clock), CNT (counter) tag types are set to not used,
the controller performs no standard processing.
0: Not used 30: SOV
34: PB8 35: PB2
Display Pattern
Model No. (MDL)
31: MTR
32: MOV
Up to 32
characters.
See
description
33: PB4
This is the OIS tag pattern number. Standard tag pattern is 0 to 9
used for 0. User created display pattern is used for 1 to 9.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
221
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
Signal Category
No. (AREA)
Number used to group instrument signals throughout the
system. Determine and register the number to which this
instrument belongs.
0 to 63
Auto Screen
Display No.
(SCNO)
With OIS, a screen to be opened automatically when an
instrument issues an alarm can be registered in advance.
Set the number of such screen. Set 0 if no screen is to be
opened automatically.
0 to 1024
Operation Lock
Setting (LOCK)
Specify whether to prohibit operator action when instrument 0: Enabled
tag pattern is tagged with the OIS.
1: Disabled
Tagging Color
(COLR)
Register the tagging color.
See
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Purple description
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange
10: Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth 22: Tea green
23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue 25: Dark purple
26: Gray green 27: Faint gray 28: Pale green
29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green 31: Faint dark gray
Up to 16
characters.
Alarm Monitoring
Method (ATYP)
Select the alarm issue and verification method.
Alarm Monitor
Common Setting
(AMON)
Select whether to monitor (ON) instrument alarm or not
(OFF).
0: ON
Control Scan
Setting (PRS)
Select the scan to perform instrument standard processing
in controller. High-speed scan or main scan.
0: Main
0: A type 1: B type 2: B1 type 3: C type
4: C1 type 5: D type 6: B2 type
Sub Schedule No. If main scan processing, the execution cycle of the
(SCH)
instrument standard processing can be scheduled in order
to distribute the load. When the sub schedule no. is 0,
processing is performed for each main scan. When N
(>0), processing is performed once every N + 1 main
scans.
See
description
1: OFF
1: High-speed
0 to 255
Grouping No.
(GRP)
0 to 254
Register the number of the main scan to perform the
processing performed every N + 1 main scans described in
"Sub Schedule No". Indicate with a number between 0 and
(N-1). When the grouping number is greater than 1, set the
number less than that number.
Interrupt Control
Register Setup
(SFRP)
Select whether to send (YES) interrupt to TIF station or not
(NO) when button status (FO) changes.
0: No
1: Yes
Alarm Monitor
Single Setting
(MON)
When Alarm Monitoring Common Setting is ON, select
whether to monitor (ON) each alarm point or not (OFF).
0: ON
1: OFF
6F8C1290
Remark
Select a color from the list.
Tagging Character Register the tagging character.
(SIGN)
222
Set Value
0: A type
1: B type
currently
supported
4.2
Item
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Alarm Grade Type Select the alarm grade for each alarm point.
(AGRD)
0: None 1: Warning 2: Minor alarm 3: Medium alarm
4: Major alarm
Remark
See
description
Input Signal
Select whether to set change in input signal in operation log See
description
Operation Record item.
Setting (ARDI)
0: No 1: When ON 2: When OFF 3: When ONOFF
Output Signal
Select whether to set change in output signal in operation
Operation Record log item.
Setting (ARDO)
0: No 1: When ON 2: When OFF 3: When ONOFF
See
description
FI Signal Change
Buzzer Setting
(BZFG)
Select whether to sound the buzzer when there is a change
in input signal.
See
description
Auto Detection
Setting (ADT)
Select whether to detect (ON) alarm or not (OFF).
0: OFF
1: ON
Answer Back
Monitor Timer SV
(FMT)
Set the monitor timer for monitoring answer back in 0.1
second units.
0 to 32767
0: No
1: When ON
2: When OFF
3: When ONOFF
Set the character displayed on the lamp.
Display Lamp
Character (SNAM)
Up to 16
characters.
See
Signal ON Display Select the lamp color when the lamp signal becomes ON.
Color (SCON)
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Purple description
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange 10:
Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth
22: Tea green 23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue
25: Dark purple 26: Gray green 27: Faint gray
28: Pale green 29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green
31: Faint dark gray
Signal OFF
Display Color
(SCOF)
Select the lamp color when the lamp signal becomes OFF.
Lamp Display
Setting (LMP)
Select whether to display lamp on tag pattern in OIS.
0: Not Display
1: Display
Button Display
Setting (PB)
Select whether to display button on tag pattern in OIS.
0: Not Display
1: Display
See
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Purple description
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange
10: Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth
22: Tea green 23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue
25: Dark purple 26: Gray green 27: Faint gray
28: Pale green 29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green
31: Faint dark gray
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
223
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
Set Value
Input Inversion
Setting (INV)
Select whether to invert signal at input point to turn on lamp. 0: Not Inverted
1: Inverted
Output Inversion
Setting (ONV)
Select whether to invert the signal during output of value
after output table processing to output point.
Input Point Bus
No. / Node No.
(IBNO*)
In the case of nv series, I/O node number is set.
Remark
0: Not Inverted
1: Inverted
For nv series
TC-net I/O: 3 to 26
Intelligent I/O: 31 to 34
In the case of V series, the bus number of the input point of
the process signal is set. Please set point number and input
point bus/unit/slot/output point bus/unit/slot/point number
when all the following conditions consist.
For V series
(1) The I/O module type = “Intelligent serial”, “SSIF", "F
series"
(2) "I/O abnormality: IOE" or "Control mode: MOD = [M] of
the DO read backing is necessary.
IOE:
Warning where intelligent I/O (DI and
DO module) is generated by DU
(down of card).
DO read backing: Read backing DO of intelligent I/O
(DO module) is set in FO.
Input Point Unit
No. (IUNO*)
Set the unit no. of the of the process signal input point.
Input Point Slot
No. (ISNO*)
Set the slot no. of the of the process signal input point.
Input Point Point
No. (IPNO*)
Set the point no. of the of the process signal input put point.
Input Point Main
Slot No. (ICNO*)
Set the slot no. of the main module.
Output Point Bus
No. (OBNO*)
Set the bus no. of the of the process signal output point.
Output Point Unit
No. (OUNO*)
Set the unit no. of the of the process signal output point.
Output Point Slot
No. (OSNO*)
Set the slot no. of the of the process signal output point.
Only nv series
Output Point Point Set the point no. of the of the process signal output point.
No. (OPNO*)
Output Point Main Set the slot no. of the main module.
Slot No. (OCNO*)
224
Input Point
Variable Name
(IA)
Set the variable name of the of the process signal input
point (digital input point) with direct notation variable
(Example: %MX11.0.0).
Output Point
Variable Name
(OA)
Set the variable name of the of the process signal output
point (digital output point) with direct notation variable
(Example: %MX11.0.0).
6F8C1290
Only nv series
4.2
Item
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Remark
Output points 1 to Select the action for output of each point when button 1 to 8 See
is pressed.
description
8
(Button pressed) 0: None 1: Set output 2: Reset output 3: Toggle output
(DA*D) * is 1 to 8
Output points 1 to Select the action for output of each point when button 1 to 8 See
is released.
description
8
(Button released) 0: None 1: Set output 2: Reset output 3: Toggle output
(DA*V) * is 1 to 8
Indicator PV
Number (PVP)
Set the PV number of the process signal displayed on
indicator.
0 to 768
Mode Usage
Setting (MODS)
Select whether to display or not the control mode for the
OIS,and select mode changing inhibit.
See
description
For future use
0: Not used 1: A/M Mode Enable
2: A Mode Disable 3:M Mode Disable
Multiple Button
Simultaneous Set
(MSEL)
Select whether to enable (1) or disable (0) pressing of
0: Disabled
multiple buttons simultaneous during remote operation from 1: Enabled
OIS.
I/O Module Type
(DIOM)
Select the PI/O module type.
Input Update
Setting (FIUS)
Select whether to update input signal (FI) by standard
process or not.
Standard
User
Answer Back
Alarm Setting
(ASA1)
Set whether to perform answer back alarm for MOT, SOV,
and MOV tag.
No
Yes
Momentary Timer
Setting (MTS)
Set the time till forced termination of momentary output for
MOT, SOV, and MOV tag. in 100 ms units. After FO
output request (RFO = 1) from OIS, if there is no termination
request (RFO1 = 0) after this time has elapsed, RFO1 = 0 is
forced by PCS.
0 to 32767
15 (1.5
second) or
less is treated
as 15.
Momentary Timer
Setting (MMS)
Set whether to perform momentary processing for each OIS Unused
button. Setting used for MOT, SOV, and MOV tag.
Used
0: Parallel PI/O
1: Intelligent serial PI/O
2: Serial PI/O
3: F series PI/O
See
description
Control Operation Selects processing condition of 2PC tag. (For 2PC Tag)
Direction Set
FO1 set with PV < SV, FO1 set with PV > SV
(CDR)
2PC std.
Processing
(F2PC)
Selects whether to use standard processing or not. If OFF is ON, OFF
selected, application program must be used for 2PC tag.
(For 2PC Tag)
Hysteresis (H)
Set input characteristic of 2PC tag. (For 2PC Tag)
−99999999 to
999999999
Set Value (SV)
Set SV of 2PC tag. (For 2PC Tag)
−99999999 to
999999999
SV at C Mode
(RSV)
Set SV of 2PC tag at C Mode. (For 2PC Tag)
−99999999 to
999999999
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
225
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
SV Setting at A
Mode (SVS)
Selects whether it is possible to set the SV value when the
control mode of the controller is A mode. (For 2PC Tag)
Control mode
setting (CMD)
Selects whether it is possible to set the control mode or not.
(For 2PC Tag)
Set Value
Remark
Enabled
Disabled
Enable, C Mode Disable, A Mode Disable, M Mode Disable,
C/A Mode Disable, C/M Mode Disable, A/M Mode Disable
Meaning of SQ
Item
Tag No. (TAG)
Description
Set Value
Set the tag number to be assigned to the instrument. This is Up to 16
characters
used to identify the instrument.
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and
underscore.
• Must be unique within the system.
• Must not be a reserved word. The case of the character is
not recognized. All characters are converted to
uppercase.
Tag Name
(NAME)
Name of instrument.
Up to 32
characters.
By inserting space in between, this can be centered or
left/right justified in unit of 16 characters when displayed on
OIS instrument.
Tag Type (TYPE)
Select the instrument function type.
Not used/SEQ
If the tag type is set to not used, the controller performs no
standard processing.
226
Display Pattern
Model No. (MDL)
This is the OIS tag pattern number. Standard tag pattern is 0 to 9
used for 0. User created display pattern is used for 1 to 9.
Signal Category
No. (AREA)
Number used to group instrument signals throughout the
system. Determine and register the number to which this
instrument belongs.
0 to 63
Auto Screen
Display No.
(SCNO)
With OIS, a screen to be opened automatically when an
instrument issues an alarm can be registered in advance.
Set the number of such screen. Set 0 if no screen is to be
opened automatically.
0 to 1024
Operation Lock
Setting (LOCK)
Specify whether to prohibit operator action when instrument Disable/Enable
tag pattern is tagged with the OIS.
Tagging Color
(COLR)
Register the tagging color.
6F8C1290
See
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Purple description
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange
10: Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth
22: Tea green 23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue
25: Dark purple 26: Gray green 27: Faint gray
28: Pale green 29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green
31: Faint dark gray
Select a color from the list.
Remark
4.2
Item
Description
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Tagging Character Register the tagging character.
(SIGN)
Remark
Up to 32
characters.
Alarm Monitoring
Method
(ATYP)
Select the alarm issue and verification method.
Alarm Monitor
Common Setting
(AMON)
Select whether to monitor (ON) instrument alarm or not
(OFF).
ON/OFF
Alarm Monitor
Single Setting
(MON)
When Alarm Monitoring Common Setting is ON, select
whether to monitor (ON) each alarm point or not (OFF).
0: ON
1: OFF
See
description
0: A Type 1: B Type 2: B1 Type 3: C Type
4: C1 Type 5: D Type 6: B2 Type
Alarm Grade Type Select the alarm grade for each alarm point.
(AGRD)
0: None 1: Warning 2: Minor alarm 3: Medium alarm
4: Major alarm
0: A Type
1: B Type
currently
supported
See
description
Phase Name
(PNAM)
Set the step name included in sequence operation.
Up to 24
characters.
Interlock/Single
Select (FA)
Set whether to stop sequence (single) at each phase.
Single/Interlock
Conf Progress
Setting (CNFM)
Set whether to confirm progress (not used).
OFF/ON
Control Mode
Setting (CMD)
Select the operation disable condition for OIS-DS tag
control mode change.
Enable, C mode disabled, A mode disabled, M mode
disabled, C/A mode disabled, C/M mode disabled, A/M
mode disabled
See
description
Meaning of TC
Item
Tag No. (TAG)
Description
Set the tag number to be assigned to the instrument.
is used to identify the instrument.
Set Value
Remark
This Up to 16
characters
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and
underscore.
• Must be unique within the system.
• Must not be a reserved word. The case of the character is
not recognized.
All characters are converted to uppercase.
Tag Name
(NAME)
Name of instrument.
Tag Type (TYPE)
Select the instrument function type.
By inserting space in between, this can be centered or
left/right justified in unit of 16 characters when displayed on
OIS instrument.
If TIM (clock), CNT (counter) tag types are set to not used,
the controller performs no standard processing.
Up to 32
characters.
Not
used/TIM/CNT
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
227
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
Set Value
Display Pattern
Model No. (MDL)
This is the OIS tag pattern number. Standard tag pattern is 0 to 9
used for 0. User created display pattern is used for 1 to 9.
Signal Category
No. (AREA)
Number used to group instrument signals throughout the
system. Determine and register the number to which this
instrument belongs.
0 to 63
Auto Screen
Display No.
(SCNO)
With OIS, a screen to be opened automatically when an
instrument issues an alarm can be registered in advance.
Set the number of such screen. Set 0 if no screen is to be
opened automatically.
0 to 1024
Operation Lock
Setting (LOCK)
Specify whether to prohibit operator action when instrument Disable /
tag pattern is tagged with the OIS.
Enable
Tagging Color
(COLR)
Register the tagging color.
Select a color from the list.
See
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Purple description
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange
10: Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth
22: Tea green 23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue
25: Dark purple 26: Gray green 27: Faint gray
28: Pale green 29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green
31: Faint dark gray
Tagging Character Register the tagging character.
(SIGN)
Up to 16
characters.
Alarm Monitoring
Method (ATYP)
Select the alarm issue and verification method.
Alarm Monitor
Common Setting
(AMON)
Select whether to monitor (ON) instrument alarm or not
(OFF).
Control Scan
Setting (PRS)
Select the scan to perform instrument standard processing
in controller. High-speed scan or main scan.
0: A Type 1: B Type 2: B1 Type
5: D Type 6: B2 Type
3: C Type
4: C1 Type
Sub Schedule No. If main scan processing, the execution cycle of the
(SCH)
instrument standard processing can be scheduled in order
to distribute the load. When the sub schedule no. is 0,
processing is performed for each main scan. When N
(>0), processing is performed once every N + 1 main
scans.
228
See
description
ON/OFF
0 to 255
Grouping No.
(GRP)
0 to 255
Register the number of the main scan to perform the
processing performed every N + 1 main scans described in
"Sub Schedule No". Indicate with a number between 0 and
(N-1). When the grouping number is greater than 1, set the
number less than that number.
Alarm Monitor
Single Setting
(MON)
When Alarm Monitoring Common Setting is ON, select
whether to monitor (ON) each alarm point or not (OFF).
6F8C1290
Remark
0: ON
1: OFF
0: A Type
1: B Type
currently
supported
4.2
Item
Description
Alarm Grade Type Select the alarm grade for each alarm point.
(AGRD)
0: None 1: Warning 2: Minor alarm 3: Medium alarm
4: Major alarm
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Set Value
Remark
See
description
Engineering Unit
(EU)
Set the engineering unit character of the process value PV.
Up to 16
characters.
Time unit (TMEU)
When instrument type is clock, PV indicates elapsed time.
Select this unit. The controller standard processing
calculates the elapsed time from this code.
Sec / Min/
Hour / Day
Decimal Place
(DCML)
Specify the number of decimal digits when displaying PV
value and range on instrument.
0 to 5
Upper Limit (MAX) This is the upper limit range. When the clock or counter PV 0 GT MAX GE
999999999
value exceeds this value, peak crossing processing is
performed automatically and rotary integration is repeated.
Lower Limit (MIN) This is the lower limit range. When the counter PV value is −99999999 to
0
below this value, negative peak crossing processing is
performed automatically and rotary integration is repeated.
Meaning of DB
Item
Tag No. (TAG)
Description
Set Value
Remark
Set the tag number to be assigned to the instrument. This is Up to 16
characters
used to identify the instrument.
• Allowed characters are alphabets, numbers, and
underscore.
• Must be unique within the system.
• Must not be a reserved word. The case of the character is
not recognized.
All characters are converted to uppercase.
Tag Name
(NAME)
Name of instrument.
Tag Type (TYPE)
Select the instrument function type. Note that if the tag
type is set to not used, the controller performs no standard
processing.
By inserting space in between, this can be centered or
left/right justified in unit of 16 characters when displayed on
OIS instrument.
0: Not used
60: DB1
Up to 32
characters.
See
description
61: DB8
Display Pattern
Model No. (MDL)
This is the OIS tag pattern number. Standard tag pattern is 0 to 9
used for 0. User created display pattern is used for 1 to 9.
Signal Category
No. (AREA)
Number used to group instrument signals throughout the
system. Determine and register the number to which this
instrument belongs.
0 to 63
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
229
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Item
Description
0 to 1024
Auto Screen
Display No.
(SCNO)
With OIS, a screen to be opened automatically when an
instrument issues an alarm can be registered in advance.
Set the number of such screen. Set 0 if no screen is to be
opened automatically.
Operation Lock
Setting (LOCK)
Specify whether to prohibit operator action when instrument Disable/
tag pattern is tagged with the OIS.
Enable
Tagging Color
(COLR)
Register the tagging color.
Select a color from the list.
See
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Purple description
6: Sky blue 7: Black 8: Light gray blue 9: Dark orange
10: Gray water 11: Flesh color 12: Very clear gray
13: Clear gray 14: Gray 15: Very dark gray
16: Dark gray 17: Gray blue 18: Gray purple
19: Light gray 20: Dark gray 21: Red earth
22: Tea green 23: Dry grass green 24: Indigo blue
25: Dark purple 26: Gray green 27: Faint gray
28: Pale green 29: Dark white 30: Faint yellow green
31: Faint dark gray
Tagging Character Register the tagging character.
(SIGN)
Up to 16
characters.
Set value
(Real)(R)
Set the initial value of REAL set value of 8 points.
RL to RH
Set Value
(Long Int) (D)
Set the initial value of LONG INT set value of 8 points.
DL to DH
Set value (Int) (W) Set the initial value of INT set value of 8 points.
230
Set Value
WL to WH
Set value Upper
Limit (Real No.)
(RH)
Set the upper limit of REAL set value of 8 points.
RL to 9999999
Set Value Upper
Limit (Long Int)
(DH)
Set the upper limit of LONG INT set value of 8 points.
DL to 9999999
Set Value Upper
Limit (Int) (WH)
Set the upper limit of INT set value of 8 points.
WL to 32767
Set Value Lower
Limit (Real No.)
(RL)
Set the lower limit of REAL set value of 8 points.
−999999 to
RH
Set Value Lower
Limit (Long Int)
(EL)
Set the lower limit of LONG INT set value of 8 points.
−999999 to
DH
Set Value Lower
Limit (Int) (WL)
Set the lower limit of INT set value of 8 points.
−999999 to
WH
Set Value Type
(DTYP)
Select the data type of set value for 8 points individually.
0: Not used 8: INT 12: LONG INT 16: REAL
See
description
Decimal Place
(DCML)
Specify the number of decimal digits when value on
instrument.
0 to 5
Engineering Unit
(EU)
Set the engineering unit character of the set value.
Up to 16
characters.
6F8C1290
Remark
4.2
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning of R
Item
Description
Set Value
Remark
Real Value
Set the numeric value of the real parameter.
Comment
Set the comment for the real parameter.
Up to 36 characters.
Engineering Unit
Set the numeric value of the real parameter.
Up to 16 characters.
Meaning of W
Item
Description
Set Value
Remark
Real Value
Set the numeric value or bit string of integer parameter.
Bit Comment
Set the comment for the bit string.
Up to 36 characters.
Comment
Set the comment for the integer parameter.
Up to 36 characters.
Engineering Unit
Set the unit of the integer parameter.
Up to 16 characters.
Meaning of T
Item
Description
Set Value
Remark
Set Value
Set the timer setting.
Comment
Set the comment for the timer.
Engineering Unit
Timer engineering unit "0.1[sec]" or "0.1[min]" is
displayed.
Input condition
Set the timer input condition equation.
Current Value
The timer current value is displayed.
−
Displayed when online
Start
[−1] is displayed when the timer starts.
−
Displayed when online
Stop
[−1] is displayed when the timer stops.
−
Displayed when online
Reset
[−1] is displayed when the timer current value is
reset.
−
Displayed when online
Up
[−1] is displayed when the timer current value
exceeds the set value.
−
Displayed when online
Up to 36
characters.
−
#T1 to #T256: 0.1 [sec]
#T257 to #T512: 0.1 [min]
Up to 18
characters
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
231
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
Meaning of C
Item
Description
Set Value
Remark
Set Value
Set the counter setting.
Comment
Set the comment for the counter.
Engineering Unit
The counter engineering unit [count] is displayed.
Input condition
Set the counter input condition equation.
Current Value
The counter current value is displayed.
−
Displayed
when online
Increment
[−1] is displayed when the counter current value increases.
−
Displayed
when online
Decrement
[−1] is displayed when the counter current value decreases.
−
Displayed
when online
Reset
[−1] is displayed when the counter current value is reset.
−
Displayed
when online
Up
[−1] is displayed when the counter current value exceeds
the set value.
−
Displayed
when online
Down
[−1] is displayed when the counter current value is less than
the absolute value of the set value prefixed with minus sign.
−
Displayed
when online
Up to 36
characters.
−
Up to 18
characters
Meaning of P
Item
232
Description
Set Value
0 < = Xi − 1 < Xi
X1 to X11
Set X coordinates 1 to 11 in increasing
direction.
Y1 to Y11
Set Y coordinates 1 to 11.
Unit (X)
Set the X value unit.
Up to 16 characters.
Unit (Y)
Set the Y value unit.
Up to 16 characters.
Comment
Set the comment of the polynomial line table.
Up to 36 characters.
6F8C1290
Remark
i = 2 to 11 single
precision real
Single precision real
4.2
Meaning of Tag Parameters
Meaning of RTT
Item
Description
Set Value
ONS logical name
(LOGN)
Register the logical name.
Up to 16 characters
ONS atom name
(ATMN)
Register the atom name.
Up to 4 characters
Data type (DTYP)
Select the data type.
See description
Remark
D_NOTYPE, D_BIT,D_BITS, D_BYTE,
D_BYTES, D_U_BYTE, D_U_BYTES,
D_SHORT, D_SHORTS, D_U_SHORT,
D_U_SHORTS, D_LONG, D_LONGS,
D_U_LONG, D_U_LONGS, D_FLOAT,
D_FLOATS
Atom array count
(ATYP)
Register the total number of atom arrays.
0: No
1 or more: Total number of arrays
Atom array position
(ARYN)
Register the position of atom array.
0 to 65535
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
233
Chapter 4
4.3
Registering Tag Variables
Importing Tags
This section describes how to import tag parameter created as CSV format text
file into the Tag Editor.
The following operations can be performed using the import and export
functions.
• Display or edit tag parameters easily using spreadsheet application such
as Excel or text editor such as Windows Notepad.
• Use already registered tag no. or parameter and register parameters to
other controllers in parameter type units.
Used CSV text format
The input file format is as follows:
Type: Comma separated text file (CSV)
Format:
Registered Content
Example
1st line
Name of item to import
IdNo,TAG,NAME,RH,RL
2nd and subsequent lines
Registration data of item to import
1,L1LOP1,,100,0
• IdNo (Record No.) is required. Specify a registration record No. starting
from 1.
• Item name must be unique within the system. Create using the content of
output file displayed on the tag editor window or created by exporting as
reference.
• There is no need to register every item of the tag in the item name. Register
only the items to import and match the number of data with number of
items.
Set a string with length 0 for blank. (Example: "",)
• The items may be in any order.
• Match the list of registration data with the list of the name of the items to be
imported.
234
6F8C1290
4.3
Importing Tags
Importing
1) Select and display the parameter type to import in [Tag Editor] and click
<File><Import>.
2) The following Import window appears.
Input file name: Specify the path and name of the CSV file.
[Reference…] button: Open a dialog box to select the path and file name.
Check box (Delete all records before importing):
Check to import after deleting the registered content corresponding to
this tag type.
This prevents duplicate Tag No. error when replacing or moving
records.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
235
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
3) Set the above import conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[OK] button to import.
Click the [Cancel] button to cancel execution and close the window.
4) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
Click the [Cancel] button to abort execution. If execution is aborted, the
result imported up that point are imported in record units.
Error log
If an error occurs, it is recorded in the error log.
• Format
[IdNo of the error], [Item name] ([Error code]), [Item name]([Error code]),
…
Example: 1, TAG(12)
2, NAME(24), RH(21), …
0, IdNo(20)
• If IdNo cannot be determined, IdNo 0 will be output.
• Error Codes
Error Code
236
6F8C1290
Description
10
IdNo is not specified.
11
Specified item (field) cannot be imported.
12
Tag No. is invalid or is duplicated.
20
Specified data is not a numeric value.
21
Specified numeric value cannot be set (out of range).
22
Specified numeric value cannot be set (not a selection option).
23
Specified character cannot be set (not a selection option).
24
Specified character cannot be set (invalid length).
4.4
4.4
Exporting Tags
Exporting Tags
This section describes how to export tag No. and parameters registered with
Tag Editor to CSV format text file.
The following operations can be performed using the import and export
functions.
• Display or edit tag parameters easily using spreadsheet application such
as Excel or text editor such as Windows Notepad.
• Use already registered tag no. or parameter and register parameters to
other controllers in parameter type units.
Exporting
1) Select and display the parameter type to export in [Tag Editor] and click
<File><Export>.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
237
Chapter 4
Registering Tag Variables
2) The following Export window appears.
Output file name:
Specify the path and name of the output CSV file.
[Reference…] button: Open a dialog box to select the path and file name.
Record No.:
Specify the range of records to output.
3) Set the above export conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[OK] button to export.
Click the [Cancel] button to cancel execution and close the window.
4) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
Click the [Cancel] button to abort execution. If execution is aborted, the
result exported up to that point are exported in record units.
Important
Restriction on the number of data columns (items)
The number of columns (items) for CSV format data is limited to 255 columns. Therefore,
a tag with number of items greater than this is automatically divided into two files. ("(2)" is
appended to the second file name.
• Affected tag: DS type PB tag
• Output file examples: PB_PARA.CSV and PB_PARA(2).CSV
Note that if a file with the same name as the second file already exists, that file is
deleted.
Also, when editing the output of the affected tag and re-importing, the files must be
merged before importing or they must be imported separately.
There is no restriction on the number of rows (records) when exporting or the number
of rows or columns when importing.
238
6F8C1290
4.4
Exporting Tags
Output CSV text format
The output file format is as follows:
Type: Comma separated text file (CSV)
Format:
Description
Example
1st line
Name of all items
IdNo,TAG,NAME,RH,RL,EU…LOG,PICT,SIMM
2nd and subsequent
lines
Registration data of
all items
1,L1LOP1,,100,0,%…1,,0
For DS type PB tag, IdNo (record No.) and TAG (tag No.) are automatically
added to the first and second column of the second file of the divided files.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
239
Chapter 4
240
6F8C1290
Registering Tag Variables
Chapter 5
Creating Control
Programs
This chapter describes the procedure to create a control program with the
Program Editor.
The following topics are described:
5.1
Kind of Program Editor····································· 243
5.2
Semi Graphic ····················································· 244
5.2.1 Program editor organization····················· 244
5.2.2 Opening a task········································· 246
5.2.3 Drawing a program ·································· 251
5.2.4 Entering variables ···································· 256
5.2.5 Declaring variables ·································· 259
5.2.6 Using functions ········································ 263
5.2.7 Using function blocks ······························· 266
5.2.8 Search and replace instruction words ······ 268
5.2.9 Various edit and display functions············ 272
5.2.10 Saving a task ··········································· 275
5.2.11 Displaying variable comment and instruction
execution sequence ································· 276
5.2.12 Using cross reference ······························ 278
5.2.13 Using device variables property ··············· 279
5.3
Structured Text ·················································· 282
5.3.1 Organization of program editor (Text) ······ 282
5.3.2 Opening program ····································· 283
5.3.3 Editing program········································ 284
241
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.3.4 Entering variables ···································· 286
5.3.5 Declaring variables ·································· 287
5.3.6 Using function ·········································· 288
5.3.7 Using function block································· 289
5.3.8 Searching and replacing device
variables ·················································· 290
5.3.9 Saving program········································ 291
5.3.10 Using cross reference ······························ 295
5.3.11 Using device variable property················· 297
5.4
Full Graphic ······················································· 298
5.4.1 Organization of program editor
(Full graphic) ·········································· 298
5.4.2 Opening program ····································· 300
5.4.3 Drawing a program ·································· 303
5.4.4 Entering variables ···································· 313
5.4.5 Declaring variables ·································· 314
5.4.6 Using functions ········································ 317
5.4.7 Using function blocks ······························· 320
5.4.8 Searching and replacing instructions
or variables ·············································· 321
5.4.9 Various edit and display functions············ 324
5.4.10 Saving program········································ 329
5.4.11 Displaying data type and
Execution order········································ 330
5.4.12 Using cross reference ······························ 331
5.4.13 Using device variables property ··············· 331
5.4.14 Using any function ··································· 331
5.5
Creating a User Function·································· 336
5.6
Creating a User Function Block ······················· 339
5.7
Using Tag Symbols ··········································· 342
5.8
Reusing a Program ··········································· 343
5.9
Compile a Batch of System ······························ 345
5.10 Batch Compiling of Controller ························· 347
5.11 Searching Influence of Change························ 349
5.12 Setting Program Security ································· 353
5.13 Searching Double Defined Variables ··············· 356
5.14 Searching Overlap Addresses of Variables ···· 358
5.15 Checking Duplicated Output Variables ··········· 360
5.16 Checking Input and Output Variables·············· 362
5.17 How to Use Custom Symbols··························· 364
5.18 How to Create Custom Symbols ······················ 368
242
6F8C1290
5.1
5.1
Kind of Program Editor
Kind of Program Editor
Kind of program editor
The following program editors are used to make the program, the function or
the function block by using programming language (LD, FBD, SFC, ST) of V
series.
Type of Program editor
Programming language
Semi graphic
LD,FBD,SFC
Full graphic
LD,FBD,SFC
Text
ST
Mutual call of program
The function and the function block can be called between programs of all
kinds.
Example: When you call the block of the function of the text and Full-graphic
function from the program of the semi-graphic
Program editor -Text
Program editor –Semi graphic
Program
BLK_1
XBLK
IN
Function Block
XO:=XOUT;
XU:=IN;
XOUT:=B[0]*CN;
Q
IF RUN THEN
Q:=XOUT+XU;
END_IF;
CN
Program editor –Full graphic
XFUN
Function
IN
TBL
YFUN
+
IN
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
243
Chapter 5
5.2
Creating Control Programs
Semi Graphic
This chapter describes the procedure to create a control program with the
Program Editor (Semi graphic).
5.2.1 Program editor organization
Name and role of each part
Title bar
Menu bar
Zoom control
Tool icon
Instruction symbol view
244
6F8C1290
Status
Monitor control
Main view
5.2
Semi Graphic
Title bar
Shows the name of the tool application and the target project file.
Menu bar
A menu of various operations. Each menu can be opened without using the
mouse by pressing ALT + (Key).
Tool icon
Commonly used menu items appear as icons. Place the cursor on an icon to
view its menu name.
Zoom control
A control to zoom in or out the graphic language displayed in menu view.
Monitor control
A control to start or stop online monitoring of the graphic language displayed
in menu view.
Main view
View to draw or edit graphical language (LD/FBD/SFC). Used from program,
function block, and function.
Instruction symbol view
A graphical language instruction symbol menu. Select with the function key
and SHIFT key to draw the instruction symbol in the main view cell that has the
focus.
The instruction symbol view appears only while editing.
Status
The following information appears in the status area:
• Cursor position view ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Shows the page, row, and column number.
• Controller operation mode view ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ When connected to a controller, shows
the controller operation mode.
• Editing view ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Displayed when editing with the Program Editor.
• Insert/Overwrite view ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Indicates the cursor input mode (insert/overwrite)
when editing with the Program Editor.
• Calendar view ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Shows the current date and time.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
245
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.2.2 Opening a task
Starting
The Program Editor is started as follows:
1) From the [Product Tree], select the corresponding station, unit module and
select a task in the module.
2) Execute <Task entry> from the <File> menu.
The following Task Entry window appears.
246
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
3) To create a new task, enter the [Program name], move the cursor to the
corresponding Task Entry No. and click the [Open program editor] button.
To open an existing task, move the cursor to the corresponding Task Entry
No. and click the [Open Program Editor] button.
You can also double-click at the cursor location to start the Program Editor.
Task entry information
Program Information can be shown as follows:
Compiled
Status of program data and code binary is shown as follows:
• Yes: All POU are already saved, and no error. All POU means a Program
with User Function and User Function Block, is called from the
program.
• No: All POU are not saved yet, or they have compiling error.
Modified
Date and time, when program was modified, is shown. Modified program
means the following operations: <Save Temporally>, <Save>, <Save and
Download>, <Batch Compile>
Important
• This Date and time means a program modified time only. Modifying User Function and
User Function Block, which is called from the program, is not included.
Steps
Program code binary size is shown.
• When <Modified> is ‘Yes’, step size is shown.
• When <Modified> is ‘No’, size ‘0’(Zero) is shown.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
247
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Program editor window (new task entry)
When you create and open a new task from task entry, you can edit it.
See [Drawing a Program] for information on how to edit a program.
248
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
Program editor window (existing task entry)
When you select and open an existing task, editing is disabled.
To edit, click <Edit> from the <Edit> menu. See [Drawing a Program] for
information on how to edit a program.
To write to a controller, click <Write to controller> from the <File> menu. For
information on how to write to a controller, see [Downloading Task Individually].
Ending
The Program Editor can be ended by any of the following methods:
1) Execute <Exit> from the <File> menu.
2) Click [X] on the right end of the title bar.
3) Double-click the icon at the left end of the title bar.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
249
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Registration of actual argument
If a program has arguments ‘VAR_INPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_OUTPUT’, the
global variables as actual arguments should be registered.
The operations are as follows:
1) Open Task Entry window, and click button [Registration of Actual
Argument].
2) The following Task Entry Argument window appears.
3) Input global variables for program argument.
Order of input: Same order with program argument.
Change ‘No.’: Order of Actual Argument can be changed.
250
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
5.2.3 Drawing a program
This section describes how to input and edit an LD (ladder diagram)/FBD
(function block diagram)/SFC (sequential function chart).
Adjusting form
The [Instruction symbol menu] can be toggled on/off from <Edit> of the
<Edit> menu. This is useful when you need to increase the view while
monitoring.
Cursor operation
• A cursor appears when you click the main view or sub view.
• The cursor can be moved with the [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] key.
• Insert mode is indicated by a narrow vertical cursor and overwrite mode is
indicated by a wide cursor.
• The insert/overwrite mode can be toggled with the [Insert] key.
• In overwrite mode, the cursor is the size of a single cell.
• The current position of the cursor appears as row and column number in
the position view.
• To select multiple cells, drag the cursor (move the cursor while pressing
the left mouse button) around the desired cells.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
251
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Size of a Cell
Cursor
Start editing
To start editing, select <Edit> from the <Edit> menu or click the following tool
icon.
Select <Edit> from the <Edit> menu or click the following tool icon once
more to exit the edit mode.
Entering instruction symbol
Place the cursor in the main view or sub view.
Press a function key No in the [Instruction symbol view]. The [Instruction
symbol view] is divided in two. Press a function key [Fn] while holding down
the [Shift] key to select the top half. The first layer simply shows the instruction
symbol types. Select an instruction symbol in the second layer to draw it at the
cursor position.
Use [Overwrite mode] when entering SFC instruction symbols.
A default variable name is assigned automatically to instruction symbols that
require variable name such as contact, coil, function block, LD, ST, SET, and
STEP.
252
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
You can use the mouse to select instruction symbols, but using the keyboard is
more efficient once you get used to it.
Use the [DEL] key to delete an instruction symbol.
The left power rail, vertical connection line, and horizontal connection line of
LD/FBD also have keyboard assignments.
Press the same key once more to erase the left power rail and vertical
connection line. They cannot be erased with the [DEL] key.
LD:Ladder Diagram
Left Power Rail
Vertical Link
Horizontal Link
The conditional branch line, parallel execution line, and step connection line of
SFC also have keyboard assignments.
Press the same key once more to erase the conditional branch line and parallel
execution line. They cannot be erased with the [DEL] key.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
253
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
SFC:Sequential Function Chart
Double Horizontal Line
Vertical Line
Horizintal Line
Program drawing editing operation
The following table shows the editing operations used during program
drawing.
Operation
Move cursor
Key operation
[←], [→], [↑], [↓]
Move cursor to left or [Ctrl] + [←], [Ctrl] + [→]
right edge
254
6F8C1290
Switch to insert
mode
Press the [Insert] key to make the cursor narrow.
Switch to overwrite
mode
Press the [Insert] key to make the cursor wide.
Draw an instruction
symbol
Move the cursor to where you want to draw the instruction symbol
and press [F1]-[F12] or [Shift] + [F1] - [Shift] + [F12] to move down
the instruction word group hierarchy and press the key once more to
select the desired instruction symbol and draw it at the cursor
location. Press the [ESC] key to go back up the hierarchy. Horizontal
line ([F11] + [F1]) is treated as a type of instruction symbol.
Drawing a function
or function block
Move the cursor to where you want to draw the function or function
block and press [Shift] + [F2], [F1] to display the function or function
block selection dialog and then select to draw.
5.2
Operation
Semi Graphic
Key operation
Delete an instruction Move the cursor to the instruction symbol to delete and press the
symbol
[Del] key.
However, power rail and horizontal line cannot be deleted.
Delete a power rail
and vertical line
Move the cursor to the power rail or vertical line to delete and press
the function key indicating the same power rail or vertical line. The
function keys for power rail are [F11] + [F3] and for vertical line are
[F11] + [F2].
Copy a circuit
Move the cursor to the top left corner of the circuit to copy, move the
cursor with [Shift] + [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] to select a rectangular area
of the circuit to copy. Then press [Ctrl] + [C] to copy the circuit to an
internal buffer. Or click the right mouse button and select <Copy>
from the displayed menu.
Cut a circuit
Move the cursor to the top left corner of the circuit to copy, move the
cursor with [Shift] + [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] to select a rectangular area
of the circuit to cut. Then press [Ctrl] + [X] to cut the circuit to an
internal buffer. Or click the right mouse button and select <Cut>
from the displayed menu.
Paste a circuit
If there is a circuit in the internal buffer, move the cursor to an empty
area and press [Ctrl] + [V] to paste it. The content of the internal
buffer is available and the same circuit can be repeatedly again to an
empty area. You can also click the right mouse button and select
<Paste> from the displayed menu.
Delete a circuit
Move the cursor to the top left corner of the circuit to delete, move the
cursor with [Shift] + [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] to select a rectangular area
of the circuit to delete. Then press the [Del] key to delete. The content
of the internal buffer is unchanged. You can also click the right mouse
button and select <Delete> from the displayed menu.
Scroll a circuit
Keep pressing the [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] key to scroll a circuit that is
tool large to display in the main graphic area.
Insert a line
Move the cursor to the row you want to insert and select <Self
worksheet><Insert row> from the <Edit> menu.
Delete a line
Move the cursor to the row you want to delete and select <Self
Worksheet><Delete Row> from the <Edit> menu.
Undo
Select Undo> from the <Edit> menu.
If <Undo> is selected in the main view, the previous edit operation is
undone. If it is selected in text view, the state before editing and the
current state are displayed alternately.
You can also click the right mouse button and select <Undo> from
the displayed menu.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
255
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.2.4 Entering variables
Keying variable names
Move the cursor to an instruction symbol and press [Enter]. When a text box
appears as shown below, enter the variable name and press [Enter] to close
the text box and draw on top of the instruction symbol.
In general, it is more efficient to enter and draw all instruction symbols first and
then enter the variable names.
256
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
Drag and drop a variable
If a variable is already declared, you can have it displayed and drag and drop it
to the instruction word. The procedure is as follows:
1) Select <Available Variables> from the <Edit> menu to open the [Variable]
window.
2) Place the cursor on the desired symbol name, hold down the left button,
and move the cursor to the instruction word to enter the variable and
release. The variable name is entered for the instruction word.
Drag & Drop
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
257
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Changing the default function name
A default variable name is assigned automatically when drawing instruction
symbols such as contact, coil, LD, ST, SET, function block, step, and transition.
This can be set in the following dialog box that appears <Default variable
names> is selected from the <Tool> menu.
The base name is part of the variable name. Set it according to the variable
name convention.
No variable name is generated if [When entering instruction symbol, generate
default variables] is unchecked in the above dialog.
258
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
5.2.5 Declaring variables
Edit lock
Editing is locked just after startup, so you cannot update and delete the
variables.
Unlock the edit lock to perform input operation.
The line for adding which marked '*' is always available.
Important
Please be sure to execute the following operations, because these changes affected the
invocation program processing.
• When the local variable is added or deleted, please delete and re-register the variable
of this function block.
• When the argument of a function block is changed, please delete and re-draw the
symbol of the function block.
• Changing or deleting variable declarations may bring some programs that refer the
variables into unexpected action.
Entering a variable declaration
A variable declaration is entered as follows:
1) Select <Available variables> from the <Edit> menu to open the
[Variables] dialog. If there are existing variable declarations, they appear as
a table.
2) Move the focus to the row containing an asterisk (*) and set the [Variables],
[Data type], [Comment], [Declaration type], [Read only], and [Declaration
sequence].
The declaration is made when the dialog box is closed.
Important
• Registration of local variables:
For safely executing programs continuously after downloading them, there are
following restrictions after updating and deleting the variables.
1) After deleting registrations, address packing does not work. After deleting, new
registration is added last line.
2) After updating data-type, delete it and added last line as new order number.
3) Over and over again operated 1) or 2), variables can not be assigned automatically.
In this case, please try batch compiling or change order number. Address packing
works, and used address is available again.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
259
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
• Registration of controller variables:
For safety engineering, there are following restrictions after updating and deleting the
variables.
1) After deleting registrations, used address is not available for automatically
assignment.
2) After updating data-type, used address is not available for automatically assignment.
3) After updating address, used address is not available for automatically assignment.
4) Over and over again operated 1) to 3), variables can not be assigned automatically.
In this case, please try batch compiling. Used address is available again.
To search a variable name, specify the [Find Word] and click the [Find] button.
Wildcards can be used in the [Find Word]. For example, specifying 'HM*' will
display all variables beginning with 'HM'. Specifying a null character will display
all variables.
I/O, station, and network are read only.
Declaring function block variables and general variables
In addition to entering in the [Variables] dialog box, variables can also be
declared as follows:
1) Open the desired program (PRG) or function block (FBK).
2) Click the icon (A) shown below to enter the [Editing] mode.
3) Draw the necessary instruction symbols that require a variable such as
function block, contact, coil, LD, and ST in the [Main view]. At this point,
default variable names (example: V1, V2, C1, C2, etc.) appear. You can
change these if necessary.
260
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
4) If you change contact, coil, gate, LD, ST, or SET to an undefined variable
name, the following dialog box opens after determining the data type
automatically.
Contact, coil, and gate are declared automatically as BOOL and LD, ST,
SET are declared with the data type of the connection destination (line only,
and gate are skipped). (They are declared as INT if the connection
destination is undefined.)
The connection destination of LD, ST, and SET are searched in the order of
right, bottom, left, and top.
Function block, SFC, action, user action, transition, differential contact
related variables and all local variables are determined automatically when
saving.
5) Select the scope, type, and data type from the combo box. Enter the initial
value and comment if they are necessary. Scope and type can only be
selected from the combo box. To set the scope or type to other than the
available selections such as making the type VAR-INPUT, set it in the
[Variables] dialog box. The data type can be entered from the keyboard.
6) Click the [Register] button to complete the variable declaration.
7) The result of variable declaration can be viewed in the [Variables] dialog
box by selecting <Available Variables> from the <Edit> menu or clicking
the icon (B) shown below.
(B) (A)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
261
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Important
Please be sure to execute the following operations, because these changes affected the
invocation program processing.
• When the local variable is added or deleted, please delete and re-register the variable
of this function block.
• When the argument of a function block is changed, please delete and re-draw the
symbol of the function block.
Automatic scope definition in undefined variables list
1) Select <Prefix Settings> from the <Tool> menu to register Initial letters of
variables.
2) When registered letters are used, variables scope is set automatically.
Target instructions: Contact, Coil, Gate, LD, ST, SET, Derivative Contact,
Derivative Coil
262
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
5.2.6 Using functions
Refer to [Drawing a Program] for information on how to draw basic graphics.
This section describes how to draw functions.
Drawing a function
Switch the focus to main view and display the cursor.
Select a function in the instruction symbol view.
• In the following diagram, select a function and click the [Select] button.
A function is drawn at the cursor position.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
263
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Changing the function input point
For some functions, the number of input points (number of input arguments)
can be changed. Those are input arguments without names.
Example: MUL_REAL.
When a function is first drawn, the number of input points is minimum.
To increase the number of input points, move the cursor to the last input point
as shown below and press the [F2] key. An input point is added and the shape
of the function is extended vertically.
Last input
[F2]
Last input
Drawing a function with execution control
A function with execution control is one with EN and ENO for input argument
and output argument.
The functions with file name ending with @ in the [Select Function or Function
Block] dialog correspond to this type.
When the focus is moved to such function, the [With EN/ENO parameters]
checkbox is enabled. Check this and click the [Select] button to draw the
function with execution control.
264
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
Copying a function
A function can be used repeatedly within the same program.
In such case, it is more efficient to copy and paste the graphic symbol rather
than repeating the above procedure.
To copy a function, move the cursor at top left of the function, select the copy
area with [Shift] + [←], [→], [↑], [↓] and press [Ctrl] + [C]. The selected area is
copied to an internal buffer.
- To paste from the internal buffer, move the cursor to an empty area and press
[Ctrl] + [V].
Copy
Paste
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
265
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.2.7 Using function blocks
Drawing a function block
Function blocks are drawn in the same manner as functions. See the section
[Using Functions].
Declaring a function block variable
A function block contains historical data. Therefore, the function block itself
must be declared as a static variable.
A function block variable is declared as a local variable of a calling program or
function block.
For example, assume there is a program that uses three on-delay timers (TON)
as function blocks. Assume that their variable names are TON_1, TON_4, and
tmEMG. Select <Available Variables> from the <Edit> menu and enter the
local variable declarations as follows: The function block name (TON) is
treated as a unique data type.
Copying a function block
A function block can be used repeatedly within the same program.
In such case, it is more efficient to copy and paste the graphic symbol rather
than repeating the above procedure to draw the function block.
To copy a function block, move the cursor to top left of the function, select the
copy area with [Shift] + [←], [→], [↑], [↓] or by dragging the mouse and press
[Ctrl] + [C]. The selected area is copied to the clipboard.
To paste from the clipboard, move the cursor to an empty area and press [Ctrl]
+ [V].
266
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
The variable name is included in the copy/paste operation. After pasting,
change the variable name and add the variable declaration.
Copy
Paste
Supplementary
• When same FBK variable names are used in a program, compiling error occurs.
Because FBK double-instance will become abnormal program processing.
• In the knowledge that it is rules of programming, you can avoid compiling error.
But the following way is very risky, please edit the programs and test them carefully.
<How to change setting>
1) Edit the text file 'Compile2.ini' in the Windows directory, set the value as follows:
[Compile]
AllowDupFB = 1
Default setting is 'AllowDupFB = 0'. It means that 'You can not use the FBK
double-instance'.
Please do not change other setting values.
2) Restart the V-Tool before editing the text file.
When you are using C/S version V-Tool, please change this setting on each client
PC, and if you use batch compiling, please change this setting on Server PC.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
267
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.2.8 Search and replace instruction words
This section describes how to search and replace variable names and
instruction words within a task (program) or controller from the Program Editor.
The following items can be searched and replaced.
Instruction word
Target
Contact/coil
Variable
F/FB
(FB) instance name, F/FB name (only when searching
instruction word)
LD,ST,SET
Variable
Gate
Variable
BOOL type Action
Timer value, Action variable
User type Action
Timer value, Action name, indicator
Step
Step instance
Transition
Variable
IF/CASE/FOR/WHILE/REPEAT
Conditional equation, initial value, final value, increment
Jump/label
Label
Searching and replacing variables
From the Program Editor:
1) Click <Find/Replace> from the <Edit> menu.
2) Enter the variable to search in <Find Text>.
3) Select <Scope><Direction><Comparison> as necessary.
268
6F8C1290
5.2
<Scope>
Semi Graphic
<Local>: Search within the task (program) containing the focus.
<Controller>: Search within the current controller.
<Direction>
<Up>: Search upward.
<Down>: Search downward.
<Comparison>
<Matched>: Search for string matching the search string.
<Contained>: Search for string containing the search string.
4) Click the [Search next] button.
<Local>: If found, the cursor moves to the found result.
<Controller>: If found, Searching dialog is displayed.
5) <Local>: If there are two or more search results, the cursor is moved to
the next location when the [Search next] button is pressed.
Search is performed in word units. Some examples are shown below.
Variable to search
“ ABCDE ”
Variables that are found
“ ABCDE ” , “ ABCDE[100] ” ,” D.ABCD ”,
Variable that are not found
“ ABCD_1 ”, “ AABCDEE ”, “ DATA_ABCDE “
Wildcard character may be used.
Character pattern
Matching character
-{ }-?
Any single character
*
Any number of characters
#
Any signal number
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
269
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Searching instruction words
From the Program Editor:
1) Click <Find/Replace> from the <Edit> menu.
2) In the lower half of the dialog box, select the instruction word symbol to
search from the instruction symbol view.
In the case of function or function block, select the "FUN" instruction
symbol to open the [Select Function/Function Block] dialog box and select
the function or function block.
3) Select <Scope> and <Direction> as necessary.
<Comparison> need not be set because it is for string search.
4) Click the [Find next] button. If found, the cursor moves to the searched
result.
5) If there are two or more search results, the next item is searched when the
[Search next] button is pressed.
6) To stop instruction word search, select a blank section in the instruction
symbol view at the bottom half of the dialog box.
Searching variables and instruction words together
From the Program Editor:
1) Click <Find/Replace> from the <Edit> menu.
2) Select <Find Text>.
3) In the lower half of the dialog box, select the instruction word symbol to
search from the instruction symbol view.
4) Select <Scope> <Direction> <Comparison> as necessary.
5) Click the [Search next] button. If found, the cursor moves to the searched
result.
6) If there are two or more search results, the next item is searched when the
[Search next] button is pressed.
270
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
Replacing variables
<Local>:
Using Program Editor,
1) Change to Edit Mode, and Click the menu <Edit><Find/Replace>.
2) Select <Local> in <Scope>.
3) Input characters in ‘Find Text’.
4) Input characters in ‘Replace With’.
5) Click button [Replace], move the cursor to found characters, replace them.
<Controller>:
Using Program Editor,
1) Change to Display Mode, and Click the menu <Edit><Find/Replace>.
2) Select <Controller> in <Scope>.
3) Input characters in ‘Find Text’.
4) Input characters in ‘Replace With’.
5) Click button [Replace All], Result dialog is displayed.
6) Click button [Replace], replace them all.
Important
• Replaced program should be saved.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
271
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.2.9 Various edit and display functions
This section describes the edit and display functions of the Program Editor that
have not been covered up to now.
Inserting and deleting rows and columns
Rows and columns can be inserted or deleted in the main view.
Select <Insert row> from the <Cell worksheet> menu to insert a row at the
current cursor location.
A row cannot be inserted in the middle of a graphic circuit.
Select <Delete row> from the <Cell worksheet> menu to delete a row at the
current cursor location.
A row cannot be deleted from the middle of a graphic circuit.
Select <Insert column> from the <Cell worksheet> menu to insert a column
at the current cursor location.
The circuit is split to insert a column even in the middle of a graphic circuit.
Select <Delete column> from the <Cell worksheet> menu to delete a column
at the current cursor location.
The circuit is deleted even if the column is in the middle of the graphic circuit.
When <Insert row> is selected from the <Cell worksheet> menu, a row is
inserted if the circuit can be retained.
When <Delete row> is selected from the <Cell worksheet> menu, a row is
deleted if the circuit can be retained.
Adding a page no.
When the graphic circuit in the main view is large, sometimes it is desirable to
divide it into pages to indicate functional groups.
To divide into pages, first place the cursor where there is no circuit.
Select <Insert Page Separator> from the <Edit> menu, add a page No. and
click [OK].
Page break is a symbol shown below. This indicates the end of the page.
272
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
To delete a page break, select <Delete Page Separator> from the <Edit>
menu.
To repaginate, select <Re-number Page No> from the <Edit> menu.
Page breaks should be entered so that it is unnecessary to repaginate when
the program is changed. Therefore, page numbers can be assigned in preset
intervals.
If there are page breaks, pages are printed separately during printing
described later.
If there are page breaks, jump can be made specifying a page number or to
the previous or next page by selecting <Jump> from the <Edit> menu.
Entering comments
In the main view, comments can be entered. Comments help to improve the
readability of a graphic circuit.
Place the cursor on a cell where there is no graphic symbol or page break.
Select <Edit comment> from the <Edit> menu.
When a text input dialog box appears, enter a comment and click the [OK]
button to enter the comment at the cursor location.
Comments can be deleted, moved, or copied by cut and paste.
Zoom in zoom out
The graphic in the main view can be zoomed in or out from 60 to 140% in 20%
interval.
Select <Zoom> from the <View> menu or specify the zoom percentage in
the zoom control.
Changing the color and size of the graphic
The background color, line color, monitor color, and cell size can be changed
in the main view.
Select <Set Size and Color of Cell> from the <Tool> menu.
The default [Cell size and color of cell] is [Standard]. If you selected [User],
you can change the color and size and store them to display with those values
next time.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
273
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Tool icons
The meaning of the tool icons are as follows:
Paste
Edit
Delete
Data Monitor
Undo
Copy
Available Variables
Cut
Write to Controller
Print
Save Project
Open
Delete Column
Insert Column
Delete Row
Insert Row
The meaning of a tool icon is displayed when the cursor is placed on an icon.
The function of each tool icon is also provided as menu.
274
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
5.2.10 Saving a task
Save
Select <Save Project> from the <File> menu to compile and save the edited
program.
If there is no compile error, the program is saved after compiling.
If there is a compile error, an error list or a message appears.
If there is an error list, <Error List> becomes available in the <Edit> menu
enabling the list to be opened from here also.
An example of an error list is shown below.
To find the location of an error, move the focus to a line in the error list and click
the [Open] button to move the cursor to the corresponding location in the main
view.
The error list can also be printed with the [Print] button.
The compiler detects more than one error so the same type of error may
appear consecutively.
Supplementary
• Since only the change part of a program is saved, the saving time of the 2nd is
shortened as compared with the first time.
Saving temporarily
Select <Save temporarily> from the <File> menu to save the current program
without compiling.
This is useful when saving a program that you are still editing or known to
contain compile errors.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
275
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.2.11 Displaying variable comment and instruction execution
sequence
Displaying data types
In the [Program Editor], the data type of an instruction word or variable can be
displayed for a compiled task (project).
1) Click <View data type> from the <View> menu.
The data types are displayed as follows:
The meaning of the abbreviations are as follows:
Abbreviation
Meaning
<B>
BOOL
<W>
WORD
< DW >
DWORD
<I>
INT
< UI >
UINT
< DI >
DINT
<R>
REAL
<T>
TIME
<D>
DATE
< TD >
TOD
< DT >
DT
< ST >
STRING
2) To stop displaying of data types, click <View data type> from the <View>
menu once more.
276
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
Displaying variable comments
In the [Program Editor], the comment of a variable can be displayed for a
compiled task (project).
1) Click <View Variable comments> from the <View> menu.
The variable comment appears above the variable name as shown below.
2) To stop displaying variable comments, click <View Variable comments>
from the <View> menu once more.
Displaying instruction execution sequence
In the [Program Editor], the execution sequence (step number) of instruction
words can be displayed for a compiled task (project).
1) Click <View Step No.> from the <View> menu.
The step number is displayed as follows:
2) To stop displaying step numbers, click <View Step No.> from the <View>
menu once more.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
277
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.2.12 Using the Cross Reference
The cross reference shows the task (program), controller, and station in which
a variable is referenced or assigned.
This is useful in determining where data is originating or used when a program
is not running as expected.
Displaying the cross reference
1) Open a task in the Program Editor.
2) If the task is compiled, move the cursor to the variable to search and select
<Cross Reference> from the <Edit> menu. The cross reference can also
be selected from the right click menu.
3) A window opens and search is started automatically.
If a variable is not selected in step 2), search as follows:
Enter the device variable name to search.
In [Find device variable], you can specify a variable name such as
"ABC" or use wildcards such as "ABC*" or "*ABC" to display a cross
reference of variable names that match those criteria.
Ex-1) *_J5, CBM_*, CBM.*: '*' is used as any character(s).
Ex-2) CBM_?1, C?0, ABC[?]: '?' is used as a character.
The device variables that are fitting to these conditions can be found.
Click the [Find] button.
278
6F8C1290
5.2
Semi Graphic
The meaning of each item is as follows:
Item
Search result
Station
Station name
Slot No.
Main module slot no.
Task
Task in which the variable is referenced or assigned
Entry No.
Task entry No.
Reference
LD, ST, SET, contact, coil, set coil, reset coil
Opening a program
The procedure to open a program at the location (station/slot/task) indicated in
the cross reference is as follows:
1) Click the target line in the cross reference list.
2) Click the [Open] button.
The Program Editor opens and the cursor moves to the location specified
by that line.
The calling status is retained at the jump destination for online/offline
status.
5.2.13 Using device variables property
You can check the properties of device variables that are used on the
programs.
Restrictions
Device variables property window can not be refreshed displaying data. If you
changed data, please re-open the windows manually.
Opening device variables property window
1) Select the device on the Program Editor, and click right button, select
'Device Variables Property' on Pop-up window.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
279
Chapter 5
280
6F8C1290
Creating Control Programs
5.2
Semi Graphic
• Display Items
Item/Scope
Network
Network I/O
Station
Station I/O Controller Controller I/O
Local
Device
Device
comment
Data type
Network
−
−
−
−
−
Network
module
−
−
−
−
−
Station
−
Controller
−
I/O module
−
-
Scan data
address
-
-
-
-
Controller
memory
-
Memory data
address
Program
name
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Input / Output
Format is as follows:
• Scope: 'NETWORK' / 'STATON' / 'CONTROLLER'
/ 'LOCAL'
• Device variable: {Device Name}
• Data type: {Data type}
• Network: {NetNo}:{Network CatCode}:{Network Comment}
• Network module: {NodeNo}:{Node CatCode}
• Station: {Station name}
• Controller: {SlotNo}:{Controller Catcode}:{Contoller Comment}
• I/O module: {MM-BB-UU-SS.WordNo[.BitNo][,IO Area Name]}:{I/O
Module Catcode}
• Scan data address: {Talker BlockNo}.{WordNo}[.{BitNo}]
• Controller memory: {Memory Block Name}
• Memory data address: {%MW*}(IQ*)
• Program name: {POU Name}
• Input / Output: 'INPUT' / 'OUTPUT' / 'IN_OUT'
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
281
Chapter 5
5.3
Creating Control Programs
Structured Text
Explains how to make structured text program using program editor (Text).
Supplementary
• This function is not supported in Engineering tool 2.
5.3.1 Organization of program editor (Text)
Control names of program editor (Text)
Title bar
Menu bar
Tool Icons
Monitor control
Status bar
Text view
Title bar
Displays name and location of the program.
Menu bar
Displays top menu to open the detail by pressing ALT key and the displayed
key without operating mouse.
Tool Icons
Frequently used menu items are also assigned to the tool icons. Put your
mouse pointer on the icon to show the name of menu item.
282
6F8C1290
5.3
Structured Text
Monitor control
Starts and stops the online monitor for the program in text view.
Text view
Displays program code of ST (Structured text).
Status bar
Displays line and column number of the cursor position, status of the
connected controller, status of the editor and current date.
5.3.2 Opening program
Open new program using ST
Enter new program name and select <Text> in [Task Entries] to open the
program using Program Editor (Text) shown as follows.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
283
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Open existed program using ST
Click existed ST program in [Task Entries] to open the program using Program
Editor (Text) shown as follows. After opening existing program, it ‘s read only.
Click menu <Edit><Enable> to let the view enable to edit.
5.3.3 Editing program
Explains how to edit Structured Text using Program Editor (Text).
See [1.3.14 Structured Text (ST)] section to understand how to program ST.
Cursor operation
Click text view to display a cursor.
Press [←], [→], [↑], [↓] keys to navigate the cursor.
The status bar shows line and column number of the cursor position in Text
view.
284
6F8C1290
5.3
Structured Text
Enable and disable to edit
Click menu <Edit><Enable> to let the text view enable to edit.
Operations for editing ST.
Operation
How to do
Move cursor to the left.
Move cursor to the right.
Move cursor to the up.
Move cursor to the down.
Press [←] key.
Press [→] key.
Press [↑] key.
Press [↓] key.
Move cursor to the left edge.
Move cursor to the right edge.
Press [Home] key.
Press [End] key.
Insert the type name
of usable Function between the
lines.
Move the cursor to the position you want to insert.
Right-click and select menu <usable functions> to open it.
Click one of the Functions to insert the name in the cursor
position.
Copy text.
Move the cursor to the start position.
Press [Shift] + one of [←], [→], [↑], [↓] keys to select the
text.
Press [Ctrl] + [C] to copy text to clipboard.
Cut text
Move the cursor to the start position.
Press [Shift] + one of[←], [→], [↑], [↓] keys to select the
text.
Press [Ctrl] + [X] to cut and copy the text to clipboard.
Paste text
Move the cursor to the start position.
Press [Ctrl] + [V] to paste the text in the position if the
clipboard has some text.
Delete text
Move the cursor to the start position.
Press [Shift] + one of [←], [→], [↑], [↓] keys to select the
text.
Press [Del] key to delete the text.
This operation does not change clipboard contents.
Undo
Click menu <Edit> <Undo> to back your latest editing.
It is single buffering undo but not multiple-buffering.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
285
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.3.4 Entering variables
Instead of typing variable name in your program code, you can copy existing
variable name in drag & drop manner shown as follows.
1) Move cursor to the inserting position in the Text View.
2) Click <Edit><Open Usable Variables> to open it.
3) Put mouse pointer on the variable name and drag and drop it on the Text
View to insert the variable name in the cursor position.
Drag & Drop
286
6F8C1290
5.3
Structured Text
5.3.5 Declaring variables
Declaring variables manually
See [5.2.5 Declaring Variables] section to declare variables manually.
Declaring variables automatically
1) Write your program in Text View.
2) Click menu <Edit><Save> menu to compile and save your program.
3) If your program has some variables which do not exist, [Undefined
Variables] form will appears.
In the form, select the data of [Scope], [Kind] and [Data type] fields if
necessarily.
And also set the data of <Initial value> and <comment> if necessary.
Note that the variable of Function Block needs the type name as data type.
4) Click [Register] button to declare variables automatically.
Note that each of the declaring variables can be skipped if you clear the
check-off in <Variable> field.
5) Open menu <Edit><Usable Variables> menu to see the declaration result.
Important
• If you add, delete or change the local variables of existing Function Block, the size,
contents or interface of the Function Block may be changed.
• If so, you should delete the instance variable declaration of Programs or Function
Blocks which call the changed Function Block.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
287
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.3.6 Using functions
Explains how to insert the name of usable Function between the lines of ST
program code.
See <1.3.14 Structured Text(ST)> to understand how to program and call
Function and Function Block using ST language.
Insert function name
In the Text View ,move cursor to the start position where you want to write the
function name.
Right-click menu <Select Function/Function Block> to open the following
form.
Click the function you need and click [Select] button to insert the name in the
cursor position.
288
6F8C1290
5.3
Structured Text
5.3.7 Using Function Blocks
Explains how to insert the name of usable Function or Function Block between
the lines of ST program code.
See [1.3.14 Structured Text (ST)] section to understand how to program and
call Function and Function Block using ST language.
Insert default variable name of Function Block
In the Text View ,move cursor to the start position where you want to write the
variable name.
Right-click menu <Select Function/Function Block> to open it.
Click the Function Block you need and click [Select] button to insert the default
variable name in the cursor position.
Declaring variable of Function Block
See [5.2.7 Using Function Blocks] section.
Important
• In a POU, you can not multi-call the instance of Function Block because the
multi-calling may cause unexpected results. Saving program that has the multi-calling,
the compile error will be reported.
• If you will allow the multi-calling, you need to change the following settings in your
responsibility.
<How to change the settings for multi-calling>
• Exit V-T ool3.
• Open ‘Compile2.ini’ file using general text editor, for instance, Note Pad that is attached
in Windows.
Find the following description, change the settings and save the data.
--[Compile]
AllowDupFB =*
---‘AllowDupFB =0’ means that multi-calling of Function Block is not allowed by compiler.
‘AllowDupFB =1’ means that multi-calling of Function Block is allowed by compiler.
• Start V-Tool3 to make the data available.
In case of Client/Server version of V-Tool3, you need to set the data in all PCs.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
289
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.3.8 Searching and replacing device variables
Explains how to search and replace device variables of Program Editor (Text).
Searching text
1) Click menu<Editor><Search & Replace> to open the form.
2) In <Search> field, enter text you search.
3) In <Scope>, <Direction>, <Comparison> fields, change data if
necessary shown as follows.
<Scope>
<Local>: search text in the POU you open.
<Controller>: Not supported in current version.
<Direction>
<Up>: search text upward.
<Down>: search text downward.
<Comparison>
<Match>: search the same text.
<Contain>:search text that contains the given text.
4) Click [Search Next] button. Hitting the text, the cursor will point it.
5) Hitting result has two or more, click [Search Next] button to make the
cursor point the next text.
If you select ‘Contain’ in <Comparison> field, you can search text using
wildcards shown as follows.
Wild card
Meaning
?
a character
*
characters
#
a numeric character
Example of searching:
<Match>
290
6F8C1290
<Contain>
<Contain>
Given text
ABCDE
ABCDE*
*ABCDE
Hit text
ABCDE
ABCDE, ABCDE[100]
ABCDE, D.ABCDE
Not hit text
ABCDE_1
AABCDEE
DATA_ABCDEF
5.3
Structured Text
Replacing text
1) Click menu<Edit><Enable> to check off and menu<Edit><Search &
Replace> to open the form.
2) In <Scope> filed, select <Local> option.
3) In <Search> field, enter text you search.
4) In <Replace> field, enter text with which you replace.
5) Click [Replace] button to search and replace if the given text is found.
5.3.9 Saving program
Explains how to save program written by Program Editor(Text).
Saving program
Click menu<File><Save> to compile and save program you have made.
If the program has no errors, the saving will be finished normally.
If it has some errors, dialog box asks you if you need error list will appear.
In case of having errors, not only by confirming the dialog but also by clicking
<Edit><Compile Error List> menu, the error list will be opened as follows.
Click a row of the list and <Open> button to let the cursor of TextView move to
the location the error occurred.
Click <Print> to print error list.
Error list may display similar errors, because the compiler has multi error
detection system.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
291
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Save temporarily
Click <File><Save temporarily> menu, If you need save program without
compiling.
Error messages
Error messages Program Editor(Text) displays are shown as follows.
No.
292
6F8C1290
Error Message
Explanation
300
End of comments '*)' is no found.
Comment should start from ‘(*’ and end to ‘*)’.
301
The literal of 'Integer' is invalid.
The Integer has wrong expression as IEC61131-3
or the value is out of range.
302
The literal of 'Binary integer' is
invalid.
The binary number has wrong expression
as IEC61131-3 or the value is out of range.
303
The literal of 'Octal integer' is
invalid.
The octal number has wrong expression as
IEC61131-3
or the value is out of range.
304
The literal of 'Hex integer' is invalid. The hexadecimal number has wrong expression
as IEC61131-3 or the value is out of range.
305
The literal of 'Real' is invalid.
The floating point number has wrong expression
as IEC61131-3 or the value is out of range.
306
The literal of 'Time' is invalid.
The time duration number has wrong expression
as IEC61131-3 or the value is out of range.
307
The literal of 'Time of day' is invalid. The time of day number has wrong expression
as IEC61131-3 or the value is out of range.
308
The literal of 'Date' is invalid.
The date number has wrong expression as
IEC61131-3
or the value is out of range.
309
The literal of 'Date and time' is
invalid.
The date and time number has wrong expression
or the value is out of range.
310
The <Integer selector value> of
CASE is invalid.
The compared numbers with ‘..’ is not integer
number.
312
Identifier is invalid.
The identifier has wrong expression as
IEC61131-3.
313
The directly represented variable is The direct representative variable has wrong
invalid.
expression as IEC61131-3.
330
End of the statement must be
semicolon. ';'
End of the statement should has a semicolon ‘ ; ‘.
332
Bracket ')' is not found after '('.
Left parenthesis ‘(‘ needs the right one ‘)’.
334
Bracket ']'' is not found after '[''.
Left parenthesis ‘[‘ needs the right one ‘]’.
335
End of the number list needs a colon ‘ : ’.
Colon ':' is not found after the
<Integer selector value> of CASE.
336
Variable member is not found.
The variable expression has no member.
5.3
No.
Error Message
Structured Text
Explanation
337
Assignment statement needs ': = '. Assignment statement needs ‘: = ’ operator for
setting data to a variable.
338
The keyword 'THEN' is not found in IF statement needs ‘THEN’ keyword after the
IF statement.
condition expression.
339
End of IF statement must be
'END_IF'.
End of IF statement needs ‘END_IF’ key word.
340
The keyword 'OF' is not found in
CASE statement.
CASE statement needs ‘OF’ key word after the
index variable.
341
End of CASE statement must be
'END_CASE'.
End of CASE statement needs ‘END_CASE’
keyword.
342
The keyword 'TO' is not found in
FOR statement.
FOR statement needs ‘TO’ keyword between
min-value and max value.
343
The keyword 'DO' is not found in
FOR or WHILE.
Both FOR statement and WHILE statement need
‘DO’ key word in the beginning statement.
344
End of FOR statement must be
'END_FOR'.
End of FOR statement needs ‘END_FOR’ keyword.
345
End of WHILE statement must be
'END_WHILE'.
End of WHILE needs ‘END_WHILE’ keyword.
346
The keyword 'UNTIL' is not found in REPEAT statement needs ‘UNTIL’ keyword before
REPEAT statement.
the condition expression.
347
End of REPEAT statement must be End of REPEAT statement needs ‘END_REPEAT’
'END_REPEAT'.
keyword.
348
Statement is invalid.
The top of statement needs a variable for
Assignment, Function name ,Function block
instance name or keyword of statement header.
349
The <Integer selector value> of
CASE must be integer value.
Comparison data of CASE statement should be
integer notation.
350
Expression is invalid.
Condition expression of statement or right
expression of Assignment needs a variable, a
constant, a function or correct expression.
351
Array element must be integer or
index-variables.
Index of array variable needs integer number,
or index variable.
352
Index-variables is not used in
CASE/FOR statement.
In CASE statement or FOR statement, an index
variable should be described after ‘CASE’ or
‘FOR’.
353
EXIT statement is available in
FOR/WHILE/REPEAT statement.
EXIT statement should be described in the loop of
FOR , WHILE or REPEAT statement.
354
Variables notation is invalid.
Pointer representative variable needs prefix data
type and variable.
355
The directly represented variable
must have even word number.
The word number of direct ‘%D’,’%F’
representative variable should be even number.
356
Invalid indexed description. Check
index name, numeric subrange or
usage of '[ ]'.
Index of array should be index variable or 0-65535
integer constant.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
293
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
No.
294
6F8C1290
Error Message
Explanation
357
Invalid description as pointer type
variable. Please use basic data
type. (ex. ABC {INT} [XI], MAP
{BOOL} [7])
358
Declaration of pointer type variable Pointer representative variable needs declaration
must be used the data type 'PTR' or with ‘PTR’ or ‘PTRB’ data type.
'PTRB'.
359
Invalid description as pointer type
variable, because it is unmatched
with the declaration.
Pointer representative variable with BOOL type
needs the declaration has ‘PTRB’ data type.
And also pointer representative variable with none
BOOL type needs the declaration has ‘PTR’ data
type.
360
Variable is not defined.
The variable declaration is not found.
361
Word address of the directly
represented variable is out of
range.
The work number of direct representative variable
should be below 4 M words.
362
This variable is prohibited
processing batch I/O.
The I/O variable does not have batch I/O function.
363
Pointer type variable is invalid.
In pointer representative variable,
left parenthesis ‘{‘ needs the right one ‘}’
364
FUN/FBK is not registered.
The Function or Function block does not registered
in POU entry.
365
FUN/FBK is not compiled.
The Function or Function block is not compiled.
366
Return value of FUN is not defined. In local variable declaration of user function, the
return type ,that is ‘FUNCTION’ type, is not found.
367
Return value of FUN is not stored.
Assignment can not be performed to Function.
368
Return value of FUN can not be
stored.
Function which return type is pointer can not
described in the expression of statement.
369
Return value of FUN should be
POU name.
In local variable declaration of user function, the
function name should be declared as ‘FUNTION’
type.
370
Data type is mismatched, or it can
not be used.
Each operators need matched data types of
variables, functions or constants.
371
Argument number of FUN/FBK is
mismatched.
The number of function parameters does not
match the declaration.
372
Argument data type of FUN/FBK is Data types of function parameters do not match
mismatched.
the declaration.
373
Data type of assignment statement Assignment statement needs the match of data
is mismatched.
types.
374
Pointer type variable can not be
stored.
375
Data type of condition is invalid in Each of IF, WHILE and REPEAT statements needs
IF/FOR/WHILE/REPEAT statement. BOOL type expression.
FOR statement needs INT or DINT type constant or
variable as MIN, MAX, STEP.
Data type of pointer representative variable should
be elementary data type, that is described in
parentheses ‘{ }’.
Pointer representative variable cannot be assigned
directly.
5.3
No.
Error Message
Structured Text
Explanation
376
Data of MIN/MAX/STEP is invalid in FOR statement needs INT or DINT type constant or
FOR statement.
variable as MIN, MAX, STEP.
377
The Function Block variable
overlaps.
In a POU, you can not duplicate Function block
calling.
378
Index-varilable can not be used,
because bit-size of array element
must be within 65535.
In BOOL type index access, the bit size of element
should be below 65535.
379
Index-varilable can not be used,
because word-size of array
element must be within 65535.
In none-BOOL type index access, the word size of
element should be below 65535.
380
The BOOL type variable has the
over 1M word address that the
instruction cannot access.
In BOOL type access, the word address should be
below 1M words.
381
The variable has over 16M word
In none-BOOL type access, the word address
address that the instruction cannot should be below 16M words.
access.
382
Program step is too
big.(Max.4KStep)
Program step size should be below 4 K steps.
5.3.10 Using cross reference
Cross-reference is a function to inspect in which station, in which controller, in
which program and how the variables you look are used. It is useful for you to
know data source and destination when inspecting programs that perform
unexpectedly.
Starting cross-reference
1) Click a program you need in Task Entry to open Program Editor (Text).
2) You can click <Edit><Cross-reference> menu if the program is saved
and compiled normally. In another way, it is available to right-click and
select <Edit><Cross-reference> menu.
3) Opening the following form and searching will be started.
If you do not select a device variable in program, you can set not only
variable name but also variable pattern characters using some wild cards
shown as follows.
Example 1:
*_J5, CBM_*, CBM*
: <*> character means any characters
Example 2:
CBM_?1, C?0, ABC[?] :<?> character means any character.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
295
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Item
Means
Variable Name
Searched device variable name
Station
Station in which device variable is used.
Slot No.
Main Slot No. of Controller in which device variable is used.
Task
Task in which device variable is used.
Entry No.
Task Entry in which device variable is used.
Action/Phase
<No use>
Page/Sheet No.
Page 1 <fixed>
Row
Row No. of page in which device variable is used.
Column
Column No. of page in which device variable is used.
Reference
If used device variable is loaded (LD) or stored (ST).
Opening referred program
Click a item of cross-reference list you need.
Click [Open] button to open the referred program and let the cursor move to
the location.
Not only in offline mode, but also in online mode, the mode will be inherited.
296
6F8C1290
5.3
Structured Text
5.3.11 Using device variable property
Explains how to display the property of device variable used in program.
Opening device variable property
In Text View, select a variable you need to display the property and click
<View>< Property of Variable > shown as follows. In another way it is
available to right-click to select <View><Property of Variable> menu.
See [5.2.13 Device Variable Property] section about the meanings of displayed
items.
Note
• The view of device variable property is snapshot and not refreshed if the declaration of
variable is changed by some other users during displaying view.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
297
Chapter 5
5.4
Creating Control Programs
Full Graphic
Explains how to use Program Editor (Full Graphic) for programming LD, FBD
and SFC.
The following items are explained.
Supplementary
• This function is not supported in Engineering tool 2.
5.4.1 Organization of program editor (Full graphic)
Control names of program editor (Full graphic)
Title bar
Menu bar
298
6F8C1290
Tool icons
Monitor Control
Status bar
Editor view
5.4
Full Graphic
Title bar
Displays the name and location of the program.
Menu bar
Displays the top menu to open the detail by pressing ALT key and the
displayed key without operating mouse.
Tool icons
Frequently used menu items are also assigned to the tool icons. Put your
mouse pointer on the icon to show the name of menu item.
Monitor control
Starts and stops the online monitor for the program in text view.
Editor view
Displays a worksheet in which full-graphical program is drawn by LD,FBD or
SFC.
Status bar
Displays the row and column number of the cursor position ,status of the
connected controller ,status of the editor and current date.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
299
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.4.2 Opening program
Creating or opening full-graphic program
1) In Product Tree, select Station, Controller ,Task in which you need to make
program as follow.
2) Click task name (ex. MS) to open [Task Entry] form shown as follows.
3) To create new program, enter <Program Name>, select ‘Full-Graphic’ as
<Kind> and click <Open program editor> button.
To open existing program, select a row of existing task entries and click
<Open program editor> button.
300
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Task entry information
Program Information can be shown as follows:
<Compiled>
Status of program data and code binary is shown as follows:
• Yes: All POU are already saved, and no error. All POU means a Program
with User Function and User Function Block, is called from the
program.
• No: All POU are not saved yet, or they have compiling error.
<Modified>
Date and time, when program was modified, is shown. Modified program
means the following operations: <Save Temporally>, <Save>, <Save and
Download>, <Batch Compile>
Note
• This Date and time means a program modified time only. Modifying User Function and
User Function Block, which is called from the program, is not included.
<Steps>
Program code binary size is shown.
• When <Modified> is ‘Yes’, step size is shown.
• When <Modified> is ‘No’, size ‘0’(Zero) is shown.
In case of new program
New program is opened ‘enable to edit’ initially.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
301
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
In Case of existing program
Existing program is opened ‘read only’ initially. If you want to edit, click
<Edit><Enable>.
Exit program editor
To exit Program Editor, click <File><Exit>, click [X] button in the right edge of
title bar or double-click app icon in the left edge of title bar.
Registering task parameters
If you declare in/out parameters (VAR_INPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_OUTPUT) for
Program ,you need to attach global variables to the parameters according to
the following ways.
1) In [Task Entry] form, click [Parameters] button to open [Task Entry
Parameters].
302
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
2) In [Task Entry Parameters], enter global variable name for each parameter
shown as follows.
Global variables will be displayed according to <No.>
Not only variables count and parameters count but also the data types
should be equal.
5.4.3 Drawing program
Explains how to draw full graphic program using Program Editor (Full Graphic).
Drawing cursor
Click space of Editor View to display drawing cursor.
Enable to edit
Click <Edit><Enable> or the following tool icon to let Editor View enable.
Click it once more to let Editor View disable.
Drawing instruction symbol
Click space of Editor View to display drawing cursor.
Click <Edit> <Usable Function> to open [Usable Function] form shown as
follows.
Click a symbol icon or a Function to draw the symbol at cursor position.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
303
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
In case of Contact, Coil, Function Block ,Gate ,Input (output) variable ,Step or
Transition, the default variable is displayed automatically. To delete symbols,
select them and press [DEL] key.
Symbol icons
Function List
Drawing symbols in quick succession
Click a symbol to select it ,for example Contact.
Click <Draw contact right > icon to draw a new contact automatically
connected.
You will find that clicking in succession will make network of contacts shown as
follows.
Not only <Draw contact right> icon but also <Draw contact down icon>
would be useful to attach wired-or Contact.
304
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Changing device
Click a symbol to select it ,for example Contact.
Click
symbol icon to change the kind of device shown as follows.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
305
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Clinking <change device> will show you the following devices.
Symbol
-|
|-
Initially
―|
|―
1st
―|/|―
2nd
―|P|―
Positive
Normally open Normally
contact
closed contact transition
sensing contact
-|↑ | -
―(
-||
)―||
||-
3rd
―|N|―
4th
5th
−
−
−
−
Negative
transition
sensing contact
−
―|↑|―
―| I |―
―|↓|―
Positive
transition
detector
Inverter
Negative
transition
detector
―( )―||
Coil
―(/)―||
―(S)―||
―(R)―||
―(P)―||
―(N)―||
Negated Coil
SET Coil
RESET Coil
Positive
transition
sensing coil
Negative
transition
sensing coil
―||
||―
―||/||―
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
END_IF
−
Normally open Normally
gate
closed gate
-V1
-[MC]-|
―V1
―>V1
Output
variable
SET variable
-[MCS]
-[MCR]
Master control Master control
SET
RESET
-[JCS]
-[JCR]
Jump control
SET
Jump control
RESET
IF
IF
THEN
ELSEIF
ELSE
CAS
CASE
INDEX
,
:
..
FOR
FOR_DO
INDEX MIN MAX STEP
END_FOR
−
−
−
REP
REPEAT
UNTIL
END_REPEAT
−
−
−
WHL
WHILE
DO
END_WHILE
−
−
−
-[JC]-|
306
6F8C1290
,
..
:
END_CASE
5.4
Full Graphic
Attaching a variable with function (FUN / FBK)
Double-click the edge of Function, near the input or output line, to attach a
input variable or a output variable.
When you want to attach a new type symbol as the new input variable or the
new output variable, please check to <Tool><Attaching New Variable
Symbol>.
Connecting a line between connectors
Move mouse pointer to a input /output line or a connector and so the mouse
pointer become <+> mark.
Click the location to start connection. You will find that the connected line
appears and the end of line can be moved with your mouse pointer.
+
Move mouse pointer and click the other location your mouse pointer become
<+> mark to finish to connect the line shown as follows.
+
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
307
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Aborting line connection
Before fishing connection ,double-click to abort connection and delete the line.
Deleting exiting line connection
Click existing line to select it.
Press [Delete] key to delete the line connection.
Moving a symbol
Click a symbol to select it.
Move a symbol in dragging manner and so each of the connected lines is
automatically moved and changed keeping connections.
308
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Connecting new line to the middle point of line
Pressing [Ctrl] key, move mouse pointer to near the middle point of line and so
the mouse pointer become <+> mark that means ‘connectable point’.
+
Click the connectable to start connection.
After starting connection, release [Ctrl] key and move mouse pointer to the
other connectable point that shows <+> mark mouse pointer.
Click the other connectable point to finish connecting line shown as follows.
+
Selecting device symbol
Supplementary
• This operation is available for Ver.4.2.0 and Ver.3.10.0 or upper version.
Using unavailable version, please try to select wide area or other area.
[Click a symbol]
When the mouse cursor is changed the following type, please click a symbol.
• Variable area:
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
309
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
• Symbol area:
[Select symbols]
When the mouse cursor is changed the following type, please select symbols.
Exception: This operation can not be used for the following symbols:
• Line symbols for SFC and LD
• Symbols for comment and diagrams
• Custom symbols
Moving and connecting symbol
Click a symbol you want to move to select it.
In dragging manner, move the symbol until the position of connector is equal
to the other connector.
After moving, the two symbols will be connected each other.
310
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Moving a middle segment of line
Click a middle segment of line to display gray colored selector bar shown as
follows.
Pressing left-button of mouse, move the selector to the location you need and
release the button.
Changing height and width of function symbol
Click a function or function block symbol to select it.
Click <Increment height between connectors> , <decrement height between
connectors>, <Increment width>, <Decrement width> to change size.
Increment
Decrement
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
311
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
The following shows the highest and the lowest.
Editing operations
Item
312
6F8C1290
Operation
Drawing a
Instruction symbol
Click space of Editor View to display cursor.
Click <Edit><Usable Functions>.
Click a symbol icon you need to draw the symbol at cursor position.
Draw a Function or
Function Block.
Click space of Editor View to display cursor.
Click <Edit><Usable Functions>.
Click one of Function List you need to draw the Function at cursor
position.
Delete a symbol.
Click a symbol you delete to select it.
Press [Delete] key.
Delete a line
Click a line you delete to select it.
Press [Delete] key.
Copying networks
Pressing left-button of mouse, drag a rectangle to select symbols and
lines the rectangle contains and release the button.
Press [Ctrl] + [C] to copy the objects to clipboard.
Cutting networks
Pressing left-button of mouse, drag a rectangle to select symbols and
lines the rectangle contains and release the button.
Press [Ctrl] + [X] to cut and copy the objects to clipboard.
Pasting networks
Click space of Editor View.
Press [Ctrl] + [V] to paste the objects from clipboard.
Deleting networks
Pressing left-button of mouse, drag a rectangle to select symbols and
lines the rectangle contains and release the button.
Press [Delete] to delete the objects.
Note that content of clipboard is not changed.
Scroll a worksheet
Pressing each of [←], [→], [↑], [↓] keys will show you the other part of
worksheet that can not be displayed in Editor View.
Inserting a row
Click space of Editor View you want to insert a row.
Click <Edit><Insert space row> to move the below networks downward.
Deleting a row
space
Click space of Editor View you want to delete a row.
Click <Edit><Insert space row> to move the below networks upward.
Undoing
Click <Edit><Undo> to go back to the previous Editor View.
5.4
Full Graphic
5.4.4 Entering variables
Entering a variable
Click a device variable to open a text box.
Drag the right-down edge of text box to resize the box.
Type variable name in the text box and press [Enter].
In general, it is more efficient to draw all instruction symbols first and then enter
the variable names.
Dragging a existing variable
Click <Edit><Usable Variables> menu to open it shown as follows.
Pressing left-button of mouse, drag one of the usable variables on a device
variable you want to change
Release left –button to replace the device variable.
Drag & Drop
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
313
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Changing default variable name of symbol
Some kinds of symbol ,for example Contact ,Contact ,Input or Output
Variable ,Function Block ,Step or Transition have a default variable initially. The
name can be changed by the following steps.
• Click <Tool><Default Variable Name>.
• Change the base name according to the rule of variable name.
5.4.5 Declaring variables
Declaring variables manually
1) Click <Edit><Usable Variables> to open it.
2) Click a last row and enter [Variable], [Data type], [Comment], [Kind],
[Constant] and [Order No.] items to add a new variable.
Locking up
Initially, existing variables are locked up. In case of editing existing variables,
clear checked mark of <Lock up> check box shown as follows.
Declaring variables automatically
In stead of entering variables manually you can register variables used in your
program automatically.
• After editing your program, click <File><Save>.
If your program has some undefined variables, [Undefined Variables] form
shown as follows will appear.
• Enter [Scope] ,[Kind] ,[Data type] ,[Value] and [Comment] fields if
necessarily.
• Click [Register] button to declare variables in each scope automatically.
If you open [Usable Variable] form again, you will find those variables
assigned automatically.
314
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Changing initial ‘scope’ of undefined variables
You can control the initial value of <Scope> field in each undefined variable in
the following manner.
• Click <Tool><Prefix settings> to open the following form.
• Enter some prefix string in each item and click [OK] button.
When saving program, [Undefined Variable] will show you the scope of
variable according to the relationship between prefix and scope.
• Following figure is an example displayed according to the above setting.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
315
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Supplementary
• If you add ,delete or change the local variables of existing Function Block, the Function
Block instance size or interface may be changed. In that case you should delete all of
the instance variable declarations and invocation drawings of Programs or Function
Blocks.
316
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
5.4.6 Using functions
Explains how to draw and edit full-graphic program using Functions and
Function Blocks.
Drawing functions
• Click space of Editor View to let drawing cursor appear.
• Click <Edit><Usable Functions> to show the following form.
• Select one of Function Libraries to show Function List.
• Double-click one of Function List to draw the symbol at the cursor position
in Editor View.
Function Library
Function List
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
317
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Increasing or decreasing input points of standard functions
Some standard Functions have variable input points, for example [+], [*],
[ADD_INT], etc. The parameter names are empty. Initially the count of input
points are drawn in minimum.
• Click a function to select it.
• Click <increase terminals> icon to increase the input points shown as
follows.
• Click <decrease terminals> icon to decrease the input points.
318
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Drawing a function with EN/ENO parameters
EN/ENO parameters perform a role of execution control for standard
Functions.
To draw the Function, check off <With EN and ENO parameters> check box
and double click one of standard Functions to draw it, shown as follows.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
319
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.4.7 Using function blocks
Drawing function blocks
See [5.4.6 Using Functions] section.
Declaring function block variables
A Function Block needs instance as a local static variable of program in which
the Function Block is called. Because each Function Block needs to have it’s
own retained data.
For example, some program calls three ‘TON’ Function Blocks. Those
variables are TON_1, TON_4 and tmEMG. In this case, you should register the
three variable as ‘TON’ data type in local scope of [Usable Variables] form
shown as follows.
Copying function blocks
In copy & paste manner, you can copy Functions Blocks. See [5.4.3 Drawing
Program-Editing Operations] section.
To avoid to multi-call a instance of Function Block, the copied variable name is
automatically changed shown as follows.
Copy
320
6F8C1290
Paste
5.4
Full Graphic
5.4.8 Searching and replacing instructions or variables
Explains how to search and replace instruction symbols or device variables in
a program or a controller.
The searched and replaced targets are shown as follows.
Instruction symbol
targets
Contact, Coil
Device variable name
Function, Function Block
Function name, Function Block type name
Function Block variable name
Input Variable
Output Variable
InOut Variable
Device variable name
Gate
Device variable name
Action
Timer setting, Action variable
User Action
Timer setting, Action name, Indicator variable name
Step
Step variable name
Transition
Device variable name
IF,CASE, FOR, WHILE, REPEAT
Index variable name, MIN, MAX, STEP
Jump, Label
Label name
Searching text
In Program Editor (Full Graphic),
• Click <Edit><Search/Replace> to open the following form.
• Enter [Find Text] item you want to search.
• Select [Scope] ,[Direction] ,[Comparison] options if necessarily.
• Click [Find Next] to start searching.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
321
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Options of searching are shown as follows.
Scope
Worksheet: searching in current Worksheet.
POU:
searching in current POU.
Controller: searching in current Controller.
Direction
Up:
searching upward.
Down: searching downward.
Comparison
Matched:
searching text matches <Find Text> string.
Contained: searching text contains <Find Text> string.
In case of Controller scope, the result of searching are shown as follows.
For example ,{G_DBINS_S02A = 2055 : MS051 : :05-002:30} means:
‘G_DBINS_S20A’: searched string
‘2055’:
POU No.
‘MS051’:
Task and Task Entry No.
’05-002:30’:
Worksheet No. -Row No: Column No.
In case of Worksheet or POU scope, the program in which searched text is
used is opened in succession by clicking [Find Next] button.
If you select <Contained> in comparison field, you can search text using wild
cards shown as follows.
Wild card
322
6F8C1290
meaning
?
any character
*
any characters
#
any numeric character
5.4
Full Graphic
Example of searching
<Matched>
<Contained>
<Contained>
Find Text
ABCDE
ABCDE*
*ABCDE
Hit Text
ABCDE
ABCDE, ABCDE[100]
ABCDE, D.ABCDE
Not hit Text
ABCDE_1
AABCDEE
DATA_ABCDEF
Searching text with symbol
You can search not only text but also text with symbol according to following
operations.
• Click <Edit><Search/Replace>.
• Enter <Find Text>.
• Select <Find Symbol>.
• Select [Scope] ,[Direction] ,[Comparison] options if necessarily.
• Click [Find Next] to start searching.
Replacing text in worksheet or POU scope
You can not only search but also replace text according to following
operations.
• In Program Editor (Full graphic), click <Edit><Enable> to enable Editor
View to edit.
• Click <Edit><Search/Replace> to open the form.
• Select ‘Worksheet’ or ‘POU’ in [Scope] field.
• Enter <Find Text> and <Replaced With>
• Click [Replace] to jump to searched text and replace it.
Note
• In case of Worksheet or POU scope program replaced by text should be saved.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
323
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Replacing text in controller scope
You can not only search but also replace text according to following
operations.
• In Program Editor (Full graphic), click <Edit><Enable> to enable Editor
View to edit.
• Click <Edit><Search/Replace> to open the form.
• Select ‘Controller’ in [Scope] field.
• Enter <Find Text> and <Replaced With>
• Click [Replace All] to open the searched results shown as follows.
• Click [Replace] to replace all of the text in the controller scope.
5.4.9 Various edit and display functions
Inserting and deleting space
Click space of Editor View you want insert or delete a row (or column) space to
display drawing cursor.
• Click <Edit><Insert space><row> to insert a row space at the cursor
position.
• Click <Edit><Insert space><column> to insert a column space at the
cursor position.
• Click <Edit><delete space><row> to delete a row space at the cursor
position.
• Click <Edit><delete space><column> to delete a column space at the
cursor position.
324
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Clipping control logic diagram
You can clip a control flow diagram displayed in a worksheet as Enhanced
Metafile and paste it on the other application like Excel sheet.
• Select some graphic objects by dragging a rectangle in a worksheet.
• Click <Edit><Clip Picture> to send the picture to clipboard.
• In the other application, like Excel sheet, click <Edit><Paste> or <Paste
As> to paste the picture.
Saving control logic diagram
You can save a control flow diagram displayed in a worksheet as Enhanced
Metafile.
• Select some graphic objects by dragging a rectangle in a worksheet.
• Click <Edit><Save Picture> to open the file dialog.
• Set a filename you want and click [Save] to make the file.
Displaying printed page boundary
Click <View><Page boundary> to display page boundary blue lines.
Those lines represent boundaries of physically printed pages according page
settings of Program Editor.
Displaying overview
Click <View><Overview> to open [Overview] form represent a over view of
the worksheet.
If you click some point of overview, Editor View will be panned to contain the
point.
Attaching free comment
• Click <Edit><Enable> to open [Usable Functions].
• Click space of Editor View to display drawing cursor.
• Click
<Free comment> icon of [Usable Functions] to draw a free
comment box.
• Double-click a free comment box to enable it to edit.
• Enter some comments you need.
In this status drag the right (or down) side of box by mouse to change size
of the box.
• Click out of the box to finish to edit.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
325
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Attaching text box, shape and line
• Click
<Text Box> icon of [Usable Functions] to draw a text box.
• See [Attaching Free Comment] section to know how to enter a text.
• Click
and
Shape (i.e. <Rectangle>, <Ellipse> and <Triangle>)
<Line> icon of [Usable Functions] to draw rectangle, ellipse,
triangle and line.
• See [Attaching Free Comment] section to know how to edit the size of
shape.
• Click and drag the end of Line to change the length and the direction.
• Click and drag the middle of Line to add a vertex. So the Line will become
polynomial line.
• Change the property settings to change the appearance.
• Click right button on a graphic object, and click <Properties> menu to
open property form.
• Change each property value and press [OK] to decide the value.
Zooming
• Click <View><Zoom> to open the following form.
• Enter zooming data (%) or slide the bar to zoom Edit View from 40% to
200%.
Worksheet operations
An Editor View of Program Editor (Full graphic) represents a worksheet means
drawing space.
A POU has one or more routines.
A routine has one or more worksheets up to 99.
• Click <File><Open><Worksheet> to open [Worksheets] form shown as
follows.
326
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
• Click {Name} you want to edit and press [F2] key to edit the name if
necessarily.
• Click [↑],[↓] key to change execution order of worksheets.
• Click [Add] button to add new worksheet after the existing worksheets.
• Click [Insert] button to add new worksheet before the selected worksheet.
Tool icons
Print
Undo
Redo
Usable Functions
Online Manual
Data Monitor
Save and Download
Save Temporarily
Save
Open Worksheet
Overview
Zoom
Enable to Edit
Usable Variables
If you put mouse pointer on a tool icon the name will appear as tool tip.
The functions of Tool Icons are prepared as menu items.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
327
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Changing graphic colors
In Full-graphic Program Editor of V-Tool3, that is version3.3.0 or higher, colors
of graphic objects can be changed as you like.
Click <Tool><Display Color Setting…> menu to open the setting form shown
as follows.
Select the Color Palette.
Customize the Color.
Initially colors of graphic objects are defined by [Standard1] color pallet.
You can change the color pallet to [Stander2] or [Design] by clicking each
header field.
You will find that colors of sample graphic objects are changed when the
selected color pallet is changed.
328
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Each color of the standard pallets is recommended and fixed but each one of
[Design] can be changed as you like. To change each color of [Design] pallet,
there are the following two ways.
• When you have selected the [Design] palette, click a color cell you want to
change to open a color table and select a color you need.
• Drag a source color cell to a destination color cell you want to change and
drop it.
Supplementary
• Worksheets made by version 3.3.0 (or higher) of V-Tool3 will be displayed in their own
color on the previous version of V-Tool3 and the colors cannot be changed.
5.4.10 Saving program
Explains how to save program written by Program Editor (Full graphic).
Saving a program
• Click <File><Save> to compile and save program you made.
If program has no errors, saving will be finished normally.
If it has some errors, message asks you if you need error list will appear.
In case of having errors, not only confirming the message but also clicking
<File><Compie Error List> open
[Error List] form shown as follows.
• Click a row of list and click <Open> button to make drawing cursor jump
to the error location.
• Click <Print> button to print displayed error list.
Save temporarily
Click <File><Save temporarily> if you need save program without compiling.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
329
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.4.11 Displaying data type and execution order
Displaying data type
In Editor View of Program Editor <Full graphic>, click <View><Data type>
menu to display each data type of device variables by characters.
If you click <View>< Data type> once more, the characters will be cleared.
Characters
Data type
B
BOOL
W
WORD
DW
DWORD
I
INT
UI
UINT
DI
DINT
R
REAL
T
TIME
D
DATE
TD
TOD
DT
DT
ST
STRING
Display execution order of instructions
If the program will be finished to save and compile, execution order no. (step
no.) of the instruction symbols will be displayed.
Click <View><Step No.> menu to display step numbers shown as follows.
If you click <View>< Step No.> once more, the step numbers will be cleared.
330
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
5.4.12 Using cross reference
Cross-reference is a function to inspect in which station, in which controller, in
which program and how the variables you look are used. It is useful for you to
know data source and destination when inspecting program that performs
unexpectedly.
See [5.3.10 Using cross reference] about operations.
5.4.13 Using device variable property
See [5.3.11 Using device variable property] about operations.
5.4.14 Using any function
What is any function?
The Any Function is one of the standard-function for any data types. The user
can use these symbols without selecting the data type.
The data types are determined automatically using variable’s data types, when
a program that contained these symbols is saved and complied in V-Tool.
Following instructions are available for full-graphic type program editor:
Kind
Arithmetic Operations
Logical Operations
Comparison Functions
Type
Symbol
Add
+
Subtract
−
Multiply
*
Divide
/
Bitwise Boolean AND
AND
Bitwise Boolean OR
OR
Bitwise Boolean NOT
~
Bitwise Boolean XOR
XOR
Greater Than
>
Greater Than or Equal
>=
Equal
=
Less Than or Equal
<=
Less Than
<
Not Equal
<>
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
331
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Sample program
These are useful in following case:
1) Efficient programming
Basic functions such as arithmetic operations can be used without
selecting the data type.
The variable data types can be determined at the same time.
2) Compact symbols
These are small symbols, so the user can draw the compact circuit that
contains these.
The type conversion instructions can be inserted automatically for internal
processing, so several data types can be selected for the input variables.
332
6F8C1290
5.4
Full Graphic
Use any function
• Open [Program Editor (Full graphic)]
• Click menu <Edit><Enable> to open [Usable Functions] shown as
follows.
Function list
Symbol view
• Click some space of worksheet to show drawing cursor.
• Click one name of [Function list] to show the image in [Symbol view].
• Double-click one name of [Function list] to draw the symbol in the
worksheet.
• Variable inputs of some symbols can be increased and decreased like the
other standard functions.
See also the manuals of ‘Instruction Set’ to know each Any Function
Instructions.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
333
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Error messages
If there is a data types conflict of variables for Any Function, compiling error
occurs.
The messages and measures are shown as follows:
No.
Message
Measure
465
Data type is mismatched, or it can not
be used.
• Insert the INOUT function with data type
declared variable.
490
Any type instruction is not allowed this
data type or combination of data types.
Please use INOUT Instruction to fix data
type, or check data type of Inputs and
Outputs.
• Check the data types of Input and/or
Output Variables.
• Check the variables, of which are
unavailable data type for conversion
functions.
Defining data type automatically (Default data types)
Default data types are as follows:
1) Data type of instructions
If there are not defined-variables for Any Function, data type of Any
Function is defined as follows:
Kind
Default types
Arithmetic Operations
REAL
Logical Operations
BOOL
Comparison Functions
REAL
2) Data type of Constant value
If there are not defined-values (ex: “1”, “-10”) for Any Function, data type of
Constant value is defined as follows:
Kind
334
6F8C1290
Default types
Arithmetic Operations
REAL
Logical Operations
BOOL
Comparison Functions
REAL
Note
Only for “0” or “1”.
If other values are used, error occurs.
5.4
Full Graphic
Defining data type manually
If user defines data type for part of variables, data types of Any Function and
other variables are defined automatically.
There are 3 concrete ways as follows:
1) Define data type of variable.
2) Connect the Any Function with data defined instructions (ex: “ADD_REAL”,
“AND_BOOL”).
3) Define data type of constant value (ex: “REAL#1”, “1.0”).
Supplementary
• If 2 or more data types are defined as variables and/or instructions, unexpected result
or compiling error occurs.
• Please use the other standard instructions of which data type is defined.
If 2 or more data types are used for Any Function, please refer to the next section
‘Know Any Function more in details’.
• Output data type of Comparison Functions is fixed as BOOL type. Connecting variable
or instruction with its inputs is valid for data type definition.
Know any function more in details
Internal processing to fix the data types is as follows:
• Automatic determination of the undefined variables data type
Data types of the undefined variables are determined automatically, which
are connected to Any Function symbol, when a program that contained
these symbols is saved and complied in V-Tool.
• Automatic determination of the instructions data type
Data types of these instructions are determined automatically, when a
program that contained these symbols is saved and complied in V-Tool.
• Automatic insertion of data conversion instructions
If the determined data types of instructions are different from the input one,
the type conversion Instruction is inserted automatically.
Supplementary
• See also the manuals of ‘Instruction Set’ to know the details of ‘Any Function
Instructions’.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
335
Chapter 5
5.5
Creating Control Programs
Creating a User Function
Determining the specification
• The user can create a unique function.
• Refer to the section "V Series Software Model Functions" for information on
functions.
• Here, the following specification is assumed:
A function to calculate the weighted averge of process values at
three points. The process values are real values. The function name
is AVE3.
Equation: y=(K1*x1+K2*x2+K3*x3)/3
where K1+K2+K3=3
Creating user function
Creating a function named AVE3.
1) Start the Product Tree and double-click the system to use the function at
the top right corner of the window. The editable sub folders in the selected
system appear at the bottom left of the screen.
2) Select the sub folder [Library] to open a library list at the bottom right of the
window.
3) Double-click [Work] in the library list to open the [Library] window.
4) In the [Library] window, enter the name of the function to be created (AVE3)
in [Data type] and FUNCTION in [Parent type].Select program kind
(Semi-Graphic, Text, Full-Graphic). Enter a comment if necessary.
5) Click [Open Program Editor] to create the inside of the function.
336
6F8C1290
5.5
Creating a User Function
Determining arguments
There are three input arguments for process value. Input arguments for
weighing coefficient are three points. The function value is the one pointweighted average.
• Select <Available Variables> from the <Edit> menu and declare the
function variables as follows:
• If the declaration type is set to [FUNCTION], the output of the created user
function can be used as input. If it is set to [VAR_OUTPUT], it is necessary
to store the output of the user function in a variable with the ST instruction.
Creating the function internal
Once the arguments are determined, create the user function as follows:
1) In the main view of the edit form, draw the operation in the above
specification using standard functions.
Main View in ‘AVE3’ Function
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
337
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
2) Select <Save Project> or <Temporarily Save> from the <File> menu to
save.
If undefined variables exist, undefined variables window is shown. If you do
not want to define them, please click checked-box to be 'OFF'.
The user function file is now created.
3) To view the user function instruction symbol, refer to the procedure
described under [Using a Function]. In this example, the instruction symbol
appears as follows.
4) As in the example, a function is created with the variable declared as
VAR_INPUT type as input and variables declared as FUNCTION and
VAR_OUTPUT type as output. Furthermore, input/output are created from
top to bottom of the function box in the variable declaration sequence.
Invocation of ‘AVE3’ Function
in the Main View of a Program
338
6F8C1290
5.6
5.6
Creating a User Function Block
Creating a User Function Block
Determining the specification
• The user can create a unique function block.
• Refer to the section [V Series Software Model Functions] for information on
function blocks.
• Here, the following specification is assumed:
Output high/low limit level alarms (HH/LL) of process value IN.
IN is a real value. Function block name is ALM2.
Alarm output HH is latched ON when IN exceeds high limit H0. Latch is released
when IN<H0-X0.
Alarm output LL is latched ON when IN is less than low limit L0. Latch is released
when IN>L0+X0.
Creating user function block
Creating a function block named ALM2.
1) Start the Product Tree and double-click the system to use the function
block at the top right corner of the window. The editable sub folders in the
selected system appear at the bottom left of the window.
2) Select the sub folder [Library] to open a library list at the bottom right of the
window.
3) Double-click [Work] in the library list to open the [Library] window.
4) In the [Library] window, enter the name of the function to be created ALM2
in [Data type] and FUNCTION_BLOCK in [Parent type]. Select program
kind (Semi-Graphic, Text, Full-Graphic). Enter an initial value and comment
if necessary.
5) Click [Open Program Editor] to create the function block internal.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
339
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Determining arguments
• Input arguments are process value IN, high limit H0, low limit L0, and dead
band X0.
• Output arguments are high limit alarm output HH and low limit alarm output
LL.
• Select <Available Variables> from the <Edit> menu and declare the
function block arguments as follows:
Creating the function block internal
Once the arguments are determined, create the user function block as follows:
1) In the main view of the edit form, draw the operation in the above
specification using standard functions.
340
6F8C1290
5.6
Creating a User Function Block
2) Add local variable declarations within the function block.
Here, declare variables as follows because the function block [RS] is used.
3) Select <Save Project> from the <File> menu to save.
If undefined variables exist, undefined variables window is shown. If you do
not want to define them, please click checked-box to be 'OFF'.
The user function block file is now created.
4) To view the user function block instruction symbol, refer to the procedure
described under [Using a Function]. In this example, the instruction symbol
is as follows:
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
341
Chapter 5
5.7
Creating Control Programs
Using Tag Symbols
This section describes how to program using Tag No.
<Using Tag symbols>
Tag No registered with the Tag Editor is registered as controller variable as
shown below:
!{TagNo}_# (#:0-3)
(Example)
DS type PV: If indicator
!FI000_0: PV_PARA variable
!FI000_1: PV_DARA variable
When using a Tag symbol in Program Editor or Tag View, specify {TagNo}
with the leading '!' and trailing '_#' removed.
(Example)
DS type PV: If indicator
FI000.PV
How to describe Array type member
Some Tag No. and Variables have the array type members shown as follows.
Example:
XPB100.FI[0]: The first lump status of Push Button XPB100.
XPB100.FI[1]: The second lump status of Push Button XPB100.
XPB100.FO[0]: The first button status of Push Button XPB100.
XPB100.FO[1]: The second button status of Push Button XPB100.
The index value of array starts from zero.
In order to fit the bump/lump no. the following descriptions are available.
Example:
XPB100.FI1: The first lump status of Push Button XPB100. Equal to
XPB100.FI[0].
XPB100.FI2: The second lump status of Push Button XPB100. Equal to
XPB100.FI[1].
XPB100.FO1: The first button status of Push Button XPB100. Equal to
XPB100.FO[0].
XPB100.FO2: The second button status of Push Button XPB100. Equal to
XPB100.FO[1].
342
6F8C1290
5.8
5.8
Reusing a Program
Reusing a Program
Sometimes, you would like to reuse part or all of a control program that you
created. Properly reusing programs can significantly improve the design
efficiency and controller usage.
This section describes various methods to reuse a program.
Copying a graphic
If graphics are similar, you can copy and modify it.
Refer to [Drawing a Program] for information on how to copy and paste
graphics.
The Program Editor can be executed more than once.
Graphics can be copied to the same view, different view within a project, or a
view of a different project.
Saving as text file
Program (PRG), function block (FBK), and function (FUN) can be saved and
loaded as text files.
This is useful when exchanging files with other tools through FD or network.
The procedure to save as text file is as follows:
1) From the [Program Editor], open the file to save (copy source). The copy
source must have been saved.
2) Execute <Save text file> from the <File> menu.
3) Specify the file name in the [Save as] dialog box and save.
Loading a text file
The procedure to load a text file is as follows:
1) Open a new program from [Task entry].
2) Execute <Load text file> from the <File> menu.
3) Specify the file in the [Open file] dialog box to open the file saved in edit
form.
4) This file can be reused by entering variable declarations.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
343
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Copying the entire system
An entire system can be copied under the same product path.
1) Open the [Product view].
2) Select the copy source system and select <Copy> from the <Edit>
menu.
3) Select [System] at the top left corner of the window and select <Paste>
from the <Edit> menu.
4) Enter the system name and click the [OK] button.
5) The name of the copied system is added to the system list at top right of
the window. Double-click it to edit inside the system.
344
6F8C1290
5.9
5.9
Compile a Batch of System
Compile a Batch of System
You can compile a batch of System that has the following items.
• User defined type
• Controller Variables
• Programs
• Task entry
Opening batch compiler
On [Product Tree], select the system to compile and click menu
<File><Batch compile>.
Start batch compile
1) Close Product Tree, without close [Batch Compiler] window.
In the case of C/S, all users should close [Product Tree].
2) Click [Start] to compile the selected system.
Please click [stop] button to stop the compile.
The logs will be displayed during compile.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
345
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
The color of logs as follows.
Color
Meaning
Blue
Compile finished
Red
Compile error detected
Click [Print] button to print out the logs.
3) When the compile is finished, start [Product Tree] to use the system.
Note
• Edit and monitoring operation is enabled during compile. But the change becomes
invalid when compile is finished.
346
6F8C1290
5.10
Batch Compiling of Controller
5.10 Batch Compiling of Controller
You can compile a batch of Controller that has the following items.
• Controller Variables
• Programs
• Task entry
Start batch compile
1) Select a controller in [Product Tree]. Select menu <File> <Batch
compile>.
2) After displaying the window, you can select other controller.
3) Push [Start] button, Batch compiling starts order by [Request List].
4) While compiling, operation 2) can be used.
The logs will be displayed during compile.
The color of logs as follows.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
347
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Color
• [Stop] button:
Meaning
Blue
Compile finished
Red
Compile error detected
Cancel compiling.
• [Delete] button: If you want to cancel request, select controller on
[Request List], and push button [Delete].
Printing result of compiling
Push button [Printing].
Supplementary
• When other user edits the controller, you can not start Batch compiling.
348
6F8C1290
5.11
Searching Influence of Change
5.11 Searching Influence of Change
When the variables or the programs will be re-made, the Influence of the
change can be searched.
Searching influence of change
The following items can be searched.
Function
Target
Library
Data types
Structure
Members
I/O Variables
I/O Variables
Controller Variables
Controller Variables (SW/DW/User)
Station Variables
Station Variables (Output/Input)
Network Variables
Network Variables (Output/Input)
Available Variables
Controller, I/O, Station, Network Variables
POU Entries
POUs
Click <Search Influence> button from above windows.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
349
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
Form of display is as follows:
Part of Influence
Form
User Definition
Datatype = {Data type:Comment}
POU type
POUtype = {Data type:Base type:Comment}
Network Variables
NetVar = {Network no.:Network name}-{Send Block no.}
-{Variable:Comment}
Station Variables
StnVar = {Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-{Memory type}-{Variable:Comment}
Controller Variables
CntVar = {Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-{Memory type}-{Variable:Comment}
Function Block
Fbk = {Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-POU name: POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Function
Fun = {Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-POU name: POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Program
Prg = {Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-TTEEE:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Example) Prg = {Stn1}-{1:S3PU55}-MS000:ACT_1_B:001-0001:01
Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
Type
−
S
Slot No.
TT
Task type
EEE
Task entry No.
PPP
Page No.
EV, SS, IP, HS, MS, BG
−
Semi Graphic
Page No.
Text
Page No.
Full Graphic
Work Sheet No.
−: Read
>: Write
S : Set
R : Reset
>
Action
RRR
Row No.
−
CC
Column No.
−
Printing influence of change
Click <Print> button from above <Search Influence> windows.
Searching and outputting influence of change
The following items can be searched.
350
6F8C1290
5.11
Product
Searching Influence of Change
Target
Network
Network Variables
Station
Station Variables
Controller
Controller Variables
1) On product tree select product, and click <File>-<Output Variable
Reference>menu.
Network
Station
Controller
2) "Output Variable Reference" form appears.
3) Confirm destination.
If you change the destination folder, click "…" button.
You cannot change the destination file name.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
351
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
4) Confirm objects.
Clear the check box if it is not necessary to output.
5) Click Start button.
Variable reference list is made on the destination. And the result appears.
Output format
Output format is as follows. Each item is separated with Tab code.
[Module / Item]
Variable 1 <Tab> Reference1 <Tab> Reference2 <Tab> Reference3
<Tab>⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅Reference N
Variable 2 <Tab> Reference1 <Tab> Reference2 <Tab> Reference3
<Tab>⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅Reference N
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
Variable n <Tab> Reference1 <Tab> Reference2 <Tab> Reference3
<Tab>⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅Reference N
352
6F8C1290
5.12
Setting Program Security
5.12 Setting Program Security
Supplementary
• The following explanation is applied to V-Tool version 2.6 or more.
Program security
You can set security, that is an access protection of your Library, against the
users if you need.
The access levels are prepared as follows.
No Access: The user can not use, inspect, nor edit the library and its
programs.
Usable:
The user can use, but not inspect nor edit the library and its
programs.
Visible:
The user can use and inspect but not edit the library and its
programs.
Editable:
The user can use, inspect and edit the library and its programs.
You can attach any access level to each users. Users who are not registered in
the library can not access the library and its programs. If a library has no user
registration, everybody can use, inspect and edit the library and its programs.
Registering a manager of library
• Open view [Library] and select a library to which you attach security.
• Click button [Security] to open dialog [Program Security].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
353
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
• In dialog [Update manager], input username and password of a manager
of the library and click button [OK].
Supplementary
• Access level of a manager is always ”Editable”.
Username and password is available from 1 to 32 characters.
Invalid characters are as follows.
? “ / \ <> * | : ; (space) (tab) (CR)
Registering members of a manger with an access level
Click menu<Member><Add>.
354
6F8C1290
5.12
Setting Program Security
Input username and password of a member that should be one of Login
users ,and access level to click button [OK].
Changing a manager
• In dialog [Program Security], input username and password of the
manager and click button [OK].
• Click menu <Manager><Update> to open dialog [Update Manager].
• Input new username or password of the manager and click button [OK].
Changing a member
• In dialog [Program Security], input username and password of the
manager and click button [OK].
• Click a username of member list who you want to change.
• Click menu <Member><Update> to open dialog [Update Member].
• Input new username or password of the member and click button [OK].
Deleting a member
• In dialog [Program Security], input username and password of the
manager and click button [OK].
• Click a username of member list who you want to delete.
• Click menu <Member> <Delete>.
Deleting program security
• In dialog [Program Security], input username and password of the
manager.
• Click menu <Manager> <Delete Security>.
Supplementary
• Login security is case-sensitive for password and not for username.
• Do not forget username and password of manager.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
355
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.13 Searching Double Defined Variables
Using this function, you can find double-defined variables as local & global
variables.
Device variable that is used in program is searched. The following variables
are target.
Local variables, Controller variables, I/O variables, Station variables, Network
variables.
The following figure shows examples. Local variable 'LVL_001' is also defined
as controller, station, and network variable. These registrations can be found.
Network1
LVL_001
Station1
LVL_001
Controller1
LVL_001
Station2
Controller2
Controller3
Controller4
MS000 MS001
LVL_001 LVL_001
Restrictions
If you change the registration of variables while searching, the result may not
be correct.
Please re-start searching manually.
Searching double defined variables
1) Select a controller in [Product Tree], Select menu <File> <Search
Duplicated Variable Names>.
2) After displaying the window, you can select other controller.
3) Push [Start] button, Searching controllers starts order by [Request List].
4) While searching, operation 2) can be used.
356
6F8C1290
5.13
Searching Double Defined Variables
• Display Items:
Local variable
LCL={Variable name}-{Data type}-{Comment}
-{Station name:Model}-{Slot no.:Controller name}
-{POU name:POU no.}-{Data type: Comment}
Controller variable
CNT={Variable name}-{Word no.:Bit no.}-{Data type}-{Comment}
-{Station name:Model}-{Slot no.:Controller name}-{Memory type}
I/O variable
I/O={Variable name}-{I/O word no.:Bit no.}-{Data type}-{Comment}
-{Module name:Hard address}
Station variable
STN={Variable name}-{Word no.:Bit no.}-{Data type}-{Comment}
-{Station name:Model}
Network variable
NET={Variable name}-{Word no.:Bit no.}-{Data type}-{Comment}
-{Network no.:Network name}-{Send Block no.}
• [Stop] button:
Cancel searching.
• [Delete] button: If you want to cancel request, select controller on
[Request List], and push button [Delete].
Printing result of searching
Push button [Printing].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
357
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.14 Searching Overlap Addresses of Variables
Using this function, you can find double-defined addresses of variables.
Device variables are searched if same address is used for the registration of
other variables or not.
The following variables are target:
• Controller variables, I/O variables, Station variables, Network variables.
The following patterns are searched:
• BOOL & BOOL: Bit address overlapping.
• BOOL & Others: Word address overlapping.
• Others & Others: Word address overlapping.
‘Others’ includes ‘Basic data type’, ‘Array type’ and ‘User data type’.
Restrictions
If you change the registration of variables while searching, the result may not
be correct.
Please re-start searching manually.
Searching overlap addressed of variables
1) Select a network or a station or a controller in [Product Tree]. Select menu
<File><Search Overlap Addresses>.
2) After displaying the window, you can select other controller.
3) Push [Start] button, Searching controllers starts order by [Request List].
4) While searching, operation 2) can be used.
• Case of a network:
Scan memory and I/O module addresses (Word No. & Bit No.) are
searched.
• Case of a station:
Station memory and I/O module addresses (Word No. & Bit No.) are
searched.
• Case of a controller:
Controller memory and I/O module addresses (Word No. & Bit No.) are
searched.
358
6F8C1290
5.14
Searching Overlap Addresses of Variables
• Display Items:
‘Scope’ format is as follows:
Network variable
{Network no.:Network name}-{Send Block no.}
Station variable
{Station name:Model}
Controller variable
{Station name:Model}-{Slot no.:Controller name}
-{Memory type}
I/O variable (System Scope)
{Station name:Model}-{Module name:Hard address}
I/O variable (Station Scope)
{Station name:Model}-{Module name:Hard address}
I/O variable (Controller Scope)
{Station name:Model}-{Slot no.:Controller name}
-{Module name:Hard address}
• [Stop] button: Cancel searching.
• [Delete] button: If you want to cancel request, select controller on [Request
List], and push button [Delete].
• [Jump] button: Variables window is opened automatically. You can confirm
the registration of a variable that is selected in this window.
Printing result of searching
Push button [Printing].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
359
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.15 Checking Duplicated Output Variables
The program locations of the duplicated output to the same variable are
detected.
Targets: Local variables, Controller variables, I/O variables, Station variables,
and Network variables.
Restrictions
Please re-start checking manually after compiling program.
The alias name of variable can not be found as the duplicated output.
Checking duplicated output variables
1) Select a controller in [Product Tree], Select menu <File><Check
Duplicated Output Variables>.
2) After displaying the window, you can select other controller.
3) Push [Start] button, checking controllers starts order by [Request List].
4) While checking, operation 2) can be used.
360
6F8C1290
5.15
Checking Duplicated Output Variables
• Display Items:
Network variable
NET={Variable name}-{Data type}:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Station name:S:POU name: POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Station variable
STN={Variable name}-{Data type}:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Station name:S:POU name: POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Controller variable
CNT={Variable name}-{Data type}:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
POU name: POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Local variable
LCL={Variable name}-{Data type}:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
S
Slot No.
PPP
Page No.
Type
−
Semi Graphic
Page No.
Text
Page No.
Full Geaphic
Work Sheet No.
−:Read
>:Write
S:Set
R:Reset
>
Action
RRR
Row No.
−
CC
Column No.
−
• [Stop] button: Cancel checking.
• [Delete] button: If you want to cancel request, select controller on [Request
List], and push button [Delete].
Printing result of checking
Push button [Printing].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
361
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.16 Checking Input and Output Variables
The program locations on which the following variables are used are detected.
• The variables of only an input without an output (Variables of Contact/Load
instruction)
• The variables of only an output without an input (Variables of Coil/Store
instruction)
Targets: Local variable and Controller variables.
Variables
Check
Local variable
Controller variable 'User','DW','SW')
Station variable
−
Network variable
−
I/O variable (Controller Scope)
−
I/O variable (Station Scope)
−
I/O variable (System Scope)
−
Restrictions
Please re-start checking manually after compiling program.
The variables can not be checked, which are used on the instructions like
'TMOV'.
The alias name of variable can not be found as the input/output variables.
When controller variables like 'DW' or 'SW' are read, these are always found as
checking result.
Checking input and output variables
1) Select a controller in [Product Tree], Select menu <File><Check Input and
Output of Variables>.
2) After displaying the window, you can select other controller.
3) Push [Start] button, checking controllers starts order by [Request List].
4) While checking, operation 2) can be used.
362
6F8C1290
5.16
Checking Input and Output Variables
• Display Items:
Controller variable
CNT={Variable name}-{Data type}:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
POU name: POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Local variable
LCL={Variable name}-{Data type}:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
S
PPP
Slot No.
Page No.
>
Action
RRR
CC
Row No.
Column No.
Semi Graphic
Text
Full Geaphic
Type
−
Page No.
Page No.
Work Sheet No.
−: Read
>: Write
S: Set
R: Reset
−
−
• [Stop] button: Cancel checking.
• [Delete] button: If you want to cancel request, select controller on [Request
List], and push button [Delete].
Printing result of checking
Push button [Printing].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
363
Chapter 5
Creating Control Programs
5.17 How to Use Custom Symbols
Custom symbol is a graphic symbol that realizes some specific figure
IEC61131-3 does not have.
Each custom symbol is functional or none-functional one. At execution,
functional symbol performs and none-functional does not perform.
Custom symbols can be used and created in V-Tool3 Ver3.1.0 or more.
Readymade custom symbols
Readymade custom symbols of V-Tool3 are shown as follows.
Custom symbol
name
Custom symbol
Equivalent function
block
dsPID
Comment
PID or SPI controller
RSV
dsPID
RPV
TAG
dsPID
TRC
TR
dsMA
SVP
MV
RSV
TAG
RPV
TRC
TR
MV
SVP
PVP
PVP
Auto/Manual setter
RMV
dsMA
RPV
TAG
dsMA
TRC
TR
SVP
MV
RMV
TAG
RPV
TRC
TR
MV
SVP
PVP
PVP
dsRS
Ratio setter
RSV
dsRS
RPV
TAG
dsRS
TRC
TR
364
6F8C1290
SVP
MV
PVP
RSV
TAG
RPV
TRC
TR
MV
SVP
PVP
5.17 How to Use Custom Symbols
Custom symbol
name
Custom symbol
dsPIDFF
Equivalent function
block
RSV
RPV
dsPIDFF
TAG
dsPIDFF
TRC
SVP
TR
PVP
GAN
FFS
FFD
Comment
PID or SPI controller
with feed forward
compensation
MV
SVP
PVP
RSV
TAG
RPV
TRC
TR
GAN
FFS
FFD
MV
Supplementary
• Using dsPID,dsMA,dsRS and dsPIDFF needs the license of New Instrument FB Library
that is an add-in package for V-Tool3.
Custom symbol
name
Custom symbol
Equivalent function
block
AND_BOOL
AND_
BOOL
OR_BOOL
OR_
BOOL
Boolean AND
Variable Inputs:2 to 15
points.
Boolean OR.
Variable Inputs:2 to 15
points.
Boolean NOT.
NOT_BOOL
X
I
SR
RS
comment
S1
R
S
R
Q1
S
S
R
Q1
R1
SR
Set-Flip-Flop
S1 Q1
R
RS
Reset-Flip-Flop
S Q1
R1
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
365
Chapter 5 Creating Control Programs
Custom symbol
name
Custom symbol
TON_100MS
PT
IN
TON_100MS
Q
ET
TOF_100MS
PT
IN
IN
PT
Off-delay timer.
1 count is 100 ms.
Rising_Edge
Rising edge detector.
Falling_Edge
Falling edge detector.
Valve
Control value display.
None-functional.
Sensor
None
6F8C1290
On-delay timer.
1 count is 100 ms.
Q
ET
IN
PT
None
366
comment
Q
ET
TOF_100MS
Q
ET
Equivalent function
block
Sensor and
transmitter display.
None-functional.
5.17 How to Use Custom Symbols
Drawing custom symbols
• Open [Program Editor (Full graphic) ]
• Click menu <Edit><Enable> to open [Usable Functions] shown as
follows.
Function libraries
Function list
Custom symbol list
Symbol view
Open custom symbol editor
• Click some space of worksheet to show drawing cursor.
• Click one name of custom symbol list to show the image in the symbol
view.
• Double-click one name of custom symbol list to draw the custom symbol in
the worksheet.
• Especially, variable inputs of some special symbols (AND_BOOL,
OR_BOOL) can be increased and decreased like the functions.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
367
Chapter 5 Creating Control Programs
5.18 How to Create Custom Symbols
Explains how to create specific custom symbols that user needs.
Custom symbols can be used and created in V-Tool version3.1.0 or more.
Specifications of custom symbols
Each custom symbol needs a custom symbol name.
Each custom symbol is functional type that is executed in controller or
none-functional type that is not executed.
A functional type symbol needs a Function or a Function Block that is executed
in controller.
One or more custom symbols can be defined for a Function or a Function
Block.
You can make custom symbols using Custom Symbol Editor.
Custom Symbol Editor has some graphical objects, that are Frame, Body,
Terminals, Shape, Line and etc, to make specific custom symbol.
To create your custom symbols, you can copy or export/import any readymade
custom symbols.
Opening and closing custom symbol editor
Open [Program Editor (Full graphic)] form.
Click <Edit><Enable> menu to open [Usable Function] form shown in the
following figure.
368
6F8C1290
5.18 How to Create Custom Symbols
Click [Custom Symbol] button to open the form shown in the following figure.
Custom Symbol Tree
Symbol View
Symbol Editor
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
369
Chapter 5 Creating Control Programs
Click [X] button of the title bar to close the form.
Creating new custom symbol
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click <Work Library> icon and click
<New> menu to add new custom symbol.
Click the new custom symbol to rename it and update the contents of Symbol
Editor.
Supplementary
Each custom symbol name should:
• Be unique in all custom symbol names of the System.
(Uppercase letter and lowercase one are not distinguished.)
(Left side and right side spaces are deleted automatically.)
• Be the length from 1 to 32 bytes.
(ASCII character is counted as 1 byte and DBCS as 2 byte.)
• Have the characters except the following special ones.
*,./:;<>?\|'
Frame
Symbol Name
Body
Symbol Editor
Type <Comment> field as you like.
Note
• The byte length of Comment should be 128 bytes or less.
Click <Functional> or <Non functional> option button as you like.
In case of Functional, you needs to select readymade Function or Function
Block by clicking [...] reference button.
370
6F8C1290
5.18 How to Create Custom Symbols
Initially Symbol Editor displays Frame, Symbol Name and Body graphic
objects.
Frame is a boundary rectangle of custom symbol and becomes the selecting
frame on Program Editor.
Note
• Any graphic objects except Link Comment should be located in Frame.
Symbol Name is the object has the name.
Body is the object expresses the main image of custom symbol.
At online monitoring, this boundary is colored by the power.
Adding graphic objects
Some toolbar icons express the usable graphic objects for making custom
symbol as follows.
Icon
Role
Shape
Expresses various readymade shape. Can hold text and
picture in it.
Line
Expresses straight line, polyline or curve.
Input Terminal (Left, Box)
Expresses left-directed input terminal for input parameter with
the box.
Input Terminal (Left)
Expresses left-directed input terminal for input parameter
without the box.
Input Terminal (Up)
Expresses up-directed input terminal for input parameter
without the box.
Output Terminal (Right, Box)
Expresses right-directed output terminal for output parameter
with the box.
Output Terminal (Right)
Expresses right-directed output terminal for output parameter
without the box.
Output Terminal (Down)
Expresses down-directed output terminal for output parameter
without the box.
In-Out Terminal
Expresses left/right-directed inout terminal for inout parameter
with the box.
Input Variable
Expresses input variable that is connected with input
parameter.
Each input variable uses a single step.
Output Variable
Expresses output variable that is connected with output
parameter.
Each output variable uses a single step.
Function Block Variable
Expresses instance of function block.
Linked Comment
Expresses comment of linked TAG or some parameter
variables.
Click each icon to add the graphic object in Symbol editor.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
371
Chapter 5 Creating Control Programs
Moving graphic objects
Click and drag a graphic object to move.
Each red connector of terminal should be located on the boundary of Frame.
Each graphic object except Linked Comment should be located inside of
Frame.
Deleting graphic objects
Press [Delete] key or click [Delete] icon on the toolbar to delete the selected
graphic objects.
Dragging mouse pointer from some point at space selects the inner graphic
objects.
Frame, Symbol Name and Body can not be deleted because of the necessary
elements for custom symbol.
Resizing graphic objects
Click and drag the rectangle boundary of graphic object to resize it.
The length of lead lines and the height of Input Terminal (Left,Box) and Output
Terminal (Right,Box) can not be resized.
Connecting line between graphic objects
Click the center of graphic object and drag mouse pointer to another graphic
object to make connected line between the objects.
Click the line and press [Delete] key to delete it.
Changing properties of graphic objects
Right button click a graphic object and click <Properties> menu to open the
form.
Change each property value as you like.
(1) Shape properties
Each Shape can hold and display the text you need. The max length is
1024 bytes.
Press [Enter] key to change the text line.
Each Shape can hold and display the picture you need.
BMP,EMF,WMF,GIF and JPEG types are usable.
Select <Picture> and press [Delete] key to delete it.
372
6F8C1290
5.18 How to Create Custom Symbols
Set ‘Adjust Picture Size to Node’ in <Auto Size> to resize the picture for
the size of Shape.
To rotate the shape, select some angle in <Shape Orientation>. But the
following marked shapes are invalid for the angle setting.
<Fill Color> is available only when <Transparent> is 'Opaque'.
(2)
Line properties
<Draw Style> except solid and transparent is available only when <Draw
Width> is 0.
<Draw Color> is available only when <Draw Style> is not 'Transparent'.
Click and drag the edge of Line to change the length and the direction.
Click and drag the middle of Line to add a vertex. So the Line will become
polyline.
Select cubic spline or bezier of <Link Style> to make the polyline curved.
Maximum is 64 points per a curved line.
The line or curved line is too close to the frame, so it cannot be saved. In
this case, please correct its position.
(3) Terminal properties
In case of functional custom symbol, <Text> needs parameter name of
the executed Function or Function Block.
(4) Variable properties
In case of functional custom symbol, <Text> needs parameter name of
the executed Function or Function Block.
Don’t overlay the other objects with Variable because monitoring value is
displayed in the south side of Variable.
(5)
Linked Comment properties
Linked Comment should be connected with Input Variable which has
TAGNo or R/W/P/T/C variable.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
373
Chapter 5 Creating Control Programs
<Tag Comment><Instrument Range><Lamp Status Character>is
usable for TAGNo Input Variable.
<Comment>is usable for R/W/P/T/C Input Variable.
Zooming
Select pull-down <Zoom> and select the value to change Zooming.
Saving custom symbol
Click [Save] button of tool bar to start the validation check for custom symbol.
When the symbol has some problems, the error list will appear.
Click an item of the list to jump and select the graphic object which has the
cause of error.
Error list icon
Meaning
Error. The location or the property setting of graphic object makes
the error.
Saving custom symbol is canceled.
Warning. Confirm the graphic object according to the message.
If the other errors are not found, saving the custom symbol is
finished normally.
Click [Save Temporarily] to save the custom symbol without the validation.
So this custom symbol does not appear in [Usable Functions] form.
In Custom Symbol Tree, note that custom symbol icon shows one of the
followings.
Error list icon
Functional
None functional
374
6F8C1290
Usable in Program Editor
Not Usable in Program Editor
5.18 How to Create Custom Symbols
Coping and customizing readymade custom symbol
There are two way of the customization. The first way is in the same System
and the second is from the other System.
(1) Copying from the Same System
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click a custom symbol you copy and
click <Copy> menu to create new symbol.
Right button click the target <Library> folder and click <Paste> menu to
move the new symbol into the Library.
Right button click the new symbol and click <Rename> to rename it.
Double-click the copied custom symbol icon to update the contents of
[Symbol Editor] form.
Edit and save the copied custom symbol contents as you like.
(2)
Copying from the Other System
In Product View, open System which has some custom symbols you want
to export.
Open [Custom Symbol Editor] in Program Editor of the System.
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click some <Library> folder you
export and click <Export> menu to open [Export] form.
In <Export> form, check the custom symbols you want to export.
In <Export> form, click <Export> button to export the files.
In Product View, open System which has some custom symbols you want
to import.
Open [Custom Symbol Editor] in Program Editor of the System.
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click some <Library> folder you
import and click <Import> menu to open [Import] form.
In [Import] form, check the custom symbol files you exported.
In [Import] form, click <Import> button to import the files in the folder.
After importing, shown as “(1)Copying from the Same System”, edit and
save the imported custom symbols.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
375
Chapter 5 Creating Control Programs
Editing custom symbol library
(1)
Adding and renaming custom symbol
See [Creating New Custom Symbol].
(2) Deleting custom symbol
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click a custom symbol you want to
delete and click <Delete> menu.
(3) Adding and renaming custom symbol library
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click <System> and click <New>
menu.
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click <Library> and click
<Rename> menu to change it.
(4) Deleting custom symbol library
In Custom Symbol Tree, right button click <Library> you want to delete
and click <Delete> menu.
Note
• Deleting Custom Symbol Library means all of the custom symbols are deleted.
• Readymade two libraries, <Work Library> and <Instrument Symbol Library>, can not be
deleted for standard.
376
6F8C1290
Chapter 6
Setting Control
Parameters
6.1
Setting Values in Data View······························ 379
6.2
Setting Values Using Tag Editor ······················ 382
377
Chapter 6
Setting Control Parameters
What is control parameter?
Control parameters refer to the semi-fixed values such as operation target
values and alarm judgment values which are referenced by the control
program. These values are set and saved with the tool beforehand and
downloaded to the controller. Normally, the values within the controller are
changed by HMI and tool according to the adjustment and operation status.
Therefore, control parameters must be stored in controller memory that retains
its content when the power is turned off.
Supplementary
• Memory that retains its content when the power is turned off depends on the controller
model. Refer to your controller manual for more information.
• Whereas "Parameters" refer to semi-fixed values read mainly by the control program,
values actively updated by the control program are sometimes referred to as "Data."
Data view and tag editor
[Data View] and [Tag Editor] are provided to display and set control
parameters and data.
Both can be used to display and set the value of a tool file (offline).
Both can be used to refresh display and set the value of a controller memory
(online).
[Data View] displays and sets all global variables and local variables as
IEC61131-3 data type.
[Data View] can display and set value of variables for up to 32 points.
In [Data View], the displayed variable name can be saved to a data sheet and
called when necessary.
The [Tag Editor] displays and sets Tag parameters/data that are provided
beforehand by the L controller.
The Tag parameter/data viewed with the [Tag Editor] can be displayed and set
regardless of whether the variable is compiled or not.
With [Tag Editor], you can easily set, select, and copy values within the
effective range of the Tag parameter/data.
The [Tag Editor] can also display online and offline values simultaneously.
The [Data View] can be used from the L, S controller, but some Tag parameters
may not be clear because their data format is not IEC61131-3. The [Tag Editor]
is designed specifically for L controller Tag parameter/data. Use these two
accordingly.
This section describes the operation to set control parameters. The following
topics are described:
378
6F8C1290
6.1
6.1
Setting Values in Data View
Setting Values in Data View
This section describes how to monitor the value of variables within the system
and set new values.
Starting data view
After selecting a system from the [Product Tree], select <Data View> from the
<File> menu to open the [Data View] window.
Adding a new data sheet
In the [Data View] window, click the [Add] button to open the [Add data sheet]
window.
Select the target controller from the [Controller] pull down list, enter the [Sheet
name] and click the [OK] button.
Click [Cancel] button to close the window.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
379
Chapter 6
Setting Control Parameters
Adding variables to the data sheet
Select a data sheet in the [Data View] window and click the [Open] button.
When the data sheet opens, enter the variable for which you want to display
the value.
You can also drag and drop from each variable window to add variables to the
data sheet.
Adding and deleting the target variables is available even if online monitoring
mode.
Start monitoring
Select [Controller] in the [Value] frame of the data sheet window to monitor an
online value.
The value display format can be switched in the [Option] window.
380
6F8C1290
6.1
Setting Values in Data View
Changing the variable value
Enter a new value in the value column. Click the [Save] button to save to the
controller.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
381
Chapter 6
6.2
Setting Control Parameters
Setting Values Using Tag Editor
This topic describes setting values of using Tag Editor. Tag Editor treats only
tag parameters and data of L Controllers.
Start tag editor
1) Tag Editor needs the L1, L2 or L3 type registration. If this controller is not
yet registered, register it from [Product Tree].
2) Select the target station from the [Product Tree] and select
<File><Open><Tag Editor> to start the [Tag Editor].
Select one of the parameters to open the tag parameter list as follows.
3) Type, increment or decrement Record No. to change the record.
4) Selecting option [View] will change the data source of the values.
[Display]
382
6F8C1290
Discription
Tool
Displays the values stored in the tool download file.
Controller
Refreshes and displays the values stored in controller memory when
transmission with the controller is enabled.
Tool and Controller
Displays the download file and controller values side by side.
6.2
Setting Values Using Tag Editor
Set tag parameters
Click a field of [Tool Value] and push [Enter] to open the text or list box.
Type or select some value and push [Enter] to finish it.
In case of numerical input, the setting range is displayed in the status bar as
follows.
Press the [Enter], [↑], or [↓] key to confirm entry.
Press the [ESC] key to cancel entry.
The portion in red in <Tool Value> or <Controller Value> indicates value not
stored in file (changed value).
To save the value, select <Save> from the <File> menu.
If the change is valid, it is saved and changes from red to black.
If the change is not valid, the name of the items and their error description
appear as follows.
In this case, the change is not saved and remains red. Correct it as necessary.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
383
Chapter 6
Setting Control Parameters
Copying tag parameters
The displayed item <Tool Value> can be copied to another record at once.
1) Display the copy source and select <Parameter Copy> from the <Edit>
menu.
2) Set the copy destination record numbers in [Start No.] and [End No.].
3) Also select whether the item to copy is the currently displayed <Tool
Value> or the default <Initial Value>.
4) Select whether the range of items to copy is the currently displayed <All
Items> or <Selected Items>. <Selected Items> is the range specified by
selecting consecutive items in the [Tool Value] field in the currently
displayed copy source items before this dialog.
5) Click the [OK] button to complete the specified copy.
Print tag parameters
1) Click menu<File> <Print> to open the following dialog.
2) Specify the pring range in the above dialog and print.
384
6F8C1290
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Downloading refers to the transferring of [Configuration], [Program], and [Global
variables] created with the Engineering Tool to the controller.
These objects are created by the following engineering actions.
Engineering
Object
Hardware registration
Configuration
Control program creation
Program
Control parameter setup
Global variable
Uploading refers to the transferring of [Configuration], [Program], and [Global
variables] from the controller to the Engineering Tool.
7.1
Connecting with the Controller ························ 386
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller ···················· 393
7.2.1 Batch downloading to controller
of nv series ·············································· 393
7.2.2 Batch downloading to controller
of V series················································ 398
7.3
Downloading Task Individually ························ 411
7.4
Batch Uploading from Controller····················· 413
385
Chapter 7
7.1
Downloading / Uploading
Connecting with the Controller
This section describes how to connect the PC (PC/AT compatible) running this
tool with the controller prior to downloading.
Connecting with RS-232C (For V series)
S L
EN CN
RS-232C
To COM port of PC
The S, R, L, FN, EN, CN, or TN board and PC can be connected via RS-232C.
An RS-232C cable provided as V series standard product is used.
This cable has a 9-pin D-sub connector at both ends except for L1. For L1, the
L1 side connector is an 8-pin modular jack.
The PC side is connected to serial port COM1 etc.
In the case of laptop PC that it is not equipped with a serial port, an expansion
unit may be necessary.
The purpose of connecting to EN, CN board via RS-232C is to display and set
board specific parameters.
When performing RS-232C transmission, select <Com. Para. Settings> from
the [Tool] menu of the [Product Tree] and set as follows. These settings are
available in each window requiring controller transmission and may be set
anywhere.
When connecting to station via TC-net10/20, select “Network via RS-232C”
setting. And set as follows.
1) Set the IP address by Module Parameter of CN module.
2) Create a new TC-net10/20 LAN in [Networks] of the [Product Tree] and
connect an CN module.
3) Select the TC-net10/20 LAN created in step 2) and select <Set as tool
communication> from the <File> menu.
386
6F8C1290
7.1
Connecting with the Controller
Important
• A wrong connection to other station via RS-232C can not be found. System may be
damaged in downloading. Please be sure and check connection.
• Data transmission rate of RS-232C is 9600bps. Downloading via RS-232C is needed
more times than via Ethernet.
Connecting with RS-485 (For V series)
S
S
S
RS-485
Station 1
Station 4
Station 2
RS-485/232C converter
A single tool can connect to up to 31 controllers.
An RS-485 cable provided as V series standard product is used.
Only the S controller can be connected by RS-485.
An RS-485 connection requires an RS-232C to RS-485 interface converter.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
387
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
When performing RS-485 transmission, select <Com. Para. Settings> from
the [Tool] menu of the [Product Tree] and set as follows. These settings are
available in each window requiring controller transmission and may be set
anywhere.
Furthermore, when performing RS-485 transmission, an ID no. which is an
RS-485 communication station no. must be specified on the destination
controller because the tool must identify the destination controller when
communicating. Specify S controller in the [Product Tree], select <Module
parameters> from the <File> menu, and specify the following parameters.
For [RS-485 Station No.], Specify a number from 1 to 32 to be assigned to the
S controllers connected to a single tool.
[Baud rate], [Parity], [Data length], and [Stop bit] are serial communication
parameters and must be set as follows for transmission with the tool.
Note that RS-485 transmission cannot be performed until these parameters
are downloaded by RS-232C or Ethernet because they must be written in S
controller memory.
388
6F8C1290
7.1
Connecting with the Controller
Connecting with Ethernet (For nv series and V series)
[OIS1200 system]
Tool
192.0.0.62
OIS1200
OIS1200
192.0.0.1
192.0.0.2
Ethernet
S L
EN CN
192.0.0.10
S L
EN
192.0.0.11
S L
EN
192.0.0.12
Set the IP address including the tool to '192.0.0.X' where X = 1 to 62.
Set the subnet mask to '255.255.255.192'.
Set the IP address of EN as follows with the tool:
1) n the [Product Tree], connect the EN module.
2) n the [Product Tree], select <Module parameters> from the <File> menu
and set the EN module parameters as follows:
Only the primary settings are necessary when using EN board as single.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
389
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
3) Create a new Ethernet LAN in [Networks] of the [Product Tree] and connect
an EN module.
4) Select the Ethernet LAN created in step 3) and select <Set as tool
communication> from the <File> menu.
5) Also select <Com. Para. Settings> from the [Tool] menu of the [Product
Tree] and set as follows.
Set the IP address of the tool PC for <Local Station settings>.
Specify <Single> if the transmission path is single. Specify <Dual> if dual.
When starting the tool on the same PC as OIS1200, do not specify <Single
(free mode)>.
390
6F8C1290
7.1
Connecting with the Controller
For the X in the IP address of EN, set the upper (H) and lower (L) numbers of
decimal X converted to hexadecimal with the EN board rotary switch. Refer to
the EN board hardware manual for more information.
Set the IP address of the PC with the Windows standard function as follows:
Please refer to "3.1.1 Step1 Set up Windows platform" of the chapter of the
setup for the setting method.
[Other Ethernet systems]
If OIS1200 is not present on the Ethernet LAN, the following two <IP address
types> can be used.
Set the [IP address type] column to either one with the EN module
parameter.
Note
• When class is changed, V-tool must be restarted.
Class B type (V series standard)
Set the IP address including the tool to '172.16.64.X' where X=1 to 126.
Set the subnet mask to '255.255.192.0'.
For the X in the IP address of EN, set the upper (H) and lower (L) numbers of
decimal X converted to hexadecimal with the EN board rotary switch. Refer to
the EN board hardware manual for more information.
Any
From the tool, set any IP address (class B or class C) to EN.
If class B, set the subnet mask to '255.255.192.0'.
Set the IP address including the tool to '172.16.64.X' to '172.31.64.X' where
X=1 to 126.
If class C, set the subnet mask to '255.255.255.192'.
Set the IP address including the tool to '192.168.0.X' to '192.168.255.X' where
X=65 to 126.
Refer to the EN board hardware manual for more information.
When the EN module is free mode and the transmission path is single, any IP
address other than above may also be specified. In this case, specify <Single
(free mode)> for [Com. Para. Settings].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
391
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
[Tc-net10 system]
Tool
172.16.64.1
172.16.64.2
172.16.64.4
Ethernet
172.16.64.3
S L
EN CN
S L
EN
Tc-net
172.16.64.5
S L
EN CN
S L
172.16.64.6
EN CN
S L
172.16.64.7
EN CN
A controller on the Tc-net10 can be accessed transparently from the tool PC on
the Ethernet.
Therefore, set the IP address including the tool to '172.16.64.X' where X=1 to
64.
Set the subnet mask to '255.255.192.0'.
Set the IP address of EN and CN with EN, CN module parameters of [Product
Tree].
For the X in the IP address of EN, set the upper (H) and lower (L) numbers of
decimal X converted to hexadecimal with the EN board rotary switch. Refer to
the EN board hardware manual for more information.
For the X in the IP address of CN, set the upper (H) and lower (L) numbers of
decimal X with the CN board rotary switch. Refer to the CN board hardware
manual for more information.
Set the IP address of the PC with the Windows standard function.
392
6F8C1290
7.2
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
Batch Downloading to Controller
This section describes how to batch download [Configuration], [Program],
[Global variables] to a controller.
7.2.1 Batch downloading to controller of nv series
This section describes how to batch download [Configuration], [Program],
[Global variables] to a controller.
Over view of downloading
Batch downloading and division downloading without tool-source.
1) Halting the controller
2) Batch download to controller without tool-source
3) Changing the controller to RUN mode
Halting the controller
The controller must be halted in order to perform batch download.
When a controller is in process operation or adjustment phase, all control
operations of the controller is stopped when the controller is halted. Whether
the controller can be halted must be determined from the operational viewpoint.
Obtain permission from the operation manager or adjustment manager who is
authorized by the operation manager.
The controller can be halted locally with switches on the front panel or remotely
with the tool.
The procedure to locally halt the controller depends on the controller model.
Refer to your hardware manual for more information.
There are two ways to remotely halt the controller.
1) Switch the operation mode to HALT in [Set RUN mode] of the [System
View].
2) Switch the operation mode to HALT in the middle of the batch download
procedure.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
393
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Batch download to controller without tool-source
1) Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <Download>
from the <File> menu.
2) Click the [Next] button and select the download unit.
• Batch download: Clears the controller memory and downloads the entire
[Configuration], [Program], and [Global variables].
• Split download: Downloads the specified [Configuration], [Program], and
[Global variables] without clearing memory.
Select the option only for duplex.
• Duplex download: Halts the controllers, which are the primary and the
secondary side, and downloads to the primary side.
• Independent download: Halts the controller, which is the primary or the
secondary side, and downloads to the selected side.
394
6F8C1290
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
Note
• The function <Duplex download> needs equalizing of controller. After downloading, run
the controller as the duplex system to equalize the data automatically. Please run the
primary side first.
3) Click the [Next] button and check the download destination controller.
At this point, if split download is specified in step 2), check the necessary
items in the download target confirmation dialog.
4) Click the [Next] button to open the download confirmation dialog box and
execute as necessary. Downloading to the controller starts when [Yes] is
selected. If [No] is selected, downloading is canceled.
5) Downloading starts and [Configuration], [Program], and [Global variables]
are transferred successively to the controller. The following dialog box
appears when downloading completes.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
395
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Supplementary
• The controller operation mode remains at DL-WAIT when batch download completes.
The only mode that can be entered from DL-WAIT is RUN. The procedure to change
the operation mode to RUN is described below.
Changing the controller to RUN mode
When the controller is changed to RUN mode, the controller will perform all
control operations.
When the controller is changed to RUN mode, depending on the process
operation and adjustment status, actual I/O takes place and process
equipment operates. Therefore, obtain permission from the process operation
and adjustment manager when changing the controller to RUN mode.
The controller can be changed to RUN mode either locally or remotely as in the
case of halting.
The procedure to locally halt the controller depends on the controller model.
Refer to your hardware manual for more information.
The two procedures to remotely change to RUN mode is as follows:
[System view]
1) When batch download described above completes, click the [System View]
button.
Supplementary
• System view can also be started as follows:
Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <System View> from the
<File> menu.
396
6F8C1290
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
2) Select [Open] in the monitor control of the [System View] and refresh the
data.
3) Check the operating status of the corresponding controller and other
controllers.
4) Use the [↑] and [↓] key to move the focus to the appropriate controller.
5) Execute <Set RUN mode> from the <Tool> menu.
6) Click the [RUN] button.
7) Select [Yes] to switch the operation mode to RUN. Select [No] to cancel.
[Run controllers]
1) When batch download described above completes, click the [Run
controllers] button.
Supplementary
• This function is not available for the dual station. In this case, please use [System
View].
2) According to the dialogs, run controllers.
How to use the buttons on the dialog windows are as follows:
'Yes': Back up the downloaded data or run controllers.
'No': Skip to back up the downloaded data or run controllers.
'Cancel': Stop to back up the downloaded data and/or run controllers.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
397
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
7.2.2 Batch downloading to controller of V series
This section describes how to batch download [Configuration], [Program],
[Global variables] to a controller. Tool-source downloading for
reverse-generation and I/O connections online downloading are also
explained.
If there are more than one controller under a station, take note of the following
when batch downloading because the controller may crash.
If the [Collaboration Control] parameter is changed, batch download to all
controllers within the same station.
Note
• Tool-source downloading and reverse-generation is supported in following controller
types and versions.
Reverse-generation
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
S3
(*1)
(*2)
(*3)
(*4)
STC
S2
−
(*1):
(*2):
(*3):
(*4):
(*5):
Basic
Basic
Basic
Basic
Basic
software
software
software
software
software
R3
FN
−
−
(*5)
Version 3.10 or more. (L3PU21: V3.11 or more)
Version 3.10 or more.
Version 2.30 or more.
Version 02.61 or more. (in BU74A excepted)
Version 02.60 or more. (S2PU82: V02.00 or more)
Over view of downloading
Batch downloading and division downloading without tool-source.
1) Halting the controller
2) Batch download to controller without tool-source
3) Changing the controller to RUN mode
Batch downloading and division downloading with tool-source.
1) Halting the controller
2) Batch download to controller with tool-source
3) Changing the controller to RUN mode
Downloading only tool-source for reverse-generation.
1) Download to controller only tool-source
398
6F8C1290
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
I/O connections online downloading.
1) Download to controller added I/O connections.
Serial I/O online downloading.
1) Download to controller added or deleted serial I/O unit information.
Halting the controller
The controller must be halted in order to perform batch download.
When a controller is in process operation or adjustment phase, all control
operations of the controller is stopped when the controller is halted. Whether
the controller can be halted must be determined from the operational viewpoint.
Obtain permission from the operation manager or adjustment manager who is
authorized by the operation manager.
The controller can be halted locally with switches on the front panel or remotely
with the tool.
The procedure to locally halt the controller depends on the controller model.
Refer to your hardware manual for more information.
There are two ways to remotely halt the controller.
1) Switch the operation mode to HALT in [Set RUN mode] of the [System
View].
2) Switch the operation mode to HALT in the middle of the batch download
procedure.
Batch download to controller without tool-source
1) Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <Download>
from the <File> menu.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
399
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
2) Click the [Next] button and select the download unit.
• Batch download: Clears the controller memory and downloads the entire
[Configuration], [Program], and [Global variables].
• Split download: Downloads the specified [Configuration], [Program], and
[Global variables] without clearing memory.
Select the option only for duplex.
• Duplex download: Halts the controllers, which are the primary and the
secondary side, and downloads to the primary side.
• Independent download: Halts the controller, which is the primary or the
secondary side, and downloads to the selected side.
Note
• The function <Duplex download> needs equalizing of controller. After downloading, run
the controller as the duplex system to equalize the data automatically. Please run the
primary side first.
3) Click the [Next] button and check the download destination controller.
400
6F8C1290
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
At this point, if split download is specified in step 2), check the necessary
items in the download target confirmation dialog.
4) Click the [Next] button to open the download confirmation dialog box and
execute as necessary. Downloading to the controller starts when [Yes] is
selected. If [No] is selected, downloading is canceled.
Supplementary
• In case of MELPLAC I/O, the Verify dialog is started automatically. See '2.4 Registering
Module Parameters'.
5) Downloading starts and [Configuration], [Program], and [Global variables]
are transferred successively to the controller. The following dialog box
appears when downloading completes.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
401
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Supplementary
• The controller operation mode remains at DL-WAIT when batch download completes.
The only mode that can be entered from DL-WAIT is RUN. The procedure to change
the operation mode to RUN is described below.
• When connecting by RS232C and performing batch download, do not pull out the
RS232C cable.
Changing the controller to RUN mode
When the controller is changed to RUN mode, the controller will perform all
control operations.
When the controller is changed to RUN mode, depending on the process
operation and adjustment status, actual I/O takes place and process
equipment operates. Therefore, obtain permission from the process operation
and adjustment manager when changing the controller to RUN mode.
The controller can be changed to RUN mode either locally or remotely as in the
case of halting.
The procedure to locally halt the controller depends on the controller model.
Refer to your hardware manual for more information.
The two procedures to remotely change to RUN mode is as follows:
[System view]
1) When batch download described above completes, click the [System View]
button.
Supplementary
System view can also be started as follows:
• Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <System View> from the
<File> menu.
2) Select [Open] in the monitor control of the [System View] and refresh the
data.
3) Check the operating status of the corresponding controller and other
controllers.
4) Use the [↑] and [↓] key to move the focus to the appropriate controller.
5) Execute <Set RUN mode> from the <Tool> menu.
6) Click the [RUN] button.
7) Select [Yes] to switch the operation mode to RUN. Select [No] to cancel.
402
6F8C1290
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
[Run controllers]
1) When batch download described above completes, click the [Run
controllers] button.
Supplementary
• This function is not available for the dual station. In this case, please use [System
View].
2) According to the dialogs, back up the downloaded data and run
controllers.
Supplementary
• Supporting the function 'Back up the downloaded data' depends on the controller
model.
How to use the buttons on the dialog windows are as follows:
'Yes':
Back up the downloaded data or run controllers.
'No':
Skip to back up the downloaded data or run controllers.
'Cancel': Stop to back up the downloaded data and/or run controllers.
Supplementary
• The function [Run controllers] is supported in following controller types and versions.
Run controllers
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
(*2)
(*2)
(*1)
S3
STC
S2
R3
FN
(*2)
(*1): Basic software Version 2.51 or more.
(*2): The function 'Back up the downloaded data' is not available.
Batch download to controller with tool-source
Uploading is the restoration of tool registration. It is called “Reverse
generation”.
Before uploading, the source information “Tool-source” should be
downloaded.
This section describes how to download to a controller with tool-source.
1) Make tool-source
Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <Download>
from the <File> menu. Select button <Make tool-source>.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
403
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Select a controller to allocate tool-source. Tool-source allocation unit is as
follows:
Network configuration, Network variables, User definition type.
System units
Hardware configuration. Station variables.
Station units
Controller variables, Program.
Controller units
Supplementary
• When you want to delete tool-source, please check off.
Checked:
Select a controller to allocate tool-source.
Non-checked:
Delete allocated tool-source.
[Default allocation]: Checked to the controller which located on the lowest
number slot.
[Include comment]: Making tool-source with comment.
[Include Program Monitor Information]:
Making tool-source with the monitoring information.
If this option is not checked, after uploading please
execute batch-compling to re-make the monitoring
information.
[Make]:
404
6F8C1290
Start to make the tool-source. If you want to break
making, please select [Cancel]
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
Tool-source is stored as POU in the controller. Please check available
memory size using ‘Resource Report’.
Supplementary
• Creation of Tool-source consumes seven POU entries from the end of POU No.
• When tool-source is made, the controller memory size is needed about 2 or 3 times
than the case in which the ‘Reverse generation‘ is not used.
Please check available memory size using ‘Resource Report’. See ‘8.8 Determining
Free Program Space‘.
• If the option [Include Program Monitor Information] and [Include comment] are checked
off, the controller memory using size can reduced.
If this option [Include Program Monitor Information] is not checked, after uploading
please execute batch-compiling to re-make the monitoring information.
2) Click the [Next] button and check the download destination controller, and
check ‘Download tool source’.
When ‘Division download’ is selected, Tool-source is download to each
products.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
405
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Configurations
Network configuration, Hardware configuration.
Global variables
Network variables, Station variables, Controller variables.
Programs
User definition type, Program.
Supplementary
• When the option ‘downloaded tool source’ is selected, please check downloaded
tool-source using [Check tool-source] of uploading window, because “Reverse
generation” is not supported in the some controller’s types and versions. See ‘10.2
Batch Uploading from Controller ‘ to know how to use [Check tool-source] function.
Download to controller only tool-source
1) Select ‘Tool source download’ in Download window, click the [Next] button.
2) Click the [Next] button and check the download destination controller, start
downloading.
406
6F8C1290
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
Supplementary
• When downloading is finished, please check downloaded tool-source using [Check
tool-source] of uploading window, because “Reverse generation” is not supported in the
some controller’s types and versions. See ‘7.4 Batch Uploading from Controller ‘ to
know how to use [Check tool-source] function.
Download to controller added I/O connections
I/O connections of network and station variables can be online-downloaded.
The controller doesn’t need to be halted, and batch I/O processing can not be
executed after adding variables.
This section describes how to download to a controller that is added I/O
connections.
Supplementary
• I/O connections online downloading is supported in following controller types and
versions.
I/O connections
online downloading
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
−
−
−
S3
STC
S2
(*1)
(*2)
(*3)
R3
FN
−
−
(*1): Basic software Version 02.7C or more.
(*2): Basic software Version 02.56 or more.
(*3): Basic software Version 02.00 or more. (S2PU82 Only)
• In following case, online-downloading is available:
Configurations were downloaded to controller from tool that supported this function.
Configurations are not changed from other tools.
I/O connections of each types are already registered, this is not first time to
downloading.
Only added I/O connections of network or station variables. Not changed or not deleted
one.
'Changing I/O Connection Area' function is not used.
New I/O modules that use I/O connections are not registered.
If these conditions are not satisfied, please use batch or division downloading function.
1) Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <Download>
from the <File> menu.
Select ‘I/O connection online download’ in Download window, and click the
[Next] button.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
407
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
2) Check the download destination controller.
3) Select [Detail] button, downloaded I/O connections are displayed.
4) Click the [Next] button, then start downloading.
408
6F8C1290
7.2
Batch Downloading to Controller
Download to controller added or deleted serial I/O unit
information
Serial I/O unit information can be online-downloaded.
The controller doesn’t need to be halted, and I/O processing can not be
executed after adding and downloading unit.
This section describes how to download to a controller added or deleted I/O
unit.
Supplementary
• Serial I/O online downloading is supported in following controller types.
Serial I/O online
downloading
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
S3
STC
S2
R3
FN
−
−
−
−
−
• In following case, online-downloading is available.
In registration data of tool, main unit configurations and controller parameters are not
changed.
In downloaded data of controller, main unit configurations and controller parameters
are not changed from other tools.
If these conditions are not satisfied, please use batch or division downloading function.
1) Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <Download>
from the <File> menu.
Select ‘Serial I/O online download’ in Download window, and click the
[Next] button.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
409
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
2) Click the [Next] button, and select the download destination I/O unit.
To clear unit information, select non-registered Unit No..
3) Click the [Next] button, operate with guidance to start downloading.
410
6F8C1290
7.3
7.3
Downloading Task Individually
Downloading Task Individually
When batch downloading is performed to a controller, [Configuration],
[Program], and [Global variables] are all transferred to the controller. Then
when the control program is changed, it is possible to download that task
individually. This task is actually a project unit assigned to a task entry. This
individual downloading can be performed regardless of whether the controller
operation mode is RUN or HALT. Individual downloading is performed from the
[Program Editor].
Individual download procedure
Start the [Program Editor] from [Task Entries].
View, edit, or save the program as necessary according to the procedure
described in [Creating Control Programs]. Here, the download procedure is
described assuming the desired task is already saved.
1) Select <Write to the Controller> from the <File> menu.
The download file list contains all of the downloaded candidates among the
files linked to the relevant project. And those that are different from the files in
the controller, in other words, those that should be downloaded are checked.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
411
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
The fist option is [Don’t download downloaded files] checked by default. This
minimizes the download time.
The second option is [Keep local variables and run] or [Initialize local variables
and run]. If you delete some local variables of downloading program or
change the order, this option may be fixed by [Initialize local variables and run].
If you do not, this option is selectable and selected by stored value you
selected previously.
[Initialize local variables and run] means that after downloading the task is
executed after zero clearing all of the local variables in the project.
[Keep local variables and run] means that after downloading the controller
copies the values of the existing local variable area to the local variable area of
the newly downloaded project in scan synchronization and executes
continuously.
Supplementary
• When the step of SFC was added in your program, [Keep local variables and run]
option cannot be selected.
2) Click [Start] button.
3) Click [OK] if you agree with the above. Click [Cancel] to cancel individual
download.
412
6F8C1290
7.4
7.4
Batch Uploading from Controller
Batch Uploading from Controller
This section describes how to batch upload [Configuration], [Program], and
[Global variables] from a controller.
Uploading is the restoration of tool registration. It is called “Reverse
generation”.
Before uploading, the source information “Tool-source” should be downloaded.
(See “7.2 Batch Downloading to Controller”.)
Supplementary
• Batch uploading over-write the user registration of this tool. Please back up the user
system registration. (See “11.1 Importing/Exporting User System”.)
Preparation
The registrations for “Reverse generation” are as follows:
• RS-232C connection: The registration of Station.
• Ethernet connection: The registrations of Station, Main-unit, Trans.-module
with IP-Address.
• RS-485 connection: The registrations of Station, Main-unit, S-module with
RS485 station no.
• When the uploading of [Global variables] which “Reverse generation” is
not executed.
• The main-unit configuration information of this tool is already downloaded
to the controller.
Supplementary
• Please check the controller’s types and versions which supported “Reverse
generation”. (See “7.2 Batch Downloading to Controller”.)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
413
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Batch uploading from controller
1) Click the relevant station in the [Product Tree] and select <Upload> from
the <File> menu.
2) Click the [Next] button and select the upload unit.
Batch upload uploads all [Configuration], [Program], and [Global
variables].
Split upload uploads the specified [Configuration], [Program], and [Global
variables].
3) Click the [Next] button and check the upload destination controller.
“Uploading tool-source, and make reverse-generation” is checked:
[Configuration], [Program], and [Global variables] are uploaded from a
controller.
[Check Tool-source] button: Tool-source list is displayed.
414
6F8C1290
7.4
Batch Uploading from Controller
“Uploading tool-source, and make reverse-generation” is not checked:
Only [Global variables] are uploaded from a controller.
Click the [Next] button.
At this point, if split upload is specified in step 2), check the necessary
items in the upload target confirmation dialog.
<Target tool-source of split-uploading>
[Configuration]
Network configuration, Hardware configuration.
[Global variables]
Network variables, Station variables, Controller variables.
[Program]
User definition type, Program.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
415
Chapter 7
Downloading / Uploading
Supplementary
• If tool-source is distributed to more than one controller, the order of uploading is as
follows:
(1) Network configuration, (2) Hardware configuration, (3) User definition type,
(4) Network/Station/Controller variables (In random order).
4) Click the [Next] button to open the upload confirmation dialog box and
execute as necessary. Uploading to the controller starts when [Yes] is
selected. If [No] is selected, uploading is canceled.
5) Uploading starts and [Configuration], [Program], and [Global variables] are
transferred successively to the engineering tool. The following dialog box
appears when uploading completes.
Note
• When connecting by RS232C and performing batch upload, do not pull out the RS232C
cable.
• When ‘Reverse genaration‘ is used, the following message may be shown after
uploading. If this message is shown, please execute batch-compling to re-make the
monitoring information.
416
6F8C1290
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control
Program
This chapter describes the procedure to monitor a control program with the
Program Editor.
8.1
Semi Graphic ····················································· 419
8.1.1 Monitoring a program ······························· 419
8.1.2 Monitoring inside a function ····················· 420
8.1.3 Monitoring inside a function block ············ 421
8.1.4 Exerting force online ································ 422
8.1.5 Swapping online······································· 425
8.1.6 Sequence tag operation ··························· 427
8.2
Structured Text ·················································· 432
8.2.1 Monitoring a program ······························· 432
8.2.2 Monitoring the inside of a function ··········· 433
8.2.3 Monitoring the inside of
a function block ········································ 433
8.3
Full Graphic ······················································· 434
8.3.1 Monitoring a program ······························· 434
8.3.2 Monitoring the inside of a function ··········· 435
8.3.3 Monitoring inside a function block ············ 436
8.3.4 Force online ············································· 437
8.3.5 Swapping online······································· 440
8.3.6 Sequence tag operation ··························· 442
8.4
Monitoring Data Together with Program ········· 447
8.5
Monitoring Any Data ········································· 448
417
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
8.6
Monitoring Multiple Tasks Concurrently ········· 449
8.7
Externally Starting the Program Monitor········· 451
8.8
Determining Free Program Space···················· 454
8.9
Comparing Programs and Data Files··············· 457
8.10 Tracing Data······················································· 462
8.11 Exerting Force on I/O Input Points ·················· 469
418
6F8C1290
8.1
8.1
Semi Graphic
Semi Graphic
This section describes how to monitor a LD (ladder diagram), FBD (function
block diagram), or SFC (sequential function chart) with the Program Editor
(Semi graphic).
• Monitoring a program
• Monitoring inside a function
• Monitoring inside a function block
• Exerting force online
• Swapping online
• Sequence tag operation
8.1.1 Monitoring a program
This section describes how to monitor an LD (ladder diagram), FBD (function
block diagram), or SFC (sequential function chart).
Start monitoring
To start monitoring a program, place the cursor in the main view and click the
<Start> button or select <Start monitor> from the <Monitor> menu.
While monitoring, [Monitor] flashes at the top of the window.
Stop monitoring
To stop monitoring a program, click the <Stop> button or select <Stop
monitor> from the <Monitor> menu.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
419
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
8.1.2 Monitoring inside a function
This section describes how to monitor inside a user created function.
Open specifying calling source
When program monitoring is started, place the cursor at the beginning of the
function to monitor and select <Open inside function or function block> from
the right click menu.
The inside of the specified function opens and monitoring starts.
420
6F8C1290
8.1
Semi Graphic
8.1.3 Monitoring inside a function block
This section describes how to monitor inside a user created function block.
Open specifying calling source
When program monitoring is started, place the cursor at the beginning of the
function block to monitor and select <Open inside function or function block>
from the right click menu.
The inside of the specified function block opens and monitoring starts.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
421
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
8.1.4 Exerting force online
This section describes how to exert force (forced retention of output result) on
a coil while monitoring the program with the [Program Editor]. Force (forced
retention of setting) can also be exerted on contact with the same procedure.
Viewing [Force setup menu]
Click <Contact/coil force menu> from the <Monitor> menu.
Exerting force
1) The instruction symbol of the forced coil appears in [Force setup menu]
when the cursor is moved to the coil to exert force.
2) Press the function key No. of the forced coil instruction symbol. Then the
coil with the cursor is replaced with a forced coil and a border appears.
Releasing force
1) [Released] appears in the [Force setup menu] when the cursor is moved to
the coil to release force.
2) Press the function key No of [Release]. Then the forced coil with the cursor
is replaced with a coil and a border appears.
3) To release all force within a file, use [Release all].
Write to controller and tool/save to tool only
Select the function key No of [Write] from the [Force setup menu] to write to
the controller and tool. The border disappears and monitoring is enabled with
the forced instruction.
To write to tool only offline, select [Save].
[Write] or [Save] at one time is possible for force or release of up to 80 steps.
422
6F8C1290
8.1
Semi Graphic
Viewing of the force state within a controller.
1) Click <Contact/coil force list> from the <Monitor> menu.
Each force state of Semi graphic/Full graphic in a controller is displayed.
The message of the existence of the force containing semi graphic/Full
graphic is displayed on a screen.
Some devices are forced.
Forced device is not found.
Releasing all force within a controller
1) Click <Contact/coil force list> from the <Monitor> menu.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
423
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
2) Click the [All Release] button. Then the [Release force] window appears.
3) Click [OK].
Note
• When you cancel a force, please set operation mode of Controller to HALT.
Releasing force within a controller
1) Click <Contact/coil force list> from the <Monitor> menu.
2) Item to release is clicked with a mouse.
* is displayed.
3) Click the [Release] button. Then the [Release force] window appears.
4) Click [OK].
Note
• When you cancel a force, please set operation mode of Controller to HALT.
Closing the [Force setup menu]
Close the [Force setup menu] with one of the following methods:
1) Select [Cancel] in the [Force setup menu].
2) Click <Contact/coil force menu> from the <Tool> menu.
3) Click <Instruction swap menu> from the <Tool> menu.
424
6F8C1290
8.1
Semi Graphic
8.1.5 Swapping online
This section describes how to swap (force exchange) instruction and
immediate value while monitoring the program with the [Program Editor].
Viewing [Instruction swap menu]
Click <Instruction Swap Menu> from the <Tool> menu. This is possible only
when monitoring.
Swapping instructions
1) Move the cursor to the instruction to swap. Then the swappable instruction
symbol appears in the [Instruction Swap Menu].
2) Press the function key No. of the instruction symbol to swap. Then the
instruction with the cursor is replaced with the selected instruction and a
border appears.
Specify a instruction in the same group for instruction to swap.
Group
Instruction that can be swapped
Contact
−| |−, −|/|−
Coil
−( )−, −(S)−, −(R)−, −(/)−
Gate
GATE, GATEN
Swapping immediate values and variables
1) When the cursor is moved to a load instruction, the currently set immediate
value or variable appears in the [Instruction Swap Menu].
2) Press the [Shift] key and [F1] key together to make the immediate value or
variable editable.
3) Edit the immediate value or variable and press the [Enter] key. Then the
value of the load instruction at the cursor is changed and a border appears.
Swapping to a different data type is not allowed.
Swapping from immediate value to variable or vice versa is not allowed.
Immediate values and variables can be swapped at the following
instructions.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
425
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Group
Instruction word
Immediate value swap
Variable swap
Contact
−| |−, −|/|−
−
Allowed
Coil
−( )−, −(S)− , −(R)-, −(/)−
−
Allowed
Gate
GATE, GATEN
−
Allowed
Load
LD
Store/set
ST, SET
Allowed
Allowed
−
Allowed
Writing to controller and tool
Press the function key No. of [Write] in the [Instruction Swap Menu]. The
border disappears and monitoring is enabled with the swapped instruction.
Closing the [Instruction Swap Menu]
Close the [Instruction Swap Menu] with one of the following methods:
1) Select [Cancel] in the [Instruction Swap Menu].
2) Click <Contact/coil Force menu> from the <Tool> menu.
3) Click <Instruction Swap Menu> from the <Tool> menu.
4) Exit the monitor.
426
6F8C1290
8.1
Semi Graphic
8.1.6 Sequence tag operation
This section describes how to operate the execution of SFC program related
with the Sequence Tag.
Prerequisites
1) The Sequence instruction must be connected to the SFC circuit and it must
be related with the Sequence Tag. (See Online manual: Instruction, 26.SFC
Instructions)
2) Available controllers are L2PU22, L3PU21 or PU821.
Sequence instruction
Restrictions
Do not assign one Sequence Tag to two or more Sequence instructions.
Displaying the operation panel
You can operate the execution of SFC program using the Operation Panel.
Open the program including Sequence instruction.
Starting monitor, the Operation Panel will be displayed automatically.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
427
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Click button [X] of the Operation Panel to close it.
Name and role of each part
Sequence Mode
Step
Operation Button
1) Sequence mode
Displays the current sequence mode.
(M:Stop, RM:Stop, A:Progress with confirmation, C:Continuous progress)
428
6F8C1290
8.1
Semi Graphic
2) Step
Displays selectable steps as restart step.
3) Operation button
Execute each operation. Place the mouse pointer on the button to view its
button name.
: Return to Top
: Progress with Confirm
: Stop
: Execute
: Single Step
: Change Restart Step
4) Message
Displays the error message at the time of operation.
Return to top
Click button [Return to Top] to activate the Initial Step in operation level.
It is effective when sequence mode is stop (M or RM).
Progress with confirm
When sequence mode is status of Progress with confirmation, [Progress with
Confirm] is displayed in yellow blink.
Click button [Progress with Confirm] to resume execution.
Stop
Click button [Stop] to change the sequence mode into M or RM.
Sequence mode is changed into M when sequence mode is not M. [Stop] is
displayed in red.
Sequence mode is changed into RM when sequence mode is M. [Stop] is
displayed in red blink.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
429
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Execute
Click button [Execute] to change the sequence mode into A or C.
Sequence mode is changed into A when sequence mode is not A. [Execute] is
displayed in green.
Sequence mode is changed into C when sequence mode is A. [Execute] is
displayed in green blink.
Single step
Click button [Single Step] to execute a step only one scan.
It is effective when sequence mode is stop (M or RM).
Change restart step
Select the target step and Click button [Change Restart Step] to change the
restart step.
In order to select target step, there is the following method.
1) Click the step instruction in program. The selected step is displayed on the
step column.
2) Select target step from list of step column.
It is effective when sequence mode is stop (M or RM).
Displaying step status
When the program including Sequence instruction is monitored, the following
sign showing the state of step is displayed.
Sign
430
6F8C1290
State of Step
>
Active Step
||
Status of Progress with Confirmation
!
Congestion alarm or Answer Back alarm
8.1
Semi Graphic
1) Active step
2) Status of progress with confirmation
3) Congestion alarm or answer back alarm
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
431
Chapter 8
8.2
Monitoring Control Program
Structured Text
Explains how to monitor a Program, Function and Function Block using
Program Editor (Text).
Supplementary
• This function is not supported in Engineering tool 2.
• Monitoring a program
• Monitoring the inside of a function
• Monitoring the inside of a function block
8.2.1 Monitoring a program
Explains how to monitor a program written by ST.
Start monitoring
Click space of Editor View.
Click [Start] button to start monitoring if the controller (or simulator) is
connected with V-Tool3.
While monitoring, [Monitor] indicator flashes at the top of the window.
And also monitor data of each line is refreshed in the left of Editor View.
Stop monitoring
Click [Stop] button.
432
6F8C1290
8.2
Structured Text
8.2.2 Monitoring the inside of a function
Explains how to monitor the inside of a User Function.
Monitoring the inside of a function
Open a Program calls User Functions and click [Start] Button to start
monitoring.
Select a user’s function name written in your program shown as follows.
Right-click and select <Open inside function or function block> menu to open
another view which monitors the inside of the Function you need.
8.2.3 Monitoring the inside of a function block
Explains how to monitor the inside of a User Function Block.
Monitoring the inside of a function block
Open a Program calls User Function Blocks and click [Start] Button to start
monitoring.
Select a user’s function block variable name written in your program shown as
follows.
Right-click and select <Open inside function or function block> menu to open
another view which monitors the inside of the Function Block you need.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
433
Chapter 8
8.3
Monitoring Control Program
Full Graphic
Explains how to monitor a Program, Function and Function Block using
Program Editor (Full Graphic).
Supplementary
• This function is not supported in Engineering tool 2.
• Monitoring a program
• Monitoring the inside of a function
• Monitoring the inside a function block
• Forcing online
• Swapping online
• Sequence tag operation
8.3.1 Monitoring a program
Explains how to monitor a Program drawn by Program Editor (Full Grapic).
Start monitoring
Click space of Editor View.
Click [Start] button to start monitoring if the controller (or simulator) is
connected with V-Tool3.
While monitoring, [Monitor] indicator flashes at the top of the window.
And also monitor data of each device is refreshed.
434
6F8C1290
8.3
Full Graphic
Stop monitoring
Click [Stop] button.
Note
• If the width of symbol is narrow, the monitor value and the device comment may
overlap. In this case please stretch the symbol.
8.3.2 Monitoring the inside of a function
Explains how to monitor the inside of a User Function.
Monitoring the inside of a function
Open a Program calls User Functions and click [Start] Button to start
monitoring.
Click a user’s function symbol called in your program shown as follows.
Right-click and select <Internal Function> menu to open another view which
monitors the inside of the Function you need.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
435
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
8.3.3 Monitoring inside a function block
Explains how to monitor the inside of a User Function Block.
Monitoring the inside of a function block
Open a Program calls User Functions and click [Start] Button to start
monitoring.
Click a user’s function symbol called in your program shown as follows.
Right-click and select <Internal Function> menu to open another view which
monitors the inside of the Function Block you need.
436
6F8C1290
8.3
Full Graphic
8.3.4 Forcing online
Explains how to force coil or contact using Program Editor (Full Graphic).
Opening [Contact/Coil Force] form
Click <Tool><Contact/coil force> menu.
Exerting force
Click a coil you want to force to select the coil and let [Forced Coil] icon be
enabled.
Click [Forced Coil] icon to force the coil and a red frame will appear on the
coil.
Releasing force
Click an existing forced coil to let [Release] button be enabled.
Click [Release] button to release the force and a red frame will appear on the
coil.
If you want to release all of the forced coils of the worksheet, click [Release All]
button.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
437
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Writing/Saving forced or released status
Note that this red frame means ‘on the way to force or release’, not yet forced
or released in Controller.
Click [Write] button to write the forced or released status into Controller and
red frames will disappear.
If you want to save the forced or released status to V-Tool, click [Save] button.
A batch of coils and contacts, up to 80, can be forced or released at once.
Opening force list of controller
Click <Tool><Contact/Coil Force List> menu to open the following form.
Click <Semi Graphic> tab to open the force list of semi graphic programs.
Click <Full Graphic> tab to open the force list of full graphic programs.
Following message will be displayed in big characters.
‘Some devices are forced.’ or ‘Forced device is not found.’ displays in each
form.
438
6F8C1290
8.3
Full Graphic
Releasing all of the forced devices
The force of the device displayed in the tab that has been selected is released
by the batch.
1) Click the [All Release] button to open [Release force] form.
2) Click [OK] to release all.
Note
• Before releasing forced devices, you need to make the Controller HALT status.
Releasing selected devices in a controller
1) Click left columns you want to release to display <*> marks.
2) Click [Release] button to open [Release force] form.
3) Click [OK] to release the selected devices.
Note
• Before releasing forced devices, you need to make the Controller HALT status.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
439
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Closing [Contact/coil force] form
You can take one of the following ways to close [Contact/Coil Force].
1) Select [Cancel] button in [Contact/Coil Force] form.
2) Click <Tool><Contact/coil Force>.
3) Click <Tool><Instruction Swap>.
8.3.5 Swapping online
Explains how to swap Instructions ,constant values or variables in a program
while monitoring using Program Editor (Full Graphic).
Opening [Instruction swap menu] form
While monitoring Click <Tool> <Instruction Swap> menu to open [Instruction
Swap] form.
Swapping instructions
Click an instruction symbol to display the swappable instruction symbols.
Click one of the swappable instruction symbols to replace the instruction
symbol and a red frame will appear.
Swappable instruction symbols are shown as follows.
Group
Instruction that can be swapped
Contact
−| |−, −|/|−
Coil
−(
Gate
GATE, GATEN
)−, −(S)−, −(R)−, −( / )−
Swapping constant values and variables
Click a constant or variable to display the constant or variable.
Edit and change the constant or variable and press [Enter] to replace the
selected constant or variable and a red frame will appear.
Note
• Cannot replace a constant or variable to one of the other data type.
• Cannot replace a constant with a variable and do a variable with a constant.
440
6F8C1290
8.3
Full Graphic
Constants and variables can be swapped in some instructions shown as
follows.
Group
Instruction symbol
Constant value swapping Variable swapping
Contact
−| |−, −|/|−
−
Allowed
Coil
−(
−
Allowed
Gate
GATE, GATEN
−
Allowed
Load
LD
Store
ST
−
Allowed
Set
SET
−
Allowed
Load/Store
−V1−
−
Allowed
)−, −(S)−, −(R)−, −( / )−
Allowed
Allowed
Writing and saved swapped status
Note that this red frame means ‘on the way to swap’, not yet swapped in
Controller.
Click [Write] to write the swapped status into controller and save to V-Tool and
the red frame will disappear.
Closing the [Instruction Swap]
You can take one of the following ways to close [Instruction Swap].
1) Click [Cancel] in the [Instruction Swap] form.
2) Click <Tool> <Instruction Swap> menu.
3) Click <Tool> <Contact/coil Force> menu.
4) Exit the monitor.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
441
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
8.3.6 Sequence tag operation
This section describes how to operate the execution of SFC program related
with the Sequence Tag.
Prerequisites
1) The Sequence instruction must be placed above the SFC circuit and it must
be related with the Sequence Tag. (See Online manual: Instruction, 26.SFC
Instructions)
2) Available controllers are L2PU22, L3PU21 or PU821.
Sequence instruction
Restrictions
Do not assign one Sequence Tag to two or more Sequence instructions.
Displaying the operation panel
You can operate the execution of SFC program using the Operation Panel.
Open the program including Sequence instruction.
Starting monitor, the Operation Panel will be displayed automatically.
442
6F8C1290
8.3
Full Graphic
Click button [X] of the Operation Panel to close it.
Name and role of each part
Sequence Mode
Step
Operation Button
1) Sequence mode
Displays the current sequence mode.
(M:Stop, RM:Stop, A:Progress with confirmation, C:Continuous progress)
2) Step
Displays selectable steps as restart step.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
443
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
3) Operation button
Execute each operation. Place the mouse pointer on the button to view its
button name.
: Return to Top
: Progress with Confirm
: Stop
: Execute
: Single Step
: Change Restart Step
4) Message
Displays the error message at the time of operation.
Return to top
Click button [Return to Top] to activate the Initial Step in operation level.
It is effective when sequence mode is stop (M or RM).
Progress with confirm
When sequence mode is status of Progress with confirmation, [Progress with
Confirm] is displayed in yellow blink.
Click button [Progress with Confirm] to resume execution.
Stop
Click button [Stop] to change the sequence mode into M or RM.
Sequence mode is changed into M when sequence mode is not M. [Stop] is
displayed in red.
Sequence mode is changed into RM when sequence mode is M. [Stop] is
displayed in red blink.
444
6F8C1290
8.3
Full Graphic
Execute
Click button [Execute] to change the sequence mode into A or C.
Sequence mode is changed into A when sequence mode is not A. [Execute] is
displayed in green.
Sequence mode is changed into C when sequence mode is A. [Execute] is
displayed in green blink.
Single step
Click button [Single Step] to execute a step only one scan.
It is effective when sequence mode is stop (M or RM).
Change restart step
Select the target step and Click button [Change Restart Step] to change the
restart step.
In order to select target step, there is the following method.
1) Click the step instruction in program. The selected step is displayed on the
step column.
2) Select target step from list of step column.
It is effective when sequence mode is stop (M or RM).
Displaying step status
When the program including Sequence instruction is monitored, the following
sign showing the state of step is displayed.
Sign
State of Step
||
Status of Progress with Confirmation
!
Congestion alarm or Answer Back alarm
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
445
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
1) Status of progress with confirmation
2) Congestion alarm or answer back alarm
446
6F8C1290
8.4
8.4
Monitoring Data Together with Program
Monitoring Data Together with Program
This section describes how to monitor the values of program variables and
global variables while monitoring a program.
Viewing data value monitor
With program monitoring started, select <Data Monitor> from the <Monitor>
menu to open the following dialog box.
Enter the variable name or direct notation variable in the Variable Name
column to start monitoring.
The display format of the data value can be changed in the Display Format
column.
The maximum number of the variables monitored at once is as follows.
nv series: 32 points
V series: 8 points
The displayed content can be saved when closing the Program Editor.
Writing variable value
Enter the new value in the data value field and click the [Write value] button.
Selecting monitoring target variable by drag and drop
Drag the monitor target variable to the data value monitor window to register
as monitor target.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
447
Chapter 8
8.5
Monitoring Control Program
Monitoring Any Data
This section describes how to monitor any data of local variable or global
variable.
The procedure to monitor any data of the L controller Tag variable is also
described.
For information on how to start and use the [Data View], refer to [Setting
Values in Data View].
For information on how to start and use the [Tag Editor], refer to [Setting
Values with Tag Editor].
Starting the tag editor
Select the target station from the [Product Tree] and select <Open> <Tag
editor> from the <File> menu to start the Tag Editor.
Select the desired [Parameter type].
Scroll [Record No.] or enter the desired Tag variable directly and display it.
Start monitoring
Select <Controller> or <Tool + Controller> from the <View> option.
Click [Start] on the tool bar to start monitoring.
Stop monitoring
Click [Stop] on the tool bar to stop monitoring.
448
6F8C1290
8.6
8.6
Monitoring Multiple Tasks Concurrently
Monitoring Multiple Tasks Concurrently
The Program Editor can be invoked more than once. Each Program Editor can
monitor a separate task to monitor more than one task at the same time.
Restrictions for concurrent monitoring
Monitoring the same controller
You cannot monitor two or more controllers at the same time from a single
PC.
Maximum number that can be monitored
A Program Editor can be invoked up to four times on a single PC with each
monitoring independently.
Depending on the amount of memory installed on the PC and the number of
concurrently invoked applications, the maximum number of monitor may be
less than 4.
Monitoring user list
Note
• This function is available for Ver.4.2.0, Ver.3.10.0, and Ver.2.14.0 or upper version.
This function is useful for the user, who wants to avoid the restrictions for
concurrent monitoring.
Automatically V-Tool shows the following window, when the users request to
start too many monitoring-program:
Note
• The users can not open this window manually.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
449
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
[Login User]: Users who use the program-monitoring function.
[PC]:
User’s PC name
[IP Address]: IP addresses of the PC
[Product]:
Program name which is monitoring.
The item [Product] can show the POU, Routine, and worksheet name. (Routine
and worksheet are only for Full-graphic type program editor.)
The button [Update]: For refreshing the data.
Note
• Do not remove LAN cable or shutdown PC, when displaying this window, not to become
the refreshing lately.
The button [Close]: For closing the window.
The following window shows user is monitoring program via RS-232C cable:
Note
• Please close window to refresh displaying ‘(RS-232C)’.
This ‘(RS-232C)’ is also displayed, when program editor is closed before stop
monitoring, and opened again.
450
6F8C1290
8.7
8.7
Externally Starting the Program Monitor
Externally Starting the Program Monitor
This section describes how to start the program monitor from user application
other than V-Tool.
With this method, you can click on a device displayed with HMI or SCADA
system process graphics and display the interlock sequence program related
to that device in online monitor status.
Prerequisite and method
1) The user application is assumed to reside on the same PC and platform as
V-Tool.
2) That PC must have sufficient resources (CPU, memory, disk space) to run
the user application and V-Tool concurrently.
3) V-Tool and user application are started using the Windows Shell because
they are configured independently.
Start with Process equipment I/O variable name
1) Start parameter
The following three parameters are specified when starting the Program
Editor with Process equipment I/O variable name.
Parameter
Meaning
Example
DeviceName
Process equipment I/O
variable name
ScopeData
Scope below system that is If
performing I/O with process [SysID]=System name= System1
equipment
[StnName]=Station name= Station1
[UnitNo]=Unit No.= 00
[ModulesNo]=Module No.= 01
then
When displaying with controller variable
ScopeData=[SysID]\[StnName]\[UnitNo]\[ModulesNo]
When displaying with station variable
ScopeData=[SysID]\[StnName]\[UnitNo]\[ModulesNo]
When displaying with network variable
ScopeData=[SysID]\[StnName]\[UnitNo]\[ModulesNo]
PrgPathName
Program Editor install path
M100_RUN, XV100_Open
PrgPathName=“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\vHMI”
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
451
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
2) Start command
The Shell command string to start the Program Editor is as follows using
the above start parameters:
Start command
{PrgPathName} /T /M {DeviceName} /C {ScopeData}
Start command example [Stand alone version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\vHMI” /T /M M100_RUN /C System1\Station1\00\00
Start command example [Client-server version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\vHMI” /T /M M100_RUN /C System1\Station1\00\00
Supplementary
• If you want to use space in PrgPathName, enclose the entire PrgPathName in double
quotation marks to avoid it being interpreted as DOS command delimiter (example
"Program Files").
Start command options
Options
Meaning
/T
Display Program Editor window on top. Optional.
/V or /M
Required options. Must be specified.
/V: Monitor is not started.
/M: Monitor is started.
/C
Specify DeviceName as output variable name to process equipment. Optional.
Use a single space as delimiter for parameters and options.
Start with tag no. of sequence tag
1) Start parameter
The following three parameters are specified when starting the Program
Editor with Tag No. of Sequence tag.
Parameter
452
Meaning
Example
Sequence TAG
Sequence TAG No.
[Sequence TAG] = SEQ_0100
System name
System name
[System name] = System1
PrgPathName
Program Editor install path PrgPathName = “C:\Program Files\VEngTool\VHMISEQ”
6F8C1290
8.7
Externally Starting the Program Monitor
2) Start command
The Shell command string to start the Program Editor is as follows using
the above start parameters:
Start command
{PrgPathName} [/T] {/M or /V} {Sequence TAG} {System name}
Start command example
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\VHMISEQ” /M SEQ_0100 System1
Supplementary
• If you want to use space in PrgPathName, enclose the entire PrgPathName in double
quotation marks to avoid it being interpreted as DOS command delimiter (example
"Program Files").
Start command options
Options
Meaning
/T
Display Program Editor window on top. Optional.
/V or /M
Required options. Must be specified.
/V: Monitor is not started.
/M: Monitor is started.
Use a single space as delimiter for parameters and options.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
453
Chapter 8
8.8
Monitoring Control Program
Determining Free Program Space
This section describes how to determine the space used by compile programs
and data files and to determine the actual free space in the controller.
Determining the space used by compiled programs and data
1) In the [Product Tree], select a station.
2) Select <Resource report> from the <File> menu to open the following
dialog box.
3) Select the target module from <Module name>.
• [Data]:
Indicates the amount of compiled data as number of words
converted to controller memory.
[Global]: Global area usage.
[Local]:
Local area usage.
[Unused]: Unused data area.
[Total]:
• [Code]:
454
6F8C1290
Total data area. Fixed according to controller type.
Indicates the amount of compiled program codes as number of
steps converted to controller memory.
8.8
[Code]:
Determining Free Program Space
Code area usage.
[Unused]: Unused code area.
[Total]:
Total code area. Fixed according to controller type.
This information can be used to determine the amount currently used by data
or program or amount still available to data or program. If data or program
exceeds the respective total, the [Unused] value becomes negative and the
warning "Unable to download" appears.
The S controller enables the boundary between the global area and local area
to be changed. Set the desired number of words for the global area in [Global
setting] and click the [Set] button. Obviously, the available local area will
decrease when the global area is increased because the total amount of
controller data area is fixed.
Viewing free controller program space
1) At the left bottom of the [Product Tree], select the controller module to view
the free space and select <Module parameter> from the <File> menu.
2) Select the [Data] tab to view the actual controller operating status.
The free program space appear as [Code memory all step size], [Code
memory remaining step], and [Code memory used step size].
The free controller variable space appear as [Data memory all word size],
[Data memory remaining word], and [Data memory used word size].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
455
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Defrag
When you repeatedly download and delete programs in the controller, you may
not be able to download programs smaller than the total remaining free space.
This is because programs are placed in various areas of the program memory
and a contiguous memory necessary to contain the download program cannot
be obtained.
In this case, you can perform a <Defrag> operation to reorganize the program
allocation. Refer to <System monitor and maintenance><Various
maintenance functions><Defrag> for more information.
456
6F8C1290
8.9
8.9
Comparing Programs and Data Files
Comparing Programs and Data Files
Programs and data files created with V-Tool are downloaded to the controller to
be executed, but in some cases, you need to compare various download files
in the tool with actual files downloaded to the controller to find discrepancies.
This section describes how to compare and interpret the comparison result.
Targets
The following items can be compared:
• Ver.2 tool data & Ver.2 tool data
• Ver.2 tool data & Controller data
• Ver.2 tool data & Ver.1 tool data
• Ver.3 tool data & Ver.3 tool data
• Ver.3 tool data & Controller data
Procedure
1) In the [Product Tree], select the station containing the data to compare and
then select <Compare> from the <File> menu.
2) When the [Compare products] dialog box appears, select the controller to
be the comparison source or destination from the pull down list.
3) Select the location of the comparison data with the radio button. Location
of files can be selected from [Tool data] or [Controller data]. However,
comparison cannot be performed between controllers.
4) Click the [Compare] button to start the comparison. Comparison may take
some time and can be stopped by clicking the [Cancel] button. Even when
comparison is canceled, the compare result up to that point can be viewed.
5) Click the [Close] button to end. If you want to change controller and repeat
comparison, you can click the [Back] button to return to the previous dialog
box and change the specification.
6) Click [Ver. 1 Compare] to compare with Ver. 1.
7) When the [Compare products] dialog box appears, select the comparison
source Ver. 2 controller from the pull down list.
8) Click the [File Select] button to select the Ver. 1 comparison target file.
9) Click the [Compare] button to start the comparison. Comparison may take
some time and can be stopped by clicking the [Cancel] button. Even when
comparison is canceled, the compare result up to that point can be viewed.
10) Click the [Close] button to end. If you want to change controller and repeat
comparison, you can click the [Back] button to return to the previous dialog
box and change the specification.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
457
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Viewing the result
The result shows the status of the compare destination file with respect to the
source file as follows.
Compare source
Compare destination
Result display
Detail display
No data
Data present
Add
−
−
Data present
No data
Delete
−
−
Data present
Same data present
Match
−
−
Data present
Different data present
Changed
Data unmatched
−
Data present
Changed
Although data is in
agreement, creation time
differs
UUID unmatched
(data matched)
−
Data present
Data may differ
UUID unmatched This result displays only
at the time of comparison
of tool data and
controller data.
Changed
UUID: Data creation information
The result display can be sorted by ID, file name, or result. Click on the title of
the respective column. The sorted result is reflected in the printout.
The result can be printed. Click the [Print] button.
458
6F8C1290
8.9
Comparing Programs and Data Files
File contents
The contents of the file are as follows:
Hardware setting
Data file name
Contents
Main unit configuration
Station configuration
Controller parameter
Controller parameter
PI/O card configuration
Parallel I/O card configuration
SI/O card configuration
Serial I/O card configuration
I/O connection table
I/O connection table
I/O connection control
I/O connection control, I/O interrupt information
S20 parameter
S20 parameter information
SI/O parameter
Serial I/O parameter information
SIF parameter
SIF parameter information
Tracking table
Redundant tracking information
FL-net parameter
FL-net setup information
Serial I/O connection control
Serial I/O connection control
Serial I/O connection table
Serial I/O connection table
Serial I/O connection table
(Memory reference type)
Serial I/O connection table (Memory reference type)
PIO interrupt table
I/O interrupt information (for DS connection)
Task
Data file name
Contents
{Task entry name}(COD)
Task entry program name
{Task entry name}(DAT)
{Task entry name} local variable
Program configuration unit
Data file name
[Program configuration unit
name]
Contents
Program, function block or function of {Program
configuration unit name}
Global variable
Data file name
{Global variable name}
Reference data
Global variable
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
459
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Program code comparing
The details of program comparing can be shown.
Supplementary
• Program code comparing is supported in following controller types and versions.
Program code comparing
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
S3
S2
−
(*1)
−
(*1)
−
(*1)
(*2)
(*3)
R3
FN
−
−
(*1): For future support
(*2): Basic software Version 02.61 or more.
(*3): Basic software Version 02.60 or more. (S2PU82: V02.00 or more)
1) Select POU which you want to check details of comparing result(s), click
[Detail] or [Details] button.
460
6F8C1290
8.9
Comparing Programs and Data Files
2) Details of comparing result(s) is/are shown in [Compare Program] dialog
as text.
The result can be printed. Click the [Print] button.
The result can be saved. Click the [Save] button.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
461
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
8.10 Tracing Data
Data trace is a function to periodically collect data synchronized with the
specified task in the controller and display it as a graph.
Restrictions
If the task scan cycle is 50ms or less, data may be lost depending on the
transmission load.
Task scan cycle should be set as follows: (when performing data trace only)
1) Ethernet: 10ms
2) RS232C: 25ms
Up to four data may be collected.
A function block must be assigned to each collected data.
Preparation
A function block for data collection must be included in the task beforehand.
A function block must be assigned to each data to be collected.
Refer to "Chapter 5. Creating Control Programs" in the Basic Edition for more
information.
462
6F8C1290
8.10
Tracing Data
Starting and quitting
Specify the station in the [Product Tree] and select <File><Data Trace>.
Data trace can be terminated by any of the following methods:
1) Select <File> <Exit>.
2) Click [x] at the right end of the title bar.
3) Double-click the icon at the left end of the title bar.
Preparing to trace
Select a module name. The default is the module with the smallest slot no.
***Figure***
Select the task type. The default is MS main scan task.
Select the task name.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
463
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Select a pen (click the number) to open the Trace Parameter Setup window.
Enter the trace FB name and click the [Done] button.
Enter the trace variable name (enter the unit, comment, upper/lower limits as
necessary) and click the [Set] button.
Unit and comment are user comments. Upper/lower limits are set to 100 and 0
respectively if not entered.
Data maximum value and Data minimum value are trace start and trace end
values.
464
6F8C1290
8.10
Tracing Data
When the trace parameters are set properly, the variable name is displayed,
pen no. is outlined in red, Display/Hide check box is set to Display. This
completes the trace preparation.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
465
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Starting trace
Start data trace by either of the following methods:
1) Select <View><Start Trace>.
2) Click
in the toolbar.
Stopping trace
Stop trace by either of the following methods:
1) Select <View><Stop Trace>.
2) Click
in the toolbar.
Display/hide graph
Check the check box to display.
Uncheck the check box to hide.
Capturing the screen
Capture the displayed screen with one of the following methods. This is
allowed only during trace.
1) Select <View><Data Capture>.
2) Click
in the toolbar.
Up to 100 screens can be captured between trace start and end.
466
6F8C1290
8.10
Tracing Data
Backward display
The captured screens are displayed while moving backward.
Display while moving backward by one of the following methods. This is
allowed only after capturing and when trace is stopped.
1) Select <View> <Backward>.
2) Click
in the toolbar.
Forward display
The captured screens are displayed while moving forward.
Display while moving forward by one of the following methods. This is allowed
only after capturing and when trace is stopped.
1) Select <View><Forward>.
2) Click
in the toolbar.
Data read bar
The data read bar can be displayed by one of the following methods:
1) Select <View><Data Read Bar>.
2) Click the graph display area.
Data read bar
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
467
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Number of graph draw points
This is the number of draw points on the horizontal axis of the graph display
area.
To change the number of draw points, select <View><Graph Draw Points>.
This is allows only when trace is stopped.
468
6F8C1290
8.11
Exerting Force on I/O Input Points
8.11 Exerting Force on I/O Input Points
This section describes how to exert force (force retention of input result) on I/O
input points when online.
Viewing the I/O variable window
1) Open [Available variables] in the [Program Editor].
2) Select [I/O] and open the I/O variable.
3) Select the I/O module to exert force (module with [Batch input] for
[Input/output]) with [Unit] and [Module].
4) The force status appears in [Force] when the [Value] is set to [Controller].
The meaning of each force status is as follows:
Yes:
All bits of the corresponding word are forced
No:
All bits of the corresponding word are not forced
Some: One of the bits of the corresponding word is forced
The procedure is the same for [Station] and [Network].
Exerting force
1) Set [Force] of the input point to exert force to [Yes].
2) Press the [Enter] key to confirm. The result is written to the controller.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
469
Chapter 8
Monitoring Control Program
Releasing force
1) Set [Force] of the input point to release force to [No].
2) Press the [Enter] key to confirm. The result is written to the controller.
Setting value to I/O input point
1) Click the [Value] of the input point to exert force.
2) Enter the [Value] and press the [Enter] key. The result is written to the
controller.
Viewing a list of input focus
Execute [Input force list] at [I/O], [Station], or [Network] of the available
variable.
Batch releasing input force
Select [Batch release]. When the confirmation dialog appears, select [Yes].
470
6F8C1290
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and
Maintenance of nv series
This chapter describes the controller software and hardware monitoring and
maintenance procedure.
9.1
Monitoring Program Registration ···················· 472
9.2
Monitoring Controller Parameters ··················· 475
9.3
Monitoring Controller Operation Status ·········· 477
9.4
Monitor I/O Loop Status···································· 480
9.5
Monitor I/O Module Status ································ 484
9.6
Monitoring System Logs ·································· 487
9.7
Monitoring Serial I/O Logs································ 490
9.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information ······ 493
9.9
Various Maintenance Functions······················· 497
9.9.1 Setting time·············································· 497
9.9.2 Switching controller operation status ······· 498
9.9.3 Switching duplex status ··························· 499
9.9.4 Switching receiver···································· 500
9.9.5 Clearing memory······································ 501
9.9.6 Defrag ······················································ 502
9.9.7 Backup and restore·································· 502
9.10 Externary Starting the RAS Window················ 504
471
Chapter 9
9.1
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Monitoring Program Registration
This section describes how to monitor the status of programs registered in the
controller.
Restrictions
Currently, there are cases where deleting of program is not accepted with
[POU entry].
In such case, place the cursor on the program name column and retry.
Furthermore, deleting of multiple lines is not allowed.
When deleting a POU entry, also delete the corresponding task entry.
Monitoring program registration
Select a controller from the [Product Tree] and double click a task type on the
right side.
472
6F8C1290
9.1
Monitoring Program Registration
The [Task Entries] of the corresponding task type opens.
Select <Controller> for the "Value" option to load the task registration
information from the controller.
After selecting a controller from the [Product Tree], select <POU entries> from
the <File> menu to view the [POU Entries].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
473
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Select <Controller> for the "Value" option to load the program registration
information from the controller.
The content of the "Matched" column is either Yes: Match, No: No match, or -:
Controller only.
Deleting program registration
Place the cursor on the program row to delete (turns to blue reverse video) and
press the [Delete] key.
When the confirmation dialog appears, select [Yes] unit.
Tool registration is deleted if tool is selected for the "Value" option and
controller registration is deleted if controller is selected.
474
6F8C1290
9.2
9.2
Monitoring Controller Parameters
Monitoring Controller Parameters
This section describes how to monitor the operation parameters in the
controller.
Viewing controller parameters
Select a controller module in the Product Tree and select <Module
parameters> from the <File> menu.
Select "Tool and module" for [View] to view the online information.
With this, you can check whether the set value is donwloaded correctly.
Monitoring the controller operation status
Select the [Data] tab to view the actual controller operating status.
The task scan time, program step size, and mode switch status appear.
The values are monitored to display the latest status.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
475
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Changing the controller scan cycle online
The value of the following parameters can be changed online even when the
controller operating mode is RUN.
• Priority 2 scan time
• Priority 3 scan time
• Priority 4 scan time
Specify a value within the following range when changing the cycle online.
• (Maximum control cycle) >= Value to be set > (Current control cycle
setting x 0.8)
• The value cannot be changed online if floating is specified for control
cycle.
476
6F8C1290
9.3
9.3
Monitoring Controller Operation Status
Monitoring Controller Operation Status
The monitoring of the alarm status and operating status in a controller is
explained.
Restrictions
In System View, download the hardware configuration to the controller before
viewing the station status because the System View reads online the hardware
configuration downloaded to the controller and displays it on the screen.
When using System View with Ethernet connection, register the network card
from Product Tree in advance and register the IP address.
Monitor the status of a controller
Select the station to display from the [Product Tree] and select
<File><System View> to display the [Station Status] window of System View.
The following status appear in the [Station Status] window.
• Controller alarm status, operation mode, I/O loop status, I/O status
• Network module alarm status
When station is duplex composition, both of status are displayed in the order
of Primary and Secondary.
To operate the controller or to display the information about the controller,
select the controller (Click the line as which the controller is displayed).
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
477
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
The monitor is stopped at the starting of [Station Status]. Push on button
[Start] In monitor-control of tool-bar to start the refreshment display. Push on
button [Stop] to suspend the refreshment display.
Supplementary
• If you accidentally disconnected the Ethernet cable when connecting via Ethernet, quit
System View before reconnecting the cable.
• When in DL-WAIT status, [Normal] appears in the [Alarm Status] and [Program
Fallback] field.
Know the detailed contents of alarm
When alarm is occurred in the controller, select the line of the controller and
select menu <Tool> <Main Module Detail Alarm> to know the detailed
contents.
Classification of an alarm status is as follows.
Major or minor failure, Hardware or software.
If there are two or more abnormal conditions, they all will be displayed side by
side.
478
6F8C1290
9.3
Alarm
Name
Hardware
Software
Monitoring Controller Operation Status
Contents
CPU
Standard software etc.
MEM
Memory failure, Parity error etc.
IOR
I/O fallback error
TRS
Failure of transmission relation
HRD
Hardware self-diagnostic failure
DUL
Failure of duplex relation
SET
The abnormalities of the registration contents
UPG
A user program, the abnormalities about a user task
PRG
Program fallback error
SFT
The abnormalities of the other software relation
To know the detailed contents of alarm, check the [System Log].
Please see "Monitoring System Logs" about [System Log].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
479
Chapter 9
9.4
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Monitor I/O Loop Status
The monitoring of the I/O loop alarm status is explained.
Monitor the I/O loop status
The [Station Status] window of the System View shows the representative
alarm status of I/O loop in the [I/O Loop Status] display area.
Know the detailed contents of alarm
Select the line of the controller and select button <I/O Loop> to know the
detailed contents of I/O loop alarm. Or double-click the [I/O Loop Status] area.
480
6F8C1290
9.4
Monitor I/O Loop Status
The following alarm status is displayed.
Alarm
Contents
Normal
Loop status is normal.
Bus Connection
Loop was disconnected. It is the bus state now.
Non-connection
There is not the I/O node of the connection partner.
Know the connection status of I/O node
Double-click the [Alarm Status] area in the [I/O Loop Detail Alarm] to know the
connection status of I/O node.
The connection status of the I/O node to lead from LP2 to LP1, and to lead
from LP1 to LP2 is displayed. When there is not the I/O node of the connection
partner, ‘X’ is displayed.
Monitor the operation status of I/O loop
In the [Station Status] of System View, select controller and select menu
<Tool> <I/O Loop Management Information>. [I/O Loop Management
Information] will be displayed.
The following information is displayed on [I/O Loop Management Information].
• Node ID (Node No., Module name, MAC address)
• The measurement term of a node (Cleared time stamp, Lapsed time)
• Error counter
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
481
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Clearing counter
• Display of detailed information according to node
• Display of In-ring map
Display the scan healthy map of I/O loop
In the [Station Status] of System View, select controller and select menu
<Tool> <I/O Loop Scan Healthy>.
The number of a node is displayed on a block.
Healthy is meant if a numeric value is green.
Unhealthy is meant if a numeric value is red.
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Clear Scan unhealthy
• Clear overlap SA
482
6F8C1290
9.4
Monitor I/O Loop Status
Display the scan data of I/O loop
In the [I/O Loop Scan Healthy], select menu <Display> <Scan data>.
A value can be changed per word.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
483
Chapter 9
9.5
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Monitor I/O Module Status
The monitoring of the I/O module alarm status is explained.
The status of I/O module is divided into three hierarchies as I/O node, I/O unit,
and I/O module.
The representation status are displayed respectively as [I/O Node Status], [I/O
Unit Status], and [I/O Module Status].
In the case of TC-net I/O, the status of I/O module is divided into two
hierarchies as I/O node and I/O module.
Monitor the I/O status
The [Station Status] window of the System View shows the representative
alarm status of I/O node and I/O module in the [I/O Status] display area.
Monitor the I/O node status
To display the status of the I/O node, select the line of the controller and push
button [I/O Node]. Or double-click the [I/O Status] area.
The representative alarm status of I/O node and I/O module is displayed per
I/O node.
484
6F8C1290
9.5
Monitor I/O Module Status
To display the detail alarm of I/O node, select menu <View> <I/O Node Detail
Alarm>. Or double-click the [Alarm Status] area.
To display the System Log of I/O node, select menu <View> <System Log>.
To display the Version information of I/O node and I/O module, select menu
<View> <Version>.
Monitoring I/O module fallback detail
To display the status of the I/O Fallback Detail, select the line of the I/O node
and select menu <Tool> <I/O Fallback Detail> in [I/O Node Status].
One line corresponds to one unit. The meaning of a sign is as follows.
-:
I/O non-registration
*:
Normal
Number: The slot number of Fallback.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
485
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Monitor the I/O module status
To display the status of I/O module, select node number and push button [I/O
Module]. Or double-click the [I/O Status] area.
The alarm status of the I/O module mounted in the unit is displayed.
Know the detailed contents of alarm
When alarm is occurred in the I/O module, select the line of the I/O module and
select menu <View> <I/O Module Detail Alarm> to know the detailed
contents.
About the individual alarm contents every I/O module, please refer to the
instruction manual of the I/O module.
486
6F8C1290
9.6
9.6
Monitoring System Logs
Monitoring System Logs
The system log is explained.
A system log is the history of operation, and it is saved in a controller.
The contents saved according to the kind of controller differ.
Log name
Controller
Contents of log
PU811
PU821
EN
TN
Error log
Record which detected the abnormalities
of hardware and software. System basic
program and an application program are
contained in software.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Event log
Record about module operating status,
such as starting and switching.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Transmission log
Record which detected the abnormalities
in transmission. Such as Ethernet etc.,
the information on network-related is
included.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Operation log
Record of the operation from OIS about
process-control.
−
OK
−
−
Obtaining system log
When [System View] is opened, the module to acquire the log is selected, and
the menu <Tool> <System log> is executed, [System log] is displayed.
Moreover, it is started from [System log] button.
The system log information on a specification controller is displayed on a
[System Log] in the order of a date. In default setting, all the information on
Error, Event, Transmission, and Operation Log is displayed.
Only a part can also be selected and displayed from these.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
487
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Know the detailed contents
To know the detailed contents of a log, It can check according to [Log Details].
Double-clicked the line, or select the log and select menu <View> <Details>
to see [Log Details].
Cause and measure are also displayed in a detailed display.
Moreover, in order to see the contents of other logs, with [Log Details]
displayed, please push an upper right vertical button and move to the log
before and behind it.
Save system log information to file
The system log information currently displayed in the screen can be saved in
CSV form at a file.
Select menu <File> <Save File>.
Display system log information from file
When the menu < file >< system log > is executed after the station is
selected with the product tree, the system log is displayed.
Selecting menu <File> <Open File>, the system log saved at the file can be
read, and it can also display on a screen.
488
6F8C1290
9.6
Monitoring System Logs
Clear the log
The log in a controller is clearable.
Select menu <View> <Clear Log> to show [Clear Log] dialog box.
It can be selected whether it clears about each of Error, Event, Operation, and
Transmission log.
If all boxes are checked and [OK] button is pushed, all the logs in a controller
can eliminate at once.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
489
Chapter 9
9.7
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Monitoring Serial I/O Logs
The serial I/O log is explained. (For the future)
Read the serial I/O log
[Serial I/O Log] is started by displaying [I/O Module Status] window from
[System View] and selecting <View><Serial I/O Log>.
In [Serial I/O Log], maintenance operation peculiar to a serial I/O module is
possible in addition to showing log.
The log is not displayed after starting. Select the following log classification
from menu <View> <Log> to read and display log.
Log type
490
Contents
All information
All the following information is read.
It is effective only when selecting a station.
Controller side serial bus RAS
information
The information managed and saved by L controller side among serial
bus RAS information is read.
SBIF serial bus
RAS information
The information managed and saved by SBIF side among serial bus
RAS information is read.
SBIF I/O-bus error counter
The error counter of an I/O bus saved by SBIF is read.
I/O-bus error counter
The error counter of an I/O bus is read.
SBIF switching information
change information
The duplex switching history of SBIF is read.
6F8C1290
9.7
Log type
Monitoring Serial I/O Logs
Contents
I/O-module log
The error counter inside an intelligent I/O module is read.
I/O-module failure information
The self-diagnostic result inside an intelligent I/O module is read.
I/O version & serial number
The hardware and software version and the serial number of an
intelligent I/O module are read.
Tag information
The tag information on an intelligent IO module is read.
A display demand of a log can be carried out also from the drop-down list of
the <View><Log Display> on the right-hand side of a screen.
Execute online operation
The operation to a serial I/O module can choose and carry out the following
operation item in menu <View> <Online Operation>.
Operation item
L2
L3
L1
LC
Contents of operation
Controller RAS
information clearance
The zero clear of the RAS information currently recorded
in a controller is carried out.
SBIF, I/O RAS
information clearance
The zero clear of the RAS information currently recorded
in SBIF is carried out.
Tag information write
Tag information is written in an intelligent I/O module.
AO output adjustment
Analog-output adjustment is performed by SAO (Analog
Output) of an intelligent I/O module.
An online operation demand can be chosen also from the drop-down list in
<Online Operation> of the screen right, and can be carried out.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
491
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Save serial I/O log information to file
The serial I/O log information currently displayed in the screen can be saved in
CSV form at a file.
Select menu <File> <Save File>.
Moreover, selecting menu <File> <Open>, the serial I/O log saved at the file
can be read, and it can also display on a screen.
492
6F8C1290
9.8
9.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information
Monitoring LAN Management Information
LAN management information is explained.
Monitor the operation status of LAN (TC-net100, Ethernet)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select TN module or EN module, and
select menu <Tool> <LAN manager information>. [LAN Management
Information] will be displayed.
The following information is displayed on [LAN Management Information].
Display contents
TN
EN (*1)
Node ID (Name, H/W address, IP address, MAC address)
OK
OK
The measurement term of a node (Cleared time stamp, Lapsed time)
OK
−
The status of a receiving line
OK
−
Error counter (Carrier crack, CRC error)
OK
−
TN
EN (*1)
Switching the receiving line
OK
−
Clearing counter
OK
OK
Display of detailed information according to node
OK
−
Display of MIB information
OK
OK
Display of In-ring map
OK
−
Display of RMON information (Only a shared hub)
OK
−
The display of port information (Only a shared hub)
OK
−
(*1): Only nv series.
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
The node is selected, and each button is pushed.
Maintenance operation
(*1): Only nv series.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
493
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Display the scan healthy map (TC-net100)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select TN module, and select menu
<Tool> <Scan Healthy Map >.
The number of a node is displayed on a block.
Healthy is meant if a numeric value is green.
Unhealthy is meant if a numeric value is red.
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Clear Scan unhealthy
• Clear overlap SA
494
6F8C1290
9.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information
Display the scan data (TC-net100)
In the [Scan Healthy Map], select menu <Display> <Scan data>.
A value can be changed per word.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
495
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Display the node number which has entered into LAN (TC-net100)
In the [LAN Management Information], click button [In-ring Map].
The node number which has entered into LAN is displayed.
496
6F8C1290
9.9
9.9
Various Maintenance Functions
Various Maintenance Functions
Switching operation status of a controller, a memory-maintenance of a
controller, switching the receive-line status of TC-net, and releasing alarm
status of a serial I/O module are explained.
• Setting time
• Switching controller operation status
• Switching duplex status
• Switching receiver
• Clearing memory
• Defrag
• Backup and restore
9.9.1 Setting time
Displaying and setting time is explained.
Set up time
To display and set up time of a controller, select menu <Tool><Set Time> in
[Station Status] of System View. [Set Time] is displayed.
Time of each controller mounted in the main unit is displayed.
When a station is duplex system, both of time is displayed in the order of
Primary and Secondary.
Time of the personal computer with which an engineering tool is operating is
also displayed.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
497
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Push button [Set Time], controller time is changed to time of the personal
computer with which an engineering tool is operating as a controller.
When tool is connected via Ethernet LAN, time of all the stations and the
controllers on a network are changed.
Supplementary
When you can not change the time of all the stations via Ethernet LAN, please make sure
of the following settings.
• EN module parameters
• <Com. Parameter Settings> of this tool
• IP address of the PC
Refer to "7.1 Connecting with the Controller" in "Chapter 7 Downloading" for detail
information on connecting with the controller.
Especially note the following points when the EN module is free mode.
• Select ‘Single (Free mode)’ in <Local Station Settings> of <Com. Parameter Settings>.
• Set the same sub-net mask to IP address setting of the PC and EN module parameter.
9.9.2 Switching controller operation status
The switching operation of a controller is explained.
Operation mode
Controller type
PU811
PU821
RUN
HALT
Error reset
OK
OK
OK
Important
• Please see the operation manual of each controller about the contents of operation
status, such as RUN and HALT.
• There is the status where a controller stops performing control, according to the kind of
operation status. Moreover, a control system may be affected by changing an operation
state. When switching an operation status, please perform influence on a control
system.
• In the system which used duplex controller, duplex-switching may occur by switching
an operation status. Please see the operation manual of each controller about the
relation of mode operating status and the duplex operating status.
498
6F8C1290
9.9
Various Maintenance Functions
Switch operation mode
A duplex status can be checked in [Station Status] of System View.
To switch operation mode status, select controller and select menu
<Tool><Set RUN Mode>. [Set Run Mode] dialog box is displayed.
When switching an operation state, Push button in [Set Run Mode] dialog box.
Please check having switched to the target operation status after execution.
9.9.3 Switching duplex status
The online / standby switching of a duplex station, and equalizing are
explained.
Switch the online / standby of a duplex station
The duplex status can be checked in [Station Status] of System View.
To switch online / standby status, select controller and select menu
<Tool><Set Duplex>.
When select button [Yes], an online station is replaced by standby, and a
standby station is replaced by online.
Supplementary
• Please see the operation manual of each controller about the detailed contents of
online / standby status switching.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
499
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
9.9.4 Switching receiver
The receiving-line status of TC-net is explained.
The following three status exist in the receiving-line status.
• Automatic receiving.
• A-line compulsion receiving.
• B-line compulsion receiving.
Switch the receiving line status of TC-net
Select TN module in [Station Status] of System View, and select menu
<Tool><Switch TC-net Receiving Line>. [Switch TC-net Receiving Line]
dialog box is displayed.
When the station is duplex composition, both of receiving line status are
displayed in the order of Primary and Secondary.
The monitor is stopped at the time of starting. Push button [Start] in monitoring
control of tool-bar to refresh screen. Push button [Stop] to suspend
refreshment.
When switching the receiving line status, push the switching button.
Please check after execution having switched to the target receiving line
status.
500
6F8C1290
9.9
Various Maintenance Functions
9.9.5 Clearing memory
Memory clearance: All the user memory of the controller is cleared to “0”.
When exchanging controllers, it initializes completely, and it is used when
re-starting.
Clear memory of a controller
Select the controller in [Station Status] of System view, and select menu
<Tool><Maintenance>.
[Maintenance Panel] is the dialog for maintaining memory of the controller.
Select tab <Memory operation>, and select "Clear memory" from pull-down
menu <Operation>. Push button [OK] to start memory clearance execution.
Operation of memory clearance is available in HALT mode.
Supplementary
• It is restricted that the memory clearance can be performed from the [Maintenance
Panel] when the basic program of the controller is operating normally.
When the abnormal condition of memory, such as the parity error, does not restore, the
memory clearance by the switch of the controller may be needed.
In this case, please perform the memory clearance compulsorily according to the
operation manual of the controller.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
501
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
9.9.6 Defrag
Defrag: An application program and the local variable area are rearranged
among the memory for users of the controller, and an empty area is
secured.
Execute defragmentation for fragmented memory of a controller
Select the controller in [Station Status] of System view, and select menu
<Tool><Maintenance>.
[Maintenance Panel] is the dialog for maintaining memory of the controller.
Select tab <Memory operation>, and select "De-frag" from pull-down menu
<Operation>. Push button [OK] to start de-fragmentation execution.
9.9.7 Backup and restore
Backup / restoration is explained.
Backup refers to the saving of controller memory content to the Tool hard disk.
Restore refers to the writing of memory content saved in Tool hard disk to the
controller.
Backup
First, switch the target controller to HALT mode.
Select the target controller in [Station Status] of System View and click
<Maintenance>. Then select [Backup] from the <Operation> pull down
menu. Click the [OK] button to start backup.
During backup, the progress is displayed as bar graph. When backup
completes, the save file dialog box appears.
Click the [Cancel] button to cancel the backup operation.
502
6F8C1290
9.9
Various Maintenance Functions
Restore
Select the target controller in [Station Status] of System View and click
<Maintenance>.
Have the target controller switched to DL-WAIT mode beforehand.
Select [Restore] from the <Operation> pull down menu of [Maintenance
Panel]. Click the [OK] button to open the Select file dialog box and select the
file to restore.
During restore, the progress is displayed as bar graph.
Click the [Cancel] button to cancel the restore operation.
Note
• If restore is canceled, the controller data will be incomplete and the controller will not
operate normally.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
503
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
9.10 Externally Starting the RAS Window
This topic describes how to execute system view and system log screen
externally from user application other than V-Tool.
Assumptions
1) The user application is on the same PC and platform as V-Tool.
2) The PC has sufficient resources (CPU, memory, disk) to run both the user
application and V-Tool at the same time.
3) V-Tool and user application are organized independently and executes the
invocation command using the Windows Shell.
Displaying station view in system view
Start parameters
Parameter
Description
Example
Program file
name
Program file name in system view (full path)
C:\Program Files
\VEngTool\SysView
/T
Display the window in system view in front. Optional.
Note: /T must be followed by /M.
/T /M
/M
Enable display function menu only. Optional.
/M
System name Name of system to display
SystemName
Station name
StationName
Name of station to display
Start command
The following shell command is used together with the above parameters to
start the system view.
Start command
{program file name} /T /M {system name}, {station name}
Start command example [Standalone version]/[Client/Server version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\SysView” /T /M SystemName,StationName
Supplementary
• If the path name of the program file contains space as in "Program Files", enclose the
entire path name within double quotation marks to distinguish it from DOS command
separator.
• In System View started by the command, [System Log] button is enabled. Selecting a
main module and opening the System Log can be available.
504
6F8C1290
9.10
Externally Starting the RAS Window
Displaying TC-net100 status in system view
Start parameters
Parameter
Description
Example
Program file
name
Program file name in system view (full path)
C:\Program Files
\VEngTool\SysView
/T
Display the window in system view in front. Optional.
Note: /T must be followed by /M.
/T /M
/M
Enable display function menu only. Optional.
/M
System name Name of system to display
SystemName
Station name
Name of station to display
StationName
Slot No.
Slot No. of main unit connected to TC-net100
2
Bus No.
Fixed to 0 (Unused)
0
Unit No.
Fixed to 0 (Unused)
0
Screen No.
Specify the type of screen to display with number
0: LAN transmission map
1: LAN control information
1
Start command
The following shell command is used together with the above parameters to
start the system view.
Start command
{program file name} /T /M {system name}, {station name}, {slot No.}, {bus No.}, {unit No.},
{screen No.}
Start command example [Standalone version] /[Client/Server version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\SysView” /T /M SystemName,StationName, 2, 0, 0, 1
Displaying main module log in system view
Start parameters
Parameter
Description
Example
Program file
name
Program file name in system view (full path)
C:\Program Files
\VEngTool\SysLog
/T
Display the window in system view in front. Optional.
Note: /T must be followed by /M.
/T /M
/M
Enable display function menu only. Optional.
/M
System name
Name of system to display
SystemName
Station name
Name of station to display
StationName
Slot No.
No of module to display
1
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
505
Chapter 9
Monitoring System and Maintenance of nv series
Start command
The following shell command is used together with the above parameters to
start the system view.
Start command
{program file name} /T /M {system name}, {station name}, {slot No.}
Start command example [Standalone version] /[Client/Server version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\SysLog” /T /M SystemName,StationName,1
506
6F8C1290
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and
Maintenance of V series
This chapter describes the controller software and hardware monitoring and
maintenance procedure.
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
Monitoring Program Registration ···················· 508
Monitoring Controller Parameters ··················· 511
Monitoring Controller Operation Status ·········· 513
Monitoring Parallel I/O Status ·························· 516
Monitoring Serial I/O Status ····························· 520
Monitoring System Logs ·································· 524
Monitoring Serial I/O Logs································ 528
Monitoring LAN Management Information ······ 531
Various Maintenance Functions······················· 541
10.9.1 Setting time ············································ 541
10.9.2 Switching controller operation status······ 543
10.9.3 Switching duplex status·························· 544
10.9.4 Switching receiver ·································· 545
10.9.5 Clearing memory ···································· 547
10.9.6 Defrag ···················································· 548
10.9.7 Backup and restore ································ 548
10.9.8 Writing to FROM ···································· 550
10.9.9 Reading from FROM ······························ 551
10.9.10 Clearing output reset······························ 552
10.9.11 Clearing read-back error ························ 553
10.9.12 I/O module online replacement ·············· 554
10.10
Externary Starting the RAS Window ············ 556
507
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.1 Monitoring Program Registration
This section describes how to monitor the status of programs registered in the
controller.
Restrictions
Currently, there are cases where deleting of program is not accepted with
[POU entry].
In such case, place the cursor on the program name column and retry.
Furthermore, deleting of multiple lines is not allowed.
When deleting a POU entry, also delete the corresponding task entry.
Monitoring program registration
Select a controller from the [Product Tree] and double click a task type on the
right side.
508
6F8C1290
10.1
Monitoring Program Registration
The [Task Entries] of the corresponding task type opens.
Select <Controller> for the "Value" option to load the task registration
information from the controller.
After selecting a controller from the [Product Tree], select <POU entries> from
the <File> menu to view the [POU Entries].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
509
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Select <Controller> for the "Value" option to load the program registration
information from the controller.
The content of the "Matched" column is either Yes: Match, No: No match, or -:
Controller only.
Deleting program registration
Place the cursor on the program row to delete (turns to blue reverse video) and
press the [Delete] key.
When the confirmation dialog appears, select [Yes] unit.
Tool registration is deleted if tool is selected for the "Value" option and
controller registration is deleted if controller is selected.
510
6F8C1290
10.2
Monitoring Controller Parameters
10.2 Monitoring Controller Parameters
This section describes how to monitor the operation parameters in the S, L, FN,
and RIO controller.
Viewing controller parameters
Select a controller module in the Product Tree and select <Module
parameters> from the <File> menu.
Select "Tool and module" for [View] to view the online information.
With this, you can check whether the set value is donwloaded correctly.
Monitoring the controller operation status
Select the [Data] tab to view the actual controller operating status.
The task scan time, program step size, and mode switch status appear.
The values are monitored to display the latest status.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
511
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Changing the controller scan cycle online
The value of the following parameters can be changed online even when the
controller (*1) operating mode is RUN.
• SS task scan cycle
• HH task scan cycle
• MS task scan cycle
Specify a value within the following range when changing the cycle online.
• (Maximum control cycle) >= Value to be set > (Current control cycle
setting × 0.8)
• The value cannot be changed online if floating is specified for control cycle.
(*1) S3Controller (Basic Software Version 02.60 or more)
512
6F8C1290
10.3
Monitoring Controller Operation Status
10.3 Monitoring Controller Operation Status
The monitoring of the alarm status and operating status in a controller is
explained.
Restrictions
In System View, download the hardware configuration to the controller before
viewing the station status because the System View reads online the hardware
configuration downloaded to the controller and displays it on the screen.
The following hardware modules cannot be distinguished in the System View.
Module
System View Display
BU356, BU35B
BU356/35B
CHS-5807, CHS-5839
CHS-5807/5839
CN611, CN612
CN611/612
CN711, CN712
CN711/712
EN611, EN631
EN611/631
EN621, EN641
EN621/641
EN711, EN731
EN711/731
EN721, EN741
EN721/741
SDI01, SDI01A
SDI01/01A
TN711, TN721
TN711/721
TN712, TN722
TN712/722
S3PU45 + IF721, S3PU45 + IF741, S3PU45
S3PU45 + IF721/741
S3ST45A + IF721, S3ST45A
S3ST45A + IF721
When using System View with Ethernet connection, register the EN or FN card
from Product Tree in advance and register the IP address.
For Ethernet connection using FN, register the controller at the left edge of the
Product Tree.
L3PU11 serial IO status cannot be displayed for Ethernet connection. Use
RS-232C.
The Ethernet card registered on the main unit "BU74A" is displayed as "EN7**."
When some windows are already displaying as monitoring-mode, and other
window is started monitoring, following message will be displayed.
'Temporarily unable to access (not ready to respond).'
In this case, please stop monitoring which is already running, before starting a
new one.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
513
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Monitor the status of a controller
Select the station to display from the [Product Tree] and select
<File><System View> to display the [Station Status] window of System View.
The following status appear in the [Station Status] window.
• Controller alarm status, program fallback status, operation mode, duplex
status.
• Network module alarm status.
• I/O module alarm status.
• Serial I/O, parallel I/O representative alarm status.
When station is duplex composition, both of status are displayed in the order
of Primary and Secondary.
To operate the controller or to display the information about the controller,
select the controller (Click the line as which the controller is displayed).
The monitor is stopped at the starting of [Station Status]. Push on button
[Start] In monitor-control of tool-bar to start the refreshment display. Push on
button [Stop] to suspend the refreshment display.
Supplementary
• If you accidentally disconnected the Ethernet cable when connecting via Ethernet, quit
System View before reconnecting the cable.
• When in DL-WAIT status, [Normal] appears in the [Alarm Status] and [Program
Fallback] field.
514
6F8C1290
10.3
Monitoring Controller Operation Status
Know the detailed contents of alarm
When alarm is occurred in the controller, select the line of the controller and
select menu <Tool> <Main Module Detail Alarm> to know the detailed
contents.
Classification of an alarm status is as follows.
Major or minor failure, Hardware or software.
If there are two or more abnormal conditions, they all will be displayed side by
side.
Alarm
Hardware
Software
Name
Contents
CPU
Standard software etc.
MEM
Memory failure, Parity error etc.
PIIO
Failure of parallel I/O relation
SIO
Failure of serial I/O relation
IOR
I/O fallback error
DUL
Failure of duplex relation
ETH
Failure of Ethernet relation
TCN
Failure of TC-net relation
HRD
Hardware self-diagnostic failure
SET
The abnormalities of the registration contents
UPG
A user program, the abnormalities about a user task
PRG
Program fallback error
SFT
The abnormalities of the other software relation
To know the detailed contents of alarm, check the [System Log].
Please see "Monitoring System Logs" about [System Log].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
515
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.4 Monitor Parallel I/O Status
The monitoring of the parallel I/O alarm status is explained.
The status of parallel I/O is divided into three hierarchies as Bus, Unit, and
Module.
The representation status are displayed respectively as [I/O Bus Status], [I/O
Unit Status], and [I/O Module Status].
Monitor the main unit status
The [Station Status] window of the System View shows the representative
alarm status of parallel I/O in the [Alarm Status] display area. The alarm status
is displayed in the corresponding slot position for parallel I/O modules
installed in the main unit.
The monitor is stopped at the starting of [Station Status]. Push on button
[Start] in monitor-control of tool-bar to start the refreshment display. Push on
button [Stop] to suspend the refreshment display.
The [I/O Bus Status], [I/O Unit Status], and a [I/O Module Status] where of it
will explain from now on are the same.
Supplementary
• If parallel I/O is not registered, [Normal] or [-] appears in the [Alarm Status] field.
516
6F8C1290
10.4
Monitor Parallel I/O Status
Monitoring parallel I/O fallback detail
To display the status of a I/O Fallback Detail, Select menu <Tool><I/O
Fallback Detail> in [Station Status] of SystemView.
One line corresponds to one unit. The meaning of a sign is as follows.
-:
No registering of I/O
*:
Normal
Number: The slot number of Fallback.
Supplementary
• The menu of Fallback cannot be chosen if there is no registration of parallel I/O.
Release I/O fallback status. (MELPLAC I/O)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select the module [R3PU45+IF72C].
Select <I/O Fallback Detail> in the <Tool> menu.
Click button [Fallback Return] to release I/O fallback status.
Monitor the parallel I/O bus status
Double-click <I/O Bus Code> <Parallel> in the [Station Status] window to
view the [I/O Bus Status] window.
This window shows the representative alarm status in parallel bus units.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
517
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Monitor the parallel I/O unit status
To display the status of a parallel I/O unit, select bus number (select the line
which the bus number is displayed) and push button [I/O Unit].
A representation alarm status is displayed per unit.
518
6F8C1290
10.4
Monitor Parallel I/O Status
Monitor the parallel I/O module status
To display the status of a parallel I/O module, select unit number (click the line
which the unit number is displayed) and push button [I/O Module]. The alarm
status of the I/O module mounted in the unit is displayed.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
519
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.5 Monitor Serial I/O Status
The monitoring of the serial I/O alarm status is explained.
The status of serial I/O is divided into three hierarchies as Bus, Unit, and
Module.
The representation status are displayed respectively as [I/O Bus Status], [I/O
Unit Status], and [I/O Module Status].
Cautions: There are no menus "I/O Bus Status" and "I/O Unit Status" in
Model1000.
Monitor the main unit status
The representation alarm status of serial I/O is displayed in the Serial field of
the <I/O Bus Code> display area in [Station Status] of System View.
The monitor is stopped at the starting of [Station Status]. Push on button
[Start] In monitor-control of tool-bar to start the refreshment display. Push on
button [Stop] to suspend the refreshment display.
The [I/O Bus Status], [I/O Unit Status], and a[I/O Module Status] where of it will
explain from now on are the same.
Supplementary
• When no serial I/O is registered, [Normal] or [-] appears in the [Alarm Status] field.
520
6F8C1290
10.5
Monitor Serial I/O Status
Monitor the serial I/O bus status
To display the status of a serial I/O bus, double-click <Serial> in the [I/O Bus
Code] field. A representation alarm status is displayed per bus.
Monitor the serial I/O unit status
To display the status of a serial I/O unit, select bus number (select the line
which the bus number is displayed) and push button [I/O Unit].
A representation alarm status is displayed per unit.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
521
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Monitor the serial I/O module status
To display the status of a serial I/O module, select unit number (click the line
which the unit number is displayed) and push button [I/O Module].
When an I/O module is duplex composition, both of status are displayed in the
order of Primary and Secondary.
To operate the I/O module or to display the information about the I/O module,
select the [I/O module] (Click the line as which the module is displayed).
522
6F8C1290
10.5
Monitor Serial I/O Status
Know the detailed contents of alarm
When alarm is occurred in the I/O module, select the line of the I/O module and
select menu <View> <I/O Module Detail Alarm> to know the detailed
contents.
To know the detailed contents of alarm, check the [Serial I/O Log].
Please see "Monitoring Serial I/O Logs" about [Serial I/O Log].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
523
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.6 Monitoring System Logs
The system log is explained.
A system log is the history of operation, and it is saved in a controller.
The contents saved according to the kind of controller differ.
Log name
Controller
Contents of a log
S
L
EN
CN
TN
FN
Error log
Record which detected the abnormalities OK
of hardware and software. System basic
program and an application program are
contained in software.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Event log
Record about module operating status,
such as starting and switching.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Transmission log
Record which detected the abnormalities OK
in transmission. Such as Ethernet etc.,
the information on network-related is
included.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Operation log
Record of the operation from OIS about
process-control.
−
OK
−
−
−
OK
Obtaining system log
When [System View] is opened, the module to acquire the log is selected, and
the menu <Tool> <System log> is executed, [System log] is displayed.
Moreover, it is started from [System log] button.
The system log information on a specification controller is displayed on a
[System Log] in the order of a date. In default setting, all the information on
Error, Event, Transmission, and Operation Log is displayed.
Only a part can also be selected and displayed from these.
524
6F8C1290
10.6
Monitoring System Logs
Know the detailed contents
To know the detailed contents of a log, It can check according to [Log Details].
Double-clicked the line, or select the log and select menu <View> <Details>
to see [Log Details].
Cause and measure are also displayed in a detailed display.
Moreover, in order to see the contents of other logs, with [Log Details]
displayed, please push an upper right vertical button and move to the log
before and behind it.
Supplementary
• Time stamp of AN777
The date and time of AN777 in System Log is red and logged from EARI1 which is
ADMAP-100F network node.
Save system log information to file
The system log information currently displayed in the screen can be saved in
CSV form at a file.
Select menu <File> <Save File>.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
525
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Display system log information from file.
When the menu < file >< system log > is executed after the station is
selected with the product tree, the system log is displayed.
Selecting menu <File> <Open File>, the system log saved at the file can be
read, and it can also display on a screen.
Clear the log
The log in a controller is clearable.
Select menu <View> <Clear Log> to show [Clear Log] dialog box.
It can be selected whether it clears about each of Error, Event, Operation, and
Transmission log.
If all boxes are checked and [OK] button is pushed, all the logs in a controller
can eliminate at once.
526
6F8C1290
10.6
Monitoring System Logs
Obtaining CPU down information
In addition to the system log, the S controller internally maintains a detail CPU
down information. If a CPU down occurs, obtain this information and send it to
your service representative. This section describes how to obtain this
information.
Note: This function is not supported on controllers other than Scontroller and
DS type L controller.
To obtain the CPU down information, select <File><Read CPU Down Info>.
The information can be stored in any file.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
527
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.7 Monitoring Serial I/O Logs
The serial I/O log is explained.
Read the serial I/O log
[Serial I/O Log] is started by displaying [I/O Module Status] window from
[System View] and selecting <View><Serial I/O Log>.
In [Serial I/O Log], maintenance operation peculiar to a serial I/O module is
possible in addition to showing log.
The log is not displayed after starting. Select the following log classification
from menu <View> <Log> to read and display log.
Log type
All information
All the following information is read.
It is effective only when selecting a station.
Controller side serial bus RAS
information
The information managed and saved by L controller side
among serial bus RAS information is read.
SBIF serial bus
The information managed and saved by SBIF side among
serial bus RAS information is read.
RAS information
528
6F8C1290
Contents
SBIF I/O-bus error counter
The error counter of an I/O bus saved by SBIF is read.
I/O-bus error counter
The error counter of an I/O bus is read.
SBIF switching information
change information
The duplex switching history of SBIF is read.
10.7
Log type
Monitoring Serial I/O Logs
Contents
I/O-module log
The error counter inside an intelligent I/O module is read.
I/O-module failure information
The self-diagnostic result inside an intelligent I/O module is
read.
I/O version & serial number
The hardware and software version and the serial number of
an intelligent I/O module are read.
Tag information
The tag information on an intelligent IO module is read.
A display demand of a log can be carried out also from the drop-down list of
the <View><Log Display> on the right-hand side of a screen.
Execute online operation
The operation to a serial I/O module can choose and carry out the following
operation item in menu <View> <Online Operation>.
Operation item
L2
L3
L1
LC
Contents of operation
Controller RAS
information clearance
The zero clear of the RAS information currently recorded
in a controller is carried out.
SBIF, I/O RAS
information clearance
The zero clear of the RAS information currently recorded
in SBIF is carried out.
Tag information write
Tag information is written in an intelligent I/O module.
AO output adjustment
Analog-output adjustment is performed by SAO (Analog
Output) of an intelligent I/O module.
An online operation demand can be chosen also from the drop-down list in
<Online Operation> of the screen right, and can be carried out.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
529
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Save serial I/O log information to file
The serial I/O log information currently displayed in the screen can be saved in
CSV form at a file.
Select menu <File> <Save File>.
Moreover, selecting menu <File> <Open>, the serial I/O log saved at the file
can be read, and it can also display on a screen.
530
6F8C1290
10.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information
10.8 Monitoring LAN Management Information
LAN management information is explained.
Monitor the operation status of LAN (TC-net10)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select CN module and select menu
<Tool> <LAN manager information>. [LAN Management Information] will be
displayed.
The following information is displayed on [LAN Management Information].
• Node ID (Name, H/W address, IP address, MAC address)
• The measurement term of a node (Cleared time stamp, Lapsed time)
• The status of a receiving line
• Error counter (Carrier crack, CRC error)
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Switching the receiving line
• Clearing counter
Know the detailed contents of error
When the error counter has risen, select the column of node and click button
[Detail], or double-click the column of node. [Node Detail] are displayed.
The following information is displayed on [Node Detail].
• Error bit status
• Error counter
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
531
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
The node detail which has transmitted the unusual frame, and an error can be
known.
The meanings of an error bit are as follows.
Error bit
Contents
0
A-line receiving normal completion
1
A-line no receiving carrier
2
A-line receiving carrier crack
3
A-line no receiving frame start delimiter
4
A-line receiving frame error
5
A-line receiving CRC error
6
A-line receiving size error
7
A-line receiving collision
8
B-line receiving normal completion
9
B-line no receiving carrier
A
B-line receiving carrier crack
B
B-line no receiving frame start delimiter
C
B-line receiving frame error
D
B-line receiving CRC error
E
B-line receiving size error
F
B-line receiving collision
Monitor the operation status of LAN (TC-net100)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select TN module and select menu
<Tool> <LAN manager information>. [LAN Management Information] will be
displayed.
532
6F8C1290
10.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information
The following information is displayed on [LAN Management Information].
• Node ID (Name, H/W address, IP address, MAC address)
• The measurement term of a node (Cleared time stamp, Lapsed time)
• The status of a receiving line
• Error counter (Carrier crack, CRC error)
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
The node is selected, and each button is pushed.
• Switching the receiving line
• Clearing counter
• Display of detailed information according to node
• Display of MIB information
• Display of In-ring map
• Display of RMON information (Only a shared hub)
• The display of port information (Only a shared hub)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
533
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Monitor the operation status of LAN (ADMAP-5M)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select AN module and select menu
<Tool> <LAN manager information>. [LAN Management Information] will be
displayed.
The following information is displayed on [LAN Management Information].
• Node ID (MAC address)
• The measurement term of a node (Cleared time stamp, Lapsed time)
• The status of a receiving line
• Error counter
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Refresh
• Save File
• Clearing counter
• Switching the receiving line
• Detail
• In-ring Map
534
6F8C1290
10.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information
Know the detailed contents of error
When the error counter has risen, select the column of node and click button
[Detail], or double-click the column of node. [Node Detail] are displayed.
The following information is displayed on [Node Detail].
• Error bit status
• Error counter
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Save File
The node detail which has transmitted the unusual frame, and an error can be
known.
Monitor the operation status of LAN (FL-net Control LAN)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select FL module and select menu
<Tool> <LAN manager information>. [LAN Management Information] will be
displayed. (Window format is same as TC-net10.)
The following information is displayed on [LAN Management Information].
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
535
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
• Node ID (Name, H/W address, IP address, MAC address)
• The status of a receiving line
• Error counter
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Clearing counter
• Scan healthy map
Display the scan healthy map (TC-net100, ADMAP-5M)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select TN, AN module and select menu
<Tool> <Scan Healthy Map >.
The number of a node is displayed on a block.
Healthy is meant if a numeric value is green.
Unhealthy is meant if a numeric value is red.
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
• Clear Scan unhealthy
• Clear overlap SA
536
6F8C1290
10.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information
Display the scan data (TC-net100, ADMAP-5M)
In the [Scan Healthy Map], select menu <Display> <Scan data>.
A value can be changed per word.
Display the node number which has entered into LAN
(TC-net100, ADMAP-5M)
In the [LAN Management Information ], click button [In-ring Map].
The node number which has entered into LAN is displayed.
Display the scan healthy map (FL-net Control LAN)
In the [LAN Management Information], select a node, and click button [Scan
Healthy Map].
(Window format is same as 'In-ring Map'.)
The healthy node number is displayed.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
537
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Display the status of FMGW1 (FMGW1)
In the [Station Status] of System View, select FMGW1 module and select menu
<Tool> <FMGW1 Status Monitor>. [FMGW1 Status Monitor] will be
displayed.
The following can be used as maintenance operation.
Clearing counter
If [CSV File Save] button is clicked, the data on display can be saved at the
CSV file.
The meaning of the alarm bit is as follows.
538
6F8C1290
10.8
Monitoring LAN Management Information
Major H/W Alarm
Bit No.
0-F
Alarm kind
Timing
−
Not used
Minor H/W Alarm
Bit No.
Alarm kind
Timing
0
DUM2 ALM
Abnormal interruption (DUM2 Minor alarm)
1
Parity error between DUM2 and
FPGA-Fenix
Abnormal interruption (DUM2 Parity error)
2
Bus stall between DUM2 and
FPGA-Fenix
Abnormal interruption (DUM2 Bus stall)
3
DUM2 FIFO overrun
Abnormal interruption (FPGA-FIFO overrun)
4
FPGA DMA Transmission size
error
Abnormal interruption (DMA Transmission size
error)
5
CPU Bus stall
Abnormal interruption (CPU Bus stall)
6-9
Not used
A
FROM BCC error
B-F
Not used
−
Periodic diagnosis (Flash ROM BCC error)
−
Major S/W Alarm
Bit No.
0-F
Alarm kind
Timing
−
Not used
Minor S/W Alarm
Bit No.
Alarm kind
Timing
0
STN-SW is 0 or FF
Initial diagnosis
1-3
Not used
4
Scan talker block duplication
Periodic diagnosis
5
Scan node duplication
Periodic diagnosis
6
Scan parameter disagreement
Periodic diagnosis
7
Status transmission registration error
Download
8-F
Not used
−
−
In the [FMGW1 Status Monitor], click [MDWS RAS Info] button. The “RAS data”
and “CPU Information” of MDWS will be displayed.
If [Refresh] button is clicked, it will read again.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
539
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
If [CSV File Save] button is clicked, the data on display can be saved at the
CSV file.
In the [FMGW1 Status Monitor], click [Transfer Freq Statistics Info] button. The
statistics information on the “Cyclic Data Transfer Frequency" and the
"Message Data Transfer Frequency" is displayed.
If [Refresh] button is clicked, it will read again.
If [CSV File Save] button is clicked, the data on display can be saved at the
CSV file.
540
6F8C1290
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
10.9 Various Maintenance Functions
Switching operation status of a controller, a memory-maintenance of a
controller, switching the receive-line status of TC-net, and releasing alarm
status of a serial I/O module are explained.
10.9.1 Setting time
Displaying and setting time is explained.
Set up time
To display and set up time of a controller, select menu <Tool><Set Time> in
[Station Status] of System View. [Set Time] is displayed.
Time of each controller mounted in the main unit is displayed.
When a station is duplex system, both of time is displayed in the order of
Primary and Secondary.
Time of the personal computer with which an engineering tool is operating is
also displayed.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
541
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Push button [Set Time], controller time is changed to time of the personal
computer with which an engineering tool is operating as a controller.
When tool is connected via Ethernet LAN, time of all the stations and the
controllers on a network are changed. When tool is connected via RS-232C
COM port, time of a controller is changed.
Note
• When you can not change the time of all the stations via Ethernet LAN, please make
sure of the following settings.
• EN module parameters
• <Com. Parameter Settings> of this tool
• IP address of the PC
Refer to "7.1 Connecting with the Controller" in "Chapter 7 Downloading" for detail
information on connecting with the controller.
Especially note the following points when the EN module is free mode.
• Select ‘Single (Free mode)’ in <Local Station Settings> of <Com. Parameter Settings>.
• Set the same sub-net mask to IP address setting of the PC and EN module parameter.
Supplementary
Time setting To AN777
• Time setting of System View does not work with AN777.
• The time of AN777 in System View is red and displayed from one of EARI1 that is
ADMAP-100F network node.
542
6F8C1290
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
10.9.2 Switching controller operation status
The switching operation of a controller is explained.
Operation mode
Controller type
RUN
HALT
HOLD
RUNF
HOLD reset
Error reset
S3, S2
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
L3, L2, L1, LC,
R3, R2, FN,
CN614, FL654, FL754
OK
OK
−
−
−
OK
Note
• Please see the operation manual of each controller about the contents of operation
status, such as RUN and HALT.
• There is the status where a controller stops performing control, according to the kind of
operation status. Moreover, a control system may be affected by changing an operation
state. When switching an operation status, please perform influence on a control
system.
• In the system which used duplex controller, duplex-switching may occur by switching
an operation status. Please see the operation manual of each controller about the
relation of mode operating status and the duplex operating status.
Switch operation mode
A duplex status can be checked in [Station Status] of System View.
To switch operation mode status, select controller and select menu
<Tool><Set RUN Mode>. [Set Run Mode] dialog box is displayed.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
543
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
When switching an operation state, Push button in [Set Run Mode] dialog box.
Please check having switched to the target operation status after execution.
10.9.3 Switching duplex status
The online / standby switching of a duplex station, and equalizing are
explained.
Switch the online / standby of a duplex station
A duplex status can be checked in [Station Status] of System View.
To switch online / standby status, select controller and select menu
<Tool><Set Duplex>. [Set Duplex] dialog box is displayed.
544
6F8C1290
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
When switching online / standby status, push button [Switch Duplex].
An online station switches to standby and a standby station switches to online.
When equalizing manually, select the destination (Primary or Secondary) and
push button [Equalize Request]. Then the information of the online station will
be equal to that of the standby station.
When running manually, select the destination (Primary or Secondary) and
push button [Compulsive run]. Then the controller will be running alone without
connecting tracking cable between Primary and Secondary.
Supplementary
• Please see the operation manual of each controller about the detailed contents of
online / standby status switching, and Equalizing.
10.9.4 Switching receiver
The receiving-line status of TC-net is explained.
The following three status exist in the receiving-line status.
• Automatic receiving.
• A-line compulsion receiving.
• B-line compulsion receiving.
Switch the receiving line status of TC-net
Select CN module in [Station Status] of System View, and select menu
<Tool><Switch TC-net Receiving Line>. [Switch TC-net Receiving Line]
dialog box is displayed.
When a station is duplex composition, both of receiving line status are
displayed in the order of Primary and Secondary.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
545
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
The monitor is stopped at the time of starting. Push button [Start] in monitoring
control of tool-bar to refresh screen. Push button [Stop] to suspend
refreshment.
When switching the receiving line status, push a target switching button.
Please check after execution having switched to the target receiving line
status.
546
6F8C1290
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
10.9.5 Clearing memory
Memory clearance: All the user memory of a controller is cleared to “0”.
When exchanging controllers, it initializes completely, and it is used when
re-starting.
Clear Memory
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
S3
S2
R3
FN
CN614
FL654/754
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Clear memory of a controller
Select a controller in [Station Status] of System view, and select menu <Tool>
<Maintenance>.
[Maintenance Panel] is a screen for maintaining memory of a controller.
Select tab <Memory operation>, and select "Clear memory" from pull-down
menu <Operation>. Push button [OK] to start memory clearance execution.
Operation of memory clearance is available in HALT mode.
Note
• It is restricted that a memory clearance can be performed from a [Maintenance Panel]
when the basic program of a controller is operating normally.
When the abnormal condition of memory, such as a parity error, does not restore, the
memory clearance by the switch of a controller may be needed.
In this case, please perform a memory clearance compulsorily according to the
operation manual of a controller.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
547
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.9.6 Defrag
Defrag: An application program and a local variable area are rearranged
among the memory for users of a controller, and an empty area is
secured.
Defrag
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
S3
S2
R3
R2
STC
FN
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
−
−
−
Execute defragmentation for fragmented memory of a controller
Select a controller in [Station Status] of System view, and select menu
<Tool><Maintenance>.
[Maintenance Panel] is a screen for maintaining memory of a controller.
Select tab <Memory operation>, and select "De-frag" from pull-down menu
<Operation>. Push button [OK] to start de-fragmentation execution.
10.9.7 Backup and restore
Backup/restoration is explained.
Backup refers to the saving of controller memory content to the Tool hard disk.
Restore refers to the writing of memory content saved in Tool hard disk to the
controller.
Backup/Restore
548
6F8C1290
Controller
L3
L2
L1, LC
S3
S2
R3
R2
STC
FN
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
Backup
First, switch the target controller to HALT mode.
Select the target controller in [Station Status] of System View and click
<Maintenance>. Then select [Backup] from the <Operation> pull down
menu. Click the [OK] button to start backup.
During backup, the progress is displayed as bar graph. When backup
completes, The save file dialog box appears.
Click the [Cancel] button to cancel the backup operation.
Note
• When resuming backup after canceling backup of L controller, wait at least 20 seconds
before resuming.
Restore
Select the target controller in [Station Status] of System View and click
<Maintenance>.
Have the target controller switched to DL-WAIT mode beforehand.
Select [Restore] from the <Operation> pull down menu of [Maintenance
Panel]. Click the [OK] button to open the Select file dialog box and select the
file to restore.
During restore, the progress is displayed as bar graph.
Click the [Cancel] button to cancel the restore operation.
Note
• If restore is canceled, the controller data will be incomplete and the controller will not
operate normally.
• When resuming restore after canceling restore of L controller, wait at least 20 seconds
before resuming.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
549
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.9.8 Writing to FROM
FROM Write: The data downloaded to the module is backed up to ROM inside
a module.
Module
Operation
L3
L3
type1 type2
L2
L1
LC
S3
S2
R3
STC
FN
CN
TN
TL8000
Write to Flash ROM
−
−
−
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
−
−
−
Save tag parameter
−
OK
−
−
−
−
−
−
OK
−
−
Write to EEPROM.
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
OK
OK
Write to ROM
Open the [Station Status] of a system view, and select a module.
Click menu <Tool><Maintenance> in System View.
A [Maintenance Panel] is a screen for maintaining memory of a module.
Select tab <Memory operation> and select [Write to Flash ROM] from the
pull-down menu <Operation>.
Push button [OK] to start ROM write.
Operation of flash ROM write is available in HALT mode.
550
6F8C1290
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
10.9.9 Reading from FROM
FROM read-out: The data backed up by ROM in a module is read and it stores
in RAM.
Module
Operation
L3
type1
L3
type2
L2
L1
LC
S3
S2
Read flash ROM
−
−
−
−
OK
OK
OK
Restore tag parameter
−
−
−
−
−
−
OK
R3
STC
FN
CN
TN
OK
−
−
−
OK
−
−
Read-out from ROM
Open the [Station Status] of a system view, and select a controller.
Click menu <Tool> <Maintenance> in System View.
A [Maintenance Panel] is a screen for maintaining memory of a controller.
Select tab <Memory Oparation> and select [Read Flash ROM] from the
pull-down menu <Operation>.
Push button [OK] to start ROM read-out.
Operation of flash ROM read-out is available in HALT mode.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
551
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.9.10 Clearing output reset
Releasing output reset status of a serial analog and digital output module is
explained.
Release output reset status: The status which is outputting "0" compulsorily.
It becomes this status when the abnormalities in transmission occur in a serial
bus and an I/O bus.
Release the output reset status of I/O module
In the [I/O Module Status] of System view, it can be checked whether the
output reset status has occurred.
In order to cancel an output reset status, there are 2 kinds of following
methods.
• Batch Release of Output Reset
Select menu <View> <Operate I/O Module><Batch Release of Output
Reset>.
The output reset status is released per unit.
• Individual Release of Output Reset
Select the analog or digital output module which the output reset status
has occurred, and select menu <View> <Operate I/O Module>
<Individual Release of Output Reset>.
The output reset status of selected module is released.
552
6F8C1290
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
10.9.11 Clearing read-back error
Resetting read back error of a serial I/O analog-output duplex module is
explained.
This operation is a function for resetting “Read-back Error” of a standby side
module which disconnected the output-line.
Reset the read back error of I/O module
In the [I/O Module Status] of System View, it can be checked whether
"Read-back Error" alarm occurred.
Select the analog-output duplex module which “Read-back Error” has
occurred, and select menu <View> <Operate I/O Module><Reset Readback
Error>.
“Read-back Error” which occurred in the standby side module is reset.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
553
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.9.12 I/O Module online replacement
Setting online replacement of I/O module is explained.
This function separates the specified I/O card from the batch I/O process,
direct I/O process and diagnosis of a controller, and enables online
replacement of I/O modules.
Operation mode
Controller type
RUN
S
HALT
HOLD
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Model3000 (*1)
Model2000
L, LC, R3, FN
RUNF
(*1) Basic software Version 02.61 or more.
Setting online replacement
Open the [I/O module status] window of a system view. In detail about open
the window; please refer to the manual of the 9.4 Monitor I/O Loop Status.
Click the column of “Replace” and select “Enable”. Then confirm dialog is
shown. Press <OK>.
After setting of Online replacement is completed, the column of “Replace” is
update.
554
6F8C1290
10.9
Various Maintenance Functions
Confirm the status of online replacement in the station
Open the [Station Status] window of a system view.
Select the S controller which is registered left end, and select menu
<Tool><I/O Fallback Detail> in [Station Status] of SystemView. Then “I/O
Fallback Detail” window is displayed.
The module that is displayed in yellow means enable Online replacement.
The meaning of the back color and character as follows.
Character
Back color
Number
‘*’
Black
The slot number of Fallback.
Disable Online replacement.
Normal
Disable Online replacement.
Yellow
The slot number of Fallback.
Enable Online replacement.
Normal
Enable Online replacement.
−: No registering of I/O
Releasing online replacement
Click the column of “Replace” and select “Disable”.
If the operation mode of the controller is changed from ‘HALT’ to ‘RUN’, all
online-replacement settings are released at once.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
555
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
10.10
Externally Starting the RAS Window
This topic describes how to execute system view and system log screen
externally from user application other than V-Tool.
Assumptions
1) The user application is on the same PC and platform as V-Tool.
2) The PC has sufficient resources (CPU, memory, disk) to run both the user
application and V-Tool at the same time.
3) V-Tool and user application are organized independently and executes the
invocation command using the Windows Shell.
Displaying station view in system view
Start parameters
Parameter
Description
Example
Program file
name
Program file name in system view (full path)
C:\Program Files
\VEngTool\SysView
/T
Display the window in system view in front. Optional.
Note: /T must be followed by /M.
/T /M
/M
Enable display function menu only. Optional.
/M
System name
Name of system to display
SystemName
Station name
Name of station to display
StationName
Start command
The following shell command is used together with the above parameters to
start the system view.
Start command
{program file name} /T /M {system name}, {station name}
Start command example [Standalone version]/[Client/Server version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\SysView” /T /M SystemName,StationName
Supplementary
• If the path name of the program file contains space as in "Program Files", enclose the
entire path name within double quotation marks to distinguish it from DOS command
separator.
• In System View started by the command, [System Log] button is enabled. Selecting a
main module and opening the System Log can be available.
556
6F8C1290
10.10
Externally Starting the RAS Window
Displaying TC-net100 status in system view
Start parameters
Parameter
Description
Example
Program file
name
Program file name in system view (full path)
C:\Program Files
\VEngTool\SysView
/T
Display the window in system view in front. Optional.
Note: /T must be followed by /M.
/T /M
/M
Enable display function menu only. Optional.
/M
System name
Name of system to display
SystemName
Station name
Name of station to display
StationName
Slot No.
Slot No. of main unit connected to TC-net100
2
Bus No.
Fixed to 0 (Unused)
0
Unit No.
Fixed to 0 (Unused)
0
Screen No.
Specify the type of screen to display with number
0: LAN transmission map
1: LAN control information
1
Start command
The following shell command is used together with the above parameters to
start the system view.
Start command
{program file name} /T /M {system name}, {station name}, {slot No.}, {bus No.},
{unit No.}, {screen No.}
Start command example [Standalone version] /[Client/Server version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\SysView” /T /M SystemName,StationName, 2, 0, 0, 1
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
557
Chapter 10
Monitoring System and Maintenance of V series
Displaying main module log in system view
Start parameters
Parameter
Description
Example
Program file
name
Program file name in system view (full path)
C:\Program Files
\VEngTool\SysLog
/T
Display the window in system view in front. Optional.
Note: /T must be followed by /M.
/T /M
/M
Enable display function menu only. Optional.
/M
System name
Name of system to display
SystemName
Station name
Name of station to display
StationName
Slot No.
No of module to display
1
Start command
The following shell command is used together with the above parameters to
start the system view.
Start command
{program file name} /T /M {system name}, {station name}, {slot No.}
Start command example [Standalone version] /[Client/Server version]
“C:\Program Files\VEngTool\SysLog” /T /M SystemName,StationName,1
558
6F8C1290
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
This chapter is intended mainly for system administrators and describes the
engineering tool maintenance method.
The following tool maintenance topics are covered. Perform these as necessary in
any order.
11.1 Importing/Exporting User System ··················· 560
11.2 Importing/Exporting Library····························· 563
11.3 Importing/Exporting In Text Format················· 567
11.4 Importing Products from Ver. 1 ························ 576
11.5 Convert Semi Graphics to Full Graphics ········ 578
11.6 Enginnering Log················································ 580
11.7 Displaying Login Users
and Current Editors ·········································· 582
559
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
11.1 Importing/Exporting User System
This section describes how to import/export user system in system folder units.
Using the import and export functions enables exchange between different
PCs in system units.
Supported media
Any writeable media may be used as long has it has sufficient capacity.
Starting import
Select a system at left top of the [Product Tree] and select <Import> from the
<File> menu.
Importing
1) Select the file to import and the destination system in the [System Import]
window.
• Drive, folder, file: Select the drive, folder, and file name of the file created
during system export.
• Import destination system name: Enter the import destination system
name.
560
6F8C1290
11.1
Importing/Exporting User System
2) Set the above import conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[Import] button to import.
3) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
4) Hereafter, follow the displayed instructions.
Starting export
Select the system to export at left bottom of the [Product Tree] and select
<Export> from the <File> menu.
Exporting
1) Specify the export destination in the [System Export] window.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
561
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
• Drive, folder: Select the export destination drive and folder.
• File name: Enter the export destination file name.
2) Set the above export conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[Export] button to export.
3) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
4) Hereafter, follow the displayed instructions.
562
6F8C1290
11.2
Importing/Exporting Library
11.2 Importing/Exporting Library
This section describes how to import/export user libraries.
<Library> import/export is performed for the following items:
• Import/export of user defined type unit or units
• Import/export of user program unit or units
Using the import and export functions enables exchange between different
PCs or systems in user defined type, user program, or user library units.
Supported media
Any writeable media may be used as long has it has sufficient capacity.
Starting import
Select a library at bottom left of the [Product Tree] and select <Import> from
the <File> menu.
Importing
1) Select the file to import and the import destination system in the [Library
import] window.
• Drive, folder, file:
Select the drive, folder, and file name containing the file created during
library export.
• Import destination library name:
Enter the import destination library name.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
563
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
• Even address forced:
This option is used for the user data type member.
'No': The user data type members are allocated tightly.
'Yes': They are aligned on the double-word address.
Note
• If Option 'Even Address Forced' is 'No', the Network or Station variables using this
Structure which may has REAL,DINT,DWORD data types which length is over 2-word
will have wrong values at run time.
2) Set the above import conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[Import] button to import.
3) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
4) Hereafter, follow the displayed instructions.
Supplementary
• Import destination library name
Specify an existing library name (other than Standard…) as the import destination
library name.
• Import sequence
If the import target type (TYP-A) uses a different type (TYP-B), import TYP-B first and
then import TYP-A.
Furthermore, if the import target POU (POU-A) uses a different POU (POU-B), import
POU-B first and then import POU-A.
564
6F8C1290
11.2
Importing/Exporting Library
Starting export
Select the export type name in the [Library] window and click the <Export>
button.
Exporting
1) Specify the export destination in the [Library export] window.
• Drive, folder: Select the drive and folder to store the export result.
• Export destination file name: Enter the file name to save the export result.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
565
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
2) Set the above export conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[Export] button to export.
3) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
4) Hereafter, follow the displayed instructions.
Supplementary
• Export destination file name
Do not change the extension (TYP, PRG, FBK, FUN) when changing the export
destination file name, such as when the file name is duplicated. If changed, the data
type cannot be determined and import will fail.
Exporting format of user data type
Address information of the structure members (‘Word No.’, ‘Bit No.’, and ‘Word
Length’) are exported as comment.
TYPE
SPC:STRUCT
WRDIA:REAL;
PAI:REAL;
GEAR:REAL;
RT:REAL;
K:REAL;
ACR:REAL;
SEL:BOOL;
END_STRUCT;
END_TYPE
(*Work Roll Diameter. (m)*)(*0,0,2*)
(*Circular Constant*)(*2,0,2*)
(*Gear Ratio*)(*4,0,2*)
(*SPC Rate (m/s2)*)(*6,0,2*)
(*SPC APC Gain K*)(*8,0,2*)
(*SPC Accuray*)(*10,0,2*)
(*Striker One Select Flag*)(*12,0,1*)
Supplementary
• Bold type characters are 2nd comment as address information.
• From left to right in 2nd
566
6F8C1290
comment, ‘Word No.’, ‘Bit No.’, and ‘Word Length’.
11.3
Importing/Exporting In Text Format
11.3 Importing/Exporting In Text Format
This section describes how to import/export user products in text format in
network unit or station unit.
Using the function to import and export in text format enables collaboration
with user's higher level Case tools that can handle text format data and
efficient data editing using commercial software.
Target products
• User I/O variables (including scan data)
• User global variables
• User task entry, POU entry
• User hardware configuration
• User hardware parameters
The following are not included in the target for this product. Use the user library
import/export function.
• User POU
• User data type
Supported media
Any writable media may be used as long has it has sufficient capacity.
Compressed/split file format (*.P00) can be used to exchange data using
floppy disks (FD).
How to use importing
Using the function to import, the difference of importing result should be
known.
• Add products
When a product is not registered yet, it is added.
• Change products
When a product is already registered, it is changed.
• Update products
When a product has a initial state, it is updated. Initialization also means
‘Deleting’.
Added products can not be deleted. If they should be deleted, please delete
them from registration before importing.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
567
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
Differences among the products are as follows
Network information
1) LAN node configuration
• Add:
When a node is not registered yet, it can be added.
• Change: Not available. When a node is already registered, it can not be
changed.
2) Send block
• Update: Using specified block number, registration can be updated.
Initialization is also available.
3) Network variable
• Add:
When a variable is not registered yet, it can be added.
• Change: When a variable is already registered, the data type of variable
can be changed.
• Update: When a variable is already registered, the comment of variable
can be updated. Initialization is also available.
Station information
1) Hardware configuration
• Add:
When a hardware is not registered yet, it can be added.
• Change: When a hardware is already registered, convertible ‘Catcode’
can not be changed.
Available ‘Catcode’ can be checked in other section; See
‘Changing Name’ of ‘Product tree’
2) Hardware parameter / point parameter
• Update: Using specified item number, registration can be updated.
Initialization is also available.
3) Station variable
• Add:
When a variable is not registered yet, it can be added.
• Change: When a variable is already registered, the data type of variable
can be changed.
• Update: When a variable is already registered, the comment of variable
can be updated. Initialization is also available.
4) Controller variable
• Add:
568
6F8C1290
When a variable is not registered yet, it can be added.
11.3
Importing/Exporting In Text Format
• Change: When a variable is already registered, the data type of variable
can be changed.
• Update: When a variable is already registered, the comment and value of
variable can be updated. Initialization is also available.
5) Task entry
• Update: Using specified entry number, registration can be updated.
Initialization is also available.
6) POU entry
• Update: Using specified entry number, registration can be updated.
Initialization is also available.
Starting import
Select a <Network> or <Station> and select <Import> from the <File>
menu.
Importing
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
569
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
1) Select the file to import in the [Text import] window.
Drive, folder, file: Select the drive, folder, and file name containing the
created text file.
2) Set the above import conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[Import] button to import.
3) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
4) Hereafter, follow the displayed instructions.
Supplementary
• Text contents are pre-checked before importing. When errors are found in the text
using pre-checking, logged them and importing is canceled. When importing is
completed abnormally, please see the logged file and correct text and re-try importing.
(The pre-checking function is supported V2.8.0 or later.)
Starting export
Select a target network or station at bottom left of the Product Tree and select
<Export> from the <File> menu.
Exporting
1) Specify the export destination file in the [Text export] window.
570
6F8C1290
11.3
Importing/Exporting In Text Format
• Drive, folder: Select the drive and folder to store the export result.
• Export destination file name: Enter the file name to save the export result.
2) Set the above export conditions in the window as necessary and click the
[Export] button to export.
3) The execution progress is indicated by the progress bar.
4) Hereafter, follow the displayed instructions.
Text format (sample)
Keywords such as @Net, @End_Net are used to store multiple CSV format
tables in a single file.
In the case of network
@Net
(* NetNo,Catcode *)
"1","TC-net 100LAN"
@LanConfig
(* NodeNo,StationName,HAddress,Catcode *)
"1","Station1","03-**-**-**","TN721"
"2","Station1","04-**-**-**","TN721"
@End_LanConfig
@SysBlocks
(* BlockNo,TopWordNo,BlockWSize,Speed,OutNodeNo,OutCntSlot *)
"0","0","64","1","1","1"
"1","0","64","1","2","1"
"2","0","64","1","",""
"2046","0","64","1","",""
"2047","0","64","1","",""
@End_SysBlocks
@SysVarsOut
(* BlockNo,IOW,Variable,Datatype,Comment,Speed,WordNo,BitNo,
StationName,HAddress *)
"0","","BIT1","BOOL","","0","0","0","",""
"0","","BIT2","BOOL","","0","0","1","",""
"0","","REG1","WORD","","0","1","0","",""
"0","","REG2","INT","","0","2","0","",""
@End_SysVarsOut
@SysVarsIn
(* Variable,InNodeNo,InCntSlot *)
@End_SysVarsIn
@End_Net
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
571
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
In the case of station
@Stn
(* Name,Catcode *)
"Station1","model 3000"
@HardsConfig
(* HAddress,Catcode *)
"**-**-**-**","BU746"
"01-**-**-**","S3PU55"
"03-**-**-**","TN721"
"04-**-**-**","TN721"
"10-**-**-**","AD338"
@End_HardsConfig
@ModulesPara
(* HAddress,OrderNo,cItemID,Value *)
"01-**-**-**","1","3225","0"
"01-**-**-**","2","3233","1"
"04-**-**-**","38","3080","0"
@End_ModulesPara
@PointsPara
(* HAddress,OrderNo,cItemID,Value,PointNo *)
"03-**-**-**","1","3504","0","0"
"03-**-**-**","2","3501","0","0"
"04-**-**-**","7","3506","0","127"
@End_PointsPara
@StnVarsOut
(* HAddress,IOW,Variable,Datatype,Comment,Speed,OutCntSlot,WordNo,
BitNo,IQNo *)
"01-**-**-**","","S_000","INT","","0","1","553984","0",""
"01-**-**-**","","S_001","UINT","","0","1","553985","0",""
"01-**-**-**","","S_002","DINT","","0","1","553986","0",""
"01-**-**-**","","S_003","REAL","","0","1","553988","0",""
"10-**-**-**","0","AID000","INT","","0","1","546548","0",""
"10-**-**-**","1","AID001","INT","","0","1","546549","0",""
"10-**-**-**","7","AID007","INT","","0","1","546555","0",""
@End_StnVarsOut
@StnVarsIn
(* Variables,InCntSlot *)
@End_StnVarsIn
@CntBlocks
(* HAddress,Name *)
"01-**-**-**","SW"
"01-**-**-**","DW"
"01-**-**-**","User"
572
6F8C1290
11.3
Importing/Exporting In Text Format
@CntVars
(* HAddress,Name,IOW,Variable,Datatype,Value,Comment,Speed,Const,
WordNo,BitNo *)
"01-**-**-**","User","","G000","INT","0","","0","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","User","","G001","UINT","0","","0","0","1","0"
"01-**-**-**","User","","G006","STR_A","","","0","0","7","0"
"01-**-**-**","User","","G009","ARRAY[0..3] OF WORD","","","0","0","20","0"
@End_CntVars
@CntValues
(* HAddress,VarMember,Datatype,Value *)
"01-**-**-**","G009[0]","WORD","1111"
"01-**-**-**","G009[1]","WORD","2222"
"01-**-**-**","G009[2]","WORD","3333"
"01-**-**-**","G009[3]","WORD","4444"
@End_CntValues
@End_CntBlocks
@PouEntries
(* HAddress,PouNo,Datatype *)
"01-**-**-**","2048","MS000"
"01-**-**-**","2049",""
"01-**-**-**","2964",""
@End_PouEntries
@TaskEntries
(* HAddress,TaskName,TaskEntryNo,Datatype,Comment,Enabled,Sch,
Grp *)
"01-**-**-**","EV","0","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","EV","7","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","SS","0","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","IP","0","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","IP","7","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","HS","0","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","HS","127","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","MS","0","MS000","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","MS","255","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","BG","0","","","0","0","0"
"01-**-**-**","BG","3","","","0","0","0"
@TaskParams
(* HAddress,TaskName,TaskEntryNo,No,Variable,dDatatype,
dComment *)
@End_TaskParams
@End_TaskEntries
@End_Stn
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
573
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
Text format (additional information)
Network information
1) I/O Variable of RIO(Remote I/O Station) is set as Network Variable
‘@SysVarsOut’.
Output Variables of RIO can be imported, when ‘@SysVarsIn’ is not
registered. They are assigned automatically. Targets: Outputs of I/O
variables and field network variables on 'TC-net 100 LAN'.
2) Importing data for address information ‘WordNo/BitNo’ of Network Variable
‘@SysVarsOut’ are used as follows:
• New location: Not set data. Length zero string is used. (Ex.: “”)
• User setting: Set data. Numeric data is used. (Ex.: “10000”)
If ‘New location’ and ‘User setting’ are used in a same text, ‘User setting’ is
set more upper line than ‘New location’. If they are set upside-down, the
located address may be duplicated.
3) I/O connection ‘IQNo’ of Network Variable ‘@SysVarsOut/@SysvarsIn’ are
automatically assigned. It is not set in importing.
4) Importing data for target controller 'StationName' and 'Haddress' of
Network Variable '@SysVarsOut' are only used for RIO controller. Please not
set value using length zero string. (Ex.: “”)
5) Importing data 'I/O Area(IOA)' and 'I/O Type(IOP)’ of Network Variable
‘@SysVarsOut’ are only used for RIO controller of MELPLAC I/O. Please
refer to "'MELPLAC I/O Information" about IOA and IOP. For other controller,
please not set value using length zero string. (Ex.: “”)
Station information
1) I/O Variable is set as Station Variable ‘@SysVarsOut’ of Controller Variable
‘@CntVars’.
If the main unit has system-bus, I/O Variable is used as Station Variable.
2) Importing data for address information ‘WordNo/BitNo’ of Station Variable
‘@StnVarsOut’ and Controller Variable ‘@CntVars’ are used as follows:
• New location: Not set data. Length zero string is used. (Ex.: “”)
• User setting: Set data. Numeric data is used. (Ex.: “10000”)
If ‘New location’ and ‘User setting’ are used in a same text, ‘User setting’
is set more upper line than ‘New location’. If they are set upside-down,
the located address may be duplicated.
574
6F8C1290
11.3
Importing/Exporting In Text Format
3) Importing data for I/O Connection ‘IQNo’ of Station Variable
‘@StnVarsOut/@StnVarsIn’ are used as follows:
• New assignment: Numeric data is set, or length zero string is used.
(Ex.: “”)
• User setting: Set reserved string ‘(None)’. (Ex.: “(None)”)
If the reserved string ‘(None)’ is used, ‘IQNo’ is registered as ‘Null’.
‘(None)’ is also used in exporting.
MELPLAC I/O information
Select from the following value.
I/O area (IOA)
1:Input area, 2:Output area, 3:Counter, 4:System area, 5:CH1 Input / Output
area, 6:CH2 Input / Output area, 7:CH3 Input / Output area, 8:CH4 Input /
Output area, 9:Command area, 10:Local error flag, 11:Input area 1, 12:Input
area 2, 13:Output area 1, 14:Output area 2, 15:CH0 area, 16:CH1 area,
17:Remote STN error, 18:Reference data, 19:Feedback data, 20:Control
area, 21:Special link relay, 22:Special link register, 23:LX Former, 24:LY
Former, 25:LB Former, 26:LW Former, 27:LX Latter, 28:LY Latter, 29:LB Latter,
30:LW Latter, 31:X, 32:Y, 33:B Former, 34:W Former, 35:B Latter, 36:W Latter,
37:Status/Command area, 38:Cyclic Input area, 39:Cyclic Output area,
40:Cyclic area, 41:Status area, 42:CYC com. IN area, 43:CYS com. OUT
area, 44:Position detect, 45:SW area
I/O type (IOP)
2:Batch IN, 3:Batch OUT
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
575
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
11.4 Importing Products from Ver. 1
Data conversion is necessary in order to use Engineering tool Ver. 1 products
in after Ver. 2.
This section is intended for system administrators and describes how to import
Engineering tool Ver.1 products.
Starting import (In the case of Ver.2)
From the Start menu, select <Program><V series Engineering Tool 2
(Management)><Ver.1 Import>.
Importing
576
6F8C1290
11.4
Importing Products from Ver. 1
1) Selecting version 1 system
Select the version 1 import target system in [Ver.1 System Folder].
2) Selecting import destination
Select the import destination system in [Ver.2 System Folder]. To import to
a new system, create the new system beforehand in [Product Tree].
3) Importing
Select the [Start] button. Import starts.
Restrictions
When 'PB_P' of 'Tag Operation Functions' is being used in the program of Ver.1
system, re-draw after deleting the target function by the [Program Editor] of
Ver.2 after import.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
577
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
11.5 Convert Semi Graphics to Full Graphics
Explains how to convert semi graphic type programs to full graphic type
programs of a System.
Semi graphic program is made by Program Editor (Semi graphic).
Full graphic program is edited by Program Editor (Full graphic).
This function is not supported in Engineering tool 2.
Checking each access level of libraries
This conversion is executed for libraries have ‘Editable’ access level.
So this operator may be Tool manager or administrator in your System.
Libraries have out of ‘Editable’ level are skipped automatically.
So you had better confirm if each library has available access level before
converting.
See [5.12 Setting Program Security] section to inspect or change access level.
Starting converter
In start menu, click < V series Engineering Tool 3 (Management) >< Batch
Convert Semi Graphics to Full Graphics > to start this converter shown as
follows.
Enter user name and password to login.
578
6F8C1290
11.5
Convert Semi Graphics to Full Graphics
Executing conversion
1) Select <System> you want to convert and click [Start].
2) During conversion you can stop the conversion by click [Stop] button.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
579
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
11.6 Engineering Log
This function outputs and displays a log file, that is a record of change in a tool
or a controller.
Output engineering log
On Product Tree, click menu <File> <View Engineering Log>.
The log file is created on Windows system folder. File name is as follows.
V2EngLog.txt
This file is displayed using [Notepad].
580
6F8C1290
11.6
Engineering Log
Customize record counts
1) Open System Folder (\Winnt) using [Explore], and Open ‘V2Tool.INI’ file
using [Notepad].
In the case of C/S, this must be performed by the tool administrator on the
server PC.
2) Change value of ‘OpeLogSize’ Item.
Standard of setting value is as follows.
Setting value
Records count
100(Default value)
about 900
300
about 2800
Note
• Do not set large value over 1000.
• Do not change another values. If these values are changed, engineering tool becomes
not work normally.
Example) Set records count about 2800.
OpeLogSize = 300
3) Save V2Tool.INI file.
Setting value becomes valid after re-start Engineering tool.
After re-installation of engineering tool, this setting is cleared. Please
perform this setting again.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
581
Chapter 11
V-Tool Maintenance
11.7 Displaying Login Users and Current Editors
In client server version, you may need to know: “Who are login users, now?” or
“Who or which PCs are editing some products?” Especially it is needed in case
of shutting down the server PC. In this section, how to display the information
and the contents will be explained.
Opening current editors
Click menu <File><Current Editors> of Product Tree to open the following
form.
The meanings of the fields are:
• Editor:
Displays current editor name of V-Tool login users. [
the PC name.
• System:
Displays System name of product edited currently.
• Station:
Displays Station name of product edited currently.
] shows
• -Controller: Displays Controller name of product edited currently. [
shows the main slot no.
• Product:
582
6F8C1290
]
Displays Product name edited currently, which shows in the
following table.
11.7
Displaying Login Users and Current Editors
Displayed string in [Product] filed
Network
Station
Unit
Module
Bus
{POU name} : Note1
{Task name} : Note2
{Task entry name} : Note3
Network variable
Station variable
Controller variable
{Type name}
:Note4
Library
Variable declaration
Permissive Fault Diagnosis
Synchro Trend
Note1: {POU name} displays the name of POU named by user.
Note2: {Task name} displays the name of Task, for example, “HS” or ”MS”.
Note3: {Task entry name} displays the name of Task entry, for example,
“HS007” or ”MS125”.
Note4: {Type name} displays the name of data type defined by user.
Login user: Displays the name of V-Tool login user.
Client PC: Displays the PC name of V-Tool login .
IP address: Displays the IP address of the client PC.
Click each header column to sort the list by the field. Each clicking changes
the sort order. Click [Update] to update the all of the tables. Click [Close] to
close the form.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
583
Chapter 11
584
6F8C1290
V-Tool Maintenance
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
This chapter describes how to print Documents or Shot Print in the following
topics.
12.1 Documents and Shot Prints ····························· 586
12.2 Setting Page Format ········································· 587
12.3 Printing Documents ·········································· 596
12.4 Printing the Cross Reference··························· 601
12.5 Printing the Variable Reference and
the Function Reference ···································· 605
585
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
12.1 Documents and Shot Prints
In V-Tool, Documents means the document products for the client. And Shot
Print means the printout report for program debugging or maintenance.
Contents of documents
System
• Station list
• LAN configuration
• Send Blocks
• Network variable list
Station
• Hardware configuration
• Module parameters
• Station global variable list
• I/O connection list
• I/O variable list
Controller
• Tag No list
• Tag parameter list
• Task List
• Program organization unit list
• Program organization unit
• Variable and parameter list
How to make shot print
Select <File><Print> in each window.
Module parameter
The content displayed on the screen is printed.
System log
Error/event/intervention/transmission/log are printed
Serial I/O log
Serial I/O log is printed
Tag editor
Value of tool in specified range is printed
Program editor
The following information is printed
•
•
•
•
586
6F8C1290
Program
Function block
Function
Compile error list
12.2
Setting Page Format
12.2 Setting Page Format
Explains how to set Page Settings for semi graphic programs or full graphic
programs.
In [Document Printing] or [Program Editor], click <File><Page Settings> to
open the following form.
Setting margins (for Semi graphic program)
1) Click [Margins] tab.
2) Enter <Left>, <Right>,<Top>,<Bottom> size
overview.
to update paper
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
587
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
Setting paper size (for Semi graphic program)
1) Click [Page Size] tab and select <Paper Size> you need.
2) Click <Orientation> option you need.
Setting header and footer (for Semi graphic program)
1) Click [Header/Footer] tab.
2) Tick off <Display Header/Footer> if necessarily.
3) Enter text or keyword in each location you need.
588
6F8C1290
12.2
Keyword
Setting Page Format
Printed Content
%F
File Name
%D
Printed Date
%T
Printed Time
%P
Page Number
%A
Total pages
%PA
Page No./Total pages
%C
Customer name
%J
JOB name
%JNo
JOBNo
%JJNo
JOB name [JOBNo]
%DNo
DocNo
%RNo
RevNo
%PN
Manufacturer name
%CN
Print item name
%XRef
Cross reference header
Printing two or more items in a field is available, using a semicolon as
separator shown as follows.
%D; %F
Printed Data and Time
System common item setup
Here you can set system common items to be displayed on the cover or
header/footer.
Select <File><System Common Setup Item>.
Enter the desired text.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
589
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
Setting paper (for Full graphic program)
Click [Paper] tab to open the following form.
• Size of paper (A4, A3, and letter)
• Orientation
• Size of blank of form (top and bottom and right and left)
• Position of header/Footer
If <Footer> is zero, Footer text is printed at the appropriate position.
Change <Footer> when you want to tune the position.
Supplementary
• If setting value is out of range, characters of Header/Footer might be cut and can not be
printed.
• Zoom rate of work-sheet when printing
Using 'Layout File', see the section 'Document Layout'.
590
6F8C1290
12.2
Setting Page Format
Setting header and footer (for Full graphic program)
Click [Header/Footer] tab to open the following form.
For each position <Left>, <Center> and <Right>, you can select printed
contents shown as follows.
• Place (position of POU
• Date
• Page number
And also <User String> ,that is arbitrary character string, as Header or Footer
can be printed.
Setting cross reference (for Full graphic program)
Click [Miscelaneous] tab to open the following form.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
591
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
Click <Cross Reference Type> option to print full graphic program with it’s
cross reference list shown as follows.
• None
• Simple
• Detail
Supplementary
• When paper orientation is 'Portrait', cross reference can be printed.
Tick off <With Data Type> to attach data type to each variable in program
if necessarily.
Tick off <With Data Type> to attach step no. to each symbol drawn in
program if necessarily.
Tick off <Mono Print> to print full graphic program in monotone if
necessarily.
• Mono Print
For monochrome printing.
• Print Cell Position
For printing with cell position.
Document layout (for Full graphic program)
This function is used for free-layout of Strings and/or Pictures.
Formatted strings and bitmaps like Company's Logo are available for the
document header/footer.
If you are already using the Settings of the section 'Setting Header and Footer',
you can also use this function.
1) Make a Layout File, using 'Print Layout Editor'.
See the section 'Editing Layout'.
2) Use the Layout File, setting to the form 'Page Settings'.
See the section 'Setting Layout'.
592
6F8C1290
12.2
Setting Page Format
Editing layout (for Full graphic program)
Click [Layout] button, to open the form [Print Layout Editor].
If you want to use a prepared file, set the file path using text box or [Browse]
button.
If you already set the Header or Footer, the mark '■'is displayed on the screen.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
593
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
1) Tool Icons are as follows
Cut
Copy
Redo
Save
Undo
Open
New
Delete
Paste
If you put the mouse-pointer on these icons, the name is appeared as tool
tip.
These functions are also prepared as the menu items.
2) Setting Logo.
Click [Logo] button, and click editing area, to place a picture like bitmap.
Select file from the [Open] dialog.
Available files: Bitmap (.bmp), Icon (.ico), JPEG (.jpg), and GIF (.gif)
3) Changing Logo.
To resize the picture as logo, mouse dragging is available.
To move the position, mouse drag & drop is available.
To update the contents, Select <Picture> <Browse> to open dialog.
4) Setting Text.
Click [Text] button, and click editing area, to place text box.
Double-click the text box to edit it.
Enter some characters you need.
5) Changing Text.
To resize the text box, mouse dragging is available.
To move the position, mouse drag & drop is available.
To edit it, double-click it again.
To change the text font, click <Format><Font> to open [Font] dialog.
6) Setting Text Alignment.
Default of Text alignment is center.
Click <Format><Text Alignment> you need.
594
6F8C1290
12.2
Setting Page Format
7) Setting Zoom.
Click <View> <Zoom> you need.
Setting layout (for Full graphic program)
To use a prepared file, set the file path using text box or [Browse] button.
If you are already using the Settings of the section 'Setting Header and Footer',
you can also use this function.
Supplementary
• If you change <Paper Size> or <Orientation> after setting 'Layout File', following dialog
is appeared, and setting of 'Layout File' is canceled.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
595
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
12.3 Printing Documents
Set print item
<Main window>
Normally, the check box in the window is used to specify whether to print a
product or not.
If an item has sub levels(“+” mark has adhered), select <View><Details>
and specify with the check box in the detail dialog box. To select/deselect all
sub levels of an item, check/uncheck the check box of the item.
The following sub levels can be opened from the main window (see detail
window 1).
• List of Network Variables
• Station
• Controller
• Data type declarations
• List of Function
Note
• When printing completes, the window does not return automatically to the original
window. Select the original window from the task bar.
• Do not print another document while print is in progress.
596
6F8C1290
12.3
Printing Documents
<Detail window 1>
Example) When Details is clicked after selecting Controller in the main
window
The following items can be opened from the Detail window 1 (see detail
window 2).
From the station detail
• Module parameters
• List of Station global variables
• List of I/O Connection
From the controller detail
• Program organization units
• List of Global Variable / Parameters
• Tag parameters
In the following cases, details of the tag parameter are displayed on the
screen.
1) Parameter with Tag No.: When Tag No. is registered.
In the MCS type tag, PVPNo should be registered in LP, and Tag No. should
be registered in PV.
2) Parameter without Tag No.: When the comment is registered.
Non-downloaded information like the comment should be registered.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
597
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
<Detail window 2>
Example) When Details is clicked after selecting List of Global Variables /
Parameters
To check all items for printing, select <Edit> <Check All>. To uncheck all
items, select <Edit> <Uncheck All>.
Select the program organization unit file print and display options from
<Option><Program Organization Unit>.
Supplementary
• Cross reference printing of program organization unit file is performed only for files with
circuit created with 12 or less columns and when the paper orientation is set to
landscape.
598
6F8C1290
12.3
Printing Documents
Preview
The print image can be checked on screen before actually printing.
Select <File><Preview> from document print or <File><Preview> from the
Program Editor.
You can print directly or go to the Page Setup window from the preview
window.
Printing
Select <File> <Print> from document print to print all of the checked items.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
599
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
A printing in progress dialog box appears while printing. Click [Cancel] to
cancel printing.
Whether the local variable is printed before the print is executed is confirmed
for Pflug Rafic's POU, and the dialog that specifies the print page is displayed
afterwards.
Note
• A blank page might be printed by Pflug Rafic's print according to the writing of the
circuit. In this case, please specify the page printed by print page specification dialog. A
consecutive page is specified by “-". It is possible to delimit it by “,".
Example) 1-4, 8, 10-12
• The preview/print cannot be likely to be done normally when there are extremely a lot of
numbers of pages(page or more 1000) in Full graphic program print. In this case,
please divide the circuit into two or more work-sheets.
600
6F8C1290
12.4
Printing the Cross Reference
12.4 Printing the Cross Reference
A cross reference list is a list that shows
1) the location (row, column) and
2) manner of use (assignment, reference, Set, Reset)
of variables in a program.
The cross reference list can be printed together with the program. This topic
describes how to interpret the cross reference list.
Printing the cross reference list together with the program
Select <File> <Page Setup> from the Program Editor.
If [Print Cross Reference Result] is selected during page setup, print the cross
reference list by selecting <File><Print>.
Preview
If [Print Cross Reference Result] is selected during page setup, the cross
reference print image can be checked on screen. Select <File><Preview>
from the Program Editor.
You can go to the Page Setup window from the following Preview window.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
601
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
Circuit section
Circuit section:
Reference section
Shows the origin of the variables referenced in the circuit
section.
Reference section: Shows the reference location of the variables used as
output in the circuit section.
If [Print Detail Location (Row, Column)] is specified during
page setup, the row and column also appear.
If the paper orientation is set to portrait or an instruction word exists in a
column of a circuit that exceeds 12 columns, the following message appears
and the cross reference cannot be printed.
602
6F8C1290
12.4
Printing the Cross Reference
Interpreting the cross reference
Circuit section
Variable
Reference
Reference section
Reference
Detail reference
Station global
(S:TEEE:PPP>)
S:TEEE:PPP>
S:TEEE:PPP>RRRRR:CC
Controller global
(TEEE:PPP>)
TEEE:PPP>
TEEE:PPP> RRRRR:CC
Local
(PPP>)
PPP>
PPP> RRRRR:CC
Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
Type
−
S
Slot No.
T
Task type
EEE
Task No.
−
PPP
Page No.
−
>
Action
RRRRR
Row No.
−
CCC
Column No.
−
E:
S:
I:
H:
M:
B:
−:
>:
S:
R:
Event task
Super high-speed task
Interrupt task
High-speed scan task
Main scan task
Background task
Read
Write
Set
Reset
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
603
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
Interpreting the cross reference result of circuit section
Shows the reference list of user global output destination.
Interpreting the cross reference result of the reference section
Shows the station global SGC1 reference list.
604
6F8C1290
12.5
Printing the Variable Reference and the Function Reference
12.5 Printing the Variable Reference and the Function
Reference
This topic describes how to print the variable reference list and the function
reference list.
Printing the variable reference list
This reference list can be printed where variables are used
Target variables: Network, Station, Controller scope variables
Printed locations: Station, Controller, Program, Line
1) Select <File><Page Setup> from the Document Printing, Select
‘Landscape’.
2) Select <Option><POU><Variable Reference>, and check scope
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
605
Chapter 12
Printing Documents
Select the target variables (‘Network variables’, ‘Station variables’,
‘Variables/Parameter List’), and start printing.
Form of display is as follows:
Variables
Reference
Network Variables
Used in FBK:
{Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-POU name:POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Station Variables
Used in Function:
{Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-POU name:POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Controller
Variables
Used in Program:
{ Station name }-{S:Controller name}
-TTEEE:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
Type
−
S
Slot No.
TT
Task type
EEE
Task entry No.
−
PPP
Page No.
−
>
Action
RRR
Row No.
−
CC
Column No.
−
EV, SS, IP, HS, MS, BG
−: Read
>: Write
S : Set
R : Reset
Example) {Stn1}-{1:S3PU55}-MS000:ACT_1_B:001-0001:01
606
6F8C1290
12.5
Printing the Variable Reference and the Function Reference
Printing the function reference list
This reference list can be printed where functions of library are used
Target functions: Program, Function, Function Block
Printed locations: Station, Controller, Program, Line
1) Select <File><Page Setup> from the Document Printing, Select
‘Landscape’.
2) Select
the function list, and start printing.
Form of display is as follows:
Functions
Reference
Function
Used in FBK:
{Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-POU name:POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Function
block
Used in Function:
{Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-POU name:POU no.:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Program
Used in Program:
{Station name}-{S:Controller name}
-TTEEE:Action name:PPP>RRR:CC
Symbol description
See ‘Variable Reference’.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
607
Chapter 12
608
6F8C1290
Printing Documents
Appendix A
Messages
When the error dialogs or the information dialogs are displayed, please check to
take actions in following list.
609
Appendix A Messages
Note
• When the transmission error is occurred, please check the following points:
Cable connection
Destination node status (See 'System Log'.)
IP address setting (In case of Ethernet.)
If you want to know the errors of controller or network equipment, please see these
manuals.
• Environment, applications, and transmission status make errors which is not listed.
When the problem is not cleared, please contact the 'User Support' with the following
information.
Using tool version
Environment
Operations
No.
Messages
Measure
3052 File sharing lock count exceeded.
Please execute the DB maintenance, and execute
it again.
3502 The data description has some errors. Check the
numeric range, string length, time unit or
separators, please.
Please input a value with the notation according to
data type.
4000 The drive has no media or is not ready.
Please set media, such as FD and MO, to a drive.
At the time of writing, please switch the
write-protected off.
5001 Current product path is not registered.
Please set up a current product path by the
product manager.
5002 Input your system name, please.
Please input the system name of one or more
characters.
5003 Length of system name must be below 64
characters.
Please input a system name within the number of
fixed characters.
5004 System name cannot has the following characters. Please do not input an invalid character into a
#'*./:;<>?@[\]|
system name.
610
5005 The system is not found or deleted.
This system is already deleted by other users.
Please update a product tree in the newest state.
5006 The system has already created.
This system name already exists. Please update a
product tree in the newest state.
5012 This system is used by other users.
This system is already used by other users. After
other users exit V-Tool, please operate it again.
5040 The Program registered in 'TaskEntries' has no
records in 'PouEntries'.
Please re-register the existing program after
deleting a task entry.
5041 The Program registered in 'TaskEntries' has no
records in 'Libraries'.
Please re-register a program after deleting a task
entry or a POU entry.
5045 The number or data type of task entry parameters
is not in agreement.
Please set the dummy argument of a task entry,
the number of actual parameters, and data type on
a task-entry argument window.
6F8C1290
No.
Messages
Measure
5081 I/O module cannot be registered, because the slot In the case of the parallel I/O: Please register a
number of I/O interface or controller module is not management controller (S, L) into a left end. 'Left
correct, or module's parameter is not set yet.
end' means the slot 1 (model 3000), or the slot 0
(model2000). When you use the extended I/O unit
of model 3000, please register an interface module
into the slot 0.
In the case of the serial I/O: When you use SIF
(Interface) module, please register a management
controller (L3) with a SIF parameter.
In the case of importing the serial I/O: Before
importing I/O modules of SIF, please register SIF
module and set the parameters using "Product
Tree" and "Module Parameter".
5082 The I/O connection of controller is too full for the
same type I/O Modules.
The I/O connection area which assigns parallel I/O
is full. Please extend an area using 'I/O connection
area change'.
5083 Please register a Network Module, before
registering the Variables.
Please register network modules (TN etc.) before
registering the RIO's I/O variable, and connect with
a network.
5084 The network variables has registration. It cannot
delete.
Before deleting this module, please delete the
network variable which assigned to it.
5085 The type of S controllers must be same.
When you register two or more S controllers in the
same station, please register S controller same
type.
5086 The I/O variables has registration. It cannot delete. Before deleting this module, please delete the I/O
variable which assigned to it.
5087 The name can not be changed, because the
station global variables are already registered
more than 1KW.
Please re-size the total amount of the station
variables to less than 1kW.
5088 The block transfer has registration. It cannot
delete.
Before deleting this module, please delete the
block transfer registration of MELPLAC I/O.
5107 The user function cannot be added in the
Please delete an unnecessary program.
controller. Because the Pou Entries of the controller
is too full.
5109 Other users are saving. Please retry after waiting
for a while.
After other users is completed to save, please save
again.
5260 The Function or Function Block is not registered.
This Function or Function Block is not registered
into a library. Please re-register.
5261 The Function or Function Block is not compiled.
This Function or Function Block has not been
compiled. Please compile Function or Function
Block.
5303 Please input some name as variable, member or
Data type.
Please input the variable of one or more
characters.
5304 The length is too long.
Please change the variable name as less than 20
characters.
5305 The top character is invalid.
The initial character of a variable should use an
alphabetic character.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
611
Appendix A Messages
No.
Messages
Measure
5306 The string except the top has invalid characters.
Please use an alphabetic character, an underscore
'_' after the 2nd character of a variable.
5307 Sequential under score cannot be used.
Please do not use an underscore '_' continuously.
5308 The name is reserved by IEC61131-3 or V-TOOL.
Please do not use reserved key-word.
5352 Please input some name as Data type.
Please input the data type of one or more
characters.
5353 Array type description needs 2 dots. 'Array[0..99]
of -- '.
When you define an array type, please input '..'
between the minimum and maximum of a
subscript.
5354 Array type description needs '[' and ']'. 'Array[0..99] When you define an array type, please bundle a
of --'.
subscript with '[]'.
5355 Array type description needs two boundary
indexes that must be natural number. 'Array[0..99]
of --'
When you define an array type, please input a
subscript by the positive number.
5356 Array type description needs lower boundary index When you define an array type, please give the
that must be '0'. 'Array[0..99] of --'
minimum of a subscript as 0.
5357 Array type description needs upper boundary
index that must be from '0' to '65535'. 'Array[0..99]
of --'
When you define an array type, please give the
maximum of a subscript as less than 65535.
5358 Array type description needs keyword 'OF'.
'Array[0..99] of --'
When you define an array type, please input 'OF'
before data type.
5359 The data type must be elementary data type or the Please input into data type a based type or the
type that is defined in the Libraries.
data type registered in the library.
5360 The data type is in the Library but has no members In case of a user definition type: Please specify the
of STRUCT.
data type by which the structure member was
defined.
In case of a function block type: Please specify a
function block name which already compiled.
5361 Data type 'PTR' or 'PTRB' is only used in parameter Please use a PTR and a PTRB type independently
of Program, Function Block or Function and cannot by argument declaration of Program, Function
be with 'Array[ ] of '.
Block, or Function.
5362 Type name of Program, Function, or Function
Block is not used in this scope.
Please do not use the name of Program, Function,
or Function Block as the global variable.
5363 Type name of Program or Function is not used in
this scope.
Please do not use the name of Program or
Function as the local variable.
5364 Type name of Function Block is only used in VAR
declaration of Program or Function Block and
cannot be with 'Array [] of '.
Please use the name of Function Block as the VAR
declaration of Program or Function Block.
Please do not define as the array type.
5402 Setting value is invalid. Because the data type is
The value of a variable can be set, when data type
not elementary type or the scope is not static local is a based type only.
variable of Program or Function Block.
At the time of a local variable, the value of a value
can be set in the VAR declaration of Program and
Function Block only.
5590 Please wait a minute. The last finding runs still now. After other users' cross-reference display is
closed, please try again.
612
6F8C1290
No.
Messages
Measure
5605 The pou is not in database or deleted. The
registration has stopped.
The program opened now does not exist. It may
have been deleted by other users. Please check
the registration of a program.
5608 The variable name is already defined. The
registration has stopped.
Please input other names.
5609 This scope is too full of variables. The registration
has stopped.
Please delete an unnecessary variable.
5610 This controller is deleted. The registration has
stopped.
The controller opened now does not exist. It may
have been deleted by other users. Please check
the registration of a controller.
5630 Receiver registrations are full.
Please close an unnecessary screen and try again.
5643 This product is occupied by the user.
After an this user's editing task is completed,
please try again.
5650 Import error: It is not the file made at the same
time.
Please use the a series of FD created by one
export operation.
5651 Import error: It is not the file of V2Port type.
Please use the file or FD created by Version2
export.
5653 Import error: The system is already exist.
Please change a system name before importing.
5655 Compression or Expand process is running.
Please wait for a while.
Please try again, after other users' the import or
export work is completed.
5656 Other users or other applications are using this
system.
After you and all users exit V-Tool, please operate it
again.
5663 Disk full.
Please check the availability of HDD.
5665 File open error.
Please set up the read-out authority of a file
correctly.
5666 File read error.
Please set up the read-out authority of a file
correctly.
5667 File write error.
Please remove write protect. Or please cancel the
attribute only for read-out.
5668 File delete error.
Please remove write protect. Or please cancel the
attribute only for read-out.
5669 The file is broken.
Please use the file created by the export function of
Version 2.
5683 The import file has some errors.(POU declaration
part)
There are some errors in the specified contents of
a PRG/FBK/FUN file. Please check the contents or
try again from the target export.
5685 The import file has some errors.(Mapping
variables)
There are some errors in the specified contents of
a PRG/FBK/FUN file. Please check the contents or
try again from the target export.
5686 The import file has some errors.(POU)
There are some errors in the specified contents of
a PRG/FBK/FUN file. Please check the contents or
try again from the target export.
5687 The import file has some errors.(TYP)
There are some errors in the specified contents of
a TYP file. Please check the contents or try again
from the target export.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
613
Appendix A Messages
No.
614
Messages
Measure
5691 The export file has some errors.(Data type of the
function)
The data type of the return value of specified
FUNCTION is not defined. please try again after a
definition by the program editor
5692 The export file has some errors.(No STRUCT
declaration)
The member of the specified structure is not
defined. Please try again after defining a member
in the Library.
5693 The data type is not defined or incorrect.
The data type of the variable currently used within
the PRG/FBK/FUN file specified at the time of the
import is not defined as a library, or there are some
errors in the notation. Please register or import the
target data type into a library.
5700 The input variables has registration. It cannot
delete.
Please delete the input variable, before deleting
the output variable of a station variable or a
network variable.
5701 The network variables of TC-net100 LAN has
registration. It cannot delete.
Please delete the network variable of
TC-net100LAN, before deleting this network
variable.
5703 Set the 'Middle speed I/O schedule num' to 2 or
more.
Please set the 'Middle speed I/O schedule num' of
the module parameter of RIO to 2 or more, and
register a variable again.
5704 Since IQNo is mismatching, the duplicate
addressing to this address is not allowed.
Please change or delete registered variables,
before register new one.
5705 Total size of variables is over than IQ max size of
RIO controller.
Please reduce variable registrations to store I/O
connection area.
5816 The server component is not set up or may have
wrong version.
Please check the tool's version of Server PC.
5817 The file is not found.
Please check the tool setup of Server PC.
5830 Define the return value of function and re-draw.
There are some errors in the definition of the
function.
5882 Memory runs short.
Please check the availability of memory.
6035 The name is double defined.
Please input other names.
6036 Please enter the value existing in the list box.
Selected characters other than a selection
candidate.
6037 The station is empty or deleted.
Please check the existence of this station.
6038 The controller is empty or deleted.
Please check the existence of this controller.
6039 The unit is empty or deleted.
Please check the existence of this unit.
6040 The Bus is empty or deleted.
Please check the existence of this bus.
6042 The network is empty or deleted.
Please check the existence of this network.
6057 This line cannot be changed or deleted.
Please do not change fixed library name 'Work'.
6059 The slot number or product has already added.
Please update the display of a product tree.
6080 The string is empty.
Please input a character.
6082 There are invalid string.
Please check an input character.
6083 The word is double defined.
The same character is already registered. Please
input other characters.
6F8C1290
No.
Messages
Measure
6091 There are no room to add the product.
Registration is the maximum. Additional
registration cannot be carried out.
6092 There are no module to be able to connect to the
network.
A newly connectable module is not in a network.
6100 Cyclic invocation is not allowed.
Member registration of itself cannot be carried out
at the member of the structure.
6101 The string length is out of the range.
Please lessen input-statement number of letters.
6102 '(*' or '*)' cannot be used.
Please delete '(*' or '*)' from a comment.
6103 The data type which member was defined cannot
be changed.
Since the member of the structure is already
registered, a name cannot be changed.
6104 The data type cannot be changed after defining
program.
Since the circuit is already written, a name cannot
be changed.
6150 It is not numeric.
Please input a numeric value.
6151 The value is out of range.
Please input a value within the limits.
6152 Please selecting YES(1) or NO(0).
(See this left.)
6153 There are no room for the Pou entry.
Please delete the POU entry of an unnecessary
program.
6154 It cannot be set up, since the Pou was not
registered to the controller,
The task entry in a controller is deleted. Please
update the task-entry screen.
6155 Changing the task entry value cannot be
continued. Please try again after writing to the
controller.
The maximum number which can be changed
simultaneously is 30. When you change 30 or more
task entries, please try after dividing.
6156 Deleting the task entry cannot be continued.
Please reduce the number.
The maximum number which can be changed
simultaneously is 150. When you change 150 or
more task entries, please try after dividing.
6160 It is not numeric.
Please input a numeric value.
6161 The value is out of range.
Please input a value within the limits.
6162 The variable is not defined.
Please input a registered variable.
6180 The pou is not in database or deleted.
Please reset up the variable for a display once
again.
6182 The Variable is not found or The data type is not
basic data.
Please input the variable name which already
exists.
6181 Input value error. The variable name is not
available, or the data type is not base type.
Please reset up the variable for a display once
again.
6183 Input value error. The local and controller variables Please input the variable of a controller.
are available.
6184 Input the VAR declared variable of Program or
Function Block.
The variable declared by VAR_TEMP or
VAR_INPUT cannot be specified.
6250 The transmit speed is not valid.
Characters other than a selection candidate are
inputted into the transmitting speed.
6251 The output node is not valid.
Characters other than a selection candidate are
inputted into the transmitting node.
6252 The output controller is not valid.
Characters other than a selection candidate are
inputted into the output controller.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
615
Appendix A Messages
No.
Messages
Measure
6253 Changing the talker block cannot be done since
network variables are defined.
(See this left.)
6254 The word size is not valid.
The word of TC-net100LAN scan block has
following restrictions. Restriction: 64 multiples &
not registered as other blocks.
6255 Clearing the talker block cannot be done since
block ranges are defined.
In TC-net100LAN, when two or more continuation
blocks are registered as the same block ('block
range'), please delete by selecting the head block
of them.
6260 Const is not valid.
Characters other than a selection candidate are
only inputted into read-out.
6263 Drag & Drop is not available between the different
kind controllers.
(See this left.)
6267 Please get Editor's right of the program.
It cannot edit, unless the program editor is the edit
mode.
6273 Please register Module parameters, before
registering the I/O Variable.
(See this left.)
6274 The value is out of range.
Please input the value, which can be selected from
the list.
6300 The string length is out of range. (below 50
characters)
Please reduce the number of characters of a
comment.
6301 '(*' or '*)' can not be used.
Please delete '(*' or '*)' from a comment.
6302 It is not numeric.
Please input a numeric value into Word No.
6303 The value is out of range.
Please input a positive-number value into Word
No.
6304 It is not numeric.
Please input a numeric value into Bit No.
6305 The value is out of range.
Please input the value of 0-15 into Bit No.
6306 Value setting is not valid except BOOL data type.
When you set up Bit No, please set data type to
BOOL.
6307 The declaration type cannot be accepted.
(See this left.)
6308 The declaration property cannot be accepted.
(See this left.)
6309 It is not numeric.
Please input a numeric value into Order No.
6310 The value is out of range.
Please input a positive-number value into Order
No.
6321 The Pointer Argument is not available for
monitoring.
(See this left.)
6346 There is no enough block memory for mapping the There is no empty memory required in order to
following new word No.
assign a variable.
Please try batch compling.
6348 Word No. and the data type cannot be changed
after defining input variable.
616
6F8C1290
the address -- please once delete a receiving side
to make a data type change
No.
Messages
Measure
6349 Duplicate addressing is not allowed the Word No.
Since the number of IQ No. assigned to existing
word No. is odd, existing word No. is overlapped
and a variable 2 words or more cannot be
assigned to it. Please reassign first from a variable
2 words or more.
6363 Too full for input or output parameters .[Bout]
Please reduce the number of arguments.
6364 Too full for Input or output parameters.[Wout]
Please reduce the number of arguments.
6365 Too full for Input or output parameters.[Bin]
Please reduce the number of arguments.
6366 Too full for Input or output parameters.[Win]
Please reduce the number of arguments.
6601 A monitor is stopped
Please start a monitor again.
6602 Please perform a monitor after control write-in
processing
(See this left.)
6603 The cable may be not connected or the controller
may be not ready.
Please check connection of a cable or the state of
a controller and try again.
6604 This monitoring can not be continued and
stopped. Please start to monitor again.
Please start a monitor again.
6850 Cannot insert it in this location. Change to override When you draw a SFC circuit, please make it
mode by INS key.
overwrite mode.
6851 Row count you can delete must be below 12.
The minimum numbers of sequences are 12
sequences.
6852 Row count you can insert must be below 36.
The maximum numbers of sequences are 36
sequences.
6853 Cannot insert Page here.
Please do not include other instruction word in the
line which inserts a page break.
6915 The selected Function or Function Block is not
supported by this controller.
Please choose the function which can be used by
the this controller, or a function block.
6916 Program Editor is now waiting for your answer.
Please try again after closing the active dialog
Close the active dialog of Program Editor and try to opened now.
open again.
6917 This program is occupied by the user who is
during editing, swapping or forcing.
After edit of other users or a swap force is
completed, please try again.
6918 This program has been changed by following user. (See this left.)
Close and Open the view again.
6923 The program is not found in the Library.
Please re-register a program after deleting a task
entry and POU entry.
6925 The program is not found in the Library.
Please re-register a program after deleting a task
entry and POU entry.
6942 The maximum number of a Program Editor was
exceeded.
Please try again after closing an unnecessary
screen.
6980 The format is mistaken. Specification Format
(See this left.)
vHMI.exe /M xx [/C]
System\Station\UnitNo\ModuleNo\Task\TaskEntryN
o
6981 The program corresponding to conditions is not
found.
(See this left.)
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
617
Appendix A Messages
No.
618
Messages
Measure
6982 The system is not found. Please check to see
System ID is right.
(See this left.)
6983 The station is not found. Please check to see a
Station Name is right.
(See this left.)
6984 The unit is not found. Please check to see Unit No
is right.
(See this left.)
6985 The module is not found. Please check to see
Module No is right.
(See this left.)
6986 There is a variable specified in order to open a
program, or no equipment.
(See this left.)
6987 The task is not found. Please check to see a Task
is right.
(See this left.)
6988 The task entry is not found. Please check to see
Task Entry No is right.
(See this left.)
7000 Getting the module name has failed.
The controller may have been deleted by other
users. Please update the display of a product tree.
7001 Getting the POU entries info has failed.
The controller may have been deleted by other
users. Please update the display of a product tree.
7080 Register main unit at first please.
Please register main-unit composition.
7081 The module for downloading is not registered.
Please register the module for download.
7082 There is no product to download.
Please register the module for upload.
7083 The module for uploading is not registered.
Please unite registration of a main unit and a main
module with a mounting state.
7084 Registration of main unit configuration is not in
agreement with controller.
Please register a controller into a station.
7085 Can not make 'Tool-Source', because there are
'Local Variable' declarations which are not fit for it.
After 'Batch-Compiling', please try again.
(See this left.)
7136 Please change to Ethernet connection. [System
Status] window is not available via RS-232C
connection.
Please change into Ethernet connection.
7139 The left end controller is not registered.
please register S controller into a left end. 'Left
end' means the slot 1 (model 3000), or the slot 0
(model2000).
7140 The hardware configuration is not downloaded.
please download a configuration once again
7141 Operation mode is not matched.
Please change an operation mode into RUN or
RUN-F.
7142 This controller does not support the function.
Check software version of this controller.
Please check the version of a controller, and the
function currently supported.
7143 RS-232C cable connected to wrong module.
Please connect an RS-232C cable to the target
module correctly.
7144 The format is mistaken. Specification Format:
SysView.exe [/T /M] System, Station.
(See this left.)
6F8C1290
No.
Messages
Measure
7145 The format is mistaken. Specification Format:
SysView.exe [/T /M] System, Station, SlotNo,
BusNo, UnitNo, DisplayNo.
(See this left.)
7146 The system is not found. Please check to see
System Name is right.
(See this left.)
7147 The station is not found. Please check to see a
Station Name is right.
(See this left.)
7150 The format is mistaken. Specification Format:
SysLog.exe [/T /M] System, Station, SlotNo.
(See this left.)
7152 The system is not found. Please check to see
System Name is right.
(See this left.)
7153 The station is not found. Please check to see a
Station Name is right.
(See this left.)
7155 The module is not found. Please check to see
Module Name is right.
(See this left.)
7480 PV No is already selected. Change [PVP] value.
Please input other PV No (es).
7481 Tag No is already exist. Change Tag No.
Please input other Tag No (es).
7700 Cannot print due to a problem with the current
printer setup.
Make sure the printer is turned on and online.
7752 5800I/O address setting error.(Condition:
TOP<ADRS<=BOT)
The address switch of an AIEX card (AIEX-5862,
RTD-5863) must be filling mentioned setups
between the TOP switches of AI-5861 and BOT
switches by which the private bus connection was
carried out. Please improve the address selection
of 5800 I/O.
7753 5800I/O AI card is not connected via private bus.
An AIEX card (AIEX-5862, RTD-5863) cannot be
used alone, but it is necessary to surely connect it
with AI-5861 by private bus. Please improve
registration and the parameter of 5800 I/O card.
7754 The same mode must be set in 'I/O Signal
processing mode' of the multi CPU configuration.
When some controllers are registered in the main
unit as 'multi CPU configuration', the same mode
must be set in 'I/O Signal processing mode' of the
each controller.
7755 The middle speed I/O scheduling of RIO is not
correct. Please register a RIO variable again.
To register a RIO variable again, please change
'I/O Speed' of I/O variable and set it again.
The middle speed I/O will be re-scheduled.
7830 The communication request is busy.
Please try again.
7831 The hardware registration was changed. Please
refresh the data.
(See this left.)
7832 No hardware registration in the controller. Please
download it.
Please use it after downloading a configuration to
a controller.
7857 Cannot print due to a problem with the current
printer setup.
Make sure the printer is turned on and online.
7858 If you changed 'Middle speed I/O schedule num',
please register a RIO variable again.
To register a RIO variable again, please change
'I/O Speed' of I/O variable and set it again.
The middle speed I/O will be re-scheduled.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
619
Appendix A Messages
No.
Messages
Measure
7905 User registration is full. Max.:100 users.
please delete registration so that a user's number
of registration becomes less than 100
7906 Setting of this tool is not correct.
please set up once again
7907 Following characters and blank cannot be
used. ?"/\<>*|:;
Please register so that these characters are not
included.
7908 Please specify a user name within 32 characters
more than one character.
Please register with the appointed number of
characters.
7909 Please specify a comment within 64 characters.
Please register with the appointed number of
characters.
7911 Version mismatch error. The same version tools
should be set-up on client and server PC.
A server and a client should set up V tool of the
same version.
7912 Login error. The Stand-alone PC can not be access Please connect with PC which setup as servers.
from the client PC.
620
7913 Reserved
Please register in the character of the specified
range.
7914 Please specify a password within 32 characters
more than one character.
Please register with the appointed number of
characters.
7921 Please insert the formatted and writable disk.
(See this left.)
7922 Please insert to the drive empty FD formatted in
1.44MB.
(See this left.)
7930 Cannot copy a file.
The error occurred in the file copy. Please check
the holder of source and destination which
displayed on an error dialog.
7931 Export error: The file is already exist.
Please remove the file from the holder displayed
on an error dialog, or change specification of a file
name.
7932 Cannot find the file.
(See this left.)
7933 Please enter the file name.
(See this left.)
7934 Cannot get disk status.
The specified disk is not mounted or is considered
to be unusual. Please check a disk state.
7935 Import error: The system is already exist.
Please remove the file from the holder displayed
on an error dialog, or change specification of a file
name.
7936 Please select a file.
(See this left.)
7939 File open error.
A file is unusual. Please check the state of the disk
used.
7940 File read error.
A file is unusual. Please check the state of the disk
used.
7941 The file is broken.
A file is unusual. Please check the state of the disk
used.
7942 The system name has some errors.
The character which cannot be used as a system
name is included, or the number limit of characters
is exceeded. Please change a name.
6F8C1290
No.
Messages
Measure
7960 This system is used by other users.
This system is used by other users. After other
users exited V-Tool, please try again.
8000 Data type is not registered in 'Libraries'.
Please register the user definition type or Function
Block type into a library.
8001 POU type is not registered in 'Libraries'.
Please delete this POU entry and re-register a
program.
8002 POU type is not registered in 'Pou Entries'.
Please delete this task entry and re-register the
existing program.
8003 Member of structure is not registered.
Please register the structure members of a user
definition type.
8004 There is circulation reference.
Please change a program not to become
circulation reference.
8005 The program have some errors.
Please open a program editor and check an error
list.
8006 The POU is not compiled.
Please open a program editor and check an error
list.
8007 'Value' has invalid value.
Please input the value according to data type.
8010 The program is empty.
There is not a program. Please delete at the time of
an unnecessary program.
8011 Local variable declaration has some errors.
Please open this program and check local variable
declaration.
8012 The number or data type of task entry parameters
is not in agreement.
Please unite the dummy argument of a task entry,
the number of actual parameters, and data type on
a task-entry argument screen.
8053 The controller is empty.
Please execute batch-compiling the system in
which this controller exists.
8054 This scope is too full of variables.
There is no vacant area of the address. Please
delete an unnecessary variable.
8100 The POU Entry is already used. Please delete it,
and make it again.
From the bottom of a POU entry, since seven
pieces are the objects for the tool sources, please
do not use them.
8101 The size of CODE is too large. Cannot download
with source. Please open Resource Report and
confirm CODE size.
Please consider a setup which includes neither the
monitor source information nor comment
information.
8102 Station name is already defined. Reverse
Existing station name is registered in Tool-source
generation was canceled. Please check the station for Reverse generation. Please change the name
configuration.
or delete this station using “Product Tree”, before
retry uploading.
8103 TagNo is already defined. Reverse generation was Existing TagNo is registered in Tool-source for
canceled. Please check the TagNo registration.
Reverse generation. Please change or delete these
TagNo using “Tag Editor”, before retry uploading.
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 -Basic-
621
Appendix A Messages
622
6F8C1290
Unified Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series
Engineering Tool 4 −Basic−
August 29, 2008
First Edition
Transmission Distribution & Industrial Systems Company
Microelectronics & System Components Department - System Components Support Group
1, Toshiba-Cho, Fuchu-Shi, Tokyo, 183-8513, Japan
Tel +81-42-333-2206
© Toshiba Corporation 2008
All Right Reserved.
11E_6F8C1290_0821_Engineering_basic_単.indd 3
No part of this document may be reproduced
without the prior written consent of Toshiba.
08.8.21 1:27:45 PM
Integrated Controller V series
2008
All Rights Reserved.
1, Toshiba-Cho, Fuchu-Shi, Tokyo, 183-8513, Japan
1290.1.0808
11E_6F8C1290_0821_Engineering_basic_単.indd 4
08.8.21 1:27:47 PM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising